The Glazing

Architectural Manual
Glazing Systems
SECTION 7
CONTENTS
Section 1 - Glass Types, Plastics and Glazing Materials
Guidelines
1.2 for
Plasticsthe Use
Glazing Sheetof Glass
Materials Basicin
Products (02/00)
7.3 July 2013
Floors
Section and Stairs
2 - The Physical Environment
2.2 Window & Door System U-Values: Certified Data (03/02)
2.8 Fire Resistant Glazing (04/03)
2.9 A Guide to the Design of Fire Resistant Glazed Screens and Partitions to comply with the

Contents Requirements for Impact and Crowd LoadsDetail on anti-slip finishes and other safety matters will
(01/01)
be considered.
Introduction
Section 4 - Products, Glazing Techniques [Link]
1. Scope Definitions
4.1 Basic Putty Fronting Glazing Techniques for Single Glazing (06/12)
2. Definitions NOTE 1: The majority of these definitions have been taken from
4.2 and Descriptions
System Design & Glazing for Insulating Glass Units (12/09)
England Building Regulation K: 2013
4.4 GGF Standard for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building (02/11)
3. Design considerations
4.4.1 Thermally Treated Soda Lime Silicate Glass NOTE
Products2: A(02/11)
drawing showing these terms is shown in Appendix 1
4. Design criteria
4.5 Glazing with Plastics (08/03)
4.8 Recommendations for Fixing Mirrors (02/00) 2.1 Uniformly distributed load (UDL)
5. Glass types
4.8.1 Mirrors - Visual Quality for Installed MirrorsLoad,
(02/00)
e.g. wind, snow, applied over the entire surface of the pane.
4.9 Compatibility
6. Glass strength considerations of Glazing Sealants and Compounds with Insulating Glass Units (01/09)
4.10 Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for2.2 Concentrated
insulating loadand Maintenance (01/10)
Glass Units
7. Post breakage
4.11 behaviour
Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety GlassLoad
(02/11)
applied over a small area.
8. Selection4.12.1 Curved
of glass for Glass Part 1: Generalities – Definitions,Terminology, Properties and Basis of
slip resistance
Measurement and Test (02/11) 2.3 Normal-use stair
9. Framing 4.12.2
and installation
Curved Glass Part 2: Curved annealed glassStair intended for use by all users in or connected to a building
(02/11)
10. Building 4.12.3
regulationsCurved Glass Part 3: Curved thermally treated glasses (02/11)
and standards 2.4 Private stair
Appendix 1 Drawing from BS 5395-1 Stair within a dwelling, intended for use only by occupants
Section 5 - Special Applications and visitors.
Bibliography
5.1.1 GGF Emergency Glazing Group - Making safe procedures (08/12)
5.10 Design Installation and Performance of Secondary 2.5 Alternating
Sashes made tread ofstair
Aluminium, Upvc or Wood (05/90)
Introduction
5.12 Recommendations for the use of Glass in Furniture (09/92)
A stair with paddle-shaped treads where the wide portion is on
floors 5.18.1
Glass Visual
and stairs are Quality for
manufactured Adhesive
from Backed
a combination alternate
of Polymeric Filmed sides on consecutive
Glass (02/09) treads.
glasses
designed
5.18.2 to create a walkableQuality
Installation structure in association
Standard with
for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film to Glass (4/08)
structural
supports.
5.18.3 GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed 2.6Polymeric
Helical stairFilm Applied to Glass: Definitions,
Descriptions and Components (04/08) Stair in a helix around a central void.
They are designed for pedestrian use only.
5.18.4 GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in Overhead Position for
2.7 Spiral stair
The use of glass
for these applications allows
Containment of Glass theininterplay of of Failure: Types of systems and precautions in use. (04/08)
the Event
transparency,
reflectionGGF
5.18.5 and refraction of light.
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed StairPolymeric
in a helix around a centraltocolumn.
Film Applied Glass in the Overhead Position for
Containment of Glass in the Event of Failure: Test Method (02/09)
1. Scope 5.18.6 GGF Recommendations for Blast Mitigation: Adhesive 2.8 Nosing
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass (04/08)
5.18.7 GGF Standard for On-Site
This Data Sheet covers the use of glass in floors and stairs for Peel Adhesion The
Testing leading
of edge
Aged of a stair tread.
Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical
pedestrian
traffic
in internal/external environments and
Flat Glass (04/08)
2.9 Going
domestic/non-domestic
applications.
5.18.8 Adhesive backed polymeric film – Guidelines for installation onto existing glazing (05/12)
5.19 Surface Modification The depth from front to back of a tread less any overlap with the
Comment will be made when the floor has to of act Glass
as a for Ease of Maintenance on Externally Installed Glass (04/08)
compartment
element Surface
5.19.1 in case ofModification
fire. next tread above.
of Glass for Ease of Maintenance on Internally Installed Glass (04/08)
5.19.2 Surface Modification of
It will give the basis of design together with information on Glass for Ease of Maintenance
2.10 Rise - Liquid Applied Glass Surface Treatments (11/13)
selection of glass types and methods of installation. The height between consecutive treads

Continued

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
 The Glazing
Architectural Manual
Glazing Systems
SECTION 7
CONTENTS
Section 6 - Windows and Doors
Guidelines
6.2 for
Code the Usefor of
of Practice GlassandinInstallation of Windows and External Doorsets (03/06)
the Survey
6.3 Security of Window and Door Products (02/00) 7.3 July 2013
Floors
and Stairs
6.4 Additional Security for Windows and Doors in Domestic Properties (12/90)
6.5 Fire, Safety and Security choosing the right Replacement Windows (11/92)
6.7 Hardware Specification Document Guidelines for the selection, installation, maintenance of hardware for the
window and door industry. (09/04)
6.8 Hardware Specification Document Guidelines for the Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Screws and
Contents
Fasteners for the Window and Door Industry Detail on anti-slip finishes and other safety matters will
(09/04)
be considered.(11/97)
Introduction 6.9
Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies
6.10 Guidance for Surveyors and Installers for the Provision of Trickle Ventilation and Other Forms of
1. Scope 2. Definitions
Ventilation for Replacement Windows within England and Wales (10/07)
2. Definitions and Descriptions NOTE 1: The majority of these definitions have been taken from
England Building Regulation K: 2013
Section 7 - Architectural Glazing Systems
3. Design considerations
7.1 NOTE
Non-Vertical Overhead Glazing. Guide to the 2: A drawing
Selection showing
of Glass fromthese
theterms
Pointisofshown
ViewinofAppendix 1
Safety (05/12)
4. Design criteria
7.2 Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers (05/12)
7.3 2.1Stairs
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Floors and Uniformly distributed load (UDL)
(07/13)
5. Glass types
Load, e.g. wind, snow, applied over the entire surface of the pane.
6. Glass strength considerations
Section 8 - Security Glazing 2.2 Concentrated load
7. Post breakage
8.1.1 behaviour
Part 1: Definitions and descriptions (02/11)Load applied over a small area.
8.1.2 Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing (02/11)
8. Selection of glass for slip resistance
8.1.3 Part 3: Bullet-resistant glazing (02/11) 2.3 Normal-use stair
9. Framing 8.1.4 Part 4: Explosion-resistant glazing (02/11) Stair intended for use by all users in or connected to a building
and installation
8.1.5 Part 5: Framing and installation (02/11)
10. Building regulations and standards 2.4 Private stair
Appendix 1 Drawing from BS 5395-1 Stair within a dwelling, intended for use only by occupants
and visitors.
Bibliography
2.5 Alternating tread stair
Introduction
A stair with paddle-shaped treads where the wide portion is on
Glass floors and stairs are manufactured from a combination of alternate sides on consecutive treads.
glasses designed to create a walkable structure in association with
structural supports. 2.6 Helical stair
Stair in a helix around a central void.
They are designed for pedestrian use only.
2.7 Spiral stair
The use of glass for these applications allows the interplay of
transparency, reflection and refraction of light. Stair in a helix around a central column.

1. Scope 2.8 Nosing

This Data Sheet covers the use of glass in floors and stairs for The leading edge of a stair tread.
pedestrian traffic in internal/external environments and
2.9 Going
domestic/non-domestic applications.
The depth from front to back of a tread less any overlap with the
Comment will be made when the floor has to act as a
compartment element in case of fire. next tread above.

It will give the basis of design together with information on 2.10 Rise
selection of glass types and methods of installation. The height between consecutive treads

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
 The Glazing
Architectural Manual
Glazing Systems
SECTION 7
CONTENTS
GGF Members Only Sections
Section 14 - General Information
Guidelines
14.2
for the Use of Glass in
The Institute of Dispute Resolution Services (IDRS) Consumer Arbitration Scheme for
7.3 Julythe
2013GGF (05/12)
Floors
and Stairs
14.3 Rules of the Deposit Indemnity Fund (11/12)
14.3.1 Guidance to Members on its operation and on the Voucher Scheme (11/12)

Section 15 - Contract Terms

Contents 15.1 Basic Guidance Notes on Construction Contracts
Detail on(Commercial) (05/12)
anti-slip finishes and other safety matters will
15.2 The Construction Act - How to make it work (08/12)
be considered.
Introduction
15.4 JCT 2011 Standard Building Sub-Contract: The Main Changes from JCT Standard Form of Domestic Sub-
1. Scope Contract (“DSC”) (02/13) 2. Definitions

2. Definitions and Descriptions NOTE 1: The majority of these definitions have been taken from
This Manual has allowed ‘space’ for future Data Sheets and developments,
England Buildingtherefore
Regulation you will find that certain sections are empty
K: 2013
3. atDesign considerations
the moment.
NOTE 2: A drawing showing these terms is shown in Appendix 1
4. Design criteria
2.1 Uniformly distributed load (UDL)
5. Glass types
Load, e.g. wind, snow, applied over the entire surface of the pane.
6. Glass strength considerations
2.2 Concentrated load
7. Post breakage behaviour
Load applied over a small area.
8. Selection of glass for slip resistance
2.3 Normal-use stair
9. Framing and installation Stair intended for use by all users in or connected to a building
10. Building regulations and standards 2.4 Private stair
Appendix 1 Drawing from BS 5395-1 Stair within a dwelling, intended for use only by occupants
and visitors.
Bibliography
2.5 Alternating tread stair
Introduction
A stair with paddle-shaped treads where the wide portion is on
Glass floors and stairs are manufactured from a combination of alternate sides on consecutive treads.
glasses designed to create a walkable structure in association with
structural supports. 2.6 Helical stair
Stair in a helix around a central void.
They are designed for pedestrian use only.
2.7 Spiral stair
The use of glass for these applications allows the interplay of
transparency, reflection and refraction of light. Stair in a helix around a central column.

1. Scope 2.8 Nosing

This Data Sheet covers the use of glass in floors and stairs for The leading edge of a stair tread.
pedestrian traffic in internal/external environments and
2.9 Going
domestic/non-domestic applications.
The depth from front to back of a tread less any overlap with the
Comment will be made when the floor has to act as a
compartment element in case of fire. next tread above.

It will give the basis of design together with information on 2.10 Rise
selection of glass types and methods of installation. The height between consecutive treads

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
• Glass Types, Plastics and Glazing Materials
SECTION 1
Plastics Glazing Sheet Materials –
Basic Products 1.2 F E B R UA RY 2 0 0 0

Scope extruded multiskin sheet. suitable for specialised glazing applications

e) Thermoplastic. A type of Plastic include:
The scope of this Data Sheet is to give
material which softens physically when f) Glass fibre reinforced plastics
information on Transparent and
heated but does not undergo chemical (GRP) flat sheet.
Translucent Thermoplastic and Glass
change. In all cases the manufacturer should be
Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Glazing Sheet
f) Thermoset Plastic. A type of Plastic consulted as to suitability and
materials and to present general product
material which has undergone a chemical recommended uses.
information to the specifier, on the main
change during manufacture and does not
types of Plastics Glazing Sheet material
soften under the action of further Note (A)
that may be used in a vertical application.
heating. An example of this material Multiskin Hollow Sheet. For Multiskin
would be GRP flat sheet. sheeting it is important to note that the
Foreword
profile cross section (the number of skins
The Data Sheet gives information on the Classifications and the overall thickness) will affect the
types of material that are available and properties, weight, performance and
Thermoplastics glazing sheet materials are
some basic information on their Physical method of use of the specific material
of various ‘types’.The types marketed
Properties. and therefore it is essential that
differ in their chemical composition and
The Glass and Glazing Federation issues manufacturer’s data is consulted for all
structure, or they may be a combination
this Data Sheet to Specifying Authorities applications.
of two or more different types. Whilst
in all industries. It is intended for use by
different types are normally available
designers of new buildings as well as for Types
under their proprietary brand names, the
maintenance engineers and estate
five basic types most commonly used for Plastics Glazing Sheet materials are
managers.
exterior and interior flat glazing available in some of the following forms
This Data Sheet is not intended to offer
applications are generically:- other than standard. Colours (including
recommendations on the specific
a) Polycarbonate Clear Transparent) - Textured - UV
material to be used in any given
b) Polymethyl Methacrylate (PPMA) Surface Protected - Hard Coated -
application. For guidance on methods of
or “Acrylic” Mirror Surfaces. For details of availability,
installation, specifiers should observe the
c) Polyvinyl Chloride or “Rigid PVC” reference should be made to the supplier.
recommendations in GGF Data Sheet 4.5
(unplasticised PVC or PVCu)
“Glazing with Plastics” and the relevant
d) Multiskin extruded profiles in Physical Properties
recommendations in BS 6262.
polycarbonate, polymethyl methacrylate
Weight
and polyvinyl chloride (See Note A).
Definitions
e) Reinforced multiskin extruded PVC Solid Sheet Material weight per square
a) Thermoplastic Material. A material panels. metre (Shown in kg) based on an sg of
based on an organic polymeric substance 1.20 for Polycarbonate, 1.38 for PVC &
of high molecular weight that may be Other Plastics materials or profiles 1.19 for Acrylic.
used either in its raw material state or in
combination with other chemical Table 1
additives to modify the properties of the
raw material to suit particular Thickness in mm Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic
applications.
b) Thermoplastic Film. Any plastics 3 3.60 4.14 3.57
material less than 1mm in thickness. 4 4.80 5.50 4.76
5 6.00 6.90 5.95
c) Thermoplastic Sheet. Any plastics
6 7.20 8.28 7.14
material 1mm or greater in thickness.
8 9.60 11.04 9.52
d) Thermoplastic Glazing Sheet 10 12.00 13.80 11.90
Material. Plastics material consisting of a 12 14.40 16.56 14.28
single sheet or a combination of sheets
laminated together or as profiled For Multiskin Hollow Sheet (See Note A).

Glass
4 and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Plastics Glazing Sheet Materials – Basic Products

Light Transmission Table 5

Light Transmission Solid Sheet. Clear Transparent (%)
Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic
Table 2 Movement shown in mm 4.0 4.8 5.0
Thickness in mm Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic per metre for both
width and length.
4 88 N/A 92
It should be noted that the colour of all materials influences their
For Light Transmission Multiskin Clear Transparent See Note A rate of expansion.
Sevice Temperature Range
Footnote The service temperature range for both solid and hollow
Coloured Transparent & Translucent forms of solid sheeting and materials are given in Table 6.
PVC are available which will offer different Transmission values. Table 6

Heat Transference Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic

The Heat Transference (measured in W/m 22K, U values) for Service Temperature +115 -40°C +65 -40°C +80 -40°C(Cast)
Solid Sheet material. Range upper & +70 -40°C
Table 3(a) lower limits (Extruded)

Thickness in mm Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic Note (B)

Machining, cutting etc should be carried out on material that has
4 5.3 N/A 5.3 reached room temperature throughout its whole [Link] may
The Heat Transference (measured in W/m 2 K, U values) for
2 take up to 24 hours to reach (Approx. 18° to 23°C) dependent
Hollow Sheet Material. upon ambient workshop and storage conditions.
Table 3(b) Weatherability
Table 7 gives typical performance guides for Ultra Violet (UV)
Typical U Value for Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic Surface protected [Link] table is based upon the Delta
(16mm Triple Wall 2.4 N/A 2.4 Yellowness Index ASTMS 1925 (1977).
section) See Note A See Foot Note Table 7

Footnote Performance Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic

For 60mm Triple wall PVC the corresponding U value is 1.4 Excellent
W/m2K. Good Good Good Excellent
Poor
Impact Strength It should be noted that the method of UV protection can vary.
The impact strength of solid sheet material is classified in
Note (C)
compliance with the soft body impact test specified in BS 6206
No Additional surface protection is necessary for Acrylics.
and the manual impact strength tests specified in BS [Link]
results are shown in Table 4(a). Reaction to Fire Properties
Typical examples of reaction to Fire properties are given in Table
Table 4(a) 8.
Test & Thickness Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic However in every case the manufacturers should be consulted
regarding the type of material to be used.
BS 6206 3mm+ Class A N/A Class C Table 8
BS 5544 4mm+ Pass at high Energy Level N/A
BS BS BR BR
+ = Upwards 476 476 Class O TP (a) TP (b)
Part 7
The impact strength of Hollow section materials are classified in Part 6 Class 1
compliance with the soft body impact strength tests specified in
BS 6206/ Typical results are shown in Table 4(b) for 10mm thick Solid
Polycarbonate Some Most Some 3mm + N/A
material.
PVC Some Most Some All N/A
Table 4(b) (Class 1)
Acrylic - (3 cast) - N/A All
BS 6206 Polycarbonate PVC Acrylic
Multi Skinned (If Class 1)
10mm Class A N/A N/A Polycarbonate Some Some Some Some All
Refer also to Note A PV C - Some - Some All
Acrylic - - - - -
Linear Thermal Expansion
BR = Building Regulations BS = British Standards
For all materials, solid and hollow, for a total 60°C overall
England & Wales
change, the materials reversibly expand and contract as shown in
Table 5. 1991 Approved Document B
• The Physical Environment
SECTION 2
Window and Door System U-values:
Provision of Certified Data 2.2 MARCH 2002

Contents Documents L1 and L2 of the Building referred to.

Regulations for England and Wales, Part J of
Foreword the Building Standards (Scotland) References marked * are prEN’s or DIS’s,
Regulations, and Part F of the Building i.e. documents for public enquiry, and may
1 Scope Regulations (Northern Ireland), as an undergo technical changes before
alternative to using the tables of indicative publication as a British Standard.
2 References U-values in the relevant Regulations and However, it is believed that the references
supporting documents. are acceptable for use.
3 Definitions
ii To provide a fair means by which 2.1 BS EN 673 : Glass in building -
4 Overview of the techniques for the comparisons can be made between the Determination of thermal transmittance
determination of U-values performances of different window and (U-value) - Calculation method.
door systems.
5 Simplified methods 2.2 BS EN 674 : Glass in building -
1 Scope Determination of thermal transmittance
6 Simulation and calculation (U-value) - Guarded hot plate.
This data sheet describes how to provide
7 Measurement methods data on : 2.3 BS EN 675 : Glass in building -
• the thermal performance of the Determination of thermal transmittance
8 Attestation report requirements component parts of windows and (U-value) –Heat flow meter.
Appendix A: Flow chart doors, which will enable subsequent
Appendix B: Reference samples calculation of U-values of complete 2.4 BS EN ISO 6946-1 : Building
Appendix C: Report requirements window and door assemblies to be components and building elements -
determined by simple arithmetical Thermal resistance and thermal
Foreword operations. transmittance : Calculation method.
• reference U-values for different types
This Data Sheet has been prepared by the of windows and doors, enabling them 2.5 BS 6993-2 :Thermal and radiometric
GGF after consultation with other trade to be compared on a fair basis. properties of glazing. Method of direct
organisations. measurement of U-value (Thermal
The data sheet defines the methods of transmittance).
It describes methods of assessing and calculation, simulation and measurement
reporting the thermal performance of available, and describes the circumstances 2.6 BS EN ISO 8990 :Thermal Insulation -
windows and doors. This version in which each method is to be used Determination of steady state thermal
supersedes the earlier (October 1998) pending agreement on national and transmission properties - Calibrated and
edition. Changes have been incorporated international standards for simulation guarded hot box.
to relate to the window U-value and calculation.
requirements of Building Regulations 2.7 BS EN ISO 10077-1 :Thermal
Approved Documents L1 and L2 (in The effects of thermal bridging at the performance of windows doors and
England and Wales) and Building Standards interface with the building envelope, solar shutters - Calculation of thermal
(Scotland) Regulations, Part J. radiation, and heat transfer by air leakage transmittance - Part 1 : Simplified
are excluded. methods.
The data sheet has two objectives:
2 References 2.8 prEN ISO 10077-2 : 2000* : Window
i To enable interested parties to establish and door components :Thermal
whether windows and doors satisfy the Unless otherwise stated, the latest edition ransmittance - Part 2 : Numerical method
U-value requirements of Approved of all referenced documents is to be for frames.

Glass
4 and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Window and Door System U-values: Provision of Certified Data

2.9 BS EN ISO 10211-1 :Thermal bridges 3.5 Window assembly 4.1.5 ISO DIS 15099 * is a detailed
in building construction – Calculation of A window with single or multiple lights, or method for determination of frame
heat flows and surface temperatures - a coupled window, including the member U-values and glazing/infill panel
Part 1: General methods. sub-frame when it is part of the normal edge U-values by means of a simulation
construction. technique (see Section 6.2). The edge U-
2.10 prEN 12412-2 : 2000* : Windows, value includes a 63.5mm edge effect of
doors and shutters - Determination of 3.6 Door assembly the spacer bar, glazing or infill panel by the
thermal transmittance by hot box method A door leaf and door frame, which may alternative "edge" method.
- Part 2 : Frames. also include side panels, multiple leaf [Note;The alternative "edge" method is
doors and fanlights. A door without a the UK industry preference as the frame
2.11 BS EN 12524 : Building materials and frame is treated as a component part. U-values determined by this method may
products – Hygrothermal properties – 3.7 Reference window or door be used for condensation assessments.]
Tabulated design values. A reference window or door is a defined
typical design and size, which is used for 4.1.6 The U-value of monolithic
2.12 BS EN ISO 12567-1 :Thermal comparison with other products aluminium and thermally broken
performance of windows and doors - manufactured from alternative window aluminium frames can be determined
Determination of thermal transmittance and door systems. using the procedures specified in the
by hot box method - Part 1 : Complete Council for Aluminium in Building
windows and doors. 4 Overview of techniques for publication ‘Setting the Standards No 3 –
determination of U-values Guide for the assessment of the thermal
2.13 prEN ISO12567-2 : 2000* :Thermal performance of aluminium windows’.
performance of windows, doors and 4.1 Determination of thermal
shutters – Determination of thermal transmittances (U-values) of window and 4.2 Determination of thermal
transmittance by hot box method - door components. transmittance (U-value) for whole
Part 2 : Roof windows and other The thermal transmittances of frames, windows and doors.
projecting windows. glazing/infill panel and Ψ (linear thermal
transmittance) can be obtained as follows: 4.2.1 BS EN ISO 12567-1 is the
2.14 ISO DIS 15099 : 2001* :Thermal measurement method for the
performance of windows, doors and 4.1.1 prEN 12412-2 * allows the frame determination of U-values for window and
shading devices – Detailed calculations. member U-value to be determined. door assemblies.
[Note :The frame U-values determined by
2.15 Council for Aluminium in Building – this method should not be used in any 4.2.2 The U-value for a complete window
‘Setting the Standard No 3 - Guide for assessment for condensation, as the U- and door assembly can be calculated from
assessment of the thermal performance of value is not representative of the glazed the component U-values using BS EN ISO
aluminium windows’. window condition]. 10077-1, prEN ISO 10077-2 * and/or ISO
DIS 15099 *.
3 Definitions 4.1.2 BS EN 673 is a method of
calculating the centre pane U-value of 4.2.3 The U-value of monolithic aluminium
3.1 Calculation glazing (Ug) or infill panels. Measurement and thermally broken aluminium window
A simple procedure based on of U-values can be undertaken in frames can be determined using the
mathematical processes that may be accordance with BS EN 674, BS EN 675 procedures specified in the Council for
carried out without a computer. The or BS 6993-2. Aluminium in Building publication ‘Setting the
result is a conservative value. Standards No 3 – Guide for the assessment
4.1.3 Simple calculation to BS EN ISO of the thermal performance of aluminium
3.2 Simulation 10077-1 allows the determination of windows’.
A procedure designed for use on a frame member U-values, glazing U-values,
computer, in which a mathematical and Ψ from basic frame dimensions and 4.3 Window and door samples for system
process is made to represent the physical tabulated values (see Section 5). reference U-value determination :
behaviour of a body. The results are When a reference U-value is required for
nearer to measured values but remain 4.1.4 prEN ISO 10077-2 * gives a method trade comparisons, or to represent the
conservative. for determination of frame member U- product system performance for Building
values and Ψ by means of a simulation Regulation purposes, the sample shall be
3.3 Method method (see Section 6). The Ψ of the as defined in Appendix B.
An orderly prescribed procedure. glazing edge includes a 190mm edge effect
of the spacer bar, glazing or infill panel by 5 Simplified methods of calculation
3.4 System the "linear" method.
A coherent group of frame sections and [Note :The frame U-values determined by 5.1 BS EN ISO 10077-1
associated component parts from which this method should not be used in any The complete window and door assembly
complete windows and doors may be assessment for condensation, as the U- overall U-values can be calculated, for
assembled. value is not representative of the glazed assemblies of any construction, from the
window condition]. component U-values as specified in 5.1.1
Window and Door System U-values: Provision of Certified Data

to 5.1.4, using the procedures defined in 6.3 Whole window U-value 7.2.1 For complete window and door
the standard : The U-value of any size or design in a assemblies : BS EN ISO 12567-1
product system is determined by summing
5.1.1 Thermal transmittance of the frame arithmetically the component values 7.2.2 For glazing : BS 6993-2
(Uf). according to the appropriate formula: -
7.2.3 For infill panels : BS EN ISO 8990
5.1.2 Thermal transmittance of the "linear" method:
central area of glazing (Ug) is taken from ∑Aglazing *Uglazing +∑Aframe *Uframe +∑lψglazing + Ψglazing 7.3 Window and door assembly U-values :
Uwindow =
Table C2. Atotal
"edge" method: 7.3.1 The overall U-value of assemblies of
5.1.3 Linear thermal transmittance of ∑Aglazing *Uglazing +∑Aframe *Uframe +∑Aedge + Uedge any construction shall be calculated from
Uwindow =
glazing (Ψg) is taken from Table E1. Atotal the component thermal transmittances
Results are reported in accordance with determined in accordance with Sections
5.1.4 Linear thermal transmittance of the the requirements of Appendix C of this 6.3, 7.1 and 7.2 of this data sheet, using
infill panel is calculated in accordance with data sheet. the procedures defined in BS EN ISO
prEN ISO 10077-2*. 10077-1.
7 Measurement methods
5.2 Aluminium window U-values can be 7.3.2 Alternatively, for aluminium products
determined using the procedures specified 7.1 Summary of procedure and methods: only, the methods given in the Council for
in the Council for Aluminium in Building Complete window U-values are measured Aluminium in Building Guide for the
publication ‘Setting the Standards No 3 – in accordance with BS EN ISO 12567–1. assessment of the thermal performance of
Guide for the assessment of the thermal The specimen is fabricated to a specified aluminium windows may be used
performance of aluminium windows’. size and design. The thermal transmittance (Reference 2.15).
is measured to the specified procedures
6 Simulation and calculation and conditions in a hot box. Results are 7.4 Previous measurements carried out on
reported in accordance with the 1.20m square window assemblies are
Simulation is a complex computer requirements of Appendix C. acceptable provided all other
procedure, normally based upon finite requirements are met.
element analysis, but in some 7.1.1 Individual window and door samples :
circumstances finite difference analysis may The size and design of the sample is 8 Report requirements
be adequate. This enables accurate chosen according to the specified
representation by mathematical processes requirement. The issuing of reports in accordance with
to be made of the temperature and heat Appendix C of this data sheet is
flux in the window or door system 7.1.2 Glazing to BS 6993-2 and infill dependent on compliance with the
components. panels to BS EN ISO 8990 :The sample following attestation requirements :
The simulation programme used shall size shall be as laid down in Appendix B of
comply with BS EN ISO 10211-1. this data sheet. 8.1 Measurement
U-values and other thermal properties of
6.1 prEN ISO 10077-2* 7.1.3 Frame members in accordance with product assemblies, and the thermal
A series of three simulations for each prEN 12412-2* :The 1400mm long test properties of product components such
frame construction detail is undertaken. specimen shall be prepared as specified in as insulating glass units, shall be measured
The simulations enable the following to be the standard, with an insulation panel only by organisations accredited by UKAS
determined: replacing the glazing. for the measurement of thermal
• frame U-value, [Note:The frame U-values produced by transmittance.
• frame thermal conductance L2D, when this method should not be used in any
glazed with an insulation panel with assessment for condensation, as the U- 8.2 Simulation
thermal conductivity of 0.035 W/mK, value is not representative of the glazed The suitability of the programmes used for
• linear thermal transmittance Ψg of the window condition]. simulation must be checked using the
glazing, representing the interaction examples given in Annex C of prEN ISO
between the frame and the edge 7.2 Measurement procedures :The 10077-2 *, to show that the total heat
construction of the glazing or infill permitted measurement procedures are flux does not deviate by more than 3%
panel by the "linear" method. specified in the standard, and the hot box from the given values.
used shall comply with the requirements
6.2 A single simulation for each frame of BS EN ISO 8990, except where 8.3 Calculation
construction detail, with the appropriate modified by BS EN ISO 12567-1 for Reference U-values of window and door
glazing, allows a frame U-value, and a complete windows and BS 6993-2 for assemblies shall be determined only from
glazing "edge" U-value, to be determined centre pane glazing : thermal transmittance values obtained by
by the alternative "edge" method using the methods described above.
ISO DIS 15099*.
Window and Door System U-values: Provision of Certified Data

Appendix A: Flow chart 1. Name of the organisation preparing

the report.

Whole window Component Component Whole window Aluminium doors 2. Name of the author of the report.
measurement simulation or door or windows
or door
simplified 3. Name of the organisation requesting
measurement Sections 4 & 7 Sections 4 & 6 Sections 4 & 5
calculation the report.
Sections 4 & 7
Sections 4 & 5
4. Name of the individual responsible for
Window and door
Simulations verifying the accuracy of the report.
Sections 4, 5 & 6
5. Identification of the sample name,
main dimensions and sectional drawings.
Report 6. Reference to methods and equipment
Appendix C used.

Appendix B : Reference samples calculations made to GGF Data Sheet 2.2 : 7. A statement of compliance with this
1998 (Window and Door System U-Values : data sheet, and a note of any
B.1 deviation from the relevant Standard.
Provision of Certified Data) before the date
Size
of issue of this document, remain valid.
8. Total surface resistance used in the
B.1.1 Window assemblies :The reference
B.2.2 Door assemblies : calibration procedures.
dimensions are 1.23m wide and 1.48m high.
B.2.2.1 Glazed residential doors. 9. The value of each parameter, e.g.
B.1.2 Door assemblies :The reference
The standard sample shall be a single, or U-value, frame thermal transmittance, or
dimensions are 1.00m wide and 2.00m
double, open-in design. Double doors linear thermal transmittance. U-values
high for single doors. Double doors and
shall be of equal width. Side panels and shall be rounded to the nearest
patio doors reference sizes are 2.00m
top lights shall not be included. 0.1 W/m2K.
wide and 2.00m high.
B.2.2.2 Patio doors.
B.1.3 Glazing and infill panels : Samples are 10. Uncertainty at 95% level.
The standard sample shall have one pane
to be square with sides measuring 1.20m.
sliding adjacent to a fixed pane of equal
Measurements on square samples with 11. Date of issue.
width.
sides measuring a minimum of 1.00m are
acceptable provided all other Fig. A Fig. B
requirements are met.
B.2 Sample design :
B.2.1 Windows :
B.2.1.1 For windows covered by
Approved Document L1:The standard
sample is a two light design having a
central mullion, comprising an opening
light of the type offered by the system,
arranged next to a fixed light (see Figure
A). The opening light should be installed
so that it is fully operational.
For measurement methods, where a fully Casement Casement
operational sample cannot be Figure B. Reference window design,
Figure A: Reference window design,
manufactured, a central transom may Approved Document L2.
Approved Document L1
replace the mullion in the standard sample.
Appendix C : Report requirements. Experimental determination shall include
B.2.1.2 For windows covered by
Approved Document L2 :The standard the following additional information:
Reports of test measurements, thermal
sample is a single opening light design (see 1. Calibration panel constructions.
transmittances obtained from simulations,
Figure B), except in the case of sliding
and calculation of reference U-values, shall 2. Calibration procedures, including
systems.
include all details required by the relevant calibration panel mounting.
For measurement, where a fully operational
Standard. The following information shall
sample cannot be manufactured, the 3. Test procedures, including test sample
be provided in sufficient detail to ensure
sample shall be as given in Figure A. In mounting.
that the sample, method, and any
either case the opening light should be
equipment used, are identified in order 4. Test measurements, with dates.
installed so that it is fully operational.
that competent practitioners may
reproduce the process : 5. Calculation procedures used to derive
B.2.1.3 Measurements, simulations and
the U-value from the test measurements.
 Fire Resistant Glazing
SECTION 2
A Guide to Best Practice in the Specification 2.8 June 2007
and Use of Fire Resistant Glazed System

“A Guide to Best Practice in the Specification and

Use of Fire-Resistant Glazed Systems” has been
developed by the Fire Resistant Glazing Group (FRGG)
of the GGF. This provides a comprehensive guide to
help all those who specify, design, supply, install, and
depend on fire-resistant glazed systems.
This datasheet is to encourage reference is made to
this best practice guide for full details.
The FRGG cannot stress strongly enough the
importance that only suitable trained personnel should
install approved fire resistant glazed systems. If you are
not clear that you meet these requirements you must
not attempt to undertake an installation.

Identify an approved fire - resistant glazed system Check:

• There is test evidence of the systems performance, this can be in the form of:

– test report – classification report

– assessment report – declaration of conformity

– certificate from a third party scheme – Certificate of Conformity

Confirm:
• The details of the glazed system will meet the specification

Further details can be found in: Best Practice Guide Section 2 – Evidence of Fire Approval
Remember you cannot substitute products from those detailed within the approval without further endorsement.

Ensure the fire-resistant glazed system is installed correctly.

A Guide to Best Practice in the Specification and Use of Fire-Resistant Glazed Systems

The installer needs to demonstrate they meet at least one of the

following requirements:
• Third party certification (e.g. FIRAS)

• Installers can demonstrate the core competencies to install fire resistant glazing

• Installers can demonstrate they have the Key skills and knowledge

Further details can be found in: Best Practice Guide Section 8 – Installation

The fundamental Golden Rule

Fire-resistant glass must only be used as part of a fire-resistant

glazed system – which includes the glass, the glazing seal, beads,
fixings and frame. All the essential components of such a system
must be compatible under fire conditions, and the performance
must be referenced to appropriate and relevant test evidence.
Always:
• Install the fire-resistant glazed system according to configuration, design and materials as tested or assessed

• Ensure that manufacturer’s installation instructions are followed

Never:
• Approve and use a fire-resistant glazed system that does not have relevant and applicable evidence of performance

• Substitute one glass for another, even if they have nominally similar specifications

• Assume that standard impact safety toughened or safety/security laminated glass is fire rated

• Use standard, non-fire rated glazing seals and bedding materials

• Allow the mixing and matching of components between different approved fire resistant systems

• Allow on-site modifications which are not approved

• Install insulation performance glass in an integrity-only rated frame system where the requirement is for an insulation
performance assembly

• Apply surface treatments or modifications to the glass after installation, unless approved and endorsed by the
glass manufacturer

“A Guide to Best Practice in the Specification and Use of Fire-Resistant Glazed Systems”

These can be purchased (£25/copy) from:

Glass and Glazing Federation, 44-48 Borough High Street, London, SE1 1XB Tel: 0870 042 4255 Fax: 0870 042 4266

Alternatively they can be downloaded from the Glass and Glazing Federation web site: [Link]
• The Physical Environment
SECTION 2
A Guide to the Design of Fire Resistant Glazed
2.9 J A N UA RY 2 0 0 1
Screens and Partitions to comply with the
Requirements for Impact and Crowd Loads

Contents Part N : Glazing – Safety in relation to compliance with BS 5234 and BS 6180
Impact, Opening and Cleaning. by partitions and barriers.
Foreword
The design shall also comply with British Extracts of British Standards are
1. Scope
Standards. reproduced with permission of BSI but
2. References
are no substitute for reference to the full
3. Definitions BS 5234:1992 Partitions
standards which are available from BSI,
4. Fire Resistant Partitions to BS 5234 Part 1 Code of Practice for Design and Customer Services, 389 Chiswick High
5. Criteria for Acceptance of Fire Installation. Road, London W4 4AL.

Resistant Partitions to BS 5234 Part 2 Specification for performance 3. Definitions

6. Fire Resistant Barriers in and about requirements for strength and robustness The definitions for this document are as
Buildings to BS 6180 including methods of test. described in the British Standards,
detailed above.
7. Deflection Limits BS 6180:1999 Code of Practice for
Barriers in and about Buildings 4. Fire Resistant Partitions to BS 5234
Foreword
BS 6262:Part 4:1994 Code of Practice
for Glazing for Buildings Safety related Grades of Partition.
The Fire Resistant Glazing Group of the
Glass and Glazing Federation has to Human Impact.
BS 5234 grades partitions by their
prepared this Data Sheet.
BS 6399:Part 1:1996 Code of Practice categories of duty. These can be assessed
for dead and imposed loads against performance criteria when tested
The Data Sheet has two objectives.
This data sheet highlights the need for for strength and robustness.
(i) To enable designers and specifiers to
ensure that fire resistant glazed screens
or barriers are strong and robust enough Table 1 Partition grades by categories of duty (from BS 5234:Part 2:Table 1)
to withstand impact and crowd pressure.
Grade Category of duty Examples
(ii) To provide relevant guidance and
recommendations to designers and Light duty (LD) Adjacent space only accessible to persons Domestic
specifiers of fire resistant glazing. with high incentive to exercise care. Small accommodation
chance of accident occurring or of misuse.
1. Scope Medium duty (MD) Adjacent space moderately used primarily Office
This Data Sheet is designed to provide by persons with some incentive to exercise accommodation
information for the successful care. Some chance of accident occurring
performance in service of fire resistant and of misuse.
glazed screens and partitions with respect
Heavy duty (HD) Adjacent space frequently used by the public Public circulation
to impact and crowd loads. and others with little incentive to exercise areas
care. Chances of accident occurring and Industrial areas
2. References of misuse.
The designer shall comply with the
Building Regulations Approved Severe duty (SD) Adjacent space intensively used by the public Major circulation
and others with little incentive to exercise areas
Documents Part K and Part N.
care. Prone to vandalism and abnormally Heavy industrial
rough use. areas
Part K : Protection from falling, collision
and impact.

Glass
Glass
4 and
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
A Guide to the Design of Fire Resistant Glazed Screens and Partitions to comply with the Requirements for Impact and Crowd Loads. January 2001

Partitions should be sufficiently robust to specified limits. f. Door slamming: when installed in a
withstand: test rig a 35 kg door leaf is slammed 20
b. Surface damage by small hard body times for light or medium duty, a 60kg
a) Bending caused by people leaning on impact: this test using a 3kg impactor, door leaf is slammed 100 times for heavy
the partition or by a person standing with its head being a 50 mm diameter or severe duty. The partition shall not be
on a ladder against it (see stiffness test). steel sphere, is inappropriate for glazed damaged, nor shall frame fittings come
areas of partitions. The impact loose. The frame closing jamb shall not
b) Impact caused by people falling against performance requirement of glass to be displaced by more than 3 mm after an
the partition (see soft body impact reduce the risk of injury from glass initial 3 slams and thereafter by any more
test). breakage is determined by testing to BS than a further 1 mm.
6206. Safety glass is classified A, B or C
c) Impact caused by trolleys, wheelchairs when it either does not break or breaks g. Crowd pressure: a continuous load
and equipment (see hard body impact safely under impactor drop heights of is transmitted through a 2.5 m horizontal
tests). Not appropriate for glazed 1219 mm, 457 mm or 305 mm. Building beam at a height of 1.2 m for 2 minutes.
partitions. Regulations Approved Document N A choice of load 0.75 kN, 1.5 kN or 3
and BS 6262:Part 4 designate where kN per metre length of beam is made
d) Door slamming caused by wind or safety glass should be used. by the test sponsor. There shall be no
people closing a door energetically collapse or damage that could cause
(see door slam test). c. Resistance to damage to impact injury.
from a large soft body: the partition shall
The performance criteria are set out in be capable of withstanding impact 6. BS 6180:1999 Barriers in and
Table 2: energies of 20 Nm, 40 Nm or 100 Nm about buildings
Table 2
Summary of grade requirements and principal test performance levels This British Standard is relevant to the
Grade (see table 1) Criteria
Test design and construction of fire resistant
Requirement Units BS 5234: glazed screens which act as barriers to
LD MD HD SD Part 2 Summary Method
Clause protect persons from various hazards,
Stiffness mm 25 20 15 10 1.6.1 Maximum deflection Annex A including falls from stairs, landings, ramps,
mm 5 3 2 1 Maximum residual deflection
Small hard body impact: edges of internal floors, external walls
Surface damage Nm 3 3 6 10 1.6.2 Judgement of indent Annex B and external balconies. As a general rule
Perforation Nm 1) 5 15 30 1.6.4 No perforation of facing Annex D barriers should be installed where there
Large soft body impact: is a difference in adjacent levels greater
Damage Nm 20 20 40 100 1.6.3 2mm maximum deformation Annex C than 600 mm. Barrier considerations
Structural damage Nm 60 60 120 120 1.6.5 No collapse or dislocation Annex E
Door slam No. 20 20 100 100 1.6.6 No damage and 1 mm Annex F
apply to screen areas up to 1100 mm
maximum displacement above floor level.
1) No requirements for this grade
Building use categories
Where a partition is liable to be according to grade, applied by swinging
subjected to the pressure of crowds, against it a 45kg bag and suffering no In the assessment of the need for a
consideration should also be given to a permanent deformation in excess of 2 barrier and the type of barrier to be
sample being tested for resistance to mm or any damage. provided, the designer should give
collapse or dangerous damage. consideration to the building use and the
d. Resistance to perforation by small risks to building users. BS 6180 invokes
5. Criteria for Acceptance of Fire hard body impact: this test uses the same BS 6399:Part 1:Table 4 for building use
Resistant Partitions to BS 5234 apparatus as b, and is likewise categories or occupancy types, inserted
inappropriate for glazed partition areas here as Table 3.
5.1 Methods of Test and Criteria for for which BS 6206 determines impact
Acceptance resistance. Design loads

Part 2 Annexes A to G specify the e. Resistance to structural damage by The design loads should be chosen in
methods of test, and section 1.6 details impact from a large soft body: the accordance with the appropriate building
the criteria for acceptance. partition shall be capable of withstanding use category and barrier location.
impact energies of 60 Nm or 120 Nm Barriers should be designed to resist the
a. Stiffness: a horizontal load of up to according to grade, applied by swinging more onerous loads arising from the
500 N is applied via a 150 mm diameter against it a 45kg bag from heights of separate consideration of the uniformly
plate. There shall be no damage other 122 mm or 245 mm, without collapsing distributed and point loads given in
than superficial cracking. Deflection or dislocating the partition or Table 3.
and deformation shall not exceed its fixings.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

A Guide to the Design of Fire Resistant Glazed Screens and Partitions to comply with the Requirements for Impact and Crowd Loads. January 2001

Table 3 Occupancy types and minimum horizontal imposed loads (from BS 6399:Part 1:Table 4)
Minimum horizontal imposed loads for parapets, barriers and balustrades, etc.

Type of occupancy for Horizontal A uniformly A point load

part of the building or Examples of specific use. uniformly distributed load applied to
structure. distributed line applied to the part of the
load (kN/m) infill (kN/m2) infill (kN)

A. Domestic and (i) All areas within or serving exclusively one dwelling 0.36 0.5 0.25
residential including stairs, landing, etc, but excluding external balconies
and edges of roofs (see C3ix)

(ii) Other residential (but also see C) 0.74 1.0 0.5

B and E. Offices and (iii) Light access stairs and gangways not more than 600 mm 0.22 N/A N/A
work areas not wide
included elsewhere
including storage (iv) Light pedestrian traffic routes in industrial and storage 0.36 0.5 0.25
areas buildings except designated escape routes

(v) Areas not susceptible to overcrowding in office and 0.74 1.0 0.5
institutional buildings, also industrial and storage buildings
except as given above

C. Areas where (vi) Areas having fixed seating within 530 mm of the barrier, 1.5 1.5 1.5
people may balustrade or parapet
congregate
(vii) Restaurants and bars 1.5 1.5 1.5
C1/C2. Areas with
tables or fixed seating.

C3. Areas without (viii) Stairs, landings, corridors, ramps. 0.74 1.0 0.5
obstacles for moving
people and not (ix) External balconies and edges of roofs. Footways and 0.74 1.0 0.5
susceptible to pavements within building curtilage adjacent to
overcrowding. basement/sunken areas.

C5. Areas susceptible (x) Footways or pavements less than 3m wide adjacent to 1.5 1.5 1.5
to overcrowding. sunken areas.

(xi) Theatres, cinemas, discotheques, bars, auditoria, shopping 3.0 1.5 1.5
malls, assembly areas, studios. Footways or pavements
greater than 3 m wide adjacent to sunken areas.

(xii) Designated stadia (see note 1) See requirements of the appropriate certifying authority

D. Retail areas (xiii) All retail areas including public areas of banks/building 1.5 1.5 1.5
societies or betting shops. For areas where overcrowding
may occur, see C5.

F/G. Vehicular (xiv) Pedestrian areas in car parks including stairs, landings, 1.5 1.5 1.5
ramps, edges or internal floors, footways.

Note 1. Designated stadia are those requiring a safety certificate under the Safety of Sports Ground Act 1975

7. Deflection limits Glass in a fully framed fire resistant edge cover to give the desired fire
screen is normally treated as an infill resistance to the glass.
A barrier that is structurally safe should
panel subjected to the concentrated
not possess sufficient flexibility to alarm
point loads given in Table 3. Its deflection Table 4 indicates sizes of glass panes for
building users. The horizontal displacement
should not exceed the smaller of 12.5 different types and thicknesses of glass
of any part of the barrier should not
mm or L/125, where L is the longest which will withstand the design criteria of
exceed 25 mm.
dimension of the glass. For fire rated this standard. Significantly larger sizes
In a full height glazed barrier with an open- glazing systems that are supported on may be possible depending on the shape
ing window, where there is an unrestricted two edges only, additional structural of the pane and whether it is an
opening below the level of 800 mm, a calculations are necessary. insulating glass unit.
barrier or rail should be provided not
more than 800 mm from the floor. The frame section should give adequate

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

A Guide to the Design of Fire Resistant Glazed Screens and Partitions to comply with the Requirements for Impact and Crowd Loads. January 2001

Table 4 Sizes of fully framed single glass panes which will be in

accordance with the design criteria given in BS 6180:Table 2
Design criteria Nominal glass Area for glass type (m2)
from Table 3 thickness mm Laminated glass Toughened glass Safety wired glass
Line load 0.36 kN/m2 6 3.6 3.8 3.4
+ UDL 0.5 kN/m2 + 8 5.8 6.0 -
concentrated load 10 8.4 8.6 -
0.25 kN 12 11.6 11.7 -
≥15 No limit No limit -
Line load 0.74 kN/m2 6 2.2 2.4 0.2
+ UDL 1.0 kN/m2 + 8 4.2 4.3 -
concentrated load 10 5.8 6.0 -
0.5 kN 12 7.8 8.0 -
15 - 11.4 -
16 12.9 - -
≥19 No limit No limit -
Line load 1.5 kN/m2 + 6 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
UDL 1.5 kN/m2 + 8 Not applicable 1.8 -
concentrated load 10 0.2 4.2 -
1.5 kN 12 3.4 6.2 -
15 - 9.0 -
16 9.9 - -
19 - 13.5 -
20 14.4 - -
≥24 No limit No limit -

8. Impact Resistance Conclusion

In addition to resisting the design loads, The designer of fire resistant glazed
the materials used should also be screens and partitions must not only
appropriate to resist impact forces. establish the appropriate level of fire
Glass should be in accordance with the performance to ensure a safe building,
safety glazing recommendations given but also assess building use and duty
in BS 6262:Part 4. rating for resistance to impact and crowd
pressure.
BS 6262 recommends a class of safety
glazing with respect to "free path" criteria. Members of the Fire Resistant Glazing
The impact energy level will vary Group are aware of the relevant British
according to the position of the barrier Standards and Codes of Practice. In
relative to the unhindered distance a conjunction with technical consultants,
body can travel in a direction they are ready to advise specifiers on the
perpendicular to the surface of the supply and installation of constructions, as
protective barrier (the free path). The required by Building Regulation 7, that are
impact classes recommended with appropriate for their use, and that
respect to free paths are: perform the functions for which they are
designed.
Less than 1500 mm class C
Greater than 1500 mm class A

but these are not normally applied to "full

height barriers" such as fire resistant
screens, which should simply comply with
BS 6262:Part 4.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Basic Putty Fronting Glazing Techniques 4.1 June 2012

for Single Glass

1 Introduction For information on glazing techniques Putties ‘set’ through a combination of
for other glasses, consult the glazing oxidation of vegetable oils together with
This Data Sheet has been produced to material manufacturer and the glass loss of volatile material in steel frames,
enable the correct products to be manufacturer. Information on plastics or absorption of oils into timber frames
selected for putty fronting single glass glazing sheet materials can be found in in the presence of moisture.
into timber, and steel windows that are GGF Data Sheet 4.5.
coated with a variety of coatings. Linseed oil putty is manufactured solely
3 Frame materials and coatings from chalk and linseed oil using a very
The method of application is the same small amount of wetting agent to give a
for all [Link] performance of the The combinations of frame material and uniform product.
products is dependent on the rebate coatings covered in this document are:-
dimensions of the frame, the selection All the other putties and plastic glazing
of the correct materials, correct painting • Primed or base coat stained compounds are made from blends of
procedure and adequate maintenance. If softwood, or hardwood to be site vegetable oils, drying and non drying oils
more detailed information on the life painted or stained after glazing. with solvents and/or polymers together
expectancy of a product is required with alternative fillers.
• Galvanised steel to be site painted
than is given in this Data Sheet, then the
after glazing. All the glazing materials form a skin,
reader should contact its manufacturer.
which is essential for the successful
• Powder coated steel where no
2 Scope painting of the product.
coating is to be applied after glazing.
The detail given in this document covers Good performance of the glazing
For information on other frame
the glazing of the following glasses into material is only achieved if the front fillet
materials, such as durable hardwoods
vertical frames using a putty fronting has a thickness and width within the
where no coating is to be applied to
technique:- range specified by the manufacturer for
the frame, or correctly prepared metal
the product. If the dimensions are
Clear float and sheet glass frame materials such as aluminium,
smaller the material will crack
bronze or ungalvanised mild steel,
Polished plate wired and unwired glass prematurely; if the dimensions are larger
contact the glazing material supplier.
the material will not set and will remain
Rough cast wired and unwired glass Any evidence of frame material
soft. In extreme cases this will lead to oil
Patterned glass deterioration should be investigated.
seepage from the material.
Toughened glass 4 Glazing materials
The following materials are available and
Note: All fronting glazing materials are cover almost all the situations where a
classified as setting glazing compounds, fronting product is requried.
Basic glass products are covered in BS and are usually referred to as putties for With the exception of some of the
EN 572, Parts 1-9. site painted frames and plastic glazing Rapid Set putty types the following
compounds for site stained frames. putties are only suitable for use in
Glazing techniques for insulating
The main components of putties are externally applied putty fronting
glass units are covered in GGF Data
chalk and vegetable [Link] amount of techniques. Depending upon individual
Sheet 4.2.
each depends on the use of the putty; manufacturer claims, some of the Rapid
The glazing of fire resistant glass is small quantities of polymeric additives Set putties may be used for internal
covered in GGF Data Sheet 2.8. provide different properties to the putty. putty fronting.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Basic Putty Fronting Glazing Techniques for Single Glass

4.1 Linseed oil putty They should be used in sealed rebates, 5 Frame storage, fitting
as loss of oil into the frame material will and preparation
Linseed oil putty is designed for fronting result in shrinkage and cracking of the
into softwood frames coated with a compound. 5.1 Storage and fitting of
primer made to BS 5082 or BS 5358. frames
Site painting after glazing is required. 4.4 Multipurpose or dual
purpose putty Do not allow frames to be stored
In order to achieve good setting, some without adequate protection against
of the oil from the putty must be These are suitable for glazing into either mechanical damage or exposure to rain.
absorbed by the [Link] primers primed or steel frames where painting is Care must be taken during frame
specified allow the correct amount of oil to be carried out after glazing. installation to avoid undue stress around
to be absorbed by the timber. Multiple the rebate joints. Excessive moisture
coats of primer or primer plus Good setting is achieved by the correct content before installation will result in
undercoat will prevent the oil being choice of vegetable oil blend in the shrinkage of the timber and the opening
absorbed by the timber, and will result formulation, which will also usually up of joints, which can lead to water
in poor setting of the putty. contain non-drying polymer elements ingress through the joints. Follow
and solvents. Putties formulated in this manufacturers’ instructions on both
4.2 Metal casement or steel way accommodate the thermal storage and installation.
sash putty movement of a steel frame after it
has set. 5.2 General points applicable
These are designed for use in steel or to all frames
non-porous hardwood frames where oil 4.5 Rapid set putty types
cannot be absorbed by the frame. • Check that the frames have not
Good setting is achieved by the choice Some manufacturers offer rapid set been damaged.
of vegetable oil blend and a small putty types. As the name indicates,
percentage of solvent. Also, a small these materials are suitable for use in • Check that the moisture content of
percentage of non-drying polymeric situations where an accelerated skinning a timber rebate/frame is not
component forms part of the time, rate of set and overpainting are excessive. High moisture contents at
compound which allows the putty to required over the range of more the time of glazing may lead to
accommodate the thermal movement traditional putties. Depending upon the shrinkage of the timber, followed by
of the steel frame after it has set. claims of the individual putty subsequent opening of joints or loss
These putties require painting manufacturer, these materials are suitable of adhesion of glazing putties, which
after glazing. for glazing most single glass types into a can result in water ingress.
selection of painted softwood, hardwood
4.3 Plastic glazing compound or steel frames. Like all vegetable based • Ensure that the rebate surfaces are
putties and to ensure good service life clean, dry and free from dust, grease
Traditional putties such as linseed oil these materials also require overcoating and cement [Link] clean
putty and metal casement putty require after application. with a paper towel.
painting and will only accommodate the
limited movement that occurs in a These putty types tend to be two part • Check that the frames are ready for
frame coated with traditional undercoat materials (base putty and a hardener) glazing, and that any specific sealers
and gloss. Plastic glazing compounds are and tend to owe their inital skinning or primers required for a product
designed to be used either in steel and cure characteristics to an have been applied.
frames which are factory painted and accelerated chemical reaction rather
• Where a primer or base coat stain
where no painting will be carried out than the slower skinning, oil absorption
has weathered considerably, the frame
after glazing, or in base coat stained and volatile loss processes employed by
should be recoated before glazing.
timber frames to be coated with more traditional putties.
microporous stains after glazing. These putty types can typically be 5.3 Timber frame preparation
These stains allow moisture vapour to overcoated within 4 to 7 days after
pass through the coating into the wood, application and set through considerably 5.3.1 Softwood to be painted
which results in significantly more quicker than traditional putties.
Softwood frames to be painted are
movement of the wood than in a
In addition, due to the accelerated usually supplied with a paint priming
painted frame.
skinning and setting characteristics, coat. If supplied uncoated, consult the
The initial set of plastic glazing some of these putty types are also paint manufacturer for any appropriate
compounds is by loss of solvent suitable for internal fronting techniques primer system. It is important to ensure
followed by reaction with oxygen in where traditional puttties cannot be that the priming paint is sufficiently dry
the air. successfully used. and hardened.
Basic Putty Fronting Glazing Techniques for Single Glass

5.3.2 Softwood to be stained Coating

Softwood frames to be stained are Frame Material Paint Stain Powder
usually supplied with one coat of a base Coating (Site applied) (Site applied) (Factory applied)
coat stain. If supplied uncoated, consult Softwood Linseed Oil Putty Plastic Glazing
the stain manufacturer for an appropriate or Multipurpose Putty Compound
base coat stain.
Apply two coats of the sealer recommended Hardwood Metal Casement Putty Plastic Glazing
or Multipurpose Putty Compound
by the plastic glazing compound manufacturer
to the surfaces of the rebate that will be in Steel Metal Casement Putty Plastic Glazing
contact with the compound. or Compound
Multipurpose Putty
5.3.3 Hardwood to be painted
or stained consistency, which is free from lumps and DO NOT USE PAINTS WITH STRONG
with separated oils thoroughly mixed in. SOLVENTS SUCH AS XYLENE.
Apply two coats of the sealer recommended
by the glazing material manufacturer to the 7 Glazing procedure The fronted material should have a
surfaces of the rebate that will be in contact strong skin and should be firm enough
7.1 Apply putty to rebate and insert to take the paint before it is applied. If
with the glazing material.
setting blocks. this is not the case brush marks or
5.4 Steel frame preparation wrinkling will occur on the surface.
7.2 Place pane on setting blocks,
5.4.1 Galvanised steel and centralise, press into putty to give a back The initial set of putties in painted
painted steel bedding of 1-2mm throughout and softwood frames occurs as a result of
secure pane with metal sprigs or clips.
both oil absorption from the putty into
Where the rebate has been primed, The use of glazing blocks may be
the timber and the formation of a skin.
check that the primer has fully hardened required for certain types of opening
by gently rubbing its surface with a cloth window. The initial set of plastic glazing
soaked in white [Link] primer should compounds in a stained timber frame
not be removed by the white spirit if it 7.3 Apply further fronting putty and
occurs as a result of loss of volatile
has fully hardened. knife off at an angle finishing about 2mm
material from the compound followed
Note: Galvanised steel does not below sight line.
by the formation of a skin.
require priming if the galvanising has The initial set of putties and plastic
7.4 Brush putty with soft brush to
become weathered. seal to glass. glazing compounds in steel frames is
by loss of volatile material from the
5.4.2 Powder coated steel 7.5 Knife off back bedding, sloping compound followed by the formation
Powder coated steel does not need away from glass. of a skin. Early application of a paint
priming before glazing. system may trap volatile material
8 Painting of fronting
and/or slow down the oxidation
glazing materials
6 Glazing material of vegetable oils which may result
All fronting glazing materials, except in a slow or poor setting putty.
6.1 Selection of glazing for the plastic glazing compound for
materials powder coated steel should be After the initial set the putties can be
painted with either white spirit or [Link] recommended painting
The table below gives the products to times are as follows:-
water based paints.
use for various combinations of frame
material and coating.
Glazing material Minimum time for Maximum time for
6.2 Storage of glazing first coat (days) first coat (days)
materials Linseed Oil Putty 7 28

Store materials in the dry, out of direct Metal Casement Putty 7 21

sunlight and at temperatures not
Multipurpose/Dual Purpose Putty 7 28
exceeding 25ºC.
Plastic Glazing Compound 7 90
6.3 Preparation of glazing
materials before glazing Rapid Set Putty 4 28
Depending upon manufacturer
Immediately before glazing, prepare putty recommendations

for use by working to a smooth

Basic Putty Fronting Glazing Techniques for Single Glass

Note: 10 Maintenance 10.3 Maintenance of the

glazing system
• Glazing material must have formed a 10.1 Introduction
strong skin and be firm enough to Maintenance schedules consist of
take the paint before application. It has been assumed that adequate regular inspections of the glazing
provision for suitable and safe access for systems and, when necessary, the
• In cold weather the minimum the maintenance of the glazing systems replacement of defective glazing
painting times should be increased, in is either incorporated into the design of material.
hotter weather the maximum times the building or otherwise allowed for.
should be reduced. To give a weathertight seal, a glazing
Be sure to provide written advice to the material must adhere well to all the
• For small fillets the maximum painting homeowner to check periodically the surfaces with which it is in contact.
times should be reduced, for larger condition of the frame coating and The movement that occurs between
fillets the minimum time should glazing system. the frame and the glass, together with
be increased.
the effect of the weather can, over a
The coating on the frame protects and
• If the surface skin is disturbed before period of time, break down the
stabilises the frame and joints. Failure to
painting, this can result in problems adhesion of the glazing material.
maintain the coating will lead to
with both the paint and the set of This loss of adhesion results in the
excessive movement of the frame,
the putty. formation of a fine split between the
putting extra stress on the glazing,
glazing material and the glass.
resulting in a reduction of its service life.
9 Further setting of putties
When such splits first form it is difficult
Distortion of the frame can also be
After painting the glazing material will to see them with the naked eye.
caused by a failure to insert glazing
continue to set as a result of further Some materials, particularly those
blocks correctly. In extreme cases
oxidation of the vegetable [Link] rate applied by hand, can shrink and set hard
reglazing will be necessary.
of a set of putty depends on the size of on ageing. Cracks will appear, initially in
the fillet, how quickly the putty was 10.2 Maintenance of the the paint, and then through the glazing
painted, the porosity of the coated frame finish material.
timber and ambient conditions.
Site applied frame finishes require It is possible to re-seal fine splits
In general, slower setting occurs with regular [Link] coating on the between the glazing material and either
larger fillet sizes, earlier painting and the horizontal surfaces will deteriorate more the glass or the frame with paint or
porosity of the coated timber. rapidly than on vertical surfaces. stain, without having to recoat the
whole [Link] splits have
Warmer ambient conditions will give Similarly the coating on a south widened and are too large to seal with
faster skinning times. Information on elevation (which is subjected to greater paint – or where cracks have formed in
recommended fillet sizes and painting times levels of sunlight) will deteriorate more the glazing material – the defective
are given in the manufacturer’s literature. rapidly than other elevations. length should be replaced with the
The further setting is relatively slow, same type of glazing material.
The period between maintenance will
taking about a year to become hard. vary from as little as 1 to 2 years for south
However under certain conditions it is facing horizontal surfaces coated with dark
possible to make an indentation in the coloured, low build microporous stains, up
surface of a putty with finger pressure to 6 years for long life coatings in less
one to two years after glazing. severe exposures.
Putty fronting without glazing pins or The specification of the actual coating
clips is not recommended, and in terms on the frame is important, and details of
of current British Standards, is not a suitable maintenance for coatings should
secure method of glazing until the putty be obtained from the manufacturer.
has set [Link] period can be up to
about two years.

It is possible to improve the security of

windows glazed with single glass using a
fronting system. For information on the
options available consult the glazing
material manufacturer.
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
System Design and Glazing Considerations
4.2 December 2009
for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

Contents Part 2 Frame Design

Part 0 General 2.1 Introduction

0.1 Introduction 2.2 Frame selection

0.2 Scope 2.3 Traditional frame materials and construction

0.3 Definitions 2.3.1 Steel frames

0.4 Principles of glazing 2.3.2 PVC-U frames

0.4.1 General principles 2.3.3 Aluminium frames

0.4.2 Prevention of prolonged contact of moisture 2.3.4 Timber frames

0.4.3 Compatability 2.3.5 Frame Finishes

0.4.4 Exposure to sunlight [Link] Steel frames

0.4.5 Quality of Workmanship [Link] Aluminium frames

0.4.6 Suitable Frame Design [Link] Timber frames

0.4.7 Frame Movement [Link] PVC-U frames

Part 1 IGU Design 2.4 Glazing rebate and bead requirements

1.1 Design considerations 2.4.1 General principles

1.1.1 Glass 2.4.2 Specific requirements for drained or drained and

ventilated glazing systems
1.1.2 Edge sealant
2.4.3 Edge clearance
1.1.3 Edge tapes
2.4.4 Edge cover
1.1.4 Spacer
2.4.5 Rebate height
1.1.5 Desiccant 2.4.6 Rebate platform
1.1.6 Edge seal 2.4.7 Beads
1.1.7 Gas filling Part 3 Glazing Systems for IGUs
1.1.8 Other components 3.1 Glazing system selection

1.2 Sizing the IGU 3.1.1 Frame design

Glass and Glazing Federation

Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266

System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

3.1.2 Compatibility In order to achieve the optimum service life from IGUs they must
be well designed and constructed to meet the requirements of BS
3.1.3 Glass type EN 1279, and glazed into well designed frames using durable
3.1.4 Special environments glazing materials with good on site or factory workmanship
followed by adequate maintenance.
3.1.5 Factory glazing/site glazing
This data sheet is intended to provide information for architects,
3.1.6 Site glazing specifiers, builders, frame manufacturers glazing companies and IGU
[Link] should lead to a more knowledgeable selection
3.1.7 Access of frames and frame finishes, improvement in glazing specifications,
and more efficient on site supervision and workmanship.
3.1.8 Colour
For ease of reference the data sheet has been divided into the
3.2 Workmanship following sections;

3.2.1 IGU handling and storage • General considerations

3.2.1a Handling factory glazed IGUs • IGU design

3.2.2 Glazing check list • Frame design

• Glazing Systems; including selection; workmanship

3.3 Location of IGUs in frames
and maintenance
3.3.1 Setting blocks
A glazing company and or supplier of IGUs may not have control
3.3.2 Location blocks over all the factors affecting service life of the IGUs. It is hoped that
by providing more information on all the important factors, the
3.3.3 Distance pieces people who do have control will understand their responsibilities
and take appropriate action.
3.3.4 Fixing of beads
0.2 Scope
3.4 Glazing Systems
This data sheet gives the principles underlying the correct glazing of
3.4.1 System IG 1: Gasket glazing IGUs into windows and doors for UK exposure conditions, and
includes descriptions of the glazing methods recommended by the
3.4.2 System IG 2: Cellular adhesive sections or strips; or
Glass and Glazing [Link] document is applicable to both
load bearing mastic tapes; or pre-shimmed mastic tapes.
site glazing and factory glazing.
3.4.3 System IG 3: Load bearing or pre-shimmed mastic The following applications are excluded from the scope of this data
tapes or cellular adhesives strips, and sealant capping. sheet, although the principles of glazing of IGUs set out in this data
3.4.4 System IG 4: Moisture vapour permeable (MVP) sheet should generally be applied for all situations.
sealant bedding. • Curtain walling
3.4.5 System IG 5: Single sealant • Structural glazing
3.4.6 System IG 6: Load bearing or • Sloped glazing
pre-shimmed mastic tapes, or cellular adhesive strips,
and sealant capping. • Stepped IGUs

3.4.7 System IG 7: Heel bead seal • Special Applications such as explosion resistant glazing, bullet
resistance, fire resistance, etc
3.5 Maintenance
0.3 Definitions
3.5.1 Glazing materials
• Bedding. The glazing material which seals IGUs and beads in
3.5.2 Window frames the rebate.

3.6 IGU Replacement • Back bedding. The glazing material between the face of the glass
and the rebate upstand after the IGU has been pushed into position.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
• Front bedding. The glazing material between the face of the
Appendix 1 glass and the bead.
Part 0 General
• Capping. A sealant applied to fill the gap above a strip glazing
0.1 Introduction material positioned between the IGU and the rebate upstand
and/or bead.
The overall purpose of the data sheet is to provide up to date
information aimed at achieving the longest possible service life from • Cavity. The space between the panes of glass in an IGU.
installed Insulating Glass Units (IGUs).
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

• Cellular Adhesive Sections: Rectangular or profiled closed cell • Flush edged IGU. An IGU in which the panes are of equal size.
synthetic rubber or polymeric section with self-adhesive backing
• Load bearing strip sealant. A strip sealant capable of
• Clearances (see fig 1):- withstanding the wind pressure exerted on an IGU without
distortion. Strip sealant suppliers should advise the maximum
• Edge [Link] distance between the edge of the IGU and
IGU sizes that can be glazed for different exposure conditions,
the rebate platform.
and edge covers.
• Back [Link] distance between the IGU and the
• Organic Spacer. An organic material containing desiccant used
rebate upstand.
to create the space between the glass panes.
• Front [Link] distance between IGU and bead.

Depth of rebate

Back clearance

Rebate width

Front clearance

Edge cover
Edge clearance

Figure 1

• Edge cover (see fig 1). The distance between the edge of the • Outer Sealant (Also known as The Secondary Seal in a dual seal
IGU and the sight line. IGU) a sealant which, when applied, is in contact with the
environment outside the IGU.
• Glazing:-
• Primer. A coating applied to a surface to improve the adhesion
• External glazing. Glazing where one face is exposed to the
of compounds or sealants.
outside of the building.
• Rebate upstand. The face of the rebate which is parallel to the
• Internal glazing. Glazing where neither face is exposed to the
faces of the IGU.
outside of the building.
• Rebate platform. The face of the rebate which makes an angle
• Outside glazing. External glazing in which the glass is inserted
with the upstand to form the complete rebate.
from outside the building.
• Sealer. A coating applied to a porous surface to prevent
• Inside glazing. External glazing where the glass is inserted from
migration from compounds or sealants subsequently applied to
inside the building.
that surface.
• Glazing material. A material which provides a bedding for the
• Sizes (see figure 2):-
glass and forms a joint between the glass and [Link] term
includes glazing compounds, sealants, putties, glazing strips and • Sight size. The actual size of the opening which admits daylight,
tapes, and gaskets. as measured between the sight lines.
• Heel bead/Toe bead. A bead of sealant applied between the • Tight size. The actual size of a rebate opening, as measured
edge of the IGU and the rebate angle, or between the edge of between the rebate platforms.
the IGU and the glazing bead.
• Sight line. The perimeter of the opening which admits daylight.
• Inner Sealant (Also known as The Primary Sealant in a dual seal
• Spacer. A component used to separate the panes and control
IGU). A sealant which, when applied, is in contact with the cavity
the width of the gap at the edge of the IGU.
of the IGU.
• Tolerance. The difference between the nominal dimensions and
• Insulating Glass Unit (IGU). An assembly consisting of at least
the actual dimensions. Tolerances are given as positive and
2 panes of glass, separated by one or more spacers, hermetically
negative differences from the nominal dimensions.
sealed along the periphery, mechanically stable and durable.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

• Rainwater
• Window cleaning operations
• Condensation within frame sections
• Condensation on the room side or outside glass surfaces
All glazing systems must protect the edge seal of the IGU, either, by
ensuring that any water which penetrates as far as the edge seal is
Sight size
soon removed by drainage and ventilation of the rebate area, or by
preventing access of water to the seal.

Tight size Glazing methods for IGU fall into two groups, known as (1) drained
methods, and (2) solid bedding methods.
1) Drained methods are based on the principle that some water
Figure 2
Figure 2 may penetrate the glazing rebate; and while this is kept to a
minimum, provision is made in the design of the frame to ensure
that any water that does penetrate is removed by drainage
and ventilation.
0.4 Principles of glazing 2) Solid bedding methods protect the seal of the IGU by
0.4.1 General principles embedding the edge of the IGU in compound or sealant to
prevent moisture coming into contact with the edge seal.
The fundamental principles underlying glazing of IGUs in order to
achieve a long service life are: 0.4.3 Compatibility
• Prevention of prolonged contact of moisture with the edge seal Edge seals have different levels of compatibility with different glazing
of the IGU materials. Edge seals and glazing material are considered to be
• Compatibility between the edge seal and other components of compatible if, when they are in direct contact with each other, or in
the IGU, the glazing materials and, if applicable, coatings on the close proximity, the performance of either is not reduced in any
glass and on the frames way as a result and there is no adverse effect to the performance
of the IGU.
• Protection of the edge seal of the IGU against direct sunlight
When using glazing methods where there is likely to be contact
• Quality of workmanship between the edge seal and the glazing material, it is essential to
• Suitable frame design check that the edge seal and the glazing material are compatible.
(See GGF data sheet 4.9 Compatibility of Glazing Sealants and
• Accommodation of frame movement Compounds with Insulating Glass Units.).
Note: IGUs are fundamentally different from single glasses, in that they have an Some IGUs are provided with an edge tape. In such cases it is
edge seal. However well they are glazed, IGUs cannot be expected to have the essential that a check is made to confirm that the tape is
same life expectancy as single glass. compatible with the proposed glazing system and the outer seal of
the IGU and has long term adhesion. (see also Part 1 Clause 1.1.3,
0.4.2 Prevention of prolonged contact of moisture and Part 3 Clause 3.2.1).
The major cause of IGU failures is associated with water. If liquid
water is trapped against the edge seal of a IGU failure of the 0.4.4 Exposure to sunlight
adhesive bond of the sealant to the glass may [Link] will allow The seals on some IGUs can degrade if exposed to direct sunlight.
water and/or moisture vapour to pass between the edge sealant It is important, therefore, to ensure that the rebates provide full
and the glass, leading to excessive moisture vapour in the IGU cover of the seal of the IGU. (Ref to later section 2.4.4 & 2.4.5)
cavity and ultimately to condensation on internal glass surfaces.
Even if failure of the adhesive bond of the sealant does not occur 0.4.5 Quality of Workmanship.
the presence of liquid water in the glazing rebate may lead to See Part 3 section 3.2 Workmanship.
premature failure of an IGU.
Water in the form of moisture vapour is able to permeate through 0.4.6 Suitable Frame Design.
the edge sealant into the IGU [Link] rate of permeation of See Part 2.
moisture vapour is dependent on the properties of the edge
sealant(s), and on the concentration of moisture vapour. However 0.4.7 Frame Movement.
low the rate of moisture vapour permeation, it is inevitable that,
after a period of time, excess moisture vapour in the IGU cavity All frame materials will move during their service life as a result of
will occur, and condensation on the internal glass surfaces will result. climatic conditions and therefore should be considered during the
design process.
Moisture can penetrate into the glazing rebate, either through or
around the glazing system, or through the frame joints, from a
variety of sources such as:-
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

PART 1. IGU DESIGN system description and therefore must remain in place when the
IGU is glazed. If edge tapes are used they should be applied after
1.1 Design considerations
quality control final inspection.
Reference should be made to the European standard BS EN 1279
The application of edge tapes may reduce the life expectancy of
for IGUs, and to the relevant parts of the Building Regulations. In
the IGU especially in cases where the tape is badly applied or is
order to conform with the Construction Products Directive (CPD),
damaged during handling. Water may enter between the tape and
to CE mark and to legally place products onto the market,
the glass and be trapped against the edge seal for prolonged
conformance to BS EN 1279 must be demonstrated.
periods, particularly in the case of drained glazing systems.
There are many component parts used in the manufacture of The adhesives on some edge tapes are water-sensitive and may
[Link] selection, design and assembly of these individual suffer loss of adhesion to the glass, thereby increasing the likelihood
components play a major role in the performance of the IGU, and of water entering between the tape and the glass. Certain
the correct combination of these materials will improve the long- adhesives used on the tapes may be incompatible with the outer
term durability of the IGU. It is important to ensure that all seal of the IGU.
materials used in the construction of the IGU are compatible and,
In cases where an edge tape is wrapped around the edge of the
when assembled, meet the requirements of BS EN 1279. A brief
IGU onto the face of the glass, and where the glazing material is
review of the major components used in the manufacture of
required to adhere to the glass, the edge tape will reduce the
IGUs follows.
effective bonding area depending on the distance by which the
tape extends onto the face of the IGU.
1.1.1 Glass
A wide variety of glass types is available for IGU manufacture. 1.1.4 Spacer
These should be checked for compatibility with the edge sealant(s)
There are many materials, shapes, sizes and surface finishes used in
and other [Link] sealant(s) should have excellent
the manufacture of spacers. Commonly these are hollow tubes.
adhesion to un-primed glass as defined in part 4 of BS EN 1279,
The IGU manufacturer should always check the suitability,
In the case of some coated glasses, it may be necessary to remove
compatibility and adhesion of the edge sealant(s) to the spacer. If
the coating from those surfaces to which the edge sealant has to
for any reason the spacer or its surface treatment is changed, then
adhere, and the advice of the glass manufacturer should
testing of the new spacer with the edge sealant(s) should be
be obtained.
carried out according to BS EN 1279.
The glass must also be compatible with the glazing materials used.
The spacer frame can be manufactured in several [Link] way in
For instance, if a laminated glass is used in the construction of a
which the corners are formed may affect the life of the IGU.
IGU then care should be taken to ensure that the glazing materials
Corners may be formed using corner keys, or by welding, or by
do not affect the appearance or performance of the interlayer e.g.
bending the spacer.
acid-cure glazing materials, or those containing oil or solvents, are
known to affect interlayer materials adversely and therefore should When using hollow spacers of various widths, the IGU
not be used to glaze laminated glass. manufacturer must ensure sufficient desiccant is held within the
spacer frame system to ensure long-term performance of the IGU.
1.1.2 Edge sealant
In some IGU constructions, rather than being a hollow tube,
A wide variety of sealants is used in the manufacture of IGUs. the spacer is a desiccant filled organic sealant which may be
pre-formed. The pre-formed sealant spacer may contain an
The manufacturer should always carry out a full evaluation of any impermeable barrier in the form of a metal strip or other
new sealant to confirm its performance with the proposed IGU material. The desiccant is blended into the sealant by the sealant
design (in accordance with BS EN 1279) manufacturer rather than being filled at the time of IGU
Performance features of the sealant (or combined sealants in a dual manufacture.
seal system), which need to be considered include:-
1.1.5 Desiccant
• Compatibility with glazing materials
Desiccants principally adsorb moisture vapour from the IGU cavity
• Moisture vapour transmittance to prevent condensation on the cavity surfaces of the [Link] are
produced in a variety of forms and blends, ranging from silica gel to
• Compatibility of inner and outer sealants pure molecular sieve of various granule sizes. Selection will depend
on specific requirements.
• Adhesion qualities
The IGU manufacturer should always ensure the suitability of the
• Resistance to service temperature desiccant system, including the quantity required. For example, if a
component of the IGU contains a volatile material, then a specific
1.1.3 Edge tapes desiccant blend, that will adsorb both water and solvent, should
Self-adhesive edge tapes are sometimes applied by the IGU be selected.
manufacturer to the perimeter of the IGU. Certain desiccants have the capability to adsorb nitrogen from the
The purpose of the edge tape is usually to improve the aesthetic IGU cavity particularly at low temperatures. This can result in
appearance of the IGU or to facilitate handling and should always excessive glass deflection and, with certain combinations of edge
be removed prior to glazing, unless it is a functional part of the sealant and spacer design, can lead to glass breakage.
design, and included in the initial type test to BS EN 1279. In this
case the use of edge tape will be included in the manufacturers'
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

1.1.6 Edge seal

The edge seal system is designed to adhere to the glass panes and
spacer, to prevent moisture from penetrating the unit cavity, and
where appropriate to retain gases within the cavity.
In principal there are two basic edge seal configurations:-
• Single seal systems
• Dual seal systems
Single seal systems rely on the sealant to act as the vapour and gas
barrier, and as the adhesive to hold the panes of glass together.

Dual Seal
This single seal can be provided by chemically curing sealants, or by
hot-applied, butyl-based sealants (commonly known as hot melt
butyls), or can be in the form of a preformed organic spacer, which
Dual Seal
may contain an impermeable barrier - see figure 3.
Figure 4

It is critical in the manufacture of IGU that the edge sealant is

applied correctly, in accordance with the manufacturer’s system
description. Some defects can dramatically reduce the service life
of the IGU and may include amongst other things, gaps in the
primary sealant, voids in the secondary sealant and uncured
secondary sealant.

1.1.7 Gas filling

Single Seal
To improve the thermal, and in some cases acoustic, properties of
the IGU the air in the cavity is sometimes replaced, either partially
or wholly with specialist gas(es) such as argon, krypton etc.
Single Seal
1.1.8 Other components
Figure 3 A variety of other components may be incorporated in the IGU
design (e.g. self-adhesive lead strip, Georgian bar inserts, coloured
films), which could have an effect on the performance of the IGU.
The component manufacturer should be consulted regarding
With single seal systems, production aids such as adhesive tapes
their use.
may be used to hold the spacer frame in position on the glass
while the edge sealant is applied and allowed to cure. These tapes
1.2 Sizing the IGU
do not increase the life expectancy of the IGU.
Tolerances from the nominal dimensions of the IGU and the frame
Dual seal systems are produced using an inner or primary seal and
tight size should be taken into account, to enable the required
an outer or secondary seal.
minimum edge clearance given in Clause 2.4.3 to be achieved.
The primary seal is normally produced from polyisobutylene (PIB), Refer to BS EN 1279: Part 1 for information relating to tolerances
which is the main moisture vapour barrier of the IGU or can be in of IGU
the form of a preformed organic spacer, which may contain an
The IGU length or height = F - C - du - df,
impermeable barrier. During assembly it firmly holds the glass and
spacer together while the secondary sealant is applied. Where F = nominal frame tight size,
The outer or secondary seal is either produced from chemically C = sum of the two edge clearances,
curing sealants, such as. silicones, polysulfides, polyurethanes, or from
hot-applied butyl materials. These sealants must have excellent long du = maximum IGU tolerance,
term adhesion to the glass and spacer frame in order to hold these df = maximum frame tolerance.
components together during the service life of the IGU.
(See Figure 4). An example using this calculation procedure is given in Appendix 1.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

PART 2. FRAME DESIGN The coating on the surface of the timber can affect the choice of
glazing material (see [Link] Frame finishes).
2.1 Introduction
NB Other frame materials may be available that are not
This section details the important features of a frame which
covered here
have a significant effect on the performance of the glazing system,
and ultimately on the service life of the IGU that is glazed into
2.3.5 Frame finishes
the frame.
[Link] Steel frames
In order to be suitable for the glazing methods described in Part 3
of this data sheet, frames must meet the requirements detailed in Steel frames are usually finished with a factory applied coating, or if
this section of the data sheet. not, may require painting on site. Some glazing materials may not
be compatible with the various finishes used, and advice should
2.2 Frame selection be sought.
When selecting a window frame the specifier should ensure that:-
[Link] Aluminium frames
• the materials used are suitable for the proposed method
Aluminium frames are finished with a factory applied coating or an
of glazing
anodised finished which requires no further treatment. Advice
• the rebate height is sufficient to give adequate edge cover and should be sought regarding the suitability and compatibility of
edge clearance for the IGU. glazing materials.
• the rebate platform is of sufficient width to allow for the
[Link] Timber frames
required thickness of glazing material each side of the IGU, and
for the correct positioning and fixing of the beads; Timber frames are manufactured from a variety of types of wood
(hard and soft) and supplied with various types of treatment or
• the beads have the required dimensions to enable them to be
coatings. Advice should be sought regarding the suitability and
positioned and fixed correctly.
compatibility of glazing materials and finishes.
• the design of any drainage/ventilation system is adequate for the
rapid removal of any water that may enter the glazing rebate. [Link] PVC-U frames
PVC-U frames are supplied ready for use and do not require
2.3 Traditional frame materials and construction
surface finishing.
2.3.1 Steel frames
2.4 Glazing rebate and bead requirements
Steel frames should be made from hot rolled sections in
2.4.1 General principles
accordance with BS EN 10025 S235JR, manufactured to meet the
requirements of BS 6510. The upstand of the glazing rebate must have sufficient height to
provide sufficient edge cover, plus edge clearance.
The coating on the surface of the steel can affect the choice of
glazing material (see [Link] Frame finishes). Glazing rebate widths must allow for the thickness of the IGU; plus
the thickness of the glazing materials; to ensure that beads can be
2.3.2 PVC-U frames securely fixed.
PVC-U frames are made from extruded hollow profiles which
2.4.2 Specific requirements for drained or drained
should conform to the appropriate standards (BS EN 12608, and
and ventilated glazing systems
BS 7722).The frames should be fabricated from these profiles in
accordance with the recommendations of the system designer and These systems should be designed to minimise the amount of
in the case of white frames conform to BS 7412. water that may enter the glazing rebate. The drainage system of
the frame must ensure the rapid removal of any water from the
2.3.3 Aluminium frames rebate platform.
Aluminium frames are made from extruded profiles. The frames The rapid removal of water from the glazing rebates to the outside
should be fabricated from these profiles in accordance with the is best achieved for timber frames by the incorporation of a
recommendations of the system designer, and should conform sloping platform.
to BS 4873.
A slope of 1 in 10 (6°) is recommended for the bottom platform
The finish on the surface of the aluminium can affect the choice of
of a timber frame. Alternatively, gutters with holes may be used for
glazing material (see [Link] Frame finishes).
aluminium or PVC-u frames (see Figure 5 for examples). A typical
system should include drainage holes at least 8mm in diameter, or
2.3.4 Timber frames
slots at least 25mm x 5mm to ensure the passage of water.
The basic design, in terms of the requirements for materials
(including preservative), profile design, workmanship, construction,
security and safety, weather-tightness, and operation and strength
performance, should be in accordance with BS 644.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

material which can be sloped to finish several millimetres above the

frame sight line.
Mechanical support is provided by the rebate upstand and bead.
Typically for IGUs made with a spacer and edge sealant, a minimum
edge cover of 12mm is required to keep the spacer below the
sight line and to protect the edge sealant. However other spacers
may be available to allow for reduced edge cover.
b
2.4.5 Rebate height
The rebate height should provide sufficient edge clearance and
a edge cover for the IGU to meet the requirements described
above, and should take account of the sight and tight size
a
tolerances for both the IGU and the frame
Figure 5
For example with an IGU that requires 12mm edge cover and a
minimum 5mm edge clearance when glazed into a timber or metal
Figure 5. Drained glazing system – a Drainage hole frame, a rebate height of 20mm will ensure that adequate edge
or slot – b clearance is achieved for most combinations of IGU and frame
tolerances. However this will not give complete cover to the spacer
It is difficult to ensure the removal of all water from the glazing
where the frame tolerances approach the maximum, and the IGU
rebates by drainage alone. Water may be trapped, or may be held
tolerances approach the minimum.
by surface tension, either as droplets or between opposing surfaces,
even though the design should prevent this happening. Ventilation For PVC-U frames, where manufacturing tolerances may be larger,
may be necessary to dry out these areas. This is particularly true the minimum rebate heights will need to be 22mm for the bottom
of frames with horizontal platforms, or where moisture may collect rebate and 20mm for the top and side rebates.
on the top edge of an [Link] degree of ventilation achieved is
not only dependent upon the size of the ventilation holes or slots, An example rebate height calculation is given at Appendix 1.
but also upon their position and accessibility to prevailing winds.
Slots of 20mm x 3mm can be adequate for ventilation in exposed 2.4.6 Rebate platform
parts of the window, but further ventilation is probably necessary in The width of the rebate should be sufficient to provide the
more protected parts. required front and back clearances and to provide sufficient contact
To prevent wind-driven water being carried into the frame section, of the glazing beads onto the platform. The width of the rebate
all exposed holes and slots should be protected, either by fitting platform should be equal to the sum of the front and back
hoods, or by forming the slots in a position in the frame where clearances, the nominal thickness of the IGU, the width of the bead,
they are not subject to direct wind and weather. and an allowance for the tolerances on IGU and bead thicknesses.
For example, in order to achieve 3mm of glazing material (to fill the
2.4.3 Edge clearance front and back clearances) each side of the IGU, for a 24mm IGU
Edge clearance is necessary to prevent frame-to-glass contact, to the rebate platform should be 24mm + 6mm + the width of the
ensure drainage and allow for differential thermal expansion of the bead + a typical allowance for the tolerances on IGU thickness, say
IGUs and frames. 1mm, making a total of 31mm plus the width of the bead.

For drained/ventilated glazing systems edge clearance is necessary 2.4.7 Beads

to prevent water from bridging between the rebate platform and
the edge seal of the IGU. The edge clearance should be sufficient Timber beads for timber frames should have an installed height
to allow for thermal movement, and the recommended minimum equal to the rebate height, and a width in contact with the rebate
is 5mm. For very well drained and ventilated frames, the clearance platform greater than the height, to enable firm fixing of the bead
can be reduced for the side and top rebates, to a minimum of to be achieved. Normally external, top and side beads should not
3mm in the case of glass lengths up to 2m. project beyond the face of the frame, and are flush with the face.
If top beads project, this could encourage water penetration which
For solid bedded glazing systems there should be sufficient edge could lead to reduced life of the IGU. Additional sealing of a
clearance to enable the perimeter of the IGU to be fully bedded to projecting top bead is required.
the rebate platform. If any voids are left around the perimeter of
the IGU, there is a possibility that water entering through open The bottom bead should run the full tight size width of the frame.
corner joints in the frame will pass through the voids to the The bottom bead should not be recessed in from the frame face,
perimeter of the IGU, and cause premature failure. For IGUs less and may project beyond the face.
than 18mm thick and up to 2m long a minimum edge clearance of If timber beads are fixed with screws these must be at no more
3mm is required; for IGUs over 2m long or over 18mm thick, a than 75mm from each corner and at not more than 200mm
minimum edge clearance of 5mm is required. centres. If pins are used they must be twice as long as the bead
height and fixed no more than 50mm from each corner and at not
2.4.4 Edge cover more than 150mm centres.
This is required around the edge of an IGU, to provide adequate Beads for metal and plastics frames should have a height equal to
mechanical support, and to protect the edge sealant from attack by the rebate height, and must be designed to be fixed to ensure they
sunlight. In some cases, for example with steel frames, further cannot move or distort, and to securely retain the IGU and the
protection of the edge seals can be obtained from the glazing glazing seals.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

PART 3. GLAZING SYSTEMS FOR IGUs distortion or bowing. Suitable soft surface supporting blocks
should be used to prevent edge damage.
3.1. Glazing system selection
Where IGUs are supplied with self adhesive edge tapes unless
The following factors should be considered in selecting the
advised by the manufacturer they should be removed and
glazing system:-
adhesives cleaned from the glass before IGUs are installed,
(See Clause 1.1.3).
3.1.1 Frame design
See also BS 8000 - Part 7. Section 2 “Material handling
The selected glazing system must be appropriate for the and preparation
frame design.
Consideration should be given to whether drainage and ventilation 3.2.1a Handling factory glazed IGUs
provision is adequate where required. (See Clause 2.4.2 above).
Frames which have been factory glazed will need care in handling
due to the weight of the glazed frame. It is advisable to label the
3.1.2 Compatibility windows and to issue instructions to indicate how they should be
The glazing materials should be compatible with each other handled to avoid distortion
and with the edge seal of the IGU , glass components and the
frame finish. 3.2.2 Glazing check list
The following features are critical and should be checked
3.1.3 Glass type before glazing
Special glazing system requirements may be necessary for some
glass types, e.g. self cleaning glass. • Frames should be checked to ensure that they are ready for
glazing, have not been damaged, that the rebates are free from
3.1.4 Special environments obstruction, and that the rebate and bead surfaces are clean, dry
and free from any dust, cement spatters, etc.
Special environments must be taken into account e.g. swimming
pools, chemical plant.
• Strippable coatings, protective tapes, etc, should be removed
3.1.5 Factory glazing / site glazing from glazing rebates and beads to ensure that they do not
encroach on to the glazing surfaces of frames prior to glazing.
Factory glazing provides a controlled environment and better
control of workmanship than site glazing.
• Timber frames and porous surrounds should be checked to
ensure that they are dry. Excessive moisture in the frame or
3.1.6 Site Glazing porous surround may prevent adhesion of primers, sealers and
In the case of site glazing, account must be taken of whether the glazing materials or may cause discolouration.
IGUs are to be inside or outside glazed. For inside glazing, special
care should be taken in the selection of drained frames. • If problems are encountered in this respect, glazing should be
suspended until the frames have dried out sufficiently (clean and
3.1.7 Access re-prime before glazing with sufficient time being allowed for the
primer to dry).
The availability of temporary or permanent access to the outside
of the building must be considered for maintenance purposes,
(see clause 3.5) • The condition of any wood primer or base coat previously
applied to a timber frame should be checked. Where the primer
3.1.8 Colour or base coat has weathered considerably, the frame should be
re-treated before glazing.
If desired the glazing material colour should be selected to
compliment the frame colours.
• The IGU size should allow adequate clearance all round in
accordance with the minimum values given in Clauses [Link] and
3.2 Workmanship
[Link] of the data sheet relating to frame design. The rebate
In order to achieve the maximum service life of an IGU it is height should be such that achievement of the edge clearance is
important that the frame design is correct and it is also important consistent with the edge seal and spacer of the [Link] rebate
to follow the specified glazing procedure. height should be such that it completely covers the edge seal
and spacer(see clause 2.4.5)
Glazing contractors should be properly trained and conversant
with good glazing practice as described in this document.
• Edge tapes should be removed unless otherwise recommended
3.2.1 IGU handling and storage by the IGU manufacturer (see clause 1.1.3).

All IGUs must be handled with care. IGUs delivered in cases • Ensure that all the glazing materials are suitable for the glazing
should be unpacked on arrival and checked that they conform to method being used.
the specification. If IGUs are found to be wet they must be dried.
All IGUs must be stored inside away from sunlight (or, if outside,
under an opaque cover and not under transparent sheeting) to • Although most of the above checks are required for both solid
avoid thermal stress. All IGUs must be stored with both panes bedding systems and drained systems, the following additional
supported and in dry conditions with adequate support to prevent checks should be made when glazing into drained systems.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

• The frames should be checked for the presence of drainage and 3.3 Location of IGUs in frames
ventilation holes or slots, and that they are of a suitable size, and
It is essential that the IGUs are correctly positioned in the frames.
are free from obstructions such as fabrication swarf, etc.
This is achieved by the use of setting blocks and, where
appropriate, location blocks and distance pieces. The use of the
• Ventilation and the free flow of water to holes and slots must correct components, in terms of material type and dimension, and
not be impeded by setting and location blocks, external bead the correct positioning of the components, is essential in achieving
retention lips, or glazing materials. a successful installation. Full details of the correct location of the
glazing blocks are given in figures 6, 7 and 8, and information
• As water can be present in the glazing rebate (and, in some relating to setting block materials and sizes is given in Table 1.
designs, in other areas of the frame) it is essential with the
exception of holes and slots for drainage that all vulnerable 3.3.1 Setting blocks
details should be adequately sealed e.g. screw fixing holes.
Setting blocks (see Figure 6) are used between the bottom edge of
Similarly, unless this is intentional as part of the drainage system,
the IGU and the frame or surround, to support and centralise the
all frame joints should be adequately sealed.
IGU in the opening.

• The external glazing seals should limit water penetration into the
rebate as much as possible, and should shield the edge seal of
the IGU against the effect of sunlight.

• Where gaskets or strip materials are supplied cut to size, these

should be the correct length to ensure that there are no gaps at
the corners.

Setti ng
Setting block
block

Figure 6
Setting blocks
Setting blocks should be of resilient, non-absorbent rot-proof,
compatible materials such as those indicated in the table below

Setting blocks are required in different positions depending on the

frame type. Positions for setting blocks for all types of frame are
shown in Figure 7.
For fixed windows, blocks are usually positioned as near the
quarter points as possible. Where it is necessary to avoid undue
deflection of the frame, the window manufacturer should specify
the position of setting blocks as being either:-
a) not less than 30mm from the corner, or;
b) in positions to coincide with the window fixing points if
these are between 30mm from the corner and the
quarter points.
For designs where the actual positions are critical, or where blocks
are required in additional positions, these should be stated by the
window manufacturer.
In order to ensure that both panes of glass are supported, the
width of the setting block should, in general, be equal to the sum of
the IGU thickness plus the back clearance. In cases where a gasket
or strip material is of such a dimension as to prevent positioning of
the setting block against the upstand, the width of the setting block
should be the same as the width of the IGU.
The thickness of the setting block is determined by the minimum
edge clearance required at the bottom of the IGU, or by the actual
edge clearance when the IGU is centralised.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

The length of the setting block is determined by the area of the

IGU and the material of the block. For handling purposes the
minimum length of each setting block should be 25mm. In cases
where setting blocks are required at two positions, the length of
setting block for different sizes of IGUs is given below:-

Table 1. Materials suitable for setting blocks, and block length

required for different areas of IGUs. (Each of 2 blocks at
bottom of unit).

IGU size
Block Material
Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to
1m2 2.5m2 5m2 7.5m2 10m2

Sealed hardwood
e.g. teak, mahogany 25mm 25mm 50mm 75mm 100mm

Rigid plastics e.g. un-plasticised

PVC-U, nylon 25mm 63mm 125mm 188mm 250mm

Plasticised PVC (with a softness

number of 35 to 45 - see BS 2571) 30mm 75mm 150mm 225mm 300mm
or neoprene (74 to 80 IRHD -
see BS ISO 2921)

Note: For vertically pivoted, side-hung and projected side hung windows, and for doors where a single setting block is required, the block length must be twice that
given in the table.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

3.3.2 Location blocks In this case the length of these location blocks should be
determined as if they were setting blocks.
Location blocks are in essence the same as setting blocks but must
be used between the edges of the IGU (other than the bottom Location blocks should be of a thickness to suit the edge clearance.
edge - called setting blocks) and the frame or surround at positions It is preferable for location blocks to be positively located in order
shown in figure 7. The purpose of location blocks is to prevent to prevent them becoming displaced during installation or service.
movement of the IGU within the frame when the window or door The width of the location blocks should in general be equal to the
is opened or closed, and to prevent the weight of the glass from sum of the IGU thickness plus the back clearance. In cases where
causing the frame to become out-of-square. For designs where the a gasket or strip material is of such a dimension as to prevent
actual positions are critical, these should be stated by the window positioning of the location blocks against the upstand, the width of
manufacturer. To prevent movement of the IGU in the frame prior the location blocks should be the same as the width of the IGU.
to, and during, installation of factory glazed windows, additional
Note: Attention should be paid to the compatibility of the setting and location
location blocks may be necessary.
blocks with the glazing materials and the edge seal of the IGU. In the case of
Location blocks should be at least 25mm long for all opening PVC-U frames, compatibility with the frame material should also be considered.
windows, except for those at the top edge of horizontally pivoted
windows which are reversible

Figure7
Position of Setting and location blocks

Setting Block
Location Block
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

3.3.3 Distance pieces 3.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

Distance pieces (positioned between the glass faces and rebate and The glazing systems described below are systems that are suitable
bead upstands) (see Fig 8) are necessary to prevent displacement for glazing IGUs in normal situations into new frames, or for
of glazing compounds or sealants by loading e.g. wind pressure on replacing IGUs in existing frames.
the glass.
The following illustrations of glazing systems are intended to
Distance pieces should be of a resilient, non-absorbent material. indicate the design principles and the use of glazing materials. For
They should be 25mm long and of a height to suit the depth of clarity, setting and location blocks, distance pieces, bead fixings and
the rebate and the method of glazing; and they should be of a covers to holes or slots have been omitted from the illustrations.
thickness equal to the actual back and front clearances, to retain
The illustrations of glazing methods show the most commonly
the IGU firmly in the frame so that it cannot be displaced in
used frame material. Providing the design of the rebate and beads
service conditions.
is suitable, frames of other materials may also be appropriate.
• Distance pieces are available in various sizes and shapes.
3.4.1 System IG 1: Gasket glazing
• Distance pieces should be used in all cases, except where a load
bearing strip material is used. This is a drained system – see Figure 9.
• Distance pieces on both sides of the IGU should be placed
opposite each other.
• Where beads are fixed by screws or over studs, distance pieces
should coincide with the bead fixing points.
Where beads are pin fixed or fit into grooves, the first distance
pieces should be at approximately 50mm from each corner, and
the remainder should be located at approximately 300mm centres.

Figure 9
System IG 1

Frame type: Aluminium, or PVC-U with channels and/or nibs to

accommodate a gasket profile, with drainage .
Procedure: Ensure the frame rebate surfaces and the beads are
clean. If the frame is mechanically jointed, apply sealant to the
frame joints if this is specified by the frame manufacturer.
If the gasket sections have not been supplied pre-cut to size, cut
Figure 8 them to the correct length. Where possible, gaskets should go
Distance pieces round the frame in one piece, being nicked in the corners to ease
bending, and with the joint at the top of the frame. Cut the
gaskets slightly oversize to ensure that they are not under tension
when assembled, which would result in creep-back in service.
Fit the gaskets to the beads and to the frame upstand where
3.3.4 Fixing of beads appropriate to the frame design.
Where timber beads are fixed with screws these must be at no Place the setting blocks in the frame ensuring that they do not
more than 75mm from each corner and at not more than 200mm obstruct drainage. Clean the perimeter of the IGU with a dry
centres. If pins are used they must be twice as long as the bead cloth. Insert the IGU into the frame, centralise, and insert location
height and fixed no more than 50mm from each corner and at not blocks as required.
more than 150mm centres. Pins should be fixed so as to avoid
Apply pressure, either by insertion of the beads, or by applying the
contact with the glass edge.
beads and inserting the wedge-shaped gasket. The wedge-shaped
Beads for metal and plastic frames should have a height equal to gasket should be inserted at the corners first, then by working
the rebate height, and must be designed to be fixed to ensure they outwards from the centre. Check that there are no gaps at the
cannot move or distort, and to securely retain the IGU and the corners of the frame.
glazing seals.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

3.4.2 System IG 2: Cellular adhesive sections or excess material which has been compressed above the sight line
strips; or load bearing mastic tapes; or pre-shimmed using a sharp knife. Where possible trim to form a chamfer to
mastic tapes. shed water.
This is a drained system - see Figure 10
3.4.3 System IG 3: Load bearing or pre-shimmed
mastic tapes or cellular adhesives strips, and
sealant capping.
This is a drained system – see Figure 11.

Figure 10
System IG 2 (Wood frame shown)

Front and back bedding (a)

Profiled closed cell synthetic rubber or polymeric section with self-
adhesive backing; or load bearing mastic tapes; or pre-shimmed
mastic tapes.
Frame Type: Timber, metal or PVC-U, with drainage .
Procedure: Ensure the frame rebate surfaces, the beads and the
areas of the IGU which will be in contact with the glazing material
are clean. If the frame is mechanically jointed, apply sealant to the
frame joints if this is specified by the frame manufacturer.
Apply self-adhesive cellular section or the mastic tape or pre-
shimmed mastic tape to the rebate upstand. In the case of the Figure 11
cellular sections, these should be applied in line with the sight line.
In the case of the mastic tapes these should be applied slightly System IG 3 (Wood frame shown)
above the sight line. Tapes or cellular sections should be at least
2.5mm thick after compression.
Place setting blocks in the frame ensuring that they do not obstruct
drainage. Insert the IGU into the frame, centralise, and insert Frame suitability: Timber or metal, with drainage
locations blocks as required. Apply pressure to bed the IGU
against the section or tape. Procedure: Ensure the frame rebate surfaces, the beads and areas
of the IGU which will be in contact with the glazing materials are
Apply the glazing material to the beads. Cellular sections should be
clean. If necessary prime the appropriate frame, bead and IGU
applied in line with the sight line. Mastic tapes should be applied
surfaces with sealant primer. If the frame is mechanically jointed,
slightly above the sight line. Bed the beads to the glass by applying
apply sealant to the frame joints if this is specified by the
pressure to compress both the inside and outside glazing materials,
frame manufacturer.
and fix the beads in position. With pre-shimmed mastic tapes the
compression should be sufficient to ensure that the shims are in Apply the self adhesive cellular strip or mastic tape to the rebate
compression between the glass and the bead and rebate upstand. upstand with the top edge set approximately 6mm below the
sight [Link] or cellular strips must be at least 2.5mm thick
If timber beads are fixed with screws, these must be at not more
after compression.
than 75mm from each corner and at no more than 200mm
centres. If pins are used, they must at least twice as long as the Place setting blocks in the frame, ensuring that they do not
bead height, and fixed at no more than 50mm from each corner obstruct drainage. Insert the IGU into the frame, centralise, and
and at no more than 150mm centres. insert location blocks as required. Apply pressure to bed the IGU
against the tape or strip.
In the case of load bearing and pre-shimmed mastic tapes, trim the
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

Apply self adhesive cellular strips or mastic tapes to the face of Outer Bedding (a)
the bead or the face of the IGU, set approximately 6mm below
Moisture vapour permeable sealant e.g. silicone.
the sight line, taking care that the drainage or ventilation is
not obstructed. Inner Bedding (b)
Bed the beads to the glass, compressing both inside and outside Low permeability glazing material e.g. load bearing or pre-
strips or tapes, and fix the beads in position. If timber beads are shimmed mastic tape, polysulfide sealant or non-setting
fixed with screws, these must be at no more than 75mm from compound.
each corner and at no more than 200mm centres. If pins are
Note: Inner bedding should always be less permeable than the
used, they must at least twice as long as the bead thickness, and
outer bedding.
fixed at no more than 50mm from each corner and at not more
than 150mm centres.
Procedure:
Apply the sealant capping internally and externally, ensuring that
the channels between the glass and the frame/beads above the Outside glazing (Figure 12a)
tape/cellular strips are completely [Link] the sealant to a Ensure the frame rebate surfaces, the beads and areas of the IGU
smooth chamfer to shed water. which will be in contact with the glazing materials are clean. If
necessary prime the appropriate frame, bead and glass surfaces
3.4.4 System IG 4: Moisture vapour permeable with sealant primer. Apply the back bedding to the rebate
(MVP) sealant bedding. upstand. In the case of mastic tapes, apply slightly above the sight
This is a solid bedding system – see Figure 12. line and apply a heel bead of sealant (this can be high or low
permeability) beneath the tape to provide a bedding for the back
Frame suitability: Timber or metal. edge of the IGU.
Insert the setting blocks and distance pieces as required.
Centralise the IGU in the frame, insert location blocks as
required, and apply pressure to bed the IGU against the back
bedding so that the distance pieces (where used) are tightly held
a b between the rebate upstand and the IGU.
Apply moisture vapour permeable sealant around the edge of
the IGU to completely fill the perimeter void ensuring that the
seal is continuous and in full contact with both the IGU and
rebate [Link] apply a substantial fillet of sealant around
the perimeter of the IGU to form the bedding between bead
and glass.
Insert distance pieces of the required thickness opposite those
against the rebate upstand. Bed the beads to the glass, squeezing
the sealant up between the beads and the glass, and between the
bottom of the bead and the rebate platform. Press the beads
12a back until the distance pieces are firmly held between beads
and glass.
Fix the beads in position. If timber beads are fixed with screws,
these must be at no more than 75mm from each corner and at
no more than 200mm centres. If pins are used, they must be at
a b least twice as long as the bead height, and fixed at no more than
50mm from each corner and at not more than 150mm centres.
Apply further sealant to fill any residual voids between bead and
glass, and tool to a smooth chamfer to shed water.
Finish the internal bedding. In the case of mastic tapes, trim with
a sharp knife, where possible forming a watershed. In the case of
glazing compound, form a smooth chamfer to shed water.

Inside glazing (Figure 12b)

The system is reversed, bedding the IGU in the moisture vapour
12b
permeable sealant, and bedding the bead to the glass with the
less permeable sealant.

Figure 12
MVP sealant bedding
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

3.4.5 System IG 5: Single sealant 3.4.6 System IG 6: Load bearing or

pre-shimmed mastic tapes, or cellular adhesive strips,
This is a solid bedding system – see Figure 13.
and sealant capping.
This is a solid bedding system – see Figure 14.
Frame suitability: Timber or metal.

Figure 13
System IG 5

Figure 14
Frame suitability: Timber or metal.
Wood frame shown System IG 6
Bedding: Suitable 1 or 2 part curing glazing sealant,
Note: Non-setting glazing compounds and putties are not suitable as the
single sealant material for glazing IGUs.
Back and front bedding (a)
Procedure: Ensure the frame rebate surfaces, the beads and
areas of the IGU which will be in contact with the glazing Load bearing mastic tapes; or pre-shimmed mastic tapes; or
materials are clean. If necessary prime the appropriate frame, closed cell synthetic rubber strips with self-adhesive backing.
bead and glass surfaces with sealant primer.
Capping, perimeter filling, and bead-to-platform bedding (b)
Apply a generous fillet of sealant around the perimeter of the
Suitable one or two-part curing sealant e.g. silicone, polysulfide.
frame to the angle between the rebate upstand and the platform.
Insert setting blocks and distance pieces as required. Procedure: Ensure the frame rebate surfaces, the beads and
areas of the IGU which will be in contact with the glazing
Centralise the IGU in the frame, insert location blocks as
materials are clean. If necessary prime the appropriate frame,
required, and apply pressure to bed the IGU against the back
bead and glass surfaces with sealant primer.
bedding so that the distance pieces are tightly held between the
rebate upstand and the IGU. Apply the mastic tape or cellular strip to the rebate upstand, with
the top edge approximately 6mm below the sight line, and apply
Apply sealant around the edge of the IGU to completely fill the
a heel bead of sealant beneath the tape to provide a bedding for
perimeter void ensuring that the sealant is continuous and in full
the back of the [Link] and cellular strips should be at least
contact with both the IGU and rebate platform. Then apply a
2.5mm thick after compression.
substantial fillet of sealant around the perimeter of the IGU to
form the bedding between beads and glass. Insert distance Place setting blocks in the frame and insert the IGU. Centralise
pieces of the required thickness opposite those against the rebate the IGU in the frame, insert location blocks as required, and apply
upstand. Bed the beads to the glass, squeezing the sealant up pressure to bed the IGU against the strip or tape.
between the beads and the glass, and between the bottom of the
bead and the rebate platform. Press the beads back until the Apply sealant around the edge of the IGU to completely fill the
distance pieces are held firmly between the beads and glass. perimeter void, finishing flush with the face of the IGU ensuring
that the sealant is continuous and in full contact with both the
Fix the beads in position. If timber beads are fixed with screws, IGU and rebate platform.
these must be at no more than 75mm from each corner and at
no more than 200mm centres. If pins are used, they must at least Apply mastic tape or cellular strip to the face of the bead or to
twice as long as the bead thickness, and fixed at no more than the face of the IGU, with the top edge approximately 6mm below
50mm from each corner and at not more than 150mm centres. the sight line, and the bottom edge approximately in line with the
edge of the IGU.
Apply further sealant on both sides of the glass to fill completely
any residual voids between glass and rebate and glass and bead.
Tool the sealant to smooth chamfers to shed water.
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

Apply a fillet of sealant to the rebate platform, against the Place setting blocks in the frame. Insert the IGU, centralise it in the
perimeter filling to form a sealant heel bead. Bed the beads to frame, insert location blocks as required, and apply pressure to bed
the glass, applying pressure to compress both the inside and the IGU against the tape or strip and the sealant.
outside tapes or strips, and to bed the beads to the platform.
Apply sealant around the edge of the IGU to completely fill the
Fix the beads. If timber beads are fixed with screws, these must perimeter void (c), finishing flush with the face of the IGU ensuring
be at no more than 75mm from each corner and at no more that the sealant is continuous and in full contact with both the IGU
than 200mm centres. If pins are used, they must at least twice as and rebate platform.
long as the bead height, and fixed at no more than 50mm from
Apply a fillet of sealant to the rebate platform against the perimeter
each corner and at not more than 150mm centres.
filling to form a sealant heel bead (d).
Apply the sealant capping internally and externally, ensuring that
Apply the glazing material to the beads (e). Closed cell rubber strip
the channels between the glass and the frame/beads above the
should be applied in line with the sight line. Mastic tapes should be
tape/cellular strips are completely [Link] the sealant to
applied slightly above the sight line. Bed the beads to the glass by
smooth chamfers to shed water.
applying pressure to compress both the inside and outside glazing
materials, and fix the beads in position. With
3.4.7 System IG 7: Heel bead seal
pre-shimmed mastic tapes the compression should be sufficient to
This is a solid bedding system - see Figure 15. ensure that the shims are in compression between the glass and the
bead and rebate upstand.
Frame suitability: Timber or metal.
Fix the beads. If timber beads are fixed with screws, these must be
at no more than 75mm from each corner and at no more than
200mm centres. If pins are used, they must at least twice as long as
the bead thickness, and fixed at no more than 50mm from each
corner and at not more than 150mm centres. In the case of mastic
tapes trim with a sharp knife, where possible forming a watershed.

3.5 Maintenance
3.5.1 Glazing materials
Materials used for the glazing methods described in this GGF Data
sheet should be selected for their suitability in respect of
maintenance and service life. However, inspections should be
carried out after approximately one year, and periodically thereafter,
as deterioration could take place as a result of incorrect application,
vandalism, or damage.
Damaged sealant should be cut out, and replaced with the same or
compatible sealant.
Where gaskets have been displaced or damaged, or where there
are gaps, the gaskets should be refitted or replaced as appropriate.
Figure 15
With drained glazing systems, inspections should be carried out to
System IG 7 check that the drainage/ventilation holes or slots have not become
blocked. Any blockages should be cleared.

3.5.2 Window frames

a. Back and front bedding (a & e)
Window frames should be well maintained. Many frames have
Load bearing mastic tapes; or pre-shimmed mastic tapes; or closed
protective coatings which not only protect the frame material but
cell synthetic rubber strips with self-adhesive backing.
also help to stabilise the frame components, particularly where
b. Heel beads and perimeter filling (b, c & d) timber frames are used.
One or two-part curing sealant. Failure to ensure that the finishes on timber frames are maintained
in good condition may lead to excessive movement occurring, due
Procedure: Ensure the frame rebate surfaces, the beads and areas
to swelling, shrinkage and distortion. This movement can put the
of the IGU which will be in contact with the glazing materials are
glazing components under stress which may exceed their design
clean. If necessary prime the appropriate frame, bead and glass
capability resulting in failure of the glazing system., resulting in
surfaces with sealant primer.
premature failure or the IGU.
Apply self-adhesive closed cell rubber strip or the mastic tape or
Hinges, catches and stays should also be examined. If such
pre-shimmed mastic tape to the rebate upstand (a). In the case of
components are damaged, they may induce racking and distortion
the closed cell rubber strip, this should be applied in line with the
of the frames, which in turn will place stresses on the IGU, and
sight line. In the case of the mastic tapes these should be applied
may also render draught seals and weather seals ineffective.
slightly above the sight line. Tapes or cellular sections must be at
least 2.5mm thick after compression. Apply a heel bead of sealant Maintenance information can be obtained from the current
(b) beneath the tape or strip to provide a bedding for the back edition of the GGF booklet “Windows and Doors, a
edge of the IGU. Homeowners Manual”
System Design and Glazing Considerations for Insulating Glass Units (IGUs)

3.6 IGU Replacement APPENDIX 1

Where replacement of an IGU is required work should generally use Example calculation of required rebate height
a glazing system as described in this document.
The following example for glazing into a timber frame illustrates
Where replacement glazing work is to be undertaken all traces of old how the actual edge clearance, and hence the required rebate
glazing compounds and sealants must be removed from the glazing height is affected by the tolerances of the frame tight size and of
rebates, and rebates must be thoroughly dry. Following preparation of the IGU size.
the rebates glazing should be carried out in accordance with the 2
For a 20mm thick IGU of less than 3m the required minimum
systems described in this document. Any components damaged
edge clearance is 5mm, and typical edge cover required is 12mm,
during replacement glazing work must be replaced.
so the minimum rebate height required will be 17mm.
BIBLIOGRAPHY However, to take account of tolerances of frame size and of IGU
size it is necessary to increase the rebate height to ensure that all
This Data Sheet contains references to the following publications.
combinations of frame size and IGU size can be glazed to meet
The current versions must always be used:
minimum edge clearance and minimum edge cover requirements.
• BS 644: Timber windows. Factory assembled windows of
The nominal size of a IGU is calculated from the nominal tight
various types. Specification.
size of the frame, with allowances for tolerances, using the
• BS 1186-2: Timber and workmanship in joinery. Specification for following formula:-
workmanship.
Nominal IGU length or height = F - C - du - df
• BS 2571: Specification for general purpose flexible PVC
Where: F is the nominal frame tight size
compounds for moulding and extrusion.
C is the sum of the two required edge clearances
• BS 4873: Aluminium alloy windows.
du is maximum IGU tolerance
• BS 5589: Code of practice for preservation of timber.
df is maximum frame tolerance
• BS 6262: Code of practice for glazing for buildings.
Hence, for a nominal tight size of frame of 1000mm with
• BS 6262: Parts1to 4 and 6 to 7: Glazing for buildings. Code of
tolerances of ±2mm, and using an IGU with length and width
practice for glazing for buildings.
tolerances of ±1.5mm the nominal size of IGU is given by:- 1000
• BS 6399: Part 2: Loading for buildings. Code of practice for - 10 - 1.5 - 2 = 986.5mm
wind loads.
If IGUs are manufactured to this nominal size then there will be a
• BS: 6510: Steel framed windows and glazed doors. minimum 5mm edge clearance even when a IGU at maximum
positive tolerance (988mm) is glazed into a frame with maximum
• BS 7412: Plastics windows made from unplasticised negative tolerance (998mm).
polyvinylchloride (PVC-U) extruded hollow profiles. Specification
However, at the opposite extreme condition, with a frame at
• BS 7722: Surface covered PVC-U profiles for windows and maximum positive tolerance (1002mm) and a IGU at maximum
doors. Specification. negative tolerance (985mm) there will be edge clearances of
• BS 8000: Part 7: Workmanship on building sites. Code of 8.5mm. (1002 - 985 X 1/2)
practice for glazing. If rebate heights are only 17mm then edge cover will be reduced
• BS EN 942: Timber in joinery. General classification of to 8.5mm rather than 12mm, so that part of the spacer and edge
timber quality. seal may be visible above the top of the rebate. To compensate it
is necessary to increase the rebate height by 3.5mm - the
• BS EN 1279:Parts 1 to 6: Glass in building. Insulating glass units. difference between the maximum possible edge clearance and
• BS EN 10025: Parts 1 to 6: Hot rolled products of non-alloy the minimum possible edge clearance. (8.5mm - 5mm).
structural [Link] delivery requirements. Hence to allow for all possible combinations of IGU sizes and
• BS EN 12608: Unplasticised polyvinylchloride (PVC-U) profiles frame sizes resulting from tolerances, the rebate height should be
for the fabrication of windows and doors. Classification, increased to 20.5mm (17mm + 3.5mm) for a timber frame for
requirements and test methods. glazing a 20mm thick IGU of less than 3m2 in area.

• BS ISO 2921: Rubber, vulcanised. Determination of low Similar calculations can be made for other frames and other
temperature [Link]-retraction procedure. tolerances of frames and IGUs.
(TR test).
• BS ISO 9000: Quality management and quality assurance
standards. Generic guidelines for the application of ISO 9001,
ISO 9002 and ISO 9003.
• BS ISO 11600: Building construction. Jointing products.
Classification and requirements for sealants.
• GGF data sheet 4.9 Compatibility of Glazing Sealants and
Compounds with Insulating Glass Units.
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of
4.4 February 2011
Thermally Toughened Soda Lime
Silicate Safety Glass for Building

Contents Other requirements, not specified in this datasheet, may apply to

thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass which is
1. Scope
incorporated into assemblies, e.g. laminated glass or insulating glass
2. Definition, characteristics and manufacturing process. units, or undergo an additional treatment, e.g. [Link] additional
requirements are specified in the appropriate product standard.
3. Glass products Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass, in this case, does
4. Fracture characteristics not lose its mechanical or thermal characteristics.
5. Dimensions and tolerances This data sheet does not apply to curved thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass.
6. Edge and/or surface work, holes, notches and cut-outs
NOTE: GGF Data Sheet 4.12.3 covers these products.
7. Shaped flat panes
2. Definitions, characteristics and manufacturing
8. Visual appearance processes
9. Properties Where appropriate these definitions have been taken from
EN 12150-1.
10. Glazing
2.1 edge deformation
11. Fragmentation test Deformation of the edge caused by the tong marks.
12. Identification 2.2 edge lift
(also referred to as edge dip)
Annex A. Tolerances and distortions specific to thermally Distortion produced in horizontal toughened glass, at the leading
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass produced by the vertical and trailing edge of the [Link] is a distortion produced by a
tong hung process reduction in surface flatness

Annex B. Alternative Method of Measuring Roller Wave 2.3 enamelled thermally toughened soda lime silicate
safety glass
Annex C. Examples of Particle Count Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass which has a ceramic
frit fired into the surface during the toughening process. After
toughening the ceramic frit becomes an integral part of the glass
1. Scope
NOTE 1: Also known as opaque thermally toughened soda lime
This datasheet defines the products and specifies the characteristics
silicate safety glass.
and associated measurement procedures and test methods for
thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass that is in NOTE 2: The application of the ceramic frit may be by a
compliance with BS EN 12150. continuous process or discontinuous application, e.g. screen printing.
The enamelled surface could be partially or wholly covered.
Dimensional characteristics i.e. length, width, thickness and flatness,
and their applicable tolerances are specified for thermally 2.4 flat thermally toughened soda lime silicate
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass. Recommendations are also safety glass
made on the dimensions and tolerances of holes/cut-outs. Details Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass which has not
of acceptable edgework are also given. been deliberately given a specific profile during manufacture
NOTE: Tolerances etc. specific to the vertical tong hung process 2.5 thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
are given in annex A. Glass within which a permanent surface compressive stress,
additionally to the basic mechanical strength, has been induced by a
A test method is described for assessing the fragmentation of
controlled heating and cooling process in order to give it greatly
thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass to show how the
increased resistance to mechanical and thermal stress and
quality and consistency of manufacture can be controlled.
prescribed fragmentation characteristics

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

NOTE: The mechanical properties, i.e. thermal durability and clause 11 is undertaken on unrestrained test specimens.
mechanical strength, and safety properties, i.e. fragmentation
The fragmentation in service may not always correspond to that
characteristics, are generated by the level of surface compression.
determined during the fragmentation test due to the imposition of
These properties are not size dependent.
other stresses, i.e. from fixing or from reprocessing (e.g. laminating).
2.6 horizontal process
5 Dimensions and tolerances
Process in which the glass is supported on horizontal rollers
5.1 Nominal thickness and thickness tolerances
2.7 local distortion
Local deformation of vertically toughened glass underneath the The nominal thicknesses and thickness tolerances are those given in
tong marks the relevant product standard (see clause 4), some of which are
reproduced in Table 1a and b.
NOTE: The mechanical properties, i.e. thermal durability and
mechanical strength, and safety properties, i.e. fragmentation Table 1a — Nominal thicknesses and thickness tolerances – float
characteristics, are generated by the level of surface compression. and patterned glass. Dimensions in millimeters
These properties are not size dependent.
2.6 horizontal process Nominal Thickness tolerance
Process in which the glass is supported on horizontal rollers Thickness d for glass types

2.7 local distortion Float Patterned

Local deformation of vertically toughened glass underneath the 3 ±0,2 ±0,5
tong marks
4 ±0,2 ±0,5
2.8 overall bow
deformation of the whole pane of horizontally and vertically 5 ±0,2 ±0,5
toughened glass caused by the heating and cooling process 6 ±0,2 ±0,5
2.9 roller wave distortion 8 ±0,3 ±0,8
distortion produced in horizontal toughened glass as a result of the
glass being in contact with the rollers during the toughening 10 ±0,3 ±1,0
[Link] is the surface distortion produced by a reduction in 12 ±0,3 ±1,5
surface flatness
14 NM ±1,5
2.10 vertical tong hung process
process in which the glass is suspended by tongs 15 ±0,5 ±1,5

NOTE: This process is now of very minor importance. 19 ±1,0 ±2,0

25 ±1,0 NM
3 Glass products
NM = not manufactured
Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass is made from a
monolithic glass generally corresponding to one of the following
standards: Table 1b — Nominal thicknesses and thickness tolerances
for drawn sheet and new antiques sheet glass.
— soda lime silicate glass products according to
Dimensions in millimeters
EN 572-1 including;
The limits of squareness are described by deviation between
— float glass according to EN 572-2;
diagonals. Limits are given in Table 3
— drawn sheet glass according to EN 572-4;
Nominal Thickness tolerance
— patterned glass according to EN 572-5;
Thickness d for glass types
— supplied and final cut sizes according to EN 572-8;
Drawn New Antique
— a coated glass, with a substrate as above, that is in accordance Sheet Sheet Glass
with EN 1096-1. 3 ±0,2 NM
Glass of nominal thicknesses other than those covered in the above 4 ±0,2 ±0.3
standards is possible.
5 ±0,3 NM
4 Fracture characteristics
6 ±0,3 ±0.3
The fracture characteristics of glass are directly related to the
amount of surface compression, these properties are not 8 ±0.5 NM
size dependent. 10 ±0.6 NM
When the glass is manufactured with an appropriate degree of NM = not manufactured
surface compression then in the event of breakage the glass
fractures into numerous small pieces, the edges of which are
generally relatively harmless. The thickness of a pane shall be determined as for the basic product.
The measurement shall be taken at the centres of the 4 sides, and away
NOTE: The degree of surface compression required is dependent from the area of any tong marks (see Figure 3), which may be present.
upon glass type and [Link] fragmentation test described in
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

5.2 Width and length (sizes) Table 2 — Tolerances on width, B, and length, H
5.2.1 General
Tolerance t
When thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass Nominal
dimensions are quoted for rectangular panes, the first dimension dimension of Nominal glass Nominal glass
shall be the width, B, and the second dimension the length, H, as side B or H thickness d < 8 thickness d > 8
shown in Figure 1. It shall be made clear which dimension is the
width, B, and which is the length, H, when related to its > 2000 ±2,0 ±3,0
installed position.
2000 <B,H≤> 3000 ±3,0 ±4,0
Figure 1 — Examples of width, B, and length, H, relative to the
> 3000 ±4,0 ±5,0
pane shape
Dimensions in millimeters

Table 3 — Limit deviations for the difference

between diagonals

Limit deviation v on the difference between diagonals

Nominal dimension Nominal glass Nominal glass

of side B or H thickness d < 8 thickness d > 8

> 2000 4 6
2000 <B,H≤> 3000 6 8
5.2.2 Maximum and minimum sizes
> 3000 8 10
For maximum and minimum sizes, the manufacturer should be
consulted. Dimensions in millimeters

5.2.3 Tolerances and squareness

The nominal dimensions for width and length being given, the 5.2.4 Edge deformation produced by the
finished pane shall not be larger than a prescribed rectangle vertical process
resulting from the nominal dimensions increased by the tolerance, t,
or smaller than a prescribed rectangle reduced by the tolerance, t. See Annex A.
The sides of the prescribed rectangles are parallel to one another 5.3 Flatness
and these rectangles shall have a common centre. Limits are given
in Table 2. 5.3.1 General

Figure 2 — Tolerance limits for dimensions of rectangular panes By the very nature of the toughening process, it is not possible to
obtain a product as flat as annealed [Link] difference in flatness
depends on the type of glass, e.g. coated etc., glass dimensions, i.e.
the nominal thickness, the dimensions and the ratio between the
dimensions, and the toughening process employed, i.e. vertical
or horizontal.
There are four kinds of distortion:
— overall bow (see Figure 4);
— roller wave distortion (for horizontal toughened glass only)
(see Figure 5);
— edge lift (for horizontal toughened glass only) (see Figure 6);
— local distortion (for toughened glass produced by the vertical
tong hung process only) (see Figure A1).

Key: NOTE: Local distortion needs to be allowed for within the glazing
B – width
materials and the weather seals. For special requirements the
H – length
manufacturers should be consulted.
T – tolerance limits for dimensions
D – diagonals
V – deviation between diagonals
P – common centre of rectangles
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

Figure 3 — Representation of overall bow Figure 6 — Support conditions for the measurement of
overall bow

Key:
1 – B or H
2 – (B or H)/2
Key: 3 – (B or H)/4

1 – deformation for calculating overall bow

2 – B, or H, or diagonal length
5.3.3 Measurement of roller wave
[Link] General
Figure 4 — Representation of roller wave distortion
The roller wave is measured by means of a straight edge, or
equivalent, being placed at right angles to the roller wave and
bridging from peak to peak of the wave (see Figure 7).
NOTE: This section deals with measurement using a straight edge
and feeler gauges. An alternative method is described in Annex B.
Figure 5 — Representation of edge lift
[Link] Apparatus
A straight edge: - length of between 300 mm and 400 mm.
NOTE: The actual length of straight edge required will depend
upon the wavelength of the roller wave.
Feeler gauges: - various thicknesses in units of 0,05 mm.
[Link] Method
Key:
Place the straight edge so that it bridges across adjacent peaks.
1 – straight edge
Insert the feeler gauge between the glass surface and the straight
2 – edge lift
edge. Increase the thickness of the feeler gauges until they just fill
3 – thermally toughened glass
the gap between glass surface and the straight edge. Record the
thickness of feeler gauge(s) to an accuracy of 0,05 mm.

5.3.2 Measurement of overall bow Repeat the measurement at several places over the glass surface.

The pane of glass shall be placed in a vertical position and The measured roller wave distortion is the maximum value
supported on its longer side by two load bearing blocks at the [Link] maximum values are given in Table 4.
quarter points (see Figure 6). [Link] Limitations
The deformation shall be measured along the edges of the glass The following limitations apply:
and along the diagonals, as the maximum distance between a
straight metal ruler, or a stretched wire, and the concave surface of — The roller wave can only be measured panes with a dimension
the glass (see Figure 4). greater than 600 mm measured at right angles to the
roller waves.
The value for the bow is then expressed as the deformation, in
millimetres, divided by the measured length of the edge of the — The roller wave cannot be measured in an exclusion area that is
glass, or diagonal, in meters, as appropriate. 150 mm from the edges of the [Link] apparatus should not
be used in the exclusion area.
The measurement shall be carried out at room temperature.
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

— Panes with an overall bow shall be laid on a flat support.

Maximum value for distortion
This will allow gravity to flatten out the overall bow and hence
give a truer result for the roller wave. Glass Type Overall bow Roller wave
mm/m mm
Figure 7 — Measurement of roller wave distortion
Uncoated float glass in
accordance with EN 572-1
and EN 572-2 3,0 0,3
Others (a) 4,0 0,5
(a) For enamelled glass that is not covered over the whole surface
the manufacturer should be consulted.
Note: Dependant upon the wave length of the roller wave an
appropriate length of gauge has to be used
Key:
1 – straight edge Table 4 — Maximum values of overall bow and roller
2 – roller wave distortion wave distortion for horizontal toughened glass
2 – thermally toughened glass

Dimensions in millimeters
5.3.4 Measurement of edge lift
(for horizontal toughened only)
Thickness of Maximum
Glass Types
The glass shall be placed on a flat support with the edge lift glass Value
overhanging the edge of the support by between 50 mm and 100
[Link] straight edge is placed on the peaks of the roller waves
Uncoated float glass in
and the gap between the ruler and the glass measured using a
accordance with EN 572-1
feeler gauge (see Figure 8). and EN 572-2 3,0 0,5
The maximum values for edge lift are given in Table 5. 4 to 5 0,4
The values in Table 5 only apply to thermally toughened glass 6 to 25 0,3
having edgework complying with Figures 9 to Figure 12.
For profiled edges or other types of edgework contact Others (a) all 0,5
the manufacturer. (a) For enamelled glass that is not covered over the whole surface the
Figure 8 — Measurement of edge lift manufacturer should be consulted.
Note: Dependant upon the wave length of the roller wave an
appropriate length of gauge has to be used

Table 5 — Maximum values

for edge lift for horizontal toughened glass
5.3.7 Limitation on overall bow
Key: and local distortion for vertical toughened glass
1 – straight edge See Annex A.1.3.
2 – edge lift
5.3.8 Other distortions
2 – thermally toughened glass
The incorporation of holes and/or notches in a plate gives the
possibility of distortions being produced during the toughening
5.3.5 Measurement of local distortion (for vertical process as a result of the absence of glass and/or an increase in
toughened glass only) unsupported [Link] magnitude of these distortions will
See Annex A.1.2 generally be less than edge lift in horizontally toughened glass or
the local distortion in vertically toughened glass.
5.3.6 Limitation on overall bow, roller waves and edge
lift for horizontal toughened glass 6 Edge and/or surface work, holes, notches and cut-outs

The maximum allowable values for the overall bow, when 6.1 Warning
measured according to 5.3.2, for roller waves, when measured Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass should not be
according to 5.3.3 and edge lift, when measured according to 5.3.4 cut, sawed, drilled, edge worked or surface finished (e.g.
are given in Tables 4 and [Link] values only apply to thermally sandblasting, acid etching) after toughening because the risk of
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass without holes and/or breakage is increased or the glass can be destroyed immediately.
notches and/or cut-outs.
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

6.2 Edge working of glass to be thermally toughened. — the nominal glass thickness (d);
The simplest type of edge working is the arrissed edge — the dimensions of the pane (B, H);
(see Figure 9). Common types of edge working are shown in
— the hole diameter (Ø);
Figures 9 to Figure 12.
— the shape of the pane;
For specialist edge work, such as ‘water jet cutting’, the
manufacturers should be consulted. — the number of holes.
The recommendations given below are those which are normally
available and are limited to panes with a maximum of 4 holes.
1) The distance, a, of the edge of a hole to the glass edge should be
not less than 2d.

Figure 9 — Arrissed edge (with blank spots)

Figure 10 — Ground edge (with blank spots)

Figure 13 — Relationship between hole and

edge of pane
2) The distance, b, between the edges of two holes should be not
less than 2d.
Figure 11 — Smooth ground edge (no blank spots)

Figure 12 — Polished edge

6.3 Profiled edges

Various other edge profiles can be manufactured with different types Figure 14 — Relationship between two holes
of [Link] kind of product is not covered by Table 5. Corners
need not to be treated unless required by the customer. 3) The distance, c, of the edge of a hole to the corner of the glass
should be not less than 6d.
6.4 Round holes
6.4.1 General
This standard considers only round holes in glass that is not less
than 4 mm nominal [Link] manufacturers should be
consulted about edge working of holes.
This edge work applies only to the perimeter
6.4.2 Diameter of holes
The diameter of holes, Ø, shall not, in general, be less than the
nominal thickness of the glass. For smaller holes, the manufacturers
should be consulted.
6.4.3 Limitations on position
of holes
In general, the limitations on the positions of holes either relative to Figure 15 — Relationship between hole and
the edges of the glass pane, the corners of the glass pane or to corner of pane
each other depends on:
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

NOTE If one of the distances from the edge of the hole to the Figure 17 — Countersunk hole
edge of the glass is less than 35 mm, it can be necessary to
position the hole asymmetrically with respect to the corner.
The manufacturers should be consulted.
6.4.4 Tolerances on hole diameters
The tolerances on diameters of holes are given in Table 7.
6.6 Notches and cut-outs
Nominal hole diameter Tolerance Many configurations of notches and cut-outs can be manufactured,
Ø for examples see Figures 18a and 18b.
4 = Ø = 20 ± 1,0
20 < Ø = 100 ± 2,0
100 < Ø consult the
manufacturer

Table 7 – Tolerances on hole diameters

6.4.5 Tolerances on position of holes
The tolerances on positions of holes are the same as the
tolerances on the width, B, and the length, H (see Table 2).
The positions of holes are measured in two directions at right
angles (x- and y- axes) from a datum point to the centre of the
[Link] datum point is generally chosen as a real or virtual Figure 18a — Examples of notches
corner of the pane (see Figure 16 for examples).
The position of a hole (X,Y) is (x ± t, y ± t),
where x and y are the required dimensions and t is the tolerance
from Table 2.
NOTE: Manufacturers should be consulted if tighter tolerances on
hole positions are required.

Figure 18b — Examples of cut-outs

Limitations on cut outs as shown in figure 18b:
- B, L and D < a/3 or b/3 whichever is the smaller;
- X and x not less than the smaller of L/2 or B/2;
- Y and y not less than D;
- Z not less than the larger of B/2, or L/2 and D/2
The manufacturer should be consulted about edge working of
P – datum point notches and cut-outs.
7 Shaped panes

Figure 16 — Examples of the positioning of holes Many non-rectangular shapes can be manufactured and
relative to the datum point manufacturers should be consulted.

6.5 Holes/others [Link] appearance

There are available countersunk holes, see Figure 17. 8.1 General
The manufacturer shall be consulted for the tolerances on hole This section covers optical quality i.e. distortion of the glass which is
position, hole shape/dimensions and edge work. visible in reflection; visual quality, i.e. defects on or within the glass,
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

which can be seen in transmission; and colour consistency, i.e. 8.4.2 Surface faults e.g. scars, scratches
changes in hue, which can be seen in either transmission
Toughened safety glass shall be deemed acceptable if the following
and/or reflection.
phenomena are neither obtrusive nor bunched: hairlines or blobs;
8.2. Optical distortion fine scratches not more than 25mm long; minute imbedded
particles. Obtrusiveness of blemishes shall be judged by looking
8.2.1 General
through the glass, not at it, when standing at right angles to it on
The toughening process will inevitably result in a product the room side at a distance of not less than 3 metres in natural
whose optical quality is lower than that of the glass from which it daylight and not in direct [Link] area to be viewed is the
is produced. normal vision area with the exception of a 50mm wide band
around the perimeter of the glass.
Surface distortion is produced by a reduction in the surface
flatness, which can be seen particularly in [Link] can be Pattern ghosting can occur on glasses with a textured finish.
exacerbated when the glass used is body tinted, surface coated
8.5 Colour consistency
(including post-toughening coating) or enamelled and/or
incorporated into insulating glass units. 8.5.1 Clear glass
8.2.2 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety Clear glass from different manufacturers may show differences
glass produced by vertical toughening in hue.
(see Annex 2.1) 8.5.2 Body tinted glass
8.2.3 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety Toughening will not produce any significant variation in colour.
glass produced by horizontal toughening However, if a piece of toughened body tinted glass is placed
next to a piece of annealed body tinted glass there may be a
While the hot glass is in contact with the rollers during the
discernible difference.
toughening process, a surface distortion is produced by a reduction
in surface flatness, known as roller wave. Roller wave is generally A far larger problem will occur if different thicknesses of body-
noticed in reflection. tinted glass are placed side by side as the colour is throughout the
glass [Link] can occur in those areas where toughened
Thermally toughened glass, may show signs of small imprints in the
safety glass is required and an attempt is made to use the increased
surface (roller pick-up/pluck).This is a result of the length of time
strength of the toughened safety glass by reducing the thickness of
the glass spends in the [Link] the thicker the glass the
the glass. Body tinted glass from different manufacturers, or from
more pronounced this could be.
different batches from the same source manufacturer can show
NOTE: Toughenable low-e glass requires longer in the furnace. different shades.
8.2.4. Roller wave 8.5.3 Surface coated glass
On toughened sheet glass, or toughened patterned glass, it is not As a general rule those surface coated glasses which can be
possible to measure roller wave, due to the inherent distortion of toughened may exhibit different visual characteristics or a slight
the basic glass. colour variation as a result of toughening. Care should be taken to
ensure that the coated surface is not contaminated before
Method of measuring roller wave distortion is given in clause 5.3.3 toughening by, for example oil, grease, sweat, etc, as these materials
and limits for acceptance in Table 4. An alternative measurement may be burnt in during the toughing [Link] could produce
method is given in Annex B patches on the coating where there is a significant colour variation.
8.3 Anisotropy (iridescence) Glass, which is coated after toughening, will be within the same
The thermal toughening process produces areas of different stress manufacturers colour tolerance as coated annealed glass.
in the cross section of the [Link] areas of stress produce a 8.5.4 Enamelled toughened safety glass
bi-refringent effect in the glass, which is visible in polarised light.
With this product the ‘colour’ results from the firing in of a
The viewing of thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass ceramic frit. No colour variation will result from the toughening
under polarized light results in areas of stress showing up as process itself.
coloured [Link] zones are, known as "leopard spots".
Polarised light occurs in normal [Link] amount of polarized However, the manufacturer should be consulted as to the likely
light depends on the weather and the angle of the sun. tolerances on the colour and the possible variation between
The bi-refringent effect is more noticeable either at a glancing angle batches of ceramic [Link] is also a possibility that a colour
or through polarized spectacles. variation may be noticeable if panes of different glass thickness or
from different basic glass supplies are placed side by side.
8.4 Visual quality
9 Properties
8.4.1. Body faults, e.g. seeds, bubbles
9.1 Thermal durability
The number, size and distribution of seeds, bubbles, etc. are defined
for the glasses under consideration in the appropriate parts of The mechanical properties of thermally toughened soda lime
EN 572. silicate safety glass are unchanged for continuous service up to
250oC and are unaffected by sub-zero temperatures.
No change will occur as a result of the toughening process. Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass is capable of
Assessment of body faults should be undertaken using the resisting both sudden temperature changes and temperature
method/criteria given, for the basic glasses in the appropriate parts differentials up to 200 K.
of EN 572.
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

NOTE: This property does not have any relationship to the fire gaskets, bushes, linings and setting [Link] should be of
resistance performance. appropriate material, which has been approved by the thermally
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass manufacturer.
9.2 Mechanical strength
All fittings to which the glass is to be clamped must be free from
The value of mechanical strength can only be given as a statistical high spots and/or burrs. Care should be taken to ensure that when
value associated with a particular probability of breakage and with a the glass is being clamped the clamping pressure is evenly
particular type of loading, i.e. four point bending test according to distributed. For more information see BS 6262-6: 2005.
EN 1288 - 3.
11 Fragmentation test
The mechanical strength values apply to quasi-static loading over a
11.1 General
short time, e.g. wind loading, and relate to a 5 % probability of
breakage at the lower limit of the 95 % confidence interval. The fragmentation test determines whether the glass breaks in the
The values for different types of glass are listed in Table 8. manner prescribed for a thermally toughened soda lime silicate
safety glass.
11.2 Dimensions and number of test specimens
Type of glass Minimum values for mechanical
strength N/mm2 The dimensions of the test specimens shall be 360 mm x 1100
mm, without holes, notches or cut-outs.
Float – clear, tinted, coated 120
11.3 Test procedure
Enamelled Float* 75
Each test specimen shall be impacted, using a pointed steel tool, at
Others 90 a position 13 mm in from the longest edge of the test specimen at
the mid-point of that edge, until breakage occurs (see Figure 19).
*Based on the enamelled surface in tension
NOTE: The fragmentation characteristics of thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass are unaffected by temperatures
Table 8 — Minimum values for the mechanical strength between – 50oC and + 100oC.
of thermally toughened soda lime silicate Examples of steel tools are a hammer of about 75 g mass, a spring
safety glass loaded centre punch, or other similar appliance with a hardened
9.3 Classification of performance under accidental [Link] radius of curvature of the point should be approximately
human impact 0,2 mm.
Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass can be classified, The test specimen shall be laid flat on a table without any
as to its performance under accidental human impact, by testing in mechanical constraint. In order to prevent scattering of the
accordance with EN 12600. fragments, the specimen shall be simply held at the edges, e.g. by a
small frame, adhesive tape etc., so that the fragments remain
The classification determined will be as follows: interlocked after breakage yet extension of the specimen is
1(C)_ not hindered.

Where the value of _: is dependent upon the glass having a no-

break performance at one of the three drop heights, i.e. 190mm,
450mm and 1200mm.
This means the classification could progress from:
1(C)0; where a test specimen broke at 190mm,
to 1(C)3; where no test specimens broke at 190mm but a test
specimen broke at 450mm,
to 1(C)2; where no test specimens broke at 190mm and 450mm
but a test specimen broke at 1200mm, to 1(C)1; where no Key:
test specimens broke 1 - impact point
10 Glazing and fixing
10.1 General Figure 19 — Position of impact point
Glazing should be in accordance with BS6262, BS 8000 Part 7, For thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
Glass and Glazing Federation Glazing Manual or other appropriate manufactured by vertical tong hung process, the impact point shall
standard. not be on the tong mark edge.
Appropriate edge clearances must always be allowed taking into 11.4 Assessment of fragmentation
account glass type, e.g. clear or solar control and either single or The particle count and measuring of the dimensions of the largest
double-glazed. Suitable insulation or cushioning should be used to particle shall be made between 4 minutes to 5 minutes after
prevent contact with hard materials. fracture. An area of radius 100 mm, centred on the impact point,
10.2 Use of mechanical fixings and a border of 25 mm, round the edge of the test specimen (see
Figure 20), shall be excluded from the assessment.
Glass to metal contact must be eliminated at all times by the use of
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

11.7 Maximum length of longest particle

In order to classify the glass as thermally toughened soda lime silicate
safety glass, the length of the longest particle shall not exceed 100mm.
12 Marking
According to EN 12150-1 the thermally toughened soda lime silicate
safety glass shall be marked as follows:
Manufacturer’s name or trade mark, number of the standard,
i.e. EN 12150
Key:
To comply with UK building regulations covering accidental human
1 - excluded area
impact the installed thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
must be indelibly marked and the marking must be visible after
Figure 20 — Area to be excluded from the particle [Link] marking shall consist of the following:
count determination and largest particle measurement
Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
The particle count shall be made in the region of coarsest fracture Number of the standard, i.e. EN 12150
(the aim being to obtain the minimum value).The particle count
Classification in accordance with EN 12600, i.e. 1(C) as a minimum.
shall be made by placing a mask of (50 ± 1) mm x (50 ± 1) mm
on the test piece (see Annex C).The number of crack-free The full performance classification, i.e. 1(C) _, will be required when
particles within the mask shall be counted. A particle is ‘crack-free’ if the glass is protecting a difference in drop.
it does not contain any cracks which run from one edge to
NOTE: The _ is dependent on glass type, thickness etc.
another (see Figure 21).
Annex A Tolerances and distortions specific to thermally
The examination shall be completed within 5 minutes of fracturing
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass produced by the
the glass.
vertical tong hung process

A.1 Distortion
A.1.1 Edge deformation produced by the vertical
process (see 5.2.4)
The tongs used to suspend the glass during toughening result in surface
depressions, known as tong marks (see Figure A.2).The centres of the
Figure 21 — Examples of crack-free particles and the tong marks are situated up to a maximum of 20 mm in from the edge.
assessment regarding the number A deformation of the edge less than 2 mm can be produced in the
region of the tong mark and there may also be an area of optical
In the particle count, all particles wholly contained within the area [Link] deformations are included in the tolerances in Table 2.
of the mask shall be counted as one particle each and all the
particles which are partially within the mask shall be counted as 1/2
particle each (see Annex B).
11.5 Minimum values from the particle count
In order to classify a glass as a thermally toughened soda lime
silicate safety glass, the particle count of each test specimen shall
not be less than the values given in Table 9.
Table 9 — Minimum particle count values

Nominal Minimum particle

Glass type
thickness, d, mm count number

Patterned 3 30
4 to 19 40
Float and 3 to 12 40
Sheet 15 to 25 30 Key:
1 - B, or H, the side on which
the tong marks occur
2 - local distortion
11.6 Selection of the longest particle
The longest particle shall be chosen from the body of the test
specimen. It shall not be in the excluded area (see 11.4). Figure A.1 — Representation of local distortion
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

Maximum value for distortion

Glass type Overall bow Local distortion

mm/m mm/ 300mm

All (a) 5,0 1,0

Key: (a) For enamelled glass that is not covered over the whole surface
the manufacturer should be consulted.
1 - deformation
2 - up to 20 mm
3 - tong mark Table A.1 — Maximum values of overall bow and local
4 - 100 mm radius maximum area of
distortion for vertical toughened glass
optical distortion
A.2 Optical distortion
A.2.1 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
Figure A.2 — Tong mark deformation glass produced by vertical toughening (see 8.2.2)
A.1.2 Measurement of local distortion The distortion is generally of a random nature. However, the tong
(for vertical toughened glass only) (see 5.3.5) marks can produce additional optical distortion, which is generally in
an area of radius 100 mm centred on the tong mark
Local distortion can occur over relatively short distances on the
(see Figure A.2)
edge of the vertical toughened glass that contains the tong marks
(see Figure A.3). Annex B Alternative method of measuring roller wave
Local distortion shall be measured over a limited length of 300 mm B.1 Apparatus
by using a straight ruler parallel to the edge at a distance of
25 mm from the edge of the glass (see Figure A.3). Local distortion is This is a 350 mm long aluminium channel with a centrally mounted
expressed as millimetres/ 300 mm length. deflection gauge/dial gauge (Figure B.1).

Figure B.1 — Roller wave measurement apparatus

Key: B.2 Method

1 - straight edge The apparatus is placed on the glass at right angles to the roller
2 - local distortion wave, so that it can bridge from peak to peak of the wave
(Figure B.2).
3 - thermally toughened glass

Figure A.3 — Measurement of

local distortion
A.1.3 Limitation on overall bow and local distortion for
vertical toughened glass (see 5.3.7)
Figure B.2 — Place the apparatus across the
The maximum allowable values for the overall bow, when measured roller wave
according to 5.3.2 and the local distortion, when measured according
to A.2 are given in Table [Link] values only apply to thermally The apparatus is then moved along its axis until the dial gauge reads
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass without holes and/or the highest value (Figure B.3).
notches and/or cut-outs.
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

Annex C Example of particle count

Figure B.3 — Set the zero of the gauge on a peak of

the roller wave
At this point, the dial gauge is resting on a peak of the roller wave.
The scale of the gauge is positioned (rotated) so that the needle
points to 0 (zero) on the scale.
The apparatus is then moved again along its axis until the gauge
reads the lowest value (Figure B.4). At this point, the dial gauge is
resting in the lowest point of the trough.
The reading is then taken, and the depth of the roller wave is the
difference between the zero point and the reading.
NOTE: The dial gauge scale is usually arranged so that a positive Figure C.1 — Select the area of coarsest fracture,
value is obtained by raising the post. Care should be taken to not according to 11.4, place the template on the test
misread the depth of the roller wave. specimen and draw round the template.

Figure B.4 — Move the gauge to

a trough
The roller wave depth is recorded to the nearest 0,05 mm. y
The above procedure can be performed several times on the same
pane, giving a variety of answers, since the roller waves are unlikely to
be [Link] worst roller wave of those recorded is the value
of the pane. Key:
Number of perimeter particles = 32/2 = 16

B.3 Limitations Figure C.2 — Mark and count the perimeter fragments
particles as 1/2 particle each
The apparatus should only be used on panes with a dimension larger
than 600 mm at right angles to the roller [Link] is an exclusion
area, 150 mm from the edge of the pane, where the apparatus
should not be used.
A true measurement of roller wave can only be obtained on an
otherwise flat pane of glass. If the pane has an overall bow, this will
contribute to the value measured by the roller wave and must be
taken into account.
This can be reduced by laying the pane of glass flat on a table, which
will reduce the overall bow in the pane due to the self weight of the
pane, particularly with larger panes.
B.4 Alternative use of apparatus
If the dial gauge is mounted on the end of the aluminium channel
rather than at the centre then it may be used for the measurement
of edge lift. Key:
Lay the test sample over the end of a table with the edge lift Number of central particles = 53
overhanging the edge of the support by between 50 mm and 100 Total number of particles = 16 + 53 = 69
mm so that the edge lift is as shown in Figure 5 Move the apparatus
towards the edge of the sample. Figure C.3 — Mark and count the central particles and
add these to the perimeter count to obtain the particle
Measure the maximum deflection of the gauge from when sitting on
count for the specimen
a peak to touching the edge of the sample.
GGF Datasheet for the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass for Building

Bibliography
BS EN 572-1: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass products
- Part 1: Definitions and general physical and mechanical properties

BS EN 572-2: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass

products- Part 2: Float glass

BS EN 572-4: 2005 Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass

products - Part 4: Drawn sheet glass

BS EN 572-5: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass

products - Part 5: Patterned glass

BS EN 572-8: Glass in building .- Basic soda lime silicate glass

products - Part 8: Supplied and final cut sizes

BS EN 572-9: Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass

products- Part 9: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard

BS EN 1096-1: Glass in buildin - Coated glass- Part 1: Definitions

and classification

BS EN 1288-3: Glass in building - Determination of the bending

strength of glass - Part 3:Test with specimen supported at two points
(four point bending)

BS EN 12150-1: Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda lime

silicate safety glass – Part 1: Definition and description

BS EN 12150-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda lime

silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard

BS EN 12600: Glass in building - Pendulum test - Impact test method

and classification for flat glass

BS 6262-4: 2005 Glazing for buildings – Part 4: Code of practice for

safety related to human impact

BS 6262-6: Glazing for buildings – Part 6: Code of practice for

special applications
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Thermally Treated Soda Lime Silicate 4.4.1 February 2011

Glass Products
Contents The physical reasons for this phenomenon was not known at
the time of the discovery, but results from the fact that glass
1 Scope taken above a critical temperature contracts to a lesser extent
if it is cooled more rapidly. The effect of quenching a glass
2 Introduction
panel cools the surface very rapidly, but the interior of the
3 Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass glass cools less rapidly and contracts to a greater extent than
4 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate the surface layers. The heat treated product has a set of built-
safety glass in stresses as a result of the different rates of contraction. The
stresses are compressive at the surface with a balancing tensile
5 Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime
stress in the central region.
silicate safety glass
The built-in compressive stress at the surface of the glass
Annex A ‘Spontaneous breakage / Nickel sulfide (NIS)
has to be overcome before the flaws in the surface become
inclusions’ susceptible to over stressing. The effect is to provide a
Bibliography product which is more resistant to applied forces, be they of
mechanical, impact or thermal origin.
1. Scope
There are three different types of thermally treated glass
This Data Sheet examines, in general terms, the various types products available:
of thermally treated soda lime silicate glass products. Annex
A discusses the topic of ‘spontaneous breakage’ of thermally • Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass – EN 1863
treated glasses as well as the influence of nickel sulfide
• Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
inclusions.
– EN 12150
Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass is covered
• Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
in detail in the GGF Data Sheet 4.4 - GGF Data Sheet for
glass – EN 14179
the Quality of Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety
Glass for Building. 3. Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass
This Data Sheet does not apply to curved thermally treated 3.1 Manufacturing Stress Levels
glass products.
Heat strengthened glass is made from non-wired annealed
NOTE: GGF Data Sheet 4.12 covers these products glass which has been heated to a uniform temperature
above 650˚C and cooled fairly rapidly, usually by blowing
2. Introduction
cold air evenly at both surfaces. Heat strengthened glass has
Glass always breaks due to excessive tensile stresses being a built-in stress as a result of this process, giving a surface
applied to the surface or/and edges of the glass and over compressive stress in the range of 25 N/mm2 to 42 N/mm2,
stressing either the natural sub-microscopic “Griffiths Flaws” or i.e. 3,600 psi to 6,000 psi.
larger flaws caused by damage to the glass.
3.2 Strength Characteristics
The earliest discovery of a stronger form of glass was “Prince Heat strengthened glass will resist mechanical forces more
Rupert’s Drops” which were made from tear drops of molten than annealed glass, although it is sometimes not possible
glass cooled rapidly. These were more entertaining than useful, to make full use of this, because heat strengthened glass has
but could resist hammer blows at levels of force which would only the same modulus of elasticity as annealed (untreated)
shatter annealed (untreated) glass.

Glass and Glazing Federation

54 Ayres Street, London. SE1 1EU
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
[Link]
Thermally Treated Soda Lime Silicate Glass Products

glass. The design of a heat strengthened glass pane is often • Manufacturers trade mark or name
governed by deflection limitations rather than strength • The standard number, i.e. EN 1863
limitations.
3.8 Compliance
3.3 Thermal Characteristics
Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass that meets the
Heat strengthened glass will resist thermal stresses and requirements of EN 1863-1 shall be manufactured and
thermal shock at levels more than two times higher approved to comply with EN 1863-2.
than annealed glass. The figure quoted in EN 1863-1 is
100K. This should be sufficient to cope with most of the 4. Thermally toughened soda
thermal stresses encountered in glazing in buildings. Heat lime silicate safety glass
strengthened glass has a maximum operating temperature of
4.1 Manufacturing Stress Levels
at least 200˚C
Toughened glass is made from annealed glass which has been
3.4 Fracture Characteristics
heated to a uniform temperature above 650˚C and cooled
Heat strengthened glass is designed to give some of the rapidly, usually by blowing cold air evenly at both surfaces.
advantages of toughened glass, e.g. a proportion of the Toughened glass has a high built-in stress as a result of the
increased strength and thermal resistance, while retaining the rapid cooling, giving a surface compressive stress in the range
fracture characteristics of annealed glass. In order for this to of 80N/mm2 to 150N/mm2, i.e. 11,600psi to 21,700psi.
occur, the levels of built-in stresses must be sufficiently low
A good quality thermally toughened glass, suitable for safety
to eliminate the possibility of violent crack propagation after
glass applications is likely to have a surface compressive
a fracture is initiated. The maximum compressive surface
stress greater than 100N/mm2, i.e. 14,500psi. To confirm
stress must be below 42N/mm2, i.e. 6,000 psi, to comply with
that the thermally toughened glass can claim resistance to
this requirement.
accidental human impact it must be classified for pendulum
Since the fracture characteristics of heat strengthened glass impact performance in accordance with EN 12600.
are similar to annealed glass, it should not be considered as
4.2 Strength Characteristics
a safety glass. Therefore a classification under the pendulum
impact test, i.e. EN 12600, should not be claimed. However, if Toughened glass will resist mechanical forces more than 4
heat strengthened glass is used in a situation that requires a times higher than annealed glass, although it is often not
safety glass then it should be laminated to enable it to obtain possible to make full use of this, because toughened glass has
an EN12600 classification. only the same modulus of elasticity as annealed (untreated)
glass. The design of a toughened glass pane is often governed
3.5 Thickness Limitations
by deflection limitations rather than strength limitations.
The fragmentation requirement requires that the built-in (See also GGF Data Sheet 4.4: 2008, Section 9.2).
stress are limited and this can lead to difficulties in providing
The strength of good quality toughened glass is sufficient
uniform cooling at a sufficiently slow rate when the glass
to allow it to be used in a number of structural and semi
thickness is more than 10mm. In practice heat strengthened
structural roles. In particular, toughened glass has a usable
glass can only be supplied 10mm or thinner.
and reliable strength for holes and notches, which make it
3.6 Optical Distortion and Bow suitable for bolted connections, provided these are suitably
designed. (See also GGF Data Sheet 4.4: 2008, Section 6 and
Heat strengthened glass is susceptible to optical distortion BS 6262-6: 2005).
and bow in a similar manner to toughened glass (see 4.6),
but the slightly less onerous processing regime and the lower 4.3 Thermal Characteristics
levels of built-in stress make it possible that the amount of
Toughened glass will resist thermal stresses and thermal
distortion and bow will be less than in toughened glass.
shock at levels more than 5 times higher than annealed glass.
The possible reduction in bow and distortion means that The figure quoted in EN 12150-1 is 200K. It has a maximum
heat strengthened glass may be a more visually pleasing operating temperature of 250˚C, above which it is possible
product than toughened glass where opaque cladding panels for the built-in stresses to be gradually released.
or reflective glasses are required to have higher resistance to
4.4 Fracture Characteristics
thermal stress than annealed (untreated) glass.
Due to the high levels of built-in stresses, once a fracture
3.6.1 Nickel Sulfide Inclusions
is initiated in toughened glass, it propagates violently due
See Annex A.
to the released energy. The effect is to disintegrate the
3.7 Marking glass into numerous small pieces, the edges of which are
generally relatively harmless and are unlikely to cause cutting
The heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass in accordance and piercing injuries like broken pieces of annealed glass.
with EN 1863-1 shall be marked as follows:
Thermally Treated Soda Lime Silicate Glass Products

(See also GGF Data Sheet 4.4. 2008, Section 4 Fracture 5.1 General
Characteristics).
The description of a heat soaked thermally toughened soda
It is because of this fragmentation after fracture that lime silicate safety glass from EN 14179-1 can be presented
thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass when as follows:
classified in accordance with EN 12600 is regarded as a
safety glass. When it is classified as a safety glass it can then Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
be used in critical locations (as defined in BS 6262-4: 2005). has a similar break pattern to thermally toughened soda lime
It is necessary to ensure that the toughened glass has silicate safety glass according to EN 12150. It also has a known
sufficiently high built-in stress to provide the fragmentation level of residual risk of spontaneous breakage arising from the
characteristics required for a safety glass. possible presence of critical nickel sulfide (NiS) inclusions in
the thermally toughened soda lime silicate glass.
The fracture pattern, under controlled fracture conditions,
can be used to assess the quality of toughened glass. A 5.2 Manufacturing Process
minimum count of 40 particles in a 50mm square, under these
Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
controlled fracture conditions, is evidence of a good quality
is manufactured initially as thermally toughened soda lime
toughened glass. (See also GGF Data Sheet 4.4: 2008, Section 11).
silicate safety glass that is then subjected to the heat soak
4.5 Thickness Limitations process cycle.

There are no practical limits on the thicknesses of non-wired The heat soak process cycle consists of heating the glass up
annealed glass that can be thermally toughened. However, to 280˚C. The glass is then held at a temperature between
depending upon actual thickness and/or thickness variation 290˚C ±10˚C for a period of two hours. After the holding
certain products may not be able to be classified for period the glass is cooled.
resistance to pendulum body impact.
NOTE: If a critical nickel sulphide inclusion is present then
4.6 Optical Distortion and Bow the glass should break during the heat soak process.

The heating of the glass softens it sufficiently to allow 5.3 Properties

gravitational or other forces to cause minor distortions of
The heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate
the glass, leaving it optically less perfect than the annealed
safety glass has the same properties as thermally toughened
glass from which it was made. The toughening process may
soda lime silicate safety glass. (See clauses 4.1 to 4.6)
also cause some bow in the glass. While manufacturers make
efforts to keep the distortion and bow to a minimum, it is 5.4 Nickel Sulfide Inclusions
inevitable that some will occur.
This product is manufactured so as to limit the likelihood
Any distortion or bow will be much more noticeable when of critical nickel sulfide inclusions being present in the
the glass is viewed in reflection. This is particularly the case final product.
with opaque cladding panels and reflective coated glasses. (See
also GGF Data Sheet 4.4: 2008, Section 5.3). According to EN 14179-1: -
The risk of spontaneous breakage, on a statistical basis,
4.7 Nickel Sulfide Inclusions due to the presence of critical nickel sulfide inclusions
is 1 breakage per 400 tonnes of heat soaked thermally
See Annex A.
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass. (See also Annex A.)
4.8 Marking
5.5 Marking
The thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass in
The heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate
accordance with EN 12150-1 shall be marked as follows:
safety glass in accordance with EN 14179-1 shall be marked
• Manufacturers trade mark or name; as follows:
• The standard number, i.e. EN 12150,
• Manufacturers trade mark or name;
And when used in critical locations, see BS 6262-4: 2005, • The standard number, i.e. EN 14179,

• EN 12600 classification And when used in critical locations, see BS 6262-4: 2005,

4.9 Compliance • EN 12600 classification

Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
5.6 Compliance
that meets the requirements of EN 12150-1 shall be
Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
manufactured and approved to comply with EN 12150-2.
glass that meets the requirements of EN 14179-1 shall be
5. Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime manufactured and approved to comply with EN 14179-2.
silicate safety glass
Thermally Treated Soda Lime Silicate Glass Products

Annex A ‘Spontaneous breakage / Nickel sulfide from which it has been made, is obtained from a reputable
(NIS) inclusions’ manufacturer.

A.1 Spontaneous Breakage/Fracture However, the risk of spontaneous breakage due to the
presence of a critical nickel sulfide inclusion can be
One of the effects of the fracture characteristics of
significantly reduced by using heat soaked thermally
toughened glass is the occurrence of what are known
as “spontaneous fractures”. These are fractures of the toughened soda lime silicate safety glass in accordance with
toughened glass due to no immediately obvious reason. In EN 14179. (see quote from EN 14179-1 in clause 5.4)
reality the reasons are usually edge damage, poor glazing,
impact damage or foreign particles in the glass. A.3 Effect of nickel sulfide inclusions

In fact, toughened glass is less susceptible to “spontaneous A.3.1 Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass
fracture” than any other form of glass, but the fracture Spontaneous breakage is highly unlikely due to the low
propagates with a loud bang, which may be accompanied compressive stress level in this product and the size of
by falling particles, and is therefore much more obvious. critical NiS inclusion necessary to initiate breakage
In addition, the origin of the fracture, which is a source of
information as to the cause, is often lost. Toughened glass A.3.2 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
thus becomes associated with unexplained, but noticeable, Likelihood has been significantly reduced due to
breakages and these have been labeled “spontaneous improvements in the annealed glass being processed.
fractures”, whereas breakages from similar causes in other
types of glass are merely referred to as “cracks”. A.3.3 Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime
silicate safety glass
Of the various causes of “spontaneous fracture”, only that The risk of spontaneous breakage, on a statistical basis,
associated with the presence of foreign particles in the glass is
due to the presence of critical nickel sulfide inclusions
more likely to cause fracture in toughened glass than in other
is 1 breakage per 400 tonnes of heat soaked thermally
forms of glass, because they can disturb the very high built-in
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass that conforms
stresses in toughened glass.
to EN 14179.
A.2 Nickel Sulfide Inclusions
Bibliography
Whilst there are several types of foreign particles which may
BS EN 1863-1: Glass in building - Heat strengthened soda lime
cause “spontaneous fracture”, one type in particular, nickel
silicate glass - Part 1: Definition and description
sulfide inclusions, is directly associated with the thermal
treatment process. BS EN 1863-2: Glass in building - Heat strengthened soda
lime silicate glass - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
Nickel sulfide has two main states, one of which is stable
standard
at high temperatures and one which is stable at lower
temperatures. When glass is toughened the nickel sulfide BS EN 12150-1: Glass in building - Thermally toughened soda
transforms to the high temperature state during the heating lime silicate safety glass - Part 1: Definition and description
process, but the glass is cooled too quickly to allow the
reverse transformation to the low temperature state. This BS EN 12150-2: Glass in building - Thermally toughened soda
reverse transformation state occurs slowly over a period of lime silicate safety glass - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/
time, accompanied by a small increase in volume. Product standard

Therefore if: BS EN 12600: Glass in building - Pendulum test - Impact test

method and classification for flat glass
• the nickel sulfide inclusion is large enough, and
• within the tensile (central) portion of the thermally treated glass, BS EN 14179-1: Glass in building -
• it can cause fracture at some time after manufacture. Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
glass - Part 1: Definition and description
This means that all types of thermally treated glass, i.e.
heat strengthened, thermally toughened, can be subject BS EN 14179-2: Glass in building -
to spontaneous breakage as the result of the presence of Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
critical nickel sulfide inclusions. glass - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard

Nickel sulfide inclusions were a serious problem in the BS 6262-4: 2005 Glazing for buildings -
1960’s, when they were first identified, but improvements Part 4: Code of practice for safety related to human impact
in the quality of the annealed glass has led to a reduction in
incidence to less than 1/10th of early levels. Nickel Sulfide BS 6262-6: 2005: Glazing for buildings -
inclusions are no longer a major cause of “spontaneous Part 6: Code of practice for special applications
fracture” in toughened glass provided the annealed glass,
• Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Glazing with Plastics
4.5 AUGUST 2003

Introduction Relevant recommendations made in Table 1

BS 626 : 1982 should also be observed.
The objective of this Data Sheet is to This data sheet deals only with the vertical Materials Common Name
stimulate careful thought about the use glazing of solid plastics sheeting. For Polycarbonate Polycarbonate
of plastics glazing sheet materials and to hollow section plastics sheets, reference Polymethylmethacrylate Acrylic
present important design, fixing and should be made to the manufacturer. Polyvinyl chloride Rigid PVC or PVCu
handling information in simple terms. All these materials have different
The Glass and Glazing Federation issues 1 Design properties and your glass merchant or
this data sheet to specifying authorities in the plastics manufacturers should be
all industries. It is intended for designers 1.1 Suitability of plastics consulted on the suitability of the
of new buildings, as well as for the material for a specific application.
maintenance engineer and the estate Techniques required to glaze successfully
manager who face ever-increasing with plastics are different to those used Check List
problems as a result of vandalism. Whilst with glass because of the different Physical properties ■
offering a range of practical tips, it serves properties and service behaviour. The Mechanical properties ■
as a check and reminder that if in doubt most commonly used transparent and Thermal properties ■
consult your glass merchant or the translucent plastics for flat glazing Effect of sunlight ■
plastics manufacturer. applications are listed in Table 1. Durability to sunlight ■
Fire properties ■

Table 2
Recommended Minimum Thickness (mm) for Single Glazing Relating toWind Load

Design Wind Loading N/m2

Area m 2
Aspect Ratio 600 800 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

0.25 1.0 :1 - 1.5 :1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

1.5 :1 - 2.5 :1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
0.5 2.5 :1 - 3.5 :1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1.0 :1 - 1.5 :1 3 3 3 4 4 5 5
1.0 1.5 :1 - 2.5 :1 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
1.5 2.5 :1 - 3.5 :1 3 3 3 3 3 3 4
2.0 1.0 :1 - 1.5 :1 4 5 5 6 6 6 8
1.5 :1 - 2.5 :1 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
2.5 :1 - 3.5 :1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6
1.0 :1 - 1.5 :1 6 6 6 8 8 8 10
1.5 :1 - 2.5 :1 5 6 6 6 8 8 8
2.5 :1 - 3.5 :1 4 5 5 6 6 6 6
1.0 :1 - 1.5 :1 6 6 8 8 10 10 10
1.5 :1 - 2.5 :1 6 6 6 8 8 10 10
2.5 :1 - 3.5 :1 5 5 6 6 8 8 8

Glass
Glass
4 and
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Glazing with Plastics

1.2 Thickness material, the gaskets, tapes and glazing problem, material of thickness greater
compounds used must also be flexible. than 3 mm should be used.
Plastics are not as rigid as glass and For anti-vandal glazing, heavy industrial Cut the panel 3mm shorter than the
Table 2 is a guide to the thickness glazing, security glazing or situations width and length of the sash. Ensure the
required for plastic panels supported on where extreme movement of the panel edge cover of the panel is at least 12 mm.
all four edges, related to a given wind may occur, it may be advisable to use a
loading, the area and aspect ratio of the greater rebate depth, in accordance with Beads should be bedded and attached in
panels, assuming an edge cover of 15mm the manufacturer’s recommendations. the conventional way.
(see 1.3.2).
1.3.3 Infill Panels 2.5 Setting Blocks
1.3 Dimensions
The overall design must allow for Setting blocks may be used especially
Due to the greater co-efficient of thermal expansion and contraction without where increased security is required,
explanation and contraction of plastics restraint. The use of over tightened bolts, otherwise they are not essential.
compared with glass, it is necessary to screws and hard setting glazing Normally the bottom edge of plastics
make sufficient provision for: compounds must be avoided. Further sheet should rest directly onto the
details about glazing infill panels for rebate. Where setting blocks are to be
Table 2 (page one) balustrades see BS 6180. In certain used, decide at the design stage and
circumstances some materials may have make allowances for them by reducing
Recommended Minimum Thickness mechanical fixings but consult your glass the height of the panel to compensate
(mm) for Single Glazing Relating to merchant or the manufacturer of the for the setting blocks and the thermal
Wind Load plastics. expansion.

The aspect ratio in this table is based on 2. Fixing 2.6 Typical Detail
a ratio of length to width. Where the
area of the panel exceeds 2.0m2 consult 2.1 Tools Fixing should be carried out using suitable
your glass merchant. glazing tapes or gaskets combined with
Detailed information on cutting and the beading. During fixing peel back just
1.3.1 Clearance finishing techniques can be obtained from sufficient masking from the plastics glazing
your glass merchant or plastics supplier. sheet to the height of the edge cover.
Between the panel edges and the frame. The best results are usually achieved by This reduces the risk of scratches and
Table 3 gives a guide to the using carbide tipped circular saws or fine finger marks on the main body of the
recommended reduction in panel size tooth bandsaws. sheet. The remainder of the masking
compared with the tight rebate should be removed as soon as possible
dimension. 2.2 Edges after completion of the process.

Table 3 Maximum breakage and impact resistance (diagram)

will be obtained by ensuring a smooth
Length of side Reduction cut. If a small chip or crack is present at 2.7 Glazing Compounds
the edge, the panel may fracture under
mm mm
flexing or impact. Table 4 Suitable Glazing Sealant
up to 1,000 3
1,001 – 2,000 6 2.3 Fixing For compatible glazing tapes and gaskets,
2,001 – 3,000 9 consult the plastics supplier for details.
Observe the design recommendations in
Part 1, and check again for the correct Edge Length Glazing Compound
1.3.2 Rebates
Up to 500 mm Butyl compounds
i) thickness (paragraph 1.2)
501 to 200 mm Silicone or two
To prevent the panels being withdrawn ii) clearance (paragraph 1.3.1)
part polysulphide
due to flexing under impact or stress, it is iii) rebate depth (paragraph 1.3.2)
over 2001 mm Silicone
essential to provide adequate edge cover. (iv) recommended glazing compounds
Except where small panels are installed, it (paragraph 2.7), tape or gaskets
is recommended that the rebate be such (all of which must be compatible 3. Cleaning
as to allow an edge cover of at least 15 with the plastics sheet).
mm. (Rebate depth equals edge cover + Warm soapy water should be used for
expansion allowance). If inadequate 2.4 Small Panels cleaning. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry
rebates are present (as with re-glazing it using a clean, soft cloth or damp
is possible to use lesser rebates but with 3mm thick materials may be used where chamois leather.
thicker sheets, see BS 6262. To maintain the longest edge of the panel does not
the flexibility of the plastic glazing exceed 500 mm. Where vandalism is a 3.1 Fresh Paint, Grease, Glazing
Glazing with Plastics

Compound
Important Notice
Some cleaning solvents attack plastics.
Abrasive materials or blades should never Some sealants require a priming agent.
be used. For a compatible removal
method consult the plastics supplier for For polycarbonates use approved primers only.
details.
Always consult the manufacturer of the sealant/compound or the plastics supplier.
3.2 Removal of scratches
Excess sealant should be carefully removed immediately after installation.
Hairline scratches may be removed by
gently polishing with an appropriate Avoid using sharp tools, which may scratch the plastics surface.
product recommended by the plastics
supplier.

4. Handling and Storage

4.1 Store single sheets vertically or at an

angle or not more than 100 to the
vertical. For bulk storage it is preferable
to store horizontally on their original
pallets.

4.2 Do not allow panels to:

i) ie. sag – give adequate support;

ii) be stored near any heating
appliances;
iii) be stored out of doors.

4.3 Masked Products

Always protect against rain, sunlight or

excessive dry heat.

Where the surface protected sheets are

used, ensure that the sheets are fixed
the correct way round, ie, with the
weather-protected surface (as indicted
on the protective masking) to the
exterior of the building.

Place sheets on clean working surfaces.

Do not remove masking from the panel
until the glazing operation is completed.
On outdoor glazing applications, ensure
that the masking is removed after glazing
work has been completed and within the
time limit specified by the manufacturer:
Glazing with Plastics

© Glass and Glazing Federation

• Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Recommendations for fixing Mirrors
4.8 F E B R UA RY 2 0 0 0
- with suggested applications

1 Scope 2.5 For light reflection mirrors should be surface or on battens spaced not more
placed as near as possible to the window than 375 mm (15 in) apart, faced with a
This Data Sheet details the characteristics
in order to 'bounce' light back into the continuous cushion such as a non
of mirrors and gives guidance notes on
interior. hardening glazing strip.
their installation and use. Design
considerations are also explained with 3.4 Where the mirror has to be set flush
3 Fixing methods
the use of sketches to illustrate in a tiled wall, e.g. as in a bathroom, and
recommendations. When fixing mirrors, care must be taken where a metal foil, or other suitable
to ensure that the backing and edges protective backing has been applied to
2 Design considerations cannot be attacked by chemical action the backing paint...an appropriate
from substrates. adhesive may be used. Alternatively self
Properly used mirrors have the ability to
Ensure that the area to which the mirror adhesive foam pads can be used as
add light and space to a room, and
will be fixed is cleaned, to be free of dirt recommended by foam pad
shown in section 8 are eight examples of
or grease. When clean, the area should [Link] number and size of
ways of doing [Link] basic principle is,
be sealed. In order to achieve the pads to be used is critical and will
of course, the same in each case: to use
required seal, a suitable primer such as an depend on the weight of the mirror
the reflection in the mirror to create the
undercoat and 2 coats of gloss should be being fixed. Pad manufacturers specify the
illusion of additional width, length or
[Link] paints are not recommended area of their pad required in relation to
height; and, in the case of light, to use the
for this purpose. It is important that any the weight of the mirror to be fixed.
reflection both to bring light deeper into
recently plastered surfaces are given Whilst it is noted that foam pads and
a room, and to create the illusion of a
sufficient time to dry out before any adhesives are available for the fixing of
greater natural light source.
attempt is made to seal them. mirrors, it is recommended that a
One of the most important things to
Where practicable an air space of 3 to preference be given to mechanical fixings.
remember is that we are dealing in
5 mm should be provided between the See sections 4 and 5.
[Link] the panel of mirror
mirror and the background to allow free
glass should be 'invisible'. It is the 3.5 To backboards using clips, beads or a
circulation of air behind the mirror.
reflection - additional wall, floor or ceiling suitable adhesive, as recommended by
Having satisfied the foregoing initial
space - we want to see, not the mirror the adhesive [Link]
preparation requirements mirrors can be
itself. Points to remember in achieving this complete assembly being then fixed to
fixed in a number of [Link] can be
are: walls or furniture by independent means.
summarised as follows:
It is important that the adhesive does not
2.1 As far as possible the mirrors should 3.1 Direct to a permanently dry create sealed areas on the back of the
be placed where the occupants of the background, as might be found in a living mirror. Generally it is advisable to apply in
room will not be seeing their own room, using screws with dome or rosette vertical strips.
reflections constantly. heads and spacer washers, or with clips.
2.2 All edges and fixing beads should be 4 Screw fixing of drilled mirrors
3.2 Where damp conditions prevail such
concealed wherever possible. as in bathrooms or kitchens it is 4.1 The mirror should be fixed securely
2.3 Because it is the reflection which is recommended that the back and edges but free from stress to avoid distortion
important, the mirror should have of the mirror are protected by applying and risk of [Link] mirror should
something attractive to reflect, and this metal foil to these areas of the mirror. If not be fixed to a very uneven surface but
means that floor and ceiling treatments the backing is not supplied with the where there is any unevenness, nylon
demand special attention. mirror the mirror supplier should be washers should be used as packing.
consulted to ensure that the adhesive of
2.4 Awkward breaks between mirror 4.2 Make sure that the wall or door
the metal backing is compatible with the
panels and other wall treatments should be substance is strong enough to take the
paint backing of the mirror.
avoided so that joints between wall, floors weight of the mirror and thick enough to
and ceilings appear to be continuous. 3.3 With edge beads either against a flat take the full length of the screw provided.

Glass
Glass
4 and
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Recommendations for fixing Mirrors - with suggested applications

In some panelled wall situations it may be weight of the mirror and thick enough to wall. Pack out the clip with spare thin
necessary to use butterfly plugs for the take the full length of the screws metal washers as necessary.
screws. provided.
Note: Large mirrors fixed by screws or
4.3 Mirrors should be fixed as shown in 5.5 Procedure of fixing
clips must be provided with additional
the diagram. It is essential that there is no There are two suggested methods for
support at the bottom edge by means of
glass to metal contact, therefore ensure the initial setting out of the position of
supplementary clips, anchors or fixing
that a plastic collar is used between the the holes: beads and adequate to carry the weight
screw and the mirror. Nylon or suitable
Method 1 of the mirror.
rubber washers must be used to ensure
a) Measure from a level floor and
a freely ventilated air space between the
mark up the position of the two
mirror and the wall.
bottom holes which will be 13 mm
(0.5 in) above the required bottom
19mm (3/4")
line of the mirror, and then screw in
the fixed clips.
b) Rest the mirror on the clips and H
lightly draw a small pencil line at the
edge of the mirror, where the four 19mm (3/4")
H2 / 13mm (1/2")
sliding clips will be.
c) Remove the mirror. Mark out the
positions of the holes for the four L4 / /
L2 /
L4
L
sliding clips as follows - top edge
PREFERRED BUT NOT
19 mm (0.75 in) below the edge and LESS THAN 76mm (3")
preferably one quarter of the width
of the mirror, but not less than
76 mm (3 in) in from the sides. Sides
- 19 mm (0.75 in) in from the edge
and half way up the mirror.
19mm (3/4")
Method 2
a) Hold the mirror in the required
position and lightly pencil the outline
of the mirror on the wall or door.
b) Mark up position of the holes: H
(i) For the two fixed clips 13 mm
(0.5 in) up from the bottom line 19mm
of the mirror.
H2 / (3/4")
(ii) For the four sliding clips 19 13mm (1/2")
4.4 Do not overtighten the [Link] mm (0.75 in) below the top edge
will cause distortion and may lead to and one quarter of the width of /
L4 /
L4

breakage of the mirror. the mirror, but not less than 76

mm (3 in) in from the sides. Sides
PREFERRED BUT NOT
5 Clip fixing of undrilled mirrors - 19 mm (0.75 in) in from the LESS THAN 76mm (3")
edge and half way up the mirror.
Manufacturer's instructions must be
followed according to the type of clip Then proceed as indicated below.
fixing set supplied. For a typical set of After the holes have been set out:
clips the following general a) Fix the clips and screws so that the
recommendations apply. (For small thin metal washer is against the wall,
THICK WASHER

mirrors 4 clips may be supplied.) then the clip and the thick nylon
washer, so that the screw head is
5.1 Because clip fixing involves glass to
totally countersunk in the larger WALL
metal contact, edge treatment of the glass
washer. Only tighten the screws MIRROR
is very [Link] edges of the
sufficiently to keep the clips [Link]
mirror must therefore be arrissed, ground
sliding clips should be able to move
or polished.
without difficulty. WALL PLUG
5.2 The mirror should be fixed securely b) Place the mirror on the bottom
but free from stress to avoid distortion fixed clips and push the sliding clips SCREW
and risk of breakage. into position, so that they gently THIN
retain the mirror in position without WASHER
5.3 The mirror should not be fixed to a CLIP
any stress.
very uneven surface.
c) If one or more of the clips do not
5.4 Make sure that the wall or door fit easily over the glass, this is
substance is strong enough to take the probably due to unevenness of the
Recommendations for fixing Mirrors - with suggested applications

6 Do's and Don'ts for installing mirrors cleaning solution or water that can attack Do ensure that any cleaner is
Do not allow the mirror faces, backs or the mirror backing. No cleaning fluids recommended by your trade supplier.
edges to rub against sharp protrusions, should ever get to the back of a mirror.
corners, rough floor surfaces or glass Do not use dirty or gritty rags, knives,
Do let the mirror "breathe" - by
chips during unpacking or cutting. scrapers, emery cloth, or any other
mounting it 3/5 mm from the wall.
abrasive materials for cleaning.
Do use great caution in unpacking Do not rest the supporting bottom edge
mirrors, and always store in a vertical directly on splash back panels or base Do use a clean, soft rag when
position, paper interleaved, and stand on [Link] is structurally unsound and cleaning mirrors.
soft wood or similar material. also causes collection of moisture at the
critical edge area. Do not abuse the mirror edges, since
Do not install mirrors with edges or
backs contaminated by foreign materials most failures are at the edges where
Do raise the supporting bottom edge
or with perspiration from handling. Use moisture and solutions attack the metal
with suitable spacers if [Link] is
gloves if necessary. structurally sound and allows air films (silver and copper).

Do clean backs and edges before circulation. Do protect the edges from accidental
installation, preferably with a dry cloth. cleaning solutions by applying the cleaner
7 Do's and Don'ts for cleaning
Do not mount mirrors flush against the mirrors to the cloth rather than to the mirror. It
[Link] causes stress and abrasions on Do not use harsh commercial cleaning is a good final cleaner practice to wipe
walls that are not plumb. In all cases, it solutions or any proprietary brands that the edges clean and dry off any surplus
can cause collection of pockets of contain ammonia or solvent based agents. cleaning solution.

8 Examples of how mirrors are used

8.1 For width
One way of making a room look wider is width comes from reflections, these of the mirrors. See fixing details, 9.1, 9.4,
to fit floor-to-ceiling mirror panels should be emphasised by the use of ceiling 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.9, 9.10 and 9.12.
adjacent and at right angles to the lines, venetian blinds, and any wall pattern
window. Because the apparent increase in which will also help to disguise the edges

Louvres to window

;;;;;yy;;
;;yy
;;;;;;
Mirror Mirror

;;;;;
;;;;;;
Wall Wall
lining lining

BEFORE AFTER PLAN

8.2 For width

Rooms can also be made to appear wider wall [Link] mirror glass panels See fixing details 9.3, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10,
by fitting long horizontal bands of mirrors reflect the ceiling, floor and window wall 9.11, 9.12, 9.13, 9.14 and 9.15.
along the top and bottom of the side walls treatments, making the actual floor area
and giving the centre section a decorative appear part of a very much larger room.

Ceiling

;;;
yyy
;;;;; ;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
Mirror Mirror

Wall Wall

;;;
yyy
;;;;; ;;;
yyy
;;;;;;
lining lining

Mirror Mirror
Floor

BEFORE AFTER SECTION

Recommendations for fixing Mirrors - with suggested applications

8.3 For height

Ceilings can be 'lifted' by panelling part can be strengthened by the use of a See fixing details 9.14, 9.16 and 9.17.
with mirror, within a deep [Link] chandelier or distinctive light fittings,
impression of depth in a pierced ceiling which provide something for reflection.

Mirror Ceiling
Rim
Light pendant

;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;
Floor

BEFORE AFTER SECTION

8.4 For height

Here is a use of mirrors which gives the window opening or room width that the mirror is contained in a natural
impression of greater height and taller immediately adjacent to the [Link] recess. See fixing details 9.3, 9.13, 9.14,
windows. A mirror panel is fixed to the allows itself to be reflected increasing its 9.16 and 9.17.
ceiling across the full width of the apparent height. Care should be taken

;;;;;;;;;;
Ceiling Mirror

;;;;;;;;;;
Window
blind

BEFORE AFTER SECTION

8.5 For length

The impression of a much longer room decorative wall lining. A ribbed ceiling See fixing details 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6,
can be obtained by fitting a floor-to- treatment will conceal the mirror-to- 9.7, 9.9, 9.10 and 9.12.
ceiling mirror panel in the centre of the ceiling junction, and plants can be used to
end wall and flanking it with panels of prevent people seeing only themselves.

Panel Mirror Panel

;;;;;;;;;;
yyy
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;
BEFORE

8.6 For length

Another way to get extra length is to fit
AFTER

can help to conceal the mirror and wall

PLAN

details 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.9, 9.10
two mirror panels in recesses separated junctions, and together with the ceiling and 9.12.
by a projecting wall panel or [Link] treatment, provide the necessary
mirrors run from floor to ceiling. Curtains patterned surfaces for reflection. See fixing

;;;;; y;;
;yy
;;;;;
Mirror Panel Mirror

;;;;;;;;;;
Curtain

BEFORE AFTER PLAN

 Recommendations for fixing Mirrors - with suggested applications

8.7 For light

Increased daylight can be obtained by the interior of the room. Mirrors fixing details 9.1, 9.3 and 9.6.
lining the inner reveals to the windows, generally should be at right angles to the
allowing daylight to 'bounce' further into window and as close as possible. See

;;;;;;
;;;;;
Mirror Window sill Mirror

;;;;;;
;;;;;
BEFORE

8.8 For light

Floor-to-ceiling mirror panels spaced at
AFTER

window wall help light to penetrate into

PLAN

9.1, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.9, 9.10 and

intervals along the walls adjacent to the the depth of a room. See fixing details 9.12.

;;;;;;;
y y
;
;;
yy
;;;;;
Mirror Mirror

;;;;;;; yy
y ;;
;;;;;
Mirror Mirror
Panels
Mirror Mirror

;;;;;;
BEFORE AFTER PLAN

9 Hints on fixing mirrors 9.3 Inset mirror

;;;;;;
;;;;
Suitable alternative to 9.1 or as a
9.1 Wall mirror junction with curtains,
partition. Wide bead edging when
etc.
reflected gives greater apparent depth

;;;;
;;;
Simple frame and bead edging concealed

;;;;;;
and can also be used at head and floor,
by curtain.

;;;;;
or to give edge support to ceiling
375mm (15") mirrors.

;;;;
Glazing strip
375mm (15")
Battens

Ceiling panel

;;;;
9.5 Carpet and wall mirror junction
Uneven wall
Mirror sits on a thin wooden floor plate

;;;;
Battens and is retained by 13 mm x 13 mm (1/2

;;
Felt or glazing strip in x 1/2 in) metal [Link] is concealed
Mirror Framing by the carpet which extends right up to
Curtain Backing board the mirror.
*Adhesive

;;
9.2 Junction between wall mirror and **Mirror with protective
backing Mirror
wall lining Wide bead

;;;;;;
Battens
Wall lining runs up to the face of the Glazing strip

;;
mirror and conceals the edge. Pattern of 9.4 Junction of wall mirror with ceiling 13mm x 13mm
wall lining repeats. (1/2" / 1/2") Angle
Mirror is retained by a glazing [Link]
"Smooth Edge" fixing

;;;;;;
in turn is concealed by the suspended or Carpet

;;;;;;
;;
false ceiling panel which is allowed to run Underfelt
up to the face of the mirror glass.

;;;;;;
Good, fine, hard plaster
or cement screed
*Adhesive Protective strips of felt or proprietary

;;;;;;
**Mirror with glazing tapes must be used to isolate the
protective backing glass from other materials.
Wall battens * Adhesive as recommended by the
Wall linings
adhesive manufacturer
** Mirror with suitable protective backing
Recommendations for fixing Mirrors - with suggested applications

;;
9.6 Junction of mirror with vertical wall damage by cleaners, etc. A flat wide 9.12 Wall mirror and floor junction
panel board (shown dotted) would give a Alternative to 9.5 and [Link] bottom

;;
The mirror is contained in a rebated better illusion. edge of the mirror must be scribed to
batten and held by a [Link] bead is the floor as closely as possible and flat
mastered by a wall panel, giving Mirror polished because it will be [Link]
apparently greater thickness to the wall, Glazing strip Alternative wide board mirror must rest on a resilient glazing
in place of skirting

;;;;;
and allowing the wall panel to be secretly strip.

;
;;;;;
fixed to the framing.
*Adhesive

;;;
Skirting **Mirror with protective
Floor level backing
Flat polished edge
resting on glazing strip

;;
9.10 Ceiling to wall mirror junction
A chase is cut in the ceiling to receive the 9.13 Vertical junction between wall

;;;
yyy
Bead

;;
Framing mirror and this is then made good. mirror panels
Battens Mirrors are set into a rebated batten and

;;;
yyy
Mirror held in position with a face member

;; ;;;;;
Wall panel which appears as a post or mullion by
Glazing strip reflection.
*Adhesive

;;;;; ;;;
9.7 Ceiling to wall mirror junction Chase in ceiling
This is similar to [Link] mirror is pushed made good after
up into a slot and the "V" jointed ceiling **Mirror with protective

;;;;; ;;;
panels camouflage the reflection. backing

;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;
Glazing strip Battens

Mirror Mullion or Post

;;;;;;
9.14 Butting mirrors
A 6 mm (1/4 in) wood fillet is fixed to the
battening and the mirrors are mastered
Mirror by a suitable wood or metal cover bead

;;;
; ;;
Glazing strip screwed through the fillet to the batten,
Ceiling panels giving the effect of a light glazing bar.

;
Bead

Wall panel 9.11 Junctions between horizontal wall

;;
mirrors and wall panelling
An alternative to [Link] wall panelling
will appear to float without support if the
top and bottom edges are above and

;;
9.8 Junctions between horizontal wall below eye level.
mirrors and wall panelling

;;
Rebated battens carry the mirror which *Adhesive Metal cover strip

;;
Wood bead
is held by [Link] wall panels master Mirror Battens
**Mirror with protective
the beads as in 9.6. backing Glazing strip

;;
Setting block
Wall panel

;
Framing

;; Glazing strip

;;
Mirror
Battens
Protective strips of felt or proprietary
9.9 Junction between wall mirror and glazing tapes must be used to isolate the

;;
floor glass from other materials.
Alternative to 9.5 and [Link] skirting * Adhesive as recommended by the
fixing should be used in vulnerable adhesive manufacturer
situations, to protect the mirror from *Adhesive ** Mirror with suitable protective backing
**Mirror with protective
backing
 Recommendations for fixing Mirrors - with suggested applications

9.15 Butting mirrors 9.17 Junction between ceiling mirror

The edges of the mirrors are ground and panel and ceiling
polished accurately to butt. Care must be The mirror is supported along its edge by

;;;;;
;;;;;
taken when fixing to ensure continuity of continuous metal strip or clips adequately
reflections across the joint. [Link] enables alternative forms of
curb to be used.

**Mirror with protective Battens

backing Backing board Battens
Flat polished butt joints *Adhesive Glazing strip

9.16 Ceiling mirror panel and ceiling **Mirror with

junction protective backing
All ceiling mirrors should have suitable Metal strip or clips
protective backing as a safety measure. Curb
The mirror is cushioned against the
ceiling battens and supported at its edge
by a wood curb which is grooved to
conceal the junction with the mirror. On
large areas screw fixing may be necessary
in addition but this should be avoided if
possible by the use of cover beads (9.14).
In any event, care must be taken to

;;;;;;
provide insulation and ensure uniform
support.

Battens
Glazing strip Protective strips of felt or proprietary
glazing tapes must be used to isolate the
**Mirror with protective glass from other materials.
backing
* Adhesive as recommended by the
Curb adhesive manufacturer
** Mirror with suitable protective backing
• Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Mirrors – Visual quality standard for
installed mirrors 4.8.1 F E B R UA RY 2 0 0 0

1 Introduction faults altering the appearance of the the following table.

image of reflected objects.
This Data Sheet is designed to be used in 5.1.2 Optical Faults
conjunction with Data Sheet 4.8. Alternation of images can result from A mirror shall be examined in areas of
(Recommendations for Fixing Mirrors), ageing, optical faults in the glass and faults 500 x 500mm at a [Link] observer is
and will deal specifically with the Visual in the reflective coating. located at a distance of 2 metres at right
Quality Standard for Installed Mirrors. angle to the area being examined. Behind
5.1 Appearance Faults the observer must be a non uniform
2 Scope The visual Quality can be altered by the [Link] reflected image must
presence of spot and/or linear and/or not be optically disturbed by another
This Data Sheet relates to the Visual Fault enlarged area of faults. mirror or window, for [Link]
Characteristics which can be found in, mirror or window, for [Link]
and the relevant quality standards 5.1.1 Surface and Body Faults mirror meets the requirements if it does
expected of, Finished Mirrors. Solid or gaseous inclusions, deposits, not exhibit optical variation outside the
scratches, etc, are admissible as defined in allowed tolerances.
3 Mirror Standard

The standard will apply in full only to Spot Faults Surface Faults
mirrors made of flat, annealed float glass, Area * 0.2mm * 0.3mm Border Hairline Scratches
clear or coloured, supplied in 2 to 6mm ) 0.3mm ) 0.4mm Zone* Scratches
thickness in all sizes, having the rear * 0.2mm ) 50mm
surface coated with a reflective silver ) 0.8mm –
deposit which is protected by a layer of
Mirror ) 0.3m2 2 1 – 2 –
metallic copper or another material, and Tiles etc.
one or more protective coatings, e.g.
paint, lacquer, etc..., for use inside normally Cut Sizes ) 1.0m2 1 1 – 2 –
occupied domestic or commercial Sizes ) 1.5m2 2 1 – 2 –
buildings. > 1.5m2 3 2 1 3 –

NB: An uncut stock size Mirror cannot be • The width of the border zone is determined as 15% of the edge length, as illustrated
expected to conform to the same below.
standards as a finished mirror.
Example::
4 Method for observing mirrors

General Aspect
The Mirror is observed in a vertical
position, with the naked eye and under
normal diffused daylight conditions
(maximum 600 Lux at the mirror) from a
distance of 1 [Link] use of an
additional spotlight source is not allowed.

5 Mirror Faults

The quality of a Mirror can be affected by

Glass
Glass
4 and
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Mirrors — Visual quality standard for installed mirrors

Optical faults are directly associated with [Link]. Edge Faults [Link]. Colour Spots
the distortion of the reflected image. Edge faults are entrant/emergent faults in Any visible coloured spots.
the form of chips, shells, corners on/off,
[Link] Spots Faults vents etc. [Link]. Edge Deterioration
Spot faults consist of nucleus (solid or Discoloration of the reflective silver at
gaseous inclusions), deposits, crush marks 5.1.3 Reflected Silver Coating Faults the edge of the mirror.
etc. In certain instances spot faults are
accompanied by a distortion zone call [Link]. Scratches This Data Sheet is not intended to deal
‘Halo’. Surface defects of various width, length with the relevant methods or test criteria,
and depth. to which mirrors should conform.
[Link]. Linear Faults
Linear faults can be in the form of [Link]. Stain
scratches, extended spot faults etc. An alteration to the reflective coating
where the reflective surface exhibits
[Link]. Enlarged Area Faults zones with various degrees of
Enlarged area faults can be as the result discoloration.
of tin deposits, glass surface erosion etc.
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Compatibility of Glazing Sealants
4.9 January 2009
and Compounds with Insulating
Glass Units

Contents This guidance expands on migration of volatile components from

recommendations given in other the materials in the form of vapour, there
1. Introduction
documents such as GGF Datasheet 4.2 does not have to be direct contact for
2. Scope Systems Design and Glazing the effects of incompatibility to
Considerations for Insulating Glass Units become apparent.
3. Definition of Compatibility and BS 8000-7 Workmanship on building
4. Components to be considered
4. Components to be Considered sites – Code of practice for glazing.
A component in this case is defined as
5. Possible effects of incompatibility 2. Scope
one or more parts of the glazed system
6. Influence of the Glazing Material This document gives guidance on the that may be in direct contact with other
issue of glazing components and their parts of the system. For example, two or
7. Influence of the type of IGU sealant compatibility with the [Link] is the more of the following may be in contact
8. General compatibility considerations least understood aspect of glazing, results with each other: glazing sealant or
in many of reported system failures compound, setting blocks/distance pieces;
9. Test Methods and is the most difficult to control once gaskets; primary and secondary IGU
10. Summary on [Link] issue of compatibility of the sealants; the interlayer of laminated glass,
components of the IGU with each other is either polyvinyl butyral (PVB) or cast in
1. Introduction better understood and, in general, place (CIP) resin or ethylene vinyl
This document has been produced with the lies within the control of the IGU acetate (EVA); the edge spacer tape of a
aim of increasing understanding of the manufacturer. CIP laminate.
impact of compatibility on the long term This document does not cover the issue of Some units are provided with an edge
performance of insulating glass units (IGUs) the glazing of low maintenance and other tape as part of the design and this needs
and the effect on the economic life coated glass, where the coating may be on to be considered as far as compatibility is
expectancy of the [Link] are four areas the outer surface of the IGU. concerned. General purpose edge tape
of compatibility that need to be considered: applied to the IGU should not normally
This document does not cover the
• Glazing components with the IGU be relied upon to form a barrier between
issue of compatibility of frame finishes
the glazing sealant and the IGU edge
• Components of the IGU with and treatments, for example timber
seal as tapes are easily damaged.
each other preservatives or stains, with the
One exception to this is fire resistant
components of the IGU and the
IGU’s where robust specialist tapes which
• Glazing components with each other glazing components.
are not easily damaged are used to form
• Frame finishes and treatments with the 3. Definition of Compatibility a barrier.
components of the IGU and the
Two materials are compatible if there is It should be noted that edge tapes can
glazing components
no change in the physical/chemical be damaged during transportation,
This datasheet is intended to provide properties, including the adhesive handling and installation and this may
information for: properties, of either when they are in result in migration of solvents/fluids
direct contact or close proximity. through the damaged area. Even if
Architects
Conversely if there is an interaction which undamaged, plastic coated cloth tapes are
Specifiers causes a change in the properties of one permeable to solvent vapours and may
or both of the materials they are said to themselves be degraded by an
Main Contractors incompatible glazing sealant.
be incompatible. Incompatibility may result
Glaziers from a chemical reaction between the Aluminium foil tapes may constitute an
materials or physical changes due to impermeable barrier, but the adhesive
IGU Manufactures migration of components from one may contribute to incompatibility issues
Window Manufacturers material into the other. In the case of leading to other effects.

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Compatibility of Glazing Sealants and Compounds with Insulating Glass Units

5. Possible Effects of Incompatibility However, of itself, the type of cure If there is no information available, then the
mechanism is not the sole indication of person responsible for the installation may
The properties of the IGU components
compatibility or incompatibility. need to consider alternative materials that
can be changed by interaction with an
Certain silicone sealant formulations can be confirmed as compatible or to
incompatible glazing sealant. An effect on
contain organic solvents or low molecular consider commissioning compatibility tests.
unit aesthetics may be observed in a
weight plasticisers, usually added to
relatively short period. Incompatibility The IGU manufacturer should indicate
cheapen the product and modify the
may also affect the long term durability of through their terms and conditions of sale
viscosity. Depending on the chemical
the unit. (warranty) that incompatible components
nature and quantity of solvent and/or
must not be used in the installation of the
The extent of the effects of incompatibility plasticiser present there is a potential for
units and their use will render the
depends on the type of components used [Link] it is possible for a
guarantee as void.
in the manufacture of IGU’s and the specific neutral cure silicone product to be
concentration and type of incompatible incompatible with an IGU edge sealant, The IGU manufacturer should consider
constituents of the glazing sealant. contrary to the common misconception attaching a warning label about
that all neutral cure silicones are incompatibility of glazing components with
A common situation where incompatibility compatible. Conversely it is possible for an their IGU.
becomes visually apparent is where a acetoxy cure silicone to be compatible
glazing sealant containing a volatile with the IGU edge sealant, although it may The person responsible for the installation
hydrocarbon solvent is used with a dual not be suitable for use in all glazing should follow all instructions regarding the
seal IGU constructed with a situations due to the potential for the use and application of the sealant that they
polyisobutylene (PIB) primary seal and a acetic acid to react with other glass or have selected.
secondary [Link] solvent vapours are frame components. There should be no variation from specified
able to permeate through the outer,
Certain types of glazing sealants other than materials unless the process of confirming
secondary seal and attack the primary seal.
silicone may also contain organic solvents the compatibility of the substitute material
In less severe cases the secondary sealant
or low molecular weight plasticisers. Like is repeated.
is not visually affected but the PIB is
softened and exudes past the spacer bar silicones, depending on the chemical nature [Link] Methods
into the vision area of the unit. In more and quantity of solvent and/or plasticiser
extreme cases the PIB is dissolved by the present, there is a potential for In Europe there is no generally accepted
solvent which also extracts plasticiser from incompatibility. standard or test method for assessing
the secondary sealant. [Link] has resulted in different
7. Influence of the type of companies/organisations/bodies having
The visual effect of this is greatest at the
IGU sealant different test methods and therefore
top edge of the unit, where dribbles of the
black PIB mixed with a clear liquid run Most IGU edge sealants may be adversely different acceptance criteria.
down the internal surfaces of the glass. affected by contact with solvents or Available test methods that could be used
plasticisers from incompatible glazing to assess some aspects of compatibility are:
In the case of laminated glass with a PVB
[Link] failure mechanism may be
interlayer incompatibility can result in small ASTM C 1294-01 Standard Test Method for
different depending on whether the sealant
bubbles or cloudiness. One common cause Compatibility of Insulating Glass Edge Sealants
is chemically cured or is a thermoplastic
is the use of an acid cure silicone sealant. with Liquid-Applied Glazing Materials
material. Failure may, for example be a
In the case of a CIP interlayer, where an result of hardening or softening of the ASTM C1087-00(2006)
acrylic edge tape is used, plasticisers from sealant or a loss of adhesion of the sealant
the glazing sealant can migrate into the to the glass or spacer bar. However despite Standard Test Method for Determining
tape resulting in a swelling of the tape and the differences between IGU edge sealant Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants
delamination of the interlayer. types, the focus of avoiding incompatibility with Accessories Used in Structural
should be the selection of suitable Glazing Systems
Note: IGU manufacturers should consider glazing sealants.
the aspect of compatibility between Whatever test method is used it should be
their secondary sealant and the acrylic 8. General Compatibility borne in mind that the composition of the
edge tape. Considerations material may be subject to change without
notification and that the results of earlier
6. Influence of the Glazing Material When the selection of a glazing sealant tests may no longer be valid.
is being considered, compatibility with the
There are a number of different generic IGU should be taken into account 10. Summary
types of glazing material in common use alongside other technical and commercial
and within each of these types there can This datasheet offers a brief guidance to the
considerations. relevant issues of compatibility. It is advisable
be many different formulations of product
available from the various suppliers. Glazing materials should be chosen that that all parties to a contract identify and
are compatible with the IGU components. resolve the technical, commercial and legal
The most commonly used products are concerns prior to embarking on any project.
the one part neutral curing silicone Advice on the compatibility of any
[Link] products cure by reaction components used in contact with the edge Should testing be required, a sufficient
with atmospheric moisture vapour and seals of the IGU should be sought from the period of time should be allowed -
produce a non acidic (usually alcohol) by- supplier/manufacturer of the component accelerated ageing will take several months.
product as a result of this reaction. Another and the supplier/manufacturer of the edge It is important that all specifications,
type of silicone is the acetoxy cure sealant sealant(s). In some cases it may also be test procedures and agreements are
whose by-product is acetic acid vapour. available from the IGU manufacturer. confirmed in writing.
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
4.10 January 2010
Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for
Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

Contents 3. Definitions
1. Introduction For the purpose of this Data Sheet the following definitions apply:
2. Scope 3.1 Appearance
3. Definitions The overall effect on the observer when looking at objects through
the IGU.
4. Glass types
3.2 Optical quality
5. Optical Quality
The distortion in the appearance of an object when observed
6. Visual Quality
through the glass.
7. Inherent characteristics of IGUs
3.3 Visual quality
8. Appearance
The effect of faults, e.g. spot, linear extended, etc., on the vision
9. Method of assessment through the glass.
10. Acceptance criteria 3.4 Transparent glass
11. References Glass that transmits light and permits clear vision through it.
Annex A / Annex B 3.5 Textured and translucent glass

1. Introduction Glass that transmits light with varying degrees of light scattering so
that vision is not clear, providing some privacy; or glass that had
The appearance/visual quality of an insulating glass unit (IGU) is been sand blasted or acid etched, or laminated glass with a white
dependent on the following: interlayer making the glass translucent.
• Optical quality of the component glass panes, i.e. distortion 3.6 Insulating glass unit (IGU)
inherent with the production of the glass pane;
An assembly consisting of at least two panes of glass, separated by
• Visual quality of the component glass panes, i.e. one or more spacers, hermetically sealed along the periphery,
number/size/type of defects; Inherent characteristics of an IGU, mechanically stable and durable.
i.e. behaviour of a hermetically sealed body;
3.7 Condensation
• Processing, handling, and glazing techniques.
The presence of moisture and/or other liquid on a glass surface
2. Scope either inside or outside the IGU.
This Data Sheet details all appropriate optical and quality factors of 3.8 Interstitial condensation
the glasses used to manufacture the IGU, that influence the
appearance of an installed IGU. Condensation that occurs within the hermetically sealed cavity of
the IGU.
It should be borne in mind that the major criterion is the view
through the IGU from the inside of a [Link] is covered in 3.9 Peripheral condensation
detail within this Data Sheet. Condensation that occurs on the inside, i.e. room surface, of the
However, it is appreciated that the appearance from the outside of IGU around the edge of the unit adjacent to the frame.
the building, i.e. in reflection, can also be important in certain 3.10 External condensation
applications and some non-specific comments are made on
this subject. Condensation that occurs on the external, i.e. outside surface, of
the IGU

Glass and Glazing Federation

Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266

Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

4. Glass types 5. Optical Quality

4.1 General 5.1 General
The IGU manufacturer uses glass panes within the IGU that comply The optical quality of a glass component is the result of the
with other standards as to their optical and visual quality. In general following:
the IGU manufacturer cannot alter these quality characteristics.
• the method of manufacture of the glass component;
During the IGU manufacturing process, and in subsequent handling,
together with
there is a risk that further visual faults, e.g. scratches, scuffs, could be
added to those already present in the components. • the effect of any subsequent processing.
The standards relating to the appropriate glass products will detail 5.2 Basic and special basic glasses
their optical and visual quality appertaining to the individual pane.
The optical quality of transparent glass is entirely dependent on the
4.2 Basic and special basic glasses manufacturing method.
These are annealed glasses that comply with one of the Generally glass made by the float process has less distortion and
following standards: manufacturing faults than drawn sheet glass. Depending on the
specific product, e.g. drawn sheet glass, there may be a number of
BS EN 572 - Parts 2 to 6 or Part 8 classes for optical quality.
BS EN 1748 - 1 - 1
Polished wired glass can be visually as good as float glass, but the
BS EN 1748 - 2 - 1 presence of the wire mesh may affect the optical appearance and it
BS EN 14178 - 1 has its own section within the standards.

Note:Typically annealed soda-lime silicate glass, i.e. BS EN 572 is Cast glass, patterned glass and wired patterned glass are all
used. Specialist glasses are normally used for specific purposes, e.g. textured glasses with varying degrees of light scattering disruption.
fire resistant glazing. These products do not have a specific optical quality.
5.3 Toughened or strengthened glasses
4.3 Toughened, toughened and heat soaked, or
strengthened glasses Thermal toughening and heat strengthening processes may
adversely affect the optical quality of the float or drawn sheet glass
These are annealed glasses that have been thermally or chemically
that is [Link] heating and cooling of the glass during the
treated to modify their strength and breakage characteristics.
process can result in bow, overall and/or local, and/or roller wave
They will comply with one of the following standards:
distortion2 that will reduce the optical quality from that of the
BS EN 1863 - 1 unprocessed glass.
BS EN 12150 - 1 Note:Any lack of flatness with thermally treated glasses can produce problems with
reflected images. See Annex A for an example.
BS EN 12337 - 1
BS EN 13024 - 1 Chemical strengthening is less likely to affect the optical quality of
the unprocessed glass.
BS EN 14179 - 1
5.3.1 Specific effects of thermal treatment process
BS EN 14321 - 1
The process may give rise to a degree of haze, i.e. a cloudy look to
4.4 Laminated glasses the surface, especially at oblique angles of incidence.
These are annealed, toughened or heat strengthened glasses, in any The process may, under some viewing conditions, result in an effect
combination, that have been combined with an interlayer(s) to that is known as anisotropy (iridescence). This is the result of stress
produce a product with modified characteristics. patterns in the cross section of the glass becoming [Link]
These modifications will affect one or more of the following: areas of stress produce a bi-refringent effect in the glass, which is
• post-breakage behaviour visible in polarised light. When viewed in polarised light these areas
show up as coloured zones, sometimes referred to as ‘leopard
• spectrophotometric characteristics spots’.The bi-refrigent effect is more noticeable at glancing angles.
• acoustic characteristics This is not considered as a fault in the glass and is a naturally
occurring phenomenon.
• resistance to penetration
5.4 Laminated glasses
They will comply with the following standards:
The optical quality of laminated glass is dependent on the following:
BS EN ISO 12543 - Parts 1 - 6, and BS EN 14449
• type and number of glass panes
4.5 Coated glasses
• type, thickness and number of interlayer(s)
A glass substrate of any of the above, that either incorporates a
coating within the glass surface or has had a coating applied to the • presence or not of plastics glazing sheet materials
[Link] coatings are designed to modify the • laminating process, e.g. folio, cast in place, etc.
spectrophotometric characteristics of the [Link] will comply
Generally folio lamination processes, i.e. ones using an interlayer
with the following standard:
such as pvb, eva, pvc, have only minor influences on the optical
BS EN 1096 - Parts 1 - 3 quality of the final product. The degree of influence will increase
Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

with more panes of glass and more/thicker interlayers as a result of Generally the visual quality is higher for a transparent glass than for
possible multiple panes of glass each having the potential for an a textured or translucent glass. With textured glasses the light
isolated fault. scattering reduces the visible impact of the [Link] the
greater the degree of light scattering the less likely is it that any
2
Details on allowable bow and how it is measured are given in the
specific fault is visually disturbing.
product standards. Specific details relating to roller wave, including
method of measurement, is given in GGF Data Sheet 4.4. 6.3 Toughened or strengthened glasses
Cast in place laminating is more likely to result in a product that As these products are manufactured from final cut sizes then the
does not have parallel faces, and hence distortions may occur. processing should not alter the basic visual quality of the glass.
Problems may occur with slight discrepancies in uniformity of curing However, the cutting, edge working and toughening/strengthening
of the interlayer that may produce refractive index discrepancies. could impart additional scratches/scuffs onto the glass surface.
These processing faults will affect the visual quality.
5.5 Coated glasses
The thermal treatment process may result in small imprints in the
The optical quality of coated glass is dependent on the following:
surface (‘roller pick-up’).This only applies to horizontally processed
• type of glass substrate glass thicker than 8mm.
• type, thickness and make-up of coating, e.g. single or multilayer, 6.4 Laminated glasses
• coating process, e.g. on-line, off-line, etc The visual quality of laminated glass depends on the following:
Generally the addition of a coating to a glass substrate does not • component glass panes
significantly alter the optical [Link] the optical quality of a
• interlayer type, thickness
coated glass is that of the substrate. Coatings are added to
influence thermal efficiency, solar control, reflective properties, or • laminating process
cleaning attributes, and may change the light transmittance or
• cutting/sawing to final cut size
reflectance of the product.
The manufacture of stock size laminated glass is influenced by the
However, as the majority of coatings work due to thin film
visual quality of the initial stock size glass panes [Link] panes
interference effects there can be a perceived change if there is a
will have a visual quality in accordance with the product standards
lack of uniformity in the coating. Similarly these thin coatings can
(see 4.2). The visual quality of the laminated glass may be worse
offer variations in colour that can appear as a lack of uniformity.
than that of any component [Link] the greater number of
Modern low-e coatings on glass may produce a haze, i.e. a cloudy
glass panes within a laminated glass the greater the likely number of
look to the surface, when viewed in oblique lighting (see 8.3).
defects (see BS EN ISO 12543 Part 6).
[Link] Quality
With selective cutting of finished sizes from stock plate of laminate
6.1 General glass some defects can be avoided in the final product.
The visual quality of a glass component is the result of the Further faults can be introduced during the laminating process due
following: to faults in the interlayer, and entrapment of any contamination
between the layers. Defects can appear as bubbles, opaque spots,
• method of manufacture of the glass component; together with
foreign bodies, and creases in the interlayer.
• effect of any subsequent processing and handling.
Cutting, sawing and edge working can impart scratches etc.
6.2 Basic and special basic glasses The thicker/heavier the laminated glass then the higher is the
probability of increasing the visual defects during these processes.
The visual quality of basic glass products can be found for stock This applies to all glass types.
sizes in the product standards (see 4.2).
6.5 Coated glasses
The visual quality for final cut sizes is given in the product standards
for special basic [Link] visual quality of basic soda lime silicate The visual quality of coated glass depends on the following:
glass products is given in BS EN 572 Part 8.
• component glass panes
Cutting down of stock plates into final cut sizes, i.e. panes for
• coating type, colour, spectrophotometric properties
further processing, is an opportunity to reduce the number and
size of inherent spot and/or linear extended faults. However, care • coating process
should be taken to ensure that the cutting process does not
• cutting to final cut size
introduce other defects, i.e. scratches.
The presence of a coating on a glass substrate may increase the
The visual quality of textured glasses also depends on the following:
visibility of a spot fault, linear extended fault within the substrate.
• pattern type/depth Similarly faults within and/or on the coating, e.g. pinholes, scratches,
scuffs, non-uniformities, etc., may decrease the visual [Link]
• directionality of the pattern
effects are more pronounced with coatings that are highly coloured
• wire mesh uniformity, squareness, alignment etc. and/or highly reflective.
Quantification of these parameters can be found in the appropriate The likelihood of the visual quality being decreased is dependent
product standards. on the type of coating process and the number of steps involved
within the coating process.
Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

Generally on-line coating is inherently more resistant to scratching, 7.3.1 Brewster’s fringes
etc. than are off-line coatings. Certain ‘soft’ off-line coatings need
The appearance of the optical phenomena known as Brewster’s
special processing, i.e. edge stripping, prior to incorporation into an Fringes is not a defect of the insulating glass unit and can occur
[Link] abrasion process can also result in decreased visual quality. with any glass of high optical and surface quality, i.e. float [Link]
7. Inherent characteristics of IGUs phenomenon is a result of the high quality now being achieved by
glass manufacturers.
7.1 General
Brewster’s Fringes occur if wavelengths of light meet up with each
An insulating glass unit as defined is a glass product that contains other when they are exactly 180º out of [Link] is an example
hermetically sealed air space(s).The air space(s) are filled with of the phenomena known to physicist as the interference of light.
dehydrated air or other gas, e.g. argon, [Link] IGU is intended to The effect is similar to, although usually much smaller than, the
reduce the rate of heat loss and therefore influence the formation interference fringes that can sometimes be seen on toughened
of condensation (see 7.2). glass windscreens.
7.1.1 Characteristics of the hermetically sealed cavity Brewster’s Fringes occur when the surfaces of the glass are optically
flat and the two panes are parallel to each other, i.e. when the light
The properties of a hermetically sealed cavity are that they will transmission properties of the installation are of a very high order.
change dependent on the following: This phenomenon is not a defect of the product and is solely
• temperature and barometric pressure when the cavity was sealed dependent on the laws of physics.
7.3.2 Newton’s rings
• actual air temperature and barometric pressure
This optical effect only occurs in faulty/defective insulating glass
• temperature of the air or gas within the cavity as a result of units when the two panes of glass are touching or nearly touching
radiation etc. in the [Link] optical effect is a series of concentric coloured
• thickness of the glass rings with the centre being at the point of contact/near contact of
the two [Link] rings are roughly circular or elliptical.
These changes will result in a volume change in the cavity.
This will result in the unit taking up either a concave or convex 7.4 Multiple images
[Link] shape will cause a number of phenomena to become As a result of the number of reflective surfaces (four in an IGU
apparent (see 7.3, 7.4, 7.5). with two glass panes manufactured from monolithic glass) there
exists the likelihood of multiple images being formed. Whist this is
7.2 Condensation
only of minor significance when the observer is looking directly
An IGU is designed to reduce the heat loss through the glazing. through the IGU, i.e. at normal incidence, this will increase
This means that, compared to single glazing, the incidence of considerably as the angle of incidence.
moisture condensing on the room side glass surface is reduced. The presence of other reflective surfaces, e.g. laminated glass,
However, condensation can still occur as follows: coatings, may enhance the phenomena. Also any deflection effect
within the unit may have an influence.
a. Internal condensation can still occur if the glass surface is the
coldest surface in a room and the relative humidity is extremely Annex B will give a diagrammatic representation of the phenomena
high, i.e. in a kitchen, bathroom, etc. with large amounts of resulting from the inherent properties of an insulating glass unit.
steam/moisture present. 7.5 Reflected image
b. Interstitial condensation occurs either when the unit seal has As a result of the hermetically sealed cavity of an IGU the glass will
failed and the cavity is saturated with moisture or when an internal deflect with changes of temperature and [Link] result of this
component, e.g. Georgian bars, etc., has deteriorated and given off is that in reflection the reflected images can appear separated.
organic solvents. Under both of these conditions the appearance of This will be further exacerbated by the presence of multiple images
that are being displaced different amounts.
condensation on one or both cavity surfaces can occur subject to
the glass surface temperature. The likelihood of this occurrence is dependent on the extent of
the deflection in the IGU as a result of the difference in
c. Peripheral internal condensation occurs with units having low atmospheric temperature and pressure between the manufacturing
U-values and is the result of localised heat flow through the spacer conditions and the service conditions.
of the unit. Using more insulating framing, and/or so-called ‘warm The effect may be more noticeable when reflective coatings are
edge technology’ can help reduce this. incorporated within the IGU.

d. External condensation occurs with units having low U-values. Annex B will give a diagrammatic representation of the phenomena
With the amount of heat being lost through the unit being resulting from the inherent properties of an insulating glass unit.
significantly reduced the outer glass pane can be colder than for 8. Appearance
less well insulated units.
8.1 General
Therefore under localised climatic conditions this can lead to Appearance relates to the limitations that are placed upon the
moisture condensing out of the atmosphere onto the outside insulating glass unit [Link] limitations are as a result of
surface of the [Link] is not a fault, and can be seen as the the following:
product being effective in keeping heat in.
• Incoming glass components,
7.3 Interference phenomena • Specification of the unit,
These are visual phenomena, similar to oil on water, and are the • Inherent properties of the unit, and last but not least,
result of light interference patterns due to the IGU glass panes
deflecting in relation to each other. • Framing and glazing systems.
Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

The perceived appearance of an installed IGU can be adversely 9.2 Inspection

affected by distortions induced by the framing system and the
installation. The IGUs shall be viewed at near normal incidence, i.e. at right
angles, to the glass surface from the room side, standing at a
8.2 Normal incidence distance of not less than 2 metres away from the inner glass
surface for annealed float glass and 3 metres away for all other
The IGU should be viewed at normal incidence, i.e. at 90º to the
glass types e.g laminated or toughened glass.
glass surface.
For IGUs containing transparent glass components the appearance The assessment of visual quality of the panes of glass should be
relates to the vision through. carried out in natural daylight but not in direct sunlight and with no
visible moisture on the surface of the inner or outer glass panes.
For IGUs containing textured or translucent glass components the The use of strong lamps and/or magnifying devices is not allowed.
appearance relates to the visual quality of the textured or
translucent glass component. It is not permissible to find defects at close range and then mark
them so as to be visible from the given viewing distance.
8.3 Oblique incidence Obtrusiveness of faults shall be judged by looking through the glass,
The effects such as multiple images, haze, etc. are inherent not at it.
characteristics of an IGU when viewed at angles of incidence less
10 Acceptance criteria
than 60º to the surface.
10.1
8.4 Reflection
Acceptance criteria relate strictly to the inherent characteristics of
Not generally considered. See Annexes A and B for further an IGU or of the glasses used to make up an IGU, such as:- totally
information. enclosed seeds, bubbles or blisters; hairlines or blobs; and minute
9. Method of assessment embedded particles; and inherent faults and fine scratches on
coated glasses.
9.1 General
IGUs with optical defects such as smears, finger prints or other dirt
The standards for the component glass panes detail the method of on the cavity faces of the glass' or extraneous material inside the
observation and the distance and criteria for acceptance. However, IGU cavity are unacceptable, and this applies also to any such
in an IGU no such recommendations are given in the applicable defects within the 50mm edge zone.
European standard, i.e. BS EN 1279-1.
Insulating glass units shall not be deemed unacceptable for any
As there is no standardised method of assessment this Data Sheet phenomena relating to the inherent characteristics of an IGU with
lays down an appropriate methodology. the exception of ‘Newton’s Rings’ (see 7.3.2.)
Damage caused by following trades after glazing will not be considered 10.2
as a fault of the installer. For example damage can be caused by
impact, scratching, deposit of plaster, cement, etc, and weld spatter and When viewed in accordance with Section 9.2 above the IGU will
spatter from cutting tools. For this reason, viewing IGUs for scratches be deemed acceptable as long as, where appropriate, none of the
or other damage on the outer faces of the panes must be carried out following apply:
before any following trades works adjacent to the glazing, and as early
• there are no defects noticed that are visually disturbing
as reasonably practicable following installation of the IGUs.
• any defects that are noted comply with the visual quality,
9.1.1 Area of IGU to be examined
(see 6), for the glass component
The glass area to be viewed is the entire vision area with the
exception of a 50mm wide band around the whole perimeter of • any visual disturbance, e.g. from roller wave, bow, etc., is within
each of the glass panes. the tolerances given in the appropriate product standard

See Figure 1. • coated glass quality, e.g. pinholes, colour variation, etc. comply
with the appropriate product quality

Edge Zone (50mm edge band) • condensation, internal or external, is not related to a seal failure
• distortion as a result of the framing system or the installation.
Main Zone

Figure 1

This edge zone, in terms of size, is similar to that given for the
determination of coated glass in final cut sizes (see BS EN 1096-1).
Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

11 References BS EN ISO 12543-2: Glass in building – Laminated glass and

laminated safety glass - Part 2: Laminated safety glass
11.1 European and/or national standards
BS EN ISO 12543-3: Glass in building – Laminated glass and
BS 952-1: Glass for glazing – Part 1. Classification
laminated safety glass - Part 3: Laminated glass
BS EN 572-1: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
BS EN ISO 12543-4: Glass in building – Laminated glass and
products - Part 1: Definition and general physical and mechanical
laminated safety glass - Part 4:Test methods for durability
properties
BS EN ISO 12543-5: Glass in building – Laminated glass and
BS EN 572-2: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
laminated safety glass - Part 5: Dimensions and edge finishing
products - Part 2: Float glass
BS EN ISO 12543-6: Glass in building – Laminated glass and
BS EN 572-3: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
laminated safety glass – Part 6:Appearance
products - Part 3: Polished wired glass
11.2 Evaluation of conformity/product standards
BS EN 572-4: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
products - Part 4: Drawn sheet glass With the publication of the harmonised European standards, hENs,
the glass components will become available as CE marked
BS EN 572-5: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
[Link] CE marking will be a declaration that the glass
products - Part 5: Patterned glass
product conforms to the appropriate hEN.
BS EN 572-6: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass The hENs are as follows:
products - Part 6: Patterned wired glass BS EN 572-8: Glass in
BS EN 572-9: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
building – Basic soda lime silicate glass products - Part 8: Supplied
products - Part 9: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
and final cut sizes
BS EN 1096-4: Glass in building – Coated glass products - Part 4:
BS EN 1096-1: Glass in building – Coated glass products -
Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
Part 1: Description and definitions
BS EN 1279-5: Glass in building – Insulating glass units - Part 5:
BS EN 1096-2 Glass in building – Coated glass products -
Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
Part 2:Test method for the durability of class A, B and S coatings
BS EN 1748-1-2: Glass in building – Special basic product –
BS EN 1096-3: Glass in building – Coated glass products -
Borosilicate glasses - Part 1-2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
Part 3:Test method for the durability of class C and D coatings
standard
BS EN 1279-1: Glass in building – Insulating glass units -
BS EN 1748-2-2: Glass in building Special basic product – Glass
Part 1: Generalities, dimensional tolerances and rules for the system
ceramics Part 2-2: - Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
description
BS EN 1863-2: Glass in building – Heat strengthened soda lime
BS EN 1748-1-1: Glass in building – Special basic product –
silicate glass products - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
Borosilicate glasses - Part 1-1: Definition and general physical and
standard
mechanical properties
BS EN 12150-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda
BS EN 1748-2-1: Glass in building Special basic product –
lime silicate safety glass products - Part 2: Evaluation of
Glass ceramics Part 2-1: - Definition and general physical and
conformity/Product standard
mechanical properties
BS EN 12337-2: Glass in building – Chemically strengthened
BS EN 1863-1: Glass in building – Heat strengthened soda lime
soda lime silicate glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
silicate glass products - Part 1: Description and definitions
standard
BS EN 12150-1: Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda
BS EN 13024-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened
lime silicate safety glass products - Part 1: Description and
borosilicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
definitions
standard
BS EN 12337-1: Glass in building – Chemically strengthened
BS EN 14178–2: Glass in building – Alkaline earth silicate glass
soda lime silicate glass – Part 1: Description and definitions
products – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
BS EN 13024-1: Glass in building – Thermally toughened
BS EN 14179-2: Glass in building – Heat soaked thermally
borosilicate safety glass – Part 1: Description and definitions
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass products – Part 2:
BS EN 14178–1: Glass in building – Alkaline earth silicate glass Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
products – Part 1: Float glass
BS EN 14321-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened alkaline
BS EN 14179-1: Glass in building – Heat soaked thermally earth silicate safety glass products – Part 2: Evaluation of
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass products – Part 1: conformity/Product standard
Description and definitions
BS EN 14449: Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated
BS EN 14321-1: Glass in building – Thermally toughened safety glass - Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
alkaline earth silicate safety glass products – Part 1: Description
11.3 GGF data sheets
and definitions
Data Sheet 4.4. Heat treated glasses
BS EN ISO 12543-1: Glass in building – Laminated glass and
laminated safety glass - Part 1: Definitions and description of
component parts
Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

Annex A A1.2 Is one tenth of one degree, 0.1º, significant?

Appearance in reflection [Link] amount of flatness change is equivalent to a deflection
of 0.8mm over a one-metre length.
A1 Problem due to lack of flatness
This should be compared with the allowable deflection limits for
A1.1 General description
framing, i.e. L/125 for single glazing, L/175 for double glazing.
A glass, especially a thermally treated one, can rarely be glazed This would mean for an L of 1 metre deflections of either 8mm
perfectly [Link] is a difficulty with the framing system, glazing for single-glazing or 5.7mm for double-glazing.
system, installation and the inherent flatness of the glass.
Deflections of greater magnitude can occur due to wind-loading.
Imagine a rectilinear feature, e.g. a telegraph pole, some 10 For thermally treated glass, i.e. thermally toughened, heat
metres from a glazed [Link] observer is viewing the feature strengthened, etc., the standards allow overall bows of 2mm/m
by reflection from a similar distance. and local bows of 3mm/300mm.
If the plane of the glazing changes by one tenth of one degree, For insulating glass units the deflection due to
0.1º between two points on its surface, then the viewer will see barometric/temperature effects can be significantly greater than
either two images apparently displaced by 70mm or one image 0.8mm/m.
distorted by this amount.
A1.3 Optical explanation
Figure A1 shows the geometry involved.

Image A

Image Separation
7 cms.

Image B

B
at point A
A Plane of glass
C
1/10º
Plane of glass at point B
10
m.

Distance A - B 3.5cm.
m.

Point C displaced 0.03mm. from

10

plane through A - B., i.e. equivalent to

a curve in the glass 0.8mm. per m. length.
Pole
Viewer

Figure A1 Explanation of lack of flatness

Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

Annex B For each pane of glass there are two reflected images, a primary
and a secondary [Link] primary images result from surfaces 1
Diagrammatic explanation:
and 3 and the secondary images from surfaces 2 and 4,
Phenomena exhibited by IGUs as a result of their inherent (see Figure B2).
properties
B1 Multiple images
B1.1 General
A
When light hits a smooth glass surface; some is transmitted
through, some is reflected and some is absorbed.
It is a law of physics that the angle of incidence is equal to the
angle of [Link] if the incident ray is at normal Figure B3
A1
incidence, i.e. at right angles to the glass surface then it is reflected
directly back, (see Figure (B1A)). If the incident ray falls obliquely
on the surface then the reflected ray bounces back at the same
angle but on the other side of the perpendicular, Figure B2
(see Figure (B1B)).
Figure B3(A)

B1.3 Influencing factors

The following will increase the spacing
Figure B2
between images:
Figure B1(A) • Increasing glass thickness,
• Increasing cavity width, .
• Decreasing the angle of incidence.
The effects of coatings and body tints are dependent upon their
Figure B1(A) spectrophotometric properties, i.e. transmittance, reflectance,
absorbtance, and their position.
. will enhance the primary image and
Generally body tinted glasses
reduce the secondary image produced by the pane. Coatings will
A enhance the image reflected from the coating.
Figure B3
Figure B1(B) B2 Distorted images .
B2.1 General
When light rays strike a curved glass surface, they reflect in
A1 different directions. However, they will still obey the law that the
angle of incidence equals the angle of [Link] the
Figure B3(B)
image of an object will be [Link] curvature of the glass
Figure B1(B) .
surface causes it to act as a lens.
B2.2 Concave curvature
B1.2 Refraction This is when the surface is bowed inwards.
Another law of physics is that when a ray enters a medium of A concave curvature will cause the light rays to be projected
differing density it is bent (refracted). inwards towards a central [Link] causes the reflected image
to appear short and thin, (see Figure B3 (A)).
When a ray enters the glass from the air the angle of refraction is
less than the angle of [Link] when reflected from
the second surface it is displaced with respect to the incident ray.
A
When the ray leaves the glass into the air the angle of refraction B
is greater than the angle of incidence. A A
1
Therefore when leaving the first pane of glass the ray is parallel to B
B
the incident ray but displaced. A 2

A similar situation occurs when the ray meets the second pane.
3

Figure B3(A)

Figure B2
 Figure B3(A)

Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance Appearance/Visual Quality Specification for Insulating Glass Units and Maintenance

B2
B2.3 Convex curvature The outcome of having different curvatures on the panes will
result in some images being made smaller/thinner and others
This is when the surface is bowed outwards.
being stretched out.
A convex curvature will cause the light rays to be projected
Note: Figure B4 only examines the first reflection of the light ray.
outwards away from a central [Link] causes the reflected
image to be stretched out in all directions, (see Figure B3 (B)) B3 Composite factors
The combination of multiple images, B1,and distorted images, B2,
is extremely difficult to describe.

. What is certain is that nothing can be done to stop

these effects occurring.

(B)

Figure B3(B)
.

B2.4 Curvature in IGUs

When an IGU is subjected to barometric and/or temperature
and/or altitude effects the whole unit will change shape.
If the effects on the unit cause it to shrink inwards then this will
result in pane #1 being concave and pane #2 being convex, (see
Figure B4 – Type (A)). Similarly if the effects on the unit cause it
to swell outwards then this will result in pane #1 being convex
and pane #2 being concave, (see Figure B4 – Type (B)).

Figure B4(A)
Surface 1 - Primary image - shrunk
Surface 3 - Primary image - spreadout

Figure B4(B)
Surface 1 - Primary image - spreadout
Surface 3 - Primary image - shrunk
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Laminated Glass and 4.11 February 2011

Laminated Safety Glass

Contents 1.3 This Data Sheet gives definitions, dimensional sizes and
tolerances as well as methods of determining visual and
1 Scope optical quality are given.
2 Definitions 1.4 All flat laminated glass covered by this Data Sheet will
3 Glass components meet, where appropriate, the following standards:-
4 Interlayers
BS EN 14449; Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated
5 Performance safety glass – Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
6 Thickness and thickness
tolerances BS EN ISO 12543; Glass in building – Laminated glass and
laminated safety glass -
7 Sizes and dimensional
tolerance including Part 1: Definitions and descriptions of component parts
displacement Part 2: Laminated safety glass
8 Edgework Part 3: Laminated glass
9 Flatness Part 4: Test methods for durability
Part 5: Dimensions and edge finishing
10 Appearance
Part 6: Appearance
11 Marking
12 Health and Safety 1.5 Curved laminated glass and curved laminated safety
glass is excluded from this datasheet.

Annex A Glass Components 2. Definitions

Annex B Interlayer types
NOTE: The definitions used in this Data Sheet have, where possible,
Annex C Bibliography been taken from the European standards.

1. Scope 2.1 General

1.1 This Data Sheet specifies the characteristics of flat 2.1.1 laminated glass
laminated glass and flat laminated safety glass for use assembly consisting of one sheet of glass with one or more
in buildings. It covers both stock and finished sizes as sheets of glass and/or plastics glazing sheet material joined
manufactured. This Data Sheet does not apply to panes together with one or more interlayers.
of area < 0.05 m2.
2.1.2 interlayer
1.2 This Data Sheet covers laminated glass and laminated layer or material acting as an adhesive and separator
safety glass manufactured using one and/or more of the between plies of glass and/or plastics glazing sheet material.
following types of interlayers:
NOTE: The interlayer can also give additional performance to the finished
1.2.1 Folio interlayers, e.g. poly vinyl butyral (pvb), poly product e.g. enhanced impact resistance, resistance to fire, solar control,
acoustic insulation, etc.
ethylene acetate (eva), poly urethane (pu), ionoplast.
2.1.3 laminating processes
1.2.2 Cast in place resin interlayers, e.g. poly methly
methacylate (pmma), poly urethane (pu), epoxy. [Link] folio lamination process process where the
interlayer, is a solid film, which is placed between the plies of
1.2.3 Intumescent interlayers, sodium silicate.

Glass and Glazing Federation

54 Ayres Street, London. SE1 1EU
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
[Link]
Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

glass or plastics glazing sheet material and is then subjected NOTE: A laminated safety glass has no fire resistance
to heat and pressure to produce the final product. properties unless it meets clause 2.2.2 or clause 2.2.3.

[Link] cast-in-place lamination process process 2.2.2 laminated glass with fire resistant properties
where the interlayer is obtained by pouring a liquid between laminated glass which does not achieve its fire resistance by
the plies of glass or plastics glazing sheet material that is then means of interlayer’s which react to high temperatures.
chemically cured to produce the final product.
2.2.3 fire resistant laminated glass
NOTE: Other lamination processes than those defined in clause [Link] laminated glass where at least one interlayer reacts to the
and clause [Link] are available which do not necessarily fit into either of high temperature to give the product its fire resistance.
the two methods described above. This product may also contain glass components that are
themselves fire resistant.
2.1.4 stock sizes
sizes that are intended to be re-cut or further processed for 2.2.4 laminated security glass
final use. laminated glass designed to withstand a specified level of
attack. The following types are available:-
2.1.5 finished sizes
sizes which are either manufactured to size or cut from stock [Link] manual attack resistant laminated glass
sizes, and may be further processed, e.g. edgeworked, drilled laminated glass designed to resist attack by means of an axe,
or face decorated etc crowbar, pickaxe, etc. and to delay access to a protected space
NOTE: In clause 2.1.6 to clause 2.1.10 the term ‘laminated glass’ can
for a short period of time.
also mean ‘laminated safety glass’.
[Link] bullet-resistant laminated glass
2.1.6 3ply laminated glass laminated glass designed to provide protection against
laminated glass manufactured from a pane of glass together firearm attack.
with either another pane of glass or plastics glazing sheet [Link] blast-resistant laminated glass laminated glass
material and another interlayer. designed to reduce the injurious effects of accidental or
2.1.7 5-ply laminated glass intentional blast forces.
laminated glass manufactured from either 3 panes of glass or 2.2.5 solar control laminated glass laminated glass
2 panes of glass and 1 pane of plastics glazing sheet material incorporating a body tinted and/or reflective float glass and/
together with 2 interlayers. or a tinted interlayer.
2.1.8 flat laminated glass 2.2.6 ultraviolet control laminated glass
laminated glass in which the constituent glass and/or plastics laminated glass incorporating a special interlayer which
glazing sheet materials have not been deliberately formed or absorbs > 99% of the ultraviolet radiation (measured over
bent in the course of manufacture. the range 280nm to 380nm) reaching the glass surface.
2.1.9 symmetrical laminated glass 2.2.7 acoustic laminated glass
laminated glass in which, from both outer surfaces, the laminated glass incorporating a special interlayer that gives
sequence of glass panes, plastics glazing sheet material enhanced sound reduction properties
and interlayer(s) by type, thickness, finish and/or general
characteristics is the same. 2.2.8 translucent laminated glass
laminated glass manufactured incorporating a patterned glass,
2.1.10 asymmetrical laminated glass a surface treated glass and/or a light diffusing interlayer
laminated glass in which, from both outer surfaces, the
sequence of glass panes, plastics glazing sheet material 3. Glass Components
and interlayer(s) by type, thickness, finish and/or general
characteristics is different. Laminated glass and laminated safety glass may be
manufactured from any combination of the glass types given
2.2 Products in Annex A.
Note: With the exception of clause 2.2.1 the term ’laminated glass’ can 4. Interlayers
also refer to ‘laminated safety glass’.
The types of interlayer materials available and their
2.2.1 laminated safety glass processing conditions are given in Annex B.
laminated glass where in the case of breakage the interlayer
serves to retain the glass fragments, limits the size of opening,
offers residual resistance and reduces the risk of cutting or
piercing injuries.
Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

5. Performance 6. Thickness and thickness tolerances

5.1 Laminated glass 6.1Nominal thickness

A laminated glass is one that conforms to the definition given The nominal thickness of a flat laminated glass or laminated
in EN ISO 12543-3 and meets the appropriate durability safety glass shall be the sum of the nominal thickness of the
tests as given in EN ISO 12543-4. constituent panes of glass, and plastics glazing sheet material,
and the interlayer(s).
5.2 Laminated safety glass
A laminated safety glass is one that conforms to the 6.2 Thickness tolerance (limit deviation on
definition given in EN ISO 12543-2 and meets the thickness)
appropriate durability tests as given in EN ISO 12543-4. It The thickness tolerance of the laminated glass/laminated
will require a pendulum impact performance classification in safety glass shall not exceed the sum of the tolerances of
accordance with EN 12600. the constituent glass panes, as specified in the appropriate
product standard (see Annex A), and that of the interlayer.
5.3 Laminated glass with fire resistant properties
6.2.1 Interlayer thickness tolerances
A laminated glass or laminated safety glass product, see The thickness tolerance of the interlayer is dependent on
clause 5.1 and clause 5.2, that incorporates as part of its the interlayer type (see Annex B).
makeup a ‘fire resistance’ glass pane.
Details of the tolerances are given in 6.2.2, 6.2.3 and 6.2.4.
NOTE: Fire resistance being determined and classified according to
EN 13501-2. Laminated glass containing different interlayer types is
covered in 6.2.5.
5.4 Fire resistant laminated glass A laminated glass
or laminated safety glass product, see 5.1 and 5.2, that 6.2.2 Folio interlayers
incorporates as part of its makeup intumescent interlayer(s), Thickness tolerances (limit deviations) to be taken into
i.e. an interlayer that reacts to high temperatures. account are given in Table 1a.

The interlayer can be either an intumescent one, i.e. one that Nominal Interlayer Thickness Limit Deviation
swells under heat, or a specialist cast in place resin layer that < 2 mm ± 0,1 mm
chars when subjected to fire.
≥ 2 mm ± 0,2 mm
NOTE: Fire resistance being determined and classified according to
EN 13501-2.
Table 1a Limits on deviation of folio interlayer(s)

5.5 Laminated security glass 6.2.3 Cast in place interlayer

A laminated glass or laminated safety glass product, see Thickness tolerances (limit deviations) to be taken into
clause 5.1 and clause 5.2, that when tested can meet the account for cast in place interlayers are given in Table 1b.
requirements of one and/or more of the following.
Nominal Interlayer Thickness Limit Deviation
5.5.1 Manual attack resistant laminated glass < 1 mm ± 0,4 mm
The performance requirements are determined and specified
≥ 1 mm < 2 mm ± 0,5 mm
in EN 356
≥ 2 mm to < 3 mm ± 0,6 mm
5.5.2 Bullet-resistant laminated glass The ≥ 3 mm ±0,7mm
performance requirements are determined and specified in
EN 1063 Table 1b Limits on deviation of cast in place
interlayer(s)
5.5.3 Blast-resistant laminated glass The performance
requirements are determined and specified in EN 13541
6.2.4 Fire resistant interlayer(s)
5.6 Ultraviolet control laminated glass The ultraviolet Thickness tolerances (limit deviations) to be taken into account
transmission is determined in accordance with EN 410. for fire resistant interlayers are given in Table 1c.

5.7 Acoustic laminated glass Nominal Interlayer Thickness Limit Deviation

The sound reduction properties are determined in < 1 mm ± 0,4 mm
accordance with ISO 22897. ≥ 1 mm < 2 mm ± 0,5 mm
NOTE: The product types in clauses 5.5, 5.6 and 5.7 may also be classified ≥ 2 mm to < 5 mm ± 0,6 mm
as laminated glass or laminated safety glass, see clauses 5.1 and 5.2. ≥ 5 mm ±1,0 mm

Table 1c Limits on deviation of fire resistant

interlayer(s)
Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

6.2.5 Combinations of interlayer types For translucent laminated glass manufactured from a patterned
The thickness tolerances (limit deviation) to be taken into glass the measurements shall be made by means of an instrument
account for combination interlayers is the square root of of the plate gauge type with a diameter of 55mm + 5mm.
the sum of the squares of the individual interlayer limit
deviations, rounded to the nearest 0,1mm. 7. Sizes and dimensional tolerances,
including displacement
6.3 Calculated nominal thickness and thickness
tolerances 7.1 Width B and length H
When laminated glass sizes are quoted for rectangular panes
These are given in the following examples: the first dimension shall be the width B and the second
dimension the length H as shown in figure 1:
EXAMPLE 1:
A laminated safety glass made from 2 panes of float glass of
3mm nominal thickness and a folio interlayer of 0,38mm.

From EN 572-2, the thickness tolerance on 3mm float glass

is ±0,2mm.

The folio interlayer is less than 2mm so the tolerance is H

±0,1mm

Therefore, the nominal thickness of the laminated glass is

6,4mm and the tolerance is ±0,5mm

EXAMPLE 2:
A 5-ply laminated security glass is made from 3 panes of
B B
nominal 3mm float glass and 2 x 1,14mm folio interlayers.
Figure 1 Examples of width, B, and length, H, relative to the pane shape
From EN 572-2, the thickness tolerance on 3mm float glass is
+0,2mm. NOTE: The maximum width and length of laminated glass are dependent
on the constituent glass and interlayer(s) used in its composition and on
The total thickness of folio interlayer is 2 x 1,14mm, i.e. 2,28mm. the manufacturing plant of each individual manufacturer. Each manufacturer
As this is >2mm then the tolerance on the interlayer is should indicate the maximum and minimum size they can produce.
±0,2mm.
7.1.1 Methods of measuring dimensions and squareness
Therefore, the nominal thickness of the laminated glass is The pane of glass shall not be larger than the nominal dimensions,
11,3 mm and the thickness tolerance is [ 3 x ±0,2 ] + given in accordance with 7.1, either increased by the upper limit
[ ±0,2 ] = ±0,8mm. deviation t 1 or smaller than the nominal dimensions reduced by
the lower deviation limit t 2 (see figure 2).
EXAMPLE 3:
A fire resistant laminated safety glass made from four sheets B+t
of float glass of nominal thickness 3 mm, a folio interlayer of
0,5mm thickness and two fire resistant interlayers of 1,5mm
thickness.

Nominal thickness:
4 x 3mm + 0,5mm + 2 x 1,5mm = 15,5mm t
H+t D2 H-t
1
Limit deviation: D
4 x (± 0,2mm) ± √(0,12mm +0,52mm+0,52mm) =
± 0,8 mm ± 0,714 mm = ± 1,5mm

Therefore, the nominal thickness of the fire resistant laminated

safety glass is 15,5 mm and the thickness tolerance (limit B-t
deviation) is ±1,5mm.
Figure 2 Tolerance Key
6.4 Measurement of actual thickness limits for dimensions of B - width
The thickness of the pane shall be calculated as the mean rectangular panes H - Length
of measurements taken at the centres of the four sides. The t - tolerance limits for dimensions
D - diagonals
measurement shall be taken to an accuracy of 0,01mm and
- glass pane
the mean is rounded to the nearest 0,1mm. The individual
measurements when rounded to the nearest 0,1mm shall also
be within the tolerances.
 Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

NOTE: The squareness of rectangular glass panes is expressed by

Nominal Dimension Maximum permissible
the difference between its diagonals.
B or H Displacement d
The difference between the two diagonal lengths of the B, H ≤ 1000 2,0 + 1a)
pane of glass shall not be larger than the deviation limit, v, as
1000 < B, H ≤ 2000 3,0 + 1a)
specified in Table 5.
2000 < B, H ≤ 4000 4,0
The limit deviations in Table 2 shall not be applied to fire B, H > 4000 6,0
resistant laminated glass and fire resistant laminated safety
glass. In these cases, the manufacturer shall specify the limit Table 4 Maximum Displacement
deviations. The limit deviations for the difference between a) (additional tolerance for thermally toughened and heat strengthened glass)
diagonals shall be in accordance with Table 3.
Dimensions in mm 8. Edgework
Nominal Nominal Nominal thickness > 8 mm
Dimension thickness 8.1 Laminated glasses incorporating thermally
Each glass pane At least one glass treated glass components
B or H ≤ 8 mm
< 10 mm nominal pane ≥ 10 mm Thermally toughened safety glass and heat strengthened glass
thickness nominal thickness
shall not be cut, sawn, drilled or edge worked before or after
≤ 2000 + 3,0 - 2,0 + 3,0 - 2,0 + 5,0 - 3,5 making into a laminate.
≤ 3000 + 4,5 - 2,5 + 5,0 - 3,0 + 3,0 - 2,0 NOTE: Thermally treated glass components may be individually
≥ 3000 + 5,0 - 3,0 + 6,0 - 4,0 + 7,0 - 5,0 worked before toughening or heat strengthening in accordance with
the applicable standard; e.g. EN 1863-1, EN 12150-1, EN 13024-1, and
Table 2 Limit deviations t on width B and length H EN 14179-1, EN 14321-1, EN 15682-1.

Dimensions in mm 8.2 Cut edge

Nominal Nominal Nominal thickness > 8 mm Cut edges shall be either originally cut edges of the
Dimension thickness constituent glass panes not subsequently worked (see Figure
Each glass pane At least one glass
B or H ≤ 8 mm 4), or the edges of the laminated glass which have been cut
< 10 mm nominal pane ≥ 10 mm
and not subsequently worked (see Figure 5).
thickness nominal thickness
≤ 2000 6 7 9
≤ 3000 8 9 11
≥ 3000 10 11 13

Table 3 Limit deviations, v, on the difference between diagonals

Figure 4
7.1.2 Limit deviations on width B and length H
Cut edge built by cut edges of the constituent glass panes not
Limit deviations on width B and length H shall be in
subsequently worked
accordance with Table 3 for finished sizes and stock sizes.
Any displacement shall be included in these limit deviations.

NOTE: Displacement is covered in 7.1.3.

If one component of the laminated glass is a toughened or

heat strengthened glass an additional tolerance of ± 3 mm
shall be taken into account.
Figure 5
7.1.3 Displacement Cut edge of cut laminated glass, not subsequently worked
Displacement d (see figure 3) is the misalignment at any one
edge of the constituent glass panes or plastic glazing sheet NOTE: The edges of fire resistant laminated glass and fire resistant
material making up the laminated glass. laminated safety glass may be protected by an adhesive tape.
B, H ± t 8.3 Worked edge
Details of the types of worked edges that are available are given
in 8.3.1 to 8.3.7.

8.3.1 Arrissed edge

The originally cut edges of the outer glass panes of the
laminated glass shall be ground off (see Figure 6).
d d

Figure 3 - Displacement
The maximum displacement d shall be as given in table 4.
Width B and length H shall be considered separately.
Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

2 - 3mm

≤ 60˚
> 30˚
Figure 6
Arrissed edge (with blank spots)
8.3.2 Ground edge Figure 10 Bevel edge
The glass shall be arrissed and flat ground (see Figure 7).

NOTE: Some bright areas may still exist on the edge face
8.3.6 Sawn edge
Sawn edge shall be obtained by cutting with a saw.
NOTE: The appearance is similar to ground edges but without bright
spots and arrising.

8.3.7 Water jet cut edge

Water jet cut edge shall be obtained by cutting with a water jet.
Figure 7
Ground edge (with blank spots) NOTE: The appearance is similar to ground edges but without bright
spots and arrissing.
8.3.3 Smooth ground edge
The edge face of the arrissed glass shall be ground and then 9. Flatness
smoothed with a finer grit than is used for ground edges, The flatness of laminated glass is dependant on the flatness
and all bright areas shall be removed (see Figure 8). of the constituent parts and can be influenced by the
manufacturing conditions.

For the flatness of final cut sizes of folio laminated glass ask
the manufacturer.

10. Appearance

10.1 Optical
Figure 8 Flat laminated/laminated safety glass is manufactured by
Smooth ground edge (no blank spots) combining the glass panes with an interlayer. The optical
quality is dependant upon the glass and interlayer type
8.3.4 Polished edge
and the lamination process employed to manufacture the
The previously smooth ground edge shall be polished in
product.
order to obtain a high lustre on the arrissed and smoothed
edges surface (see Figure 9). 10.1.1 Folio interlayer/lamination
The final product has the optical quality of the component
glass panes

10.1.2 Cast in place interlayer/lamination

The final product will not have the optical quality of the
component glass panes. This is caused by the laminated/
laminated safety glass developing a concave or convex shape.
Figure 9
Polished edge (no blank spots) 10.1.3 Intumescent interlayer
The final product may have the same optical quality of the
8.3.5 Bevelled edge component glass panes.
A bevel edge shall be smooth ground or polished edge with an
angle not exceeding 60°.The limit deviation on bevel angle shall 10.2 Visual including edge bubbles
be ± 3° (see Figure 10). The visual quality/appearance of flat folio laminated glass is
determined by means of a visual inspection test (see 10.2.4).
NOTE: For greater angles and their limit deviations the manufacturer
should be contacted. The presence of spot defects, linear defects and edge
bubbles will be allowed depending on their size, frequency,
The nominal dimension B or H shall be reduced by 2 mm to position, size of the pane, make-up of the pane of laminated
3 mm to cater for an arrissed edge. glass and whether or not they are obtrusive when the glass
is inspected.
Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

10.2.1 Defects in vision area - Defects of diameter < 5 mm allowed,

- Bubbles occupying < 5% of edge area allowed.
[Link] Spot defects
Spot defects which have been observed are noted and The edge area (see Fig 11) is defined with respect to the
measured. They are assessed in relationship to their size, d, edge width as follows:
see Table 5. - Area of pane < 5 m2 then edge width < 15mm,
- Area of pane > 5 m2 then edge width < 20mm
Size of
Defect,
d, mm Edge area

d < 0.5 Not considered

No limitation as long as no accumulations 1
0.5 < d < 1.0 of 4 or more defects (see Table 6a) Main area H

2
Limited according to area of pane
1.0 < d < 3.0
(see Table 6b)
d > 3.0 Not allowed
L
Table 5 Acceptance criteria for defects
Key Figure 11 Edge area to
1 - Edge area be examined on finished
Laminated glass Distance between 2 - Sight line of panel
make-up defects in mm sizes ready for glazing

3 ply ≥ 200
[Link] Defects in unframed edges
5 ply ≥ 180 When used unframed the edge quality should be in
7 ply ≥ 150 compliance with Clause 8.3.3, 8.3.4 or 8.3.5.
≥ 9 ply ≥ 100 The following defects:
- shells,
Table 6a Separation distances for accumulations not to occur
- bubbles,
- interlayer faults,
Size of pane, Number of permissible defects - interlayer retraction,
A, m2 3 ply 5 ply 7 ply ≥ 9 ply
are permissible if not obvious when subjected to the visual
A<1 1 2 3 4 inspection (see 10.2.4).
1<A<2 2 3 4 5
For laminated glasses incorporating thermally treated glasses
2<A<8 1/m2 1.5/m2 2/m2 2.5/m2 the following applies: exposed edges.:
A>8 1.2/m2 1.8/m2 2.4/m2 3/m2
• Surface faults as a result of the thermal treatment
Table 6b Number of permissible defects process allowed if not visible when inspected as
per 10.2.4.
[Link] Linear Defects
• Any bubbles around edges, cut outs, notches or drilled
Linear defects that have been observed are assessed as given
holes are allowed as long as they do not extend more
in Table 7.
than 15mm from the ‘edge’.
Number of permissible linear
Size of pane, 10.2.3 Interlayer defects
defects of length, l, mm
A, m2 These are not allowed in the vision area if obvious.
l < 30 1 ≥ 30
10.2.4 Inspection method
A<5 Allowed Not allowed The laminated glass pane to be observed is placed vertically,
5 <A < 8 Allowed 1 in front of and parallel to a matt grey screen, lit by diffused
daylight or equivalent.
A>8 Allowed 2
The inspection shall not be undertaken in direct sunlight nor
Table 7 Allowable linear defects
shall directional light sources, e.g. spotlights be used.
10.2.2 Defects in edge area The observer stands 3 meters from the glass observing it
perpendicularly (the matt screen being on the other side of
[Link] Framed edges
the glass).
Defects that have been observed in the edge area are
assessed as follows:
Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

The observer marks all defects that are disturbing when A.3 Thermally treated glasses
viewed under this regime. Thermally treated glass that is in accordance with the
following:
11. Marking
A.3.1 Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass EN 1863-2
There are no requirements in EN 14449, i.e. the hEN, for the
marking of laminated/laminated safety glass. A.3.2 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
EN 12150-2
11.1 Safety glazing regulations
The laminated safety glass when installed MUST be A.3.3 Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate
clearly and indelibly marked with the marking visible after safety glass EN 14179-2
installation. Details of critical locations, classification of
product to be installed and marking are given in BS 6262-4. A.3.4 Thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass
EN 13024-2
Marking shall consist of the following:
A.3.5 Thermally toughened alkaline earth silicate safety glass
• Manufacturer’s name or trade mark; EN 14321-2

• The standard number, i.e. EN 14449 A.3.6 Heat soaked thermally toughened alkaline earth
and silicate safety glass EN 15682-2

• Classification according to EN A.4 Chemically strengthened glass

12600, i.e. 3(B)3, 2(B)2 or 1(B)1. Chemically strengthened soda lime silicate glass that is in
accordance with EN 12337-2
11.2 Fire regulations
The latest version of England & Wales Building Regulation A.5 Acid etched, sandblasted glass
Approved Document B recommends that all installed fire
NOTE 1: Standards are being written for these products
resistant glass be marked. The marking must be clear and
visible after installation to allow unambiguous identification. NOTE 2: The treated surface should not be in contact with the
interlayer.
12 Health and Safety
A.6 Coated glass
The cutting of laminated glass and laminated safety glass has
Coated glass products that are in accordance with EN 1096-4.
to be undertaken safely.
NOTE: Care should be taken if the coating is to be in contact with the
The use of burning methylated spirits to warm the interlayer interlayer.
is considered unsafe and should be prohibited. The coated glass manufacturer’s advice should be sought.

ANNEX A ANNEX B
Glass components Interlayer types
A.1 Basic soda lime silicate glasses B.1 Folio Interlayer(s)
Soda lime silicate glasses products that are in accordance
with EN 572 -9. They are as follows: B.1.1 Poly vinyl butyral – pvb

A.1.1 Float glass EN 572-2 B.1.2 Poly ethylene acetate – eva

A.1.2 Polished wired glass EN 572-3 B.1.3 Poly urethane – pu

A.1.3 Drawn sheet glass EN 572-4 B.1.4 Ionoplast

A.1.4 Patterned glass EN 572-5 B.1.5 Others

A.1.5 Wired patterned glass EN 572-6 B.2 Cast in Place Interlayer(s)

A.2 Special basic glasses B.2.1 Poly methyl methacrylate – pmma

Special basic glass products that are in accordance with the
following: B.2.2 Poly urethane – pu

A.2.1 Borosilicate glass EN 1748-1-2 B.2.3 Epoxy

A.2.2 Glass ceramics EN 1748-2-2 B.2.4 Others

A.2.3 Alkaline earth silicate glass EN 14178-2 B.3 Intumescent Interlayer(s)

A.2.4 Alumino silicate glass EN 15681-2 B.3.1 Sodium Silicate

Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass

Annex C BS EN 14178-2: Glass in buildings - Basic alkaline earth

silicate glass products - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/
Bibliography Product standard
BS EN 356:2000 Glass in building.- Security glazing - BS EN 14179-2: Glass in buildings - Heat soaked thermally
Testing and classification of resistance against manual attack toughened soda lime silicate safety glass - Part 2: Evaluation
of conformity/Product standard
BS EN 410:1998 Glass in building - Determination of
luminous and solar characteristics of glazing BS EN 14321-2: Glass in buildings - Thermally toughened
alkaline earth silicate safety glass - Part 2: Evaluation of
BS EN 572-2: 2004 Glass in building- Basic soda lime silicate
conformity/Product standard
glass products - Part 2: Float glass
BS EN 14449: Glass in buildings - Laminated glass and
BS EN 572-3: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass
laminated safety glass - Evaluation of conformity/Product
products - Part 3: Polished wired glass
standard
BS EN 572-4: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass
BS EN 15681-2: Glass in buildings - Basic alumino silicate
products - Part 4: Drawn sheet glass
glass products - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
BS EN 572-5: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass standard
products - Part 5: Patterned glass
BS EN 15682-2: Glass in buildings - Heat soaked thermally
BS EN 572-6: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass toughened alkaline earth silicate safety glass -
products - Part 6: Wired patterned glass Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard

BS EN 572-9: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass BS EN ISO 12543-1: Glass in building - Laminated glass and
products - Part 9: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard laminated safety glass. - Part 1: Definitions and description of
component parts
BS EN 1063: Glass in building - Security glazing -
Testing and classification of resistance against bullet attack BS EN ISO 12543-2: Glass in building - Laminated glass and
laminated safety glass - Part 2: Laminated safety glass
BS EN 1096-4: Glass in building - Coated glass -
Part 4: evaluation of conformity/product standard BS EN ISO 12543-3: Glass in building - Laminated glass and
laminated safety glass - Part 3: Laminated glass
BS EN 1748-1-2: Glass in building - Special basic products -
Borosilicate glasses - Part 1-2: Evaluation of conformity/ BS EN ISO 12543-4:Glass in building. - Laminated glass and
Product standard laminated safety glass - Part 4: Test methods for durability

BS EN 1748-2-2: Glass in building - Special basic products - BS EN ISO 12543-5: Glass in building - Laminated glass and
Glass Ceramics - Part 2-2: Evaluation of conformity/Product laminated safety glass - Part 5: Dimensions and edge finishing
standard
BS EN ISO 12543-6: Glass in building. - Laminated glass and
BS EN 1863-2: Glass in buildings - Heat strengthened soda laminated safety glass -
lime silicate glass - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
ISO 22897: Glass in building - Glazing and airborne sound
standard
insulation - Product descriptions and determination of
BS EN 12150-2 Glass in building. - Thermally toughened soda properties
lime silicate safety glass. Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/
BS 6262-4: 2005 Glazing for buildings - Part 4: Code of
Product standard
practice for safety related to human impact
BS EN 12337-2: Glass in buildings - Chemically strengthened
England and Wales Building Regulations Approved
soda lime silicate glass - Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/
Document B Fire Safety
Product standard

BS EN 12600: Glass in building - Pendulum test -

Impact test method and classification for flat glass

BS EN 13024-2: Glass in buildings -

Thermally toughened borosilicate safety glass -
Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product standard

BS EN 13501-2: Fire classification of construction products

and building elements - Part 2: Classification using data from
fire resistance tests, excluding ventilation services

BS EN 13541: Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and

classification of resistance against explosion pressure
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Curved Glass Part 1:
Generalities – Definitions,Terminology, 4.12.1 February 2011

Properties and Basis of Measurement and Test

Contents 2.1.2 coated glass

A glass which has had an inorganic/organic coating applied either to
1. Scope a continuous moving ribbon of an annealed glass during its
manufacture, (on-line coating), or to individual pieces of annealed,
2. Definitions laminated or thermally treated glass, (off-line coating).
3. Symbols 2.1.3 thermally treated glass [thermally toughened,
heat strengthened, heat soaked thermally toughened]
4. Dimensional Characteristics
This is made by subjecting annealed glass, with the exception of
wired glass, to a temperature in excess of a specific temperature
5. Available Glass Types,Thicknesses
followed by a rapid controlled cooling, introducing a permanent
and Thickness Tolerances stress distribution within the [Link] stress distribution gives the
glass greatly increased resistance to mechanical and thermal stress.
6. Optical and Visual Quality
2.1.4 laminated glass
7. Properties Two or more panes of glass with an interlayer between them.
The interlayer(s) are permanently bonded to the glass panes.
8. Bibliography
2.1.5 insulating glass unit
An assembly consisting of at least two panes of glass, separated by
1. SCOPE one or more spaces, hermetically sealed along the periphery,
This part of Data Sheet 4.12: Curved Glass defines curved glass mechanically stable and durable.
and its types and gives
2.1.6 curved glass
• the terminology to be used to specify a curved glass; A pane of annealed glass that is heated above a specific
• the procedures, measurement and test methods for the temperature and then given a deliberate shape either by sag
determination of dimensional parameters and visual and bending or press bending.
optical quality;
2.1.7 curved annealed glass
• the range of available annealed glass types, thicknesses A curved glass that is allowed to cool down under controlled
and thickness tolerances. conditions after the bending process. As the glass has been re-
Data on maximum and minimum size and glass type/ thickness annealed during the process this type of curved glass can be cut.
availability is given in the product specific parts, i.e. Parts 2 to 5.
Also included in Parts 2 to 5 are the allowable dimensional and 2.1.8 curved thermally treated glass
quality limits. A curved glass that is subjected to rapid cooling after the bending
2. DEFINITIONS process so as to produce a permanent in-built stress distribution
For the purpose of this Data Sheet the following definitions apply: 2.1.9 curved laminated glass
2.1 Products Two or more panes of curved annealed glass that are laminated
together.
2.1.1 annealed glass
Glass that has been subjected to controlled cooling to reduce the 2.1.10 curved laminated thermally treated glass
presence of residual stresses in the glass thus allowing easy cutting. Two or more panes of curved thermally treated glass that are
It is glass that includes float glass, patterned glass and wired glass. laminated together.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Curved Glass Part 1: Generalities – Definitions,Terminology, Properties and Basis of Measurement and Test

2.1.11 curved coated glass and in a shell- shape appear around crossing points of wires in the
A curved coated glass: either a coated glass whose coating is stable case of annealed curved wired glass.
at the temperature of the bending process, or a curved glass that
2.2.8 curvature profile
has been through an off-line coating process.
Geometrical shape of the curved part of the curved glass.
NOTE: Care should be taken with coated glass to ensure that the Note: This can be a variety of profiles, e.g. simple curve, double
coating will not deteriorate during the processing, i.e. whether the curve, or an S-bend, J bend,V bend, etc.
coating is on the concave or convex surface. Due to their design
certain off-line coaters will only accept extremely shallow curves. 2.2.9 depth of bend
The measurement from the width to the furthest point of the curve
2.1.12 curved insulating glass units
An insulating glass unit manufactured from two or more panes of 2.2.10 edge straightness (warp)
curved glass. The deviation from straightness of the straight edges of the glass.
NOTE: The panes may be of any type of curved glass, i.e. annealed, Relative to a straight edge perpendicular to the edge.
thermally treated, laminated, coated. NOTE: Includes minor changes to glass thickness due to stretching
during forming/shaping.
2.2 Terminology (see Figure 1)
2.2.11 flat
The non-curved portion of a curved glass.
Figure 1
2.2.12 girth
The distance around the concave or convex surface measured
perpendicular to the rise including any flats.

2.2.13 gauge
Measurement tool for checking the curvature profile of the finished
product.

2.2.14 length
Dimension of the straight edge of the curved glass.

2.2.15 pock marks

Process surface blemishes that consist of small, shallow areas,
circular in shape, on the surface of the glass.
2.2.1 angle 2.2.16 ring marks
The angular measurement of a segment of a curve. Process surface blemishes, that consist of shallow marks, typically
running along the perimeter of the glass surface.
2.2.2 arc
The outside length of the curved portion of the bend. 2.2.17 rise
NOTE: Generally described as either interior arc or exterior arc. Segment between the middle of the arc of the circle and the
middle of the chord that subtends the arc
2.2.3 chord
2.2.18 shape accuracy
A straight-line segment that joins two points of an arc.
The accuracy of the contoured form including curvature, arc(s), and
NOTE: Generally described as either interior chord or even flats.
exterior chord.
2.2.19 side straightness (flatness)
2.2.4 concave Deviation from straightness of the face of the glass along the length
The ‘hollow’ face of curved glass of the glass at the straight edges. Relative to a straight edge at 90 o
to the face
2.2.5 convex
2.2.20 template
The ‘bulge’ face of curved glass.
A device manufactured, at a scale of 1:1, to determine the shape of
2.2.6 cross-bend deviation (sag) the product to be made.
Deviation from a straight edge along a line perpendicular to the 2.2.21 twist
curvature measured on either the convex or concave side
Deviation of one or more of the corners of the glass from the
2.2.7 cold crack same plane
Cracks caused by a difference of temperature of the surface in the 2.2.22 width
cooling process (e.g. around tong marks or ring marks) in a The overall width of the [Link] is not dependant on type
whisker-like or hair-like shape in case of curved toughened glass of curve. (see Figure 1)
Curved Glass Part 1: Generalities – Definitions,Terminology, Properties and Basis of Measurement and Test

3 SYMBOLS
For the purpose of this Data Sheet the symbols shown in Table 1 apply
:
Table 1. Symbols

SYMBOL DEFINITION COMMENT

a° Angle Measured in degrees
A Arc
Ca Chord
E Edge straightness (warp)
H Rise
F Cross Bend Deviation (sag)
L Length
Measured in mm.
R Radius
S Side straightness
T Thickness
V Twist
I Internal/inner These subscripts can be used with,
E External/outer Ca (as per definition 2.2.3) and R.

4 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS 4.2.4 Side straightness

4.1 General Side straightness is measured with the glass in a vertical position.
A straight edge steel ruler is placed vertically on the face of the
A curved glass is specified by the parameters given in Figure 1. glass, i.e. at 90o to the glass surface, at the edge of the glass pane.
All the parameters that have been given symbols in clause 3 can be The gap (S) between the face of the glass and the ruler is
checked as required; if applicable to the curve shape being determined (see Figures 3A and 3B).
[Link] checks that are required shall be defined for any
particular curved [Link] tolerances are dependant on the
method of manufacture and the final use of the product and should Figure 2A Edge Straightness (WARP)
be agreed between the parties

4.2 Measurement
4.2.1 General
Measurements of the shape and dimensional characteristics shall be
undertaken in accordance with the specific methods given below.

4.2.2 Shape, girth and height

The measurement of dimensions shall be either of the following
methods, corresponding to the shape of the curved glass.
a) In the case of height dimension, measure the length of
sides using a steel tape or a straight edge of 1mm scale
interval.
b) In the case of girth dimension and shape accuracy, measure
on the convex surface with a steel tape measure of 1mm
scale interval

4.2.3 Edge straightness (warp)

Edge straightness (warp) is measured with the glass in a vertical
position. A straight edge ruler is placed vertically along the length of
the glass at a tangent to the glass [Link] gap (E) between the edge
of the glass and the ruler is determined. (see Figures 2A and 2B)
Curved Glass Part 1: Generalities – Definitions,Terminology, Properties and Basis of Measurement and Test

4.2.5 Cross bend deviation (sag)

Figure 2B Edge Straightness (WARP)
Cross-bend deviation is determined by placing a straight edge along
the length of the glass, on the glass surface, perpendicular to the arc.
Measure the gap (F) between the glass and straight edge.
(see figures 4A and 4B)

NOTE: The gap can be measured at any point on the arc

Figure 3A Side Straightness Figure 4A Cross Bend Deviation or SAG

Figure 3B Side Straightness Figure 4B Cross Bend Deviation or SAG

Curved Glass Part 1: Generalities – Definitions,Terminology, Properties and Basis of Measurement and Test

4.2.6 Twist (V)

Figure 5 Twist
Twist shall be measured on the “vertical” of the curved glass
standing on its [Link] glass is positioned with the bottom
corners in tight contact with the bead against the back surface.
A top corner can be held against the surface, i.e. the one adjacent
to the [Link] actual distance that the other corner is away from
the surface is the twist value. (see figure 5)

4.3 Allowable deviations

These are given for the specific curved glass products in Parts 2 to
5 respectively.

5 AVAILABLE GLASS TYPES,THICKNESSES

AND THICKNESS TOLERANCES
Table 2 details the available annealed glass types, thicknesses and
thickness tolerances for basic soda lime silicate glass products in
accordance with the EN 572 series.

NOTE: Details for curved laminated glass is given in Part 4

Table 2. GLASS THICKNESSES AND THICKNESS TOLERANCES

Glass Type Nominal Thickness (mm) Thickness Tolerance (mm)

3 + 0.2
1
Float glass ; 4 + 0.2
5 + 0.2
2
Clear, Tinted, White, Coated 6 + 0.2
8 + 0.3
10 + 0.3
12 + 0.3
15 + 0.5
19 + 1.0
25 + 1.0

Polished wired glass 3 6 6.0/7.4

Wired patterned glass 4 7 + 0.6

8 + 0.8

Patterned glass 5 4 + 0.5

5 + 0.5
6 + 0.5
8 + 0.8
10 + 1.0
KEY
1 In accordance with EN 572-2
2 In accordance with EN 1096-1
3 In accordance with EN 572-3
4 In accordance with EN 572-6
5 In accordance with EN 572-5
Curved Glass Part 1: Generalities – Definitions,Terminology, Properties and Basis of Measurement and Test

6 VISUAL AND OPTICAL QUALITY faults can be [Link] will be covered in Part 4.
6.1 Optical Quality 6.2.4 Assessment of body faults
Any bending process will inevitably result in a product whose Assessment of body faults should be undertaken using the
optical quality is lower than that of the glass from which it method/criteria given, for the glass type. (see Parts 2 to 5)
was produced.
6.2.5 Assessment of surface faults
Surface distortion occurs during the process and is seen
particularly in [Link] can appear exacerbated when the When assessing surface faults, the pane should be observed under
glass is body tinted, surface coated or enamelled (printed) and/or normal daylight conditions at a distance of 3 metres and the angle
incorporated into insulating glass units. of observation should be normal (90O) to the particular part
(or section) of the glass surface being assessed.
The likelihood of distortion is increased with curved laminated glass
as there is more than one pane of glass [Link] laminating The pane should be vertical and may be glazed. A pane is deemed
process itself may also introduce other distortions to be acceptable if surface faults, e.g. scars, scratches, etc., are not
readily visible when viewed in transmission.
6.1.1 Method of assessing optical quality
When assessing optical quality the pane should be observed under 6.2.6 Assessment of lamination faults
normal daylight conditions at a distance of 3 metres and the angle When assessing lamination faults, the pane should be observed
of observation should be normal (90O) to the particular part (or under normal daylight conditions at a distance of 3 metres and the
section) of the glass surface being assessed. angle of observation should be normal (90O) to the particular part
(or section) of the glass surface being assessed
The focus of vision should be on an object not less than 1 metre The pane should be vertical and may be glazed.
behind the surface being assessed.
Specific details for the assessment of laminated curved glass and
6.1.2 Acceptance criteria the applicable acceptance criteria are given in Part 4.
The degree of any distortion will depend on the process used to
bend the glass and any subsequent processing e.g. [Link] 7. PROPERTIES
acceptability of optical distortion will depend on the application 7.1 Spectrophotometric
for the [Link] manufacturer/processor of the glass should
be consulted to agree the acceptability of the product in relation The light transmission and solar radiant heat properties of the glass
to the achievable quality and application. are unaffected by the high temperature of the curving process.

6.2 Visual Quality NOTE: On-line coated curved toughened glass may show slight
variations when compared with annealed [Link] can be
The visual quality is made up of body faults, i.e. those within the noticeable on a building façade with a mix of both products,
glass, and surface faults, i.e. those on the surface of the glass. depending on the weather.
With laminated glass other faults that can affect the visual quality
can result from the lamination process. 7.2 Acoustic
6.2.1 Body faults, e.g, seeds, bubble, etc. The curving process has no affect on the acoustic performance of
the glass.
The number, size and distribution of seeds, bubbles, etc, are defined
for the different glass types used to manufacture the curved glass 7.3 Mechanical strength
and are detailed in Parts 2 to 5.
The strength of curved glass can be assumed to be the same as a
However, there will be no change in the body faults as a result of flat pane of the same size, shape, glass type and thickness.
the high temperatures associated with the curving and/or thermal 7.4 Resistance to accidental human impact
treatment processes.
This will depend upon the type of curved glass and will be
6.2.2 Surface faults, e.g. scars, scratches, etc considered in Parts 2 to 5.
The number, size and distribution of scars, scratches, etc. are defined
for the different glass types used to manufacture the curved glass BIBLIOGRAPHY
and are detailed in Parts 2 to 5.
BS EN 572 – 1: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
However, the presence and number of surface faults will be products – Part 1: Definition and general physical and mechanical
influenced by: properties
• any cutting, edgeworking, etc. undertaken prior to the BS EN 572 – 2: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
glass bending process, products – Part 2: Float glass
• the glass bending process.
BS EN 572 - 3: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass
• use of body tinted/coated glass, and products – Part 3: Polished wired glass
• screen printing/enamelling

6.2.3 Laminating faults, e.g. interlayer defects,

entrapped air, etc.
Depending upon the lamination process being used a number of
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Curved Glass Part 2:
4.12.2 February 2011
Curved annealed glass

Contents 2. DEFINITIONS
The definitions in Data Sheet 4.12.2 apply
1 Scope

2. Definitions [Link]
The terminology in Data Sheet 4.12.2 applies
3 Terminology
4. AVAILABILITY
4 Availability
4.1 Glass types and thicknesses
5 Dimensional Characteristics The types and thicknesses of annealed glass, in accordance with EN
572-1, 2 3, 5 and 6 and EN 1096-1, available as annealed glass are
6 Visual and Optical Quality
given in Table 1.
7 Human Body Impact Thickness tolerances are given in Data Sheet 4.12.2:Table 2.
8 Bibliography 4.2 Maximum and minimum sizes
This will depend upon the type of bending equipment being used
1. SCOPE and the girth of the bend being [Link] following are
generally accepted as the limits:
This part of the Curved Glass Data Sheet deals with curved
annealed glass and details: Maximum dimensions
• glass types and thicknesses available; • length of pane, L, up to 5500mm
• maximum and minimum size availability; • girth of pane, G, up to 2400mm
• acceptable tolerance for dimensional characteristics;
• acceptance criteria for optical and visual quality. Minimum dimensions no limitation

Table 1. Available thicknesses of annealed glass

Glass type Thickness mm

3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 15 19 25
Clear X X X X X X X X X X

Float Tinted X X X X X X

White X X X X X X X X X

Surface X X X X X X X
coated
Patterned Clear X X X X X X

Wired Polished X

Patterned X X

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Curved Glass Part 2: Curved annealed glass

5. DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS 5.2 Squareness

5.1 Tolerances on length and girth The squareness of a pane is determined by measuring and
comparing [Link] allowable limits are given in Table 3.
The tolerances on length, L, and girth, G, are dependant on nominal
glass thickness rather than glass [Link] generally accepted values
are given in Table 2

Table 2 Size tolerances for various nominal glass thickness

Dimension, Tolerance on length, L, and girth, G,

Dimension,
L or G, Tolerance
for on length,
various nominal L, thickness,
glass and girth, G,
T,
L mm
or G, for various nominal glass thickness, T,
(mm)
mm (mm)
T>6 <6 T >10 12 & 15 19 & 25
T>6 <6 T >10 12 & 15 19 & 25
> 1000 +1 +2 +2 +4
> 1000 +1 +2 +2 +4
< 1000 +2 +2 +3 +4
< 1000 +2 +2 +3 +4

Table 3 Squareness — Allowable differences in lengths of diagonals

Length of diagonal, mm Allowable difference between diagonals, mm

Length of diagonal, mm Allowable difference between diagonals, mm
> 2000 4
> 2000 4
< 2000 5
< 2000 5

5.3 Tolerances on shape 7 HUMAN BODY IMPACT

5.3.1 Edge straightness (warp) 7.1 General

When determined in accordance with Data Sheet 4.12.1; clause The ability of a glass to withstand accidental human body impact
4.3.2 the maximum tolerance on the gap (E) shall be ± 3mm/m. is determined using a pendulum impact test, i.e. BS EN 12600.

5.3.2 Side straightness 7.2 Annealed glass; excluding wired glass

When determined in accordance with Data Sheet 4.12.1; clause Annealed glass in flat plates generally does not have a claimed
4.3.3 the maximum tolerance on the gap (S) shall be ± 3mm/m. impact performance [Link] annealed curved glass
will not be classified for its impact performance.
5.3.3 Cross bend deviation (sag)
7.3 Wired glass
When determined in accordance with Data Sheet 4.12.1; clause
4.3.4 the maximum tolerance on the gap (F) shall be ± 3mm/m. Certain types of wired glass, i.e. safety wired, in flat plates can be
classified in accordance with BS EN [Link] curved
5.3.4 Twist (V) safety wired glass can be similarly classified; see BS 6262 – 4;
When determined in accordance with Data Sheet 4.12.1; clause clause 10.
4.3.5 the maximum tolerance on the gap (V) shall be ± 3mm/m.

6 VISUAL AND OPTICAL QUALITY

See Data Sheet 4.12.1
Curved Glass Part 2: Curved annealed glass

8 BIBLIOGRAPHY

BS EN 572 – 1: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate

glass products – Part 1: Definition and general physical and
mechanical properties

BS EN 572 – 2: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate

glass products – Part 2: Float glass

BS EN 572 – 3: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate

glass products – Part 3: Polished wired glass

BS EN 572 – 5: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass

products – Part 5: Patterned glass

BS EN 572 – 6: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass

products – Part 6: Wired patterned glass

BS EN 1096 - 1: Glass in building – Coated glass – Part 1:

Definitions and classification

BS EN 12600: Glass in building – Pendulum test - Impact test

method for flat glass and classification

BS 6262 – 4: 2005: Glass for glazing – Part 4: Code of practice

for safety related to human impact
 Products, Glazing Techniques and Maintenance
SECTION 4
Curved Glass Part 3:
4.12.3 February 2011
Curved thermally treated glasses

Contents 2.2 curved heat strengthened glass

a curved glass that as part of its manufacturing process undergoes
1 Scope a heat strengthening process so as to give the product defined
mechanical and thermal strength and known fragmentation
2. Definitions behaviour (cross refer to EN 1863-1and Data Sheet 4.4.1)
3 Terminology 2.3 curved heat soaked thermally toughened glass
a thermally toughened curved glass that as part of its
4 Availability
manufacturing process undergoes a heat soaking process so as to
5. Edge Working give the product defined mechanical and thermal strength and
known fragmentation behaviour but also has a known behaviour
6 Holes and Cut-outs with respect to spontaneous breakage from critical nickel sulphide
inclusions. (cross refer to EN 14179-1 and Data Sheet 4.4.1)
7 Dimensional Characteristics
2.4 vertically (tong) curved thermally treated glass
8 Visual and Optical Quality a curved glass that is manufactured by suspending from tongs
during the curving and thermal treatment process
9 Human Body Impact
2.5 horizontally (roller) curved thermally
10 Bibliography treated glass
a curved glass that is supported by rollers, i.e. nominally horizontal,
Annex A. Compliance with United Kingdom Safety during the heat [Link] glass continues to be supported by
Glazing Legislation the rollers during the bending and thermal treatment processes.
NOTE: There are some furnaces where the glass is not supported
1. SCOPE by the rollers during the bending, where the glass is on a mould
This part of the Curved Glass Data Sheet deals with thermally that is transported on a chain, or where the glass is supported on a
treated curved glass and details: ring mould.
• glass types and thicknesses available; 2.6 tong marks (hanging points in vertical forming)
• maximum and minimum size availability; slight indentations slightly inboard of the top edge of vertically
curved glass, resulting from the method of holding or supporting
• specific criteria relating to edgework, holes, etc.; the glass with tongs.
• acceptable tolerance for dimensional characteristics;
2.7 ring moulds
• acceptance criteria for optical and visual quality. A device that supports the glass at its periphery during the
manufacturing process
2. DEFINITIONS
[Link]
The definitions in 4.12.1 apply together with the following:
The terminology in 4.12.1 together with the following applies:
2.1 curved thermally toughened glass
a curved glass that as part of its manufacturing process undergoes 3.1 roller wave distortion
a thermal toughening process so as to give the product defined Distortion produced in horizontal thermally treated glass as a result of
mechanical and thermal strength and known fragmentation the glass during the heating process being in contact with the rollers.
behaviour (cross refer to EN 12150-1 and Data sheet 4.4.1) This is a surface distortion produced by a reduction in surface flatness.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
 Curved Glass Part 3: Curved thermally treated glasses

4 AVAILABILITY The following are generally accepted as the limits:

4.1 Glass types and thicknesses • Maximum dimensions
The types and thicknesses of annealed glass, in accordance with EN • length of pane, L, up to 4200mm,
572-1, 2 and 5 and EN 1096-1, available that can be processed into • girth of pane, Ge, up to 2440mm
curved thermally treated glass are given in tables 1 and 2.
NOTE: There are furnaces on the market with larger specifications
Thickness tolerances are given in 4.12.1 for L and G.
4.2 Maximum and minimum sizes • Minimum dimensions
This will depend upon the type of bending equipment being used, • length of pane, L, 325mm;
the girth of the bend being produced and the glass type/thickness. • girth of pane, Ge, 220mm

Table 1. Available thicknesses of curved thermally toughened glass and curved heat soaked thermally toughened glass
Glass type Thickness mm

Glass type 3 4 5 6 8 10 mm 12
Thickness 15 19
Clear X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 X 8 X 10 X 12 X 15 X 19
Tinted
Clear X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Float
White
Tinted X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Float
Surface
White X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X
coated
Surface
Enamelled/ X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X
coated
Screen
Enamelled/
printed X X X X X X X X X
Patterned Screen X X X X X
Clear
printed
Patterned Enamelled
Clear X X X X X X X X X X

Enamelled X X X X X

Table 2. Available thicknesses of curved heat strengthened glass

Glass type Thickness mm

3 4 5 6 8 10
Glass type Thickness mm
Clear X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 X 8 X 10
Tinted
Clear X X X X X X X X X X X
Float
White
Tinted X X X X X X X X X X X
Float
Surface
White X X X X X X X X X X X X
coated
Surface
Enamelled/ X X X X XX X X X X X X
coated
Screen
Enamelled/
printed X X X X X X
Screen
printed
Curved Glass Part 3: Curved thermally treated glasses

5 EDGE WORKING

5.1 General
Any edge-working must be in accordance with the appropriate
European standard, i.e. EN 1863-1 for heat strengthened, EN
12150-1 for thermally toughened, EN 14179-1 for heat soaked
thermally toughened.
It is important that the edge remaining after mitre bevelling is
not less than 2mm or 1/3rd of the glass thickness, whichever is
the larger.
Figure 1a: Arrissed edge
Normally every glass, which is to be thermally treated, has to be (with blank spots)
edge-worked prior to thermal [Link] simplest type of
edge-working is the arrissed or linished edge (see Figure 6a).
Other common types are shown in Figures 6 b) to 6d).
For specialist edge-work, such as water jet cutting, or" as cut" edges
the manufacturers should be consulted.

5.2 Profiled edges

Various other edge profiles can be manufactured with different
types of [Link] manufacturer should be consulted

6 HOLES /CUT-OUTS

6.1 Warning Figure 1b: Ground edge

(with blank spots)
Thermally treated curved glass should not be cut, sawn, drilled or
edge-worked after thermal treatment.
6.2 General
This section deals with the types, sizes and position of holes/cut
outs that can be incorporated within thermally treated curved glass
of thickness of 4 mm and greater. Tolerances are given on hole/cut-
out size and position. Comments are made on the quality of
edge-work-associated holes/cut-outs.
Where there are more than four holes in a plate, the total area of
all holes exceeds one sixth of the plate area or the glass is 3mm,
the manufacturer should be consulted.
Figure 1c: Smooth ground edge
6.3 Round Holes (no blank spots)
6.3.1 General
This standard considers only round holes in glass that is not less
than 4mm nominal [Link] manufacturer should be
consulted about edge-working holes.

6.3.2 Diameter of holes

The diameter of holes, shall not, in general, be less than the nominal
thickness of the glass. For smaller holes, the manufacturer should be
consulted about edge-working holes.
6.3.3 Limitations on position of holes
In general, the limitations on hole positions relative to the edges of
the glass pane, the corners of the glass pane and to each other Figure 1d: Polished edge
depends on:
The nominal glass thickness (d);
The dimensions of the pane (B, H);
The diameter of the hole (ø);
The shape of the pane;
The number of holes.
Curved Glass Part 3: Curved thermally treated glasses

The recommendations given below are those, which are normally

available and are limited to panes with a maximum of 4 holes.
1) The distance, a, of the edge of a hole to the glass edge
should be not less than 2d.
2) The distance, b between the edges of two holes should be
not less than 2d.
3) The distance, c, of the edge of a hole to the corner of the
glass should not be less than 6d.
NOTE: If one of the distances from the edge of the hole to the
edge of the glass is less than 35mm, it can be necessary to position
the hole asymmetrically with respect to the corner.
The manufacturers should be consulted.
6.3.4 Tolerances on hole diameters
The tolerances on hole diameters are given in Table 3.
Dimensions in millimetres

Table 3: Tolerances on hole diameters

Nominal Hole Diameter Tolerances

Ø (mm)

4 ≤ ø ≥ 20 ± 1,0

20< ø ≥100 ± 2,0

100<ø Consult the manufacturer

6.3.5. Tolerances on positions of holes

The tolerances on positions of holes are the same as the
tolerances on the width, B, and the length, H, (see Table 4).
The positions of holes are measured in two directions at right
angles (x- and y-axis) from a datum point to the centre of the
[Link] datum point is generally chosen as a real or virtual
corner of the pane (see Figure 10 for examples) The position of a
hole (X,Y) is x t, y t), where x and y are the required dimensions
and t is the tolerance from Table 2.

6.4 Notches and cutouts

Many configurations of notches and cutouts can be supplied .
The manufacturers should be consulted about edge working of
notches and cut-outs.
NOTE: radius (minimum 10mm) not less than glass thickness.
Curved Glass Part 3: Curved thermally treated glasses

7 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS Surface distortion occurs during the process and is seen
particularly in [Link] can appear exacerbated when the
7.1 General glass is body tinted, surface coated or enamelled (printed).
The dimensional tolerances of curved thermally treated glass are
dependent upon the actual dimensions of the curved glass, the 8.1.1 Method of assessing optical quality
type of curve and the equipment being used for the curving and When assessing optical quality the pane should be observed under
thermal treatment processes. normal daylight conditions at a distance of 3 metres and the angle
of observation should be normal (90o) to the particular glass
7.2 Thickness
surface being assessed.
Details of the available thicknesses of thermally toughed and heat
soaked thermally toughened are given in Table 1 and heat The focus of vision should be on an object not less than 1 metre
strengthened in Table 2 respectively. Information on thicknesses behind the surface being assessed.
tolerances is given in 4.12. 1;Table 2.
8.1.2 Acceptance criteria
7.3 Tolerances on Length and width The pane will be deemed acceptable if there is no significant
These are determined on the piece of glass before it has been distortion of the image in transmission.
subjected to the curving and thermal treatment processes.
8.2 Visual Quality
Allowable tolerances are given in Table 4.
8.2.4 Assessment of body faults
Table 4: Tolerances on width B and length H Assessment of body faults should be undertaken using the
method/criteria given, for the glass type. (EN 572-2 and 5)

Dimension of Tolerance 8.2.5 Assessment of surface faults

nominal width, B, When assessing surface faults, the pane should be observed under
or length, H normal daylight conditions at a distance of 3 metres and the angle
d < 8mm d < 8mm
of observation should be normal (90o) to the particular glass
surface being [Link] pane should be vertical and may
> 2000 ± 2,0 ± 3,0 be glazed.

2000<B,H>3000 ± 3,0 ± 4,0 9. HUMAN BODY IMPACT

> 3000 ± 4,0 ± 5,0 9.1 General

The ability of a thermally treated glass to withstand accidental
human body impact is determined using a pendulum impact test,
7.4 Tolerances on shape i.e. BS EN 12600.

7.4.1 Edge straightness (warp) 9.2 Curved thermally toughened and curved
When determined in accordance with 4.12. 1; clause 4.3.2 the heat soaked thermally toughened glass
maximum tolerance on the gap (E) shall be ± 3mm/m. These glass types, if properly manufactured, will be capable of being
classified by a pendulum impact test. However, these test methods
7.4.2 Side straightness are designed to be used with flat plate materials and not with
When determined in accordance with 4.12. 1; clause 4.3.3 the curved [Link] the performance will have to be
maximum tolerance on the gap (S) shall be ± 3mm/m. determined by indirect methods.

7.4.3 Cross bend deviation (sag) Annex A gives details of a compliance certificate that shows the
When determined in accordance with 4.12.1; clause 4.3.4 the way to give impact performance classification.
maximum tolerance on the gap (F) shall be ± 3mm/m.
9.3 Curved heat strengthened glass
7.4.4 Twist (V) Heat strengthened glass in flat plates does not obtain an impact
When determined in accordance with 4.12.1; clause 4.3.5 the performance [Link] curved glass heat strengthened
maximum tolerance on the gap (V) shall be ± 3mm/m. glass will not be classified for its impact performance.

8. VISUAL AND OPTICAL QUALITY

8.1 Optical Quality
Any bending process will inevitably result in a product whose
optical quality is lower than that of the glass from which it
was produced.
Curved Glass Part 3: Curved thermally treated glasses

10. BIBLIOGRAPHY

GGF Data Sheet 4.4.1: Thermally treated soda lime

silicate glass products

BS EN 572 – 1: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass

products – Part 1: Definition and physical and mechanical
properties

BS EN 572 – 2: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass

products – Part 2: Float glass

BS EN 572 – 5: Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass

products – Part 5: Patterned glass

BS EN 1096 - 1: Glass in building – Coated glass – Part 1:

Definitions and classification

BS EN 1863 – 1: Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass -

Part 1: Definition and description

BS EN 12150 – 1: Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety

glass - Part 1: Definition and description

BS EN 12600: Glass in building – Pendulum test - Impact test

method for flat glass and classification

BS EN 14179 - 1: Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime

silicate safety glass - Part 1: Definition description

BS 6262 – 4: 2005: Glass for glazing – Part 4: Code of practice

for safety related to human impact
Curved Glass Part 3: Curved thermally treated glasses

Annex A Toughened Glass with United Kingdom BS EN 12150-2 also lists the use of ‘measurement of optical pre-
‘Safety Glazing’ Legislation stress’ as a factory production control [Link] may be employed
if optical pre-stress had been measured during the initial type
Toughened Glass with United Kingdom ‘Safety Glazing’ testing of the product, i.e. proving it meets it definition, and
LegislationPresent legislation in the United Kingdom, i.e. Part N1, classifying it for it’s pendulum body impact behaviour, i.e. testing in
Part P2 and Part V1, all require the use of a ‘safety glass’presently accordance with BS EN 12600.
defined in accordance with BS 6206 and, in the future classified in
accordance with BS EN 12600. Unfortunately both of these test The thermally toughened curved glass manufacturer can prove
methods have been developed to test flat sheet material and that the product is equivalent to a thermally toughened soda lime
cannot test curved [Link], the existing situation is silicate safety glass by the following:
that there is no method of proving that a curved thermally
toughened glass can be regarded as a ‘safety glass’. • Manufacturing to an equivalent level the curved product
as a flat product;
The situation as given in BS 6262 – Part 4: 1994 is that specialist
glazing products, such as curved glass, may be deemed to comply • Ensuring that the product fragmentation and mechanical
if a flat pane of the same material, thickness etc. meets the strength; and surface pre-stress, where applicable, are
standard (BS 6206).The following has been taken from the equivalent;
revision of BS 6262 – Part 4:
• Ensuring that the flat product can be classified 1(C)- when
BS 6262 Part 4: 2005 tested in accordance with BS EN 12600;
Clause 3.11 safety glass
• Operating a factory production control system in line with
glass product conforming to BS EN 572-3, BS EN 572-5, BS EN that given in BS EN 12150-2
12150-1, BS EN ISO 12543-2, BS EN 13024-1 or BS EN 14179-1
that has a performance classification in accordance with BS EN This should allow the manufacturer to make the following claim:
12600
“Thermally toughened curved glass can be treated as
Clause 11 Specialist glazing products equivalent to a thermally toughened soda lime silicate
Bent (curved), profiled and corrugated glass or plastics, or glass or safety glass, in accordance with BS EN 12150-1, with a
plastics bullions, should be acceptable if a flat pane of the same pendulum impact classification equivalent to 1(C)-.”
type, thickness and quality of material conforms to the
NOTE: All references to ‘thermally toughened’ and EN 12150 can
recommendations given in Clause 8.
equally apply to ‘heat soaked thermally toughened’ and EN 14179.
Clause 8 – Requires the use of safety glass with specific
BS 6206:1981 – Specification for the impact performance
classification, in accordance with BS EN 12600, depending on the
requirements of flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in
critical location/pane dimensions.
buildings
The new BS 6262 – Part 4: 2005 refers to the BS EN standards
BS 6262 – Part 4: Code of practice for Glazing for buildings –
for the glass product, i.e. BS EN 12150-1 for thermally toughened
Part 4 Safety related to human impact
soda lime silicate safety glass. Whilst BS EN 12150-1; specifically
excludes ‘curved toughened glass’ it does define for ‘flat BSEN 12150-1: Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda
toughened glass’ the principal criteria. A thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 1: Definition and description
lime silicate safety glass is defined by the following:

• Fragmentation;
• Mechanical strength: determined by means of a 4-point
bending test.
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
GGF Emergency Glazing Group
- Making safe procedures 5.1.1 August 2012

Scope The order given below is unimportant.

This Data Sheet is not intended to be an exhaustive list of making 1. Wooden boards fixed to temporary wooden sub-frames by
safe methods, but is to be considered as ‘best practice’ guidance means of screws/nails/clamps. Sub-frame to be wedged or fixed
relating to making safe assemblies and is to be considered as the with minimum damage to existing building [Link] minimum
methods which have been sanctioned by the Federation’s thickness of the wooden boards to be 8mm plywood or
Emergency Glazing [Link] methods given are suitable for equivalent (excluding materials denoted above) and the
most vertical applications, and subsequent Data Sheets will give minimum size of the sub-frame is to be 50mm x 50mm sawn
more comprehensive information of materials and fixing softwood. In the case of annealed glass the whole of the glass
methods to be used on non-vertical applications. panel must be boarded and not only the glass area damaged.
Definitions
2. Wooden boards fixed to the laminated glass only by means
Making safe of a fast setting [Link] boards can be fixed either to the
Making safe with a structure consisting of either flat pieces of sawn inside or outside of the glass and must be a tight fit to the
timber or glass or rigid material (excluding chipboard, hardboard or primary framing.
materials which degrade due to dampness of water), specifically
constructed to make safe with minimal damage to the building 3. Laminated safety glass patches fixed to the existing damaged
fabric and adequate for 24 hours to a glass area which is either laminated glazed surface by means of fast setting adhesive thus
damaged or broken. allowing light into the premises with the exposed edges finished
in accordance with BS 952: Part 2. It is important that the edge
Primary Frame remaining after the treatment is not more than 2mm.
The fixed frame which substantially contains the broken glazed
element. 4. For application of self adhesive heavy duty safety film to the
damaged surface area of the glass within the primary frame.
Sub Frame Note: only acceptable for laminated glass.
A frame usually of wood fixed on one side of the primary frame to
assist in making the premises safe for 24 hours. 5. Where practicable to cut out the damaged glass and reglaze
with the right glass in the right place (Health, Safety and
Care of property Welfare) Regulations 1992, Regulation 14, Document N of
On completion, the site should be left in a clean and tidy condition the Building Regulations and BS 6262 Part 4.
with all broken glass to be removed from site unless specifically
requested otherwise by the [Link] Code of Good Practice of 6. Wooden boards fixed within the rebate of the existing
the Glass and Glazing Federation should be strictly observed primary frame after the damaged glass has been safely
particularly in respect of the protection of the property in which removed. Any beads to be replaced temporarily but securely.
the installation is taking place. Boards to be stiffened where required.
Classifications 7. Wooden boards fixed in a sandwich construction – one board
There are a number of methods of making safe and the Glass and inside and one board outside securely bolted together with any
Glazing Federation list the acceptable major making safe methods nuts on the inside face.
which operatives and Members of the GGF Emergency Glazing
8. Where a frameless toughened glass door has been destroyed,
Group will endeavour to use when called upon to do so.
the opening is initially boarded up. A temporary wooden door
All methods recommended herein will make the glass breakage in a subframe can then be fixed in a followup visit, should
and premises safe within the criteria laid down by the Group. access be required.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
email: info@[Link] omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
[Link] in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Emergency Glazing Group - Making safe procedures

Installation
When considering which method to be installed it will be
paramount in the mind of the operator that no additional damage
to the existing primary frame should be inflicted unless under
exceptional circumstances where this should be kept to a minimum.
Performances
We have already established that there are many methods of
making safe and it cannot be over emphasised that the primary
purpose of the method to be used is to make the premises safe
with minimal damage to the building fabric and adequate for
24 hours.
• Special Applications
SECTION 5
Design, Installation and Performance
5.10 M AY 1 9 9 0
of Secondary Sashes made of
Aluminium, uPVC or Wood
1. Scope 2.9 Secondary sash. A panel or panels, (2) panels which slide either horizontally or
sometimes with an outer frame, fitted on vertically within an outer frame.
This document deals with secondary sashes the room side of a primary window, to
fitted to the room side of primary windows provide improved thermal and/or sound 3.3 Size and arrangement of panels.
and which have frames made from aluminium, insulation. For aesthetic reasons, secondary sashes
uPVC or wood or a combination of these should be sub-divided into a number of
materials. It includes all forms with opening 2.10 Stile. A vertical member of a panel of a panels in such a way that their horizontal
and/or fixed panels containing glass or plastics horizontally sliding secondary sash. and/or vertical members align with
sheet glazing materials. members in the primary windows.
2.11 Sub frame. A frame, usually of wood, However, this may not be practical, or
2. Definitions fixed on the room side of a primary further sub-division may be necessary to
For the purpose of this Standard the following window to which either the outer frame restrict the size of the panels so that they:
definitions apply: or panel is fixed or secured. (1) are capable of being cleaned. (Consider
strength, weight of panel, reach. See
2.1 Batten. A length of wood fixed to an 2.12 Venting. Making special provision for air also 3.6.)
internal reveal of a window opening or infiltration through the primary window (2) are efficiently sealed when closed.
to the primary window, or to which the into the cavity between the window and (Consider strength of panel, number o
outer frame or panel is fixed or secured. the secondary sash. fixings.)
(3) will resist the wind loading. (Consider
2.2 Glazing material. A material that 2.13 Weatherstripping. Material fitted to the strength of panel number of fixings.)
produces a joint between the glass or outer frame or to the panels to reduce (4) will comply with operating force
plastics and the surround. (Not to be air penetration. requirements. (Consider strength of
confused with glass or plastics sheet panel, weight of panel.)
glazing materials.) 3. General Principles (5) will permit access to the primary
window opening lights. (see 3.7.)
2.3 Hardware. Fittings which are used to 3.1 Purpose
operate and/or secure the panels. Secondary sashes supplement primary 3.4 Safety When Handling Panels.
windows for the purposes of providing Any panel which is removable for cleaning
2.4 Outer frame. The fixed perimeter frame improved thermal and/or sound insulation should generally be restricted in weight to
of a secondary sash which, in some and in some cases, depending on the lack of approximately 30Kg maximum, to allow it
designs, is necessary to support the panel airtightness of the primary windows to which to be handled by two persons with a
or panels. they are fitted, of reducing air infiltration into reasonable degree of safety. Where there
the room. It should be noted that the is a specific customer requirement which
2.5 Plastics sheet glazing materials. A rigid installation of secondary sashes will affect will exceed this limit, he must be advised
sheet of plastics, used for making the the number of air changes in the rooms of the total weight involved and his
secondary sash. and the internal air tempera-ture and, acceptance must be obtained.
although they will provide thermal Where there is a requirement for the
2.6 Panel. The glazed frame of a secondary insulation, a reduction in condensation on panel to be removable by one person, its
sash. the glazing may not be achieved. weight should be reduced substantially.
These limits are for a normal domestic
2.7 Primary window. The existing window 3.2 Types of secondary sashes. Depending situation. For non-domestic situations
which, after the installation of a on the type and design of the primary where removal of the panel will be carried
secondary sash, will form the outer unit window, secondary sashes may consist of: out by professionals, these limits can be
of the double or multiple glazing system. (1) panels which are hinged or easily increased.
removable, fitted directly into the
2.8 Rail. A horizontal member of a panel of a primary window, or fitted to an 3.5 Perimeter sealing.
vertically sliding secondary sash. outer frame. It is important that the secondary sash

Glass
Glass
and
and
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:
020
020
7939
7939
9100
9100Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042
042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Design, Installation and Performance of Secondary Sashes made of Aluminium, uPVC or Wood. May 1990

assembly (outer frame and panels (when except for details such as nibs, interlocks, accordance with BS 6262.
closed)) are as efficiently sealed as etc., which may be thinner. Glazing thickness shall be in accordance
practicable against air penetration, to The finish of the aluminium should be: with BS 6262 for the appropriate wind
minimise the amount of warm air entering (1) anodised to BS 1615 and having a loading and safety requirements. (See
the space between the panels and the minimum thickness of 5 microns. also Appendix A for a guide to suitable
primary window, and to minimise the (2) Stoved organic finish to BS 4842. glass thicknesses.)
entry of colder air into the room. The
primary window when closed will normally 4.1.2 uPVC 4.1.9 Glazing materials.
provide sufficient air infiltration to allow Extruded members shall be of a suitable Glazing gaskets shall be of such materials
the cavity to breathe to the outside air formulation which is chemically stable as neoprene, EPDM rubber to BS 4255
without additional venting. (See 6.5.) during extrusion and resistant to chemical Part 1 and Part 2, or plasticised PVC.
attack and weathering. The colour shall (note: Plasticised PVC must not be used
3.6 Access for cleaning. be stable. No finish is necessary. with plastics sheet glazing materials.)
The arrangement of the panels, their size, Other glazing materials shall be in
type and location in relation to the 4.1.3 Wood. accordance with BS 6262.
primary window, should allow both The quality shall comply with the
surfaces of the glazing in the panels and requirements of BS 1186 Part 1. The 4.2 Construction
the inner surface of the primary window workmanship shall comply with the
to be cleaned from within the room. requirements of BS 1186 Part 2. 4.2.1 Outer frame and panel joints.
Where the outer surface of the primary The wood shall be treated as necessary Corner joints may be stepped or flush.
window is cleanable from inside, the fitting to render it substantially durable. Advice In aluminium or uPVC constructions, the
of secondary sashes should not make this on preservation of timber may be surfaces of flush joints formed by
impractical unless otherwise agreed with obtained from BRE Technical Note 24. mechanical means (e.g. screwing or
the customer. cleating) may deviate from the same
4.1.4 Joint sealing materials. plane only within the limitations imposed
3.7 Provision of Ventilation. The perimeter of the outer frame and by the extrusion tolerances. Joints in
Where provision is to be made for the corner joints in that frame and in the wood which are designed to be flush,
ventilation, this should be by either sliding panels shall, where necessary, be sealed shall be sanded flush if they would
or hinged panels, positioned also to against air penetration with joint sealing otherwise deviate from the same plane.
provide access to allow the outer window materials which will withstand stresses
4.2.2 Sliding Panels.
to be opened. The fitting of the secondary during assembly, transportation,
With the exception of interlocking
sash should not impede the operation of installation and normal use.
portions of meeting rails and stiles:
the primary opening lights unless
otherwise agreed with the customer. 4.1.5 Hardware. (1) aluminium or softwood sliding
Hinges, handles, thumb turns and similar panels shall not slide directly upon
3.8 Provision of escape in emergency. devices shall be of materials resistant to, or against outer frames of the same
The GGF recommends that its members or suitably protected against, atmospheric material.
and their agents will always draw the corrosion and shall not react with (2) uPVC sliding panels shall not slide
attention of potential customers to the adjacent materials and finishes. directly upon uPVC outer frames.
absence of means of escape, and will have Hardwood panels may slide upon
available in their product range opening 4.1.6 Weatherstripping. or against hardwood outer frames.
replacement and opening secondary The weatherstripping shall be of materials Vertically sliding panels shall be
windows which will provide the means of which do not react adversely with the supported on balancing devices, or
escape, if required by the customer. panel and frame materials and finishes. they may be prevented from
dropping by spring loaded bolts at
4. Specification 4.1.7 Fastenings and fixings. both jambs which locate against
All screws and other fastenings and stops provided at intervals in the
4.1 Materials fixings shall be compatible with the outer frame jambs.
materials with which they are in contact
4.1.1 Aluminium. and shall be corrosion resistant. 4.2.3 Hinged and removable panels.
Extruded aluminium members shall be However, this requirement does not The hinges on hinged panels and bearing
fabricated from designated treated alloys apply to timber secondary sashes and devices on removable panels shall be
6063TB, 6063TE, or 6063TF complying sub-frames which are adequately capable of supporting the panel during
with requirements of BS 1474, or from protected by paint. its normal use.
special alloys required when integral
colour anodising is to be carried out. 4.1.8 Glass and plastics sheet glazing materials. 4.2.4 Safety.
The aluminium profiles used in the The type and quality of the glass shall be It shall not be possible for any panel to
construction of the outer frames and in accordance with BS 952, and that of become unintentionally disengaged when
panels shall be not less than 1.2mm thick, plastics sheet glazing materials shall be in operated normally without abuse.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

Design, Installation and Performance of Secondary Sashes made of Aluminium, uPVC or Wood. May 1990

4.2.5 The finished installation. 5.4 Thermal insulation. Federation should be strictly observed,
The panels, including any exposed edges As the design of secondary sashes is particularly in respect of the protection
to the glazing and outer frame, shall be such that the cavity between the glazing of the property in which the installation
free from any sharp edges, burrs and the of the primary window and that of the is taking place.
like that might be a hazard to the user. secondary sash is at least 19mm, the The customer’s attention should be
U value may be assumed to be 2.9 drawn to the installer’s Terms of Contract.
5. Performance W/m2 º[Link] of the cavity to the
outside (See 3.5) should have no 6.2 Provision for fixing.
5.1 Air penetration. significant effect on the thermal
Air penetration through the secondary insulation. 6.2.1 Fixing direct to the primary window
sash shall be minimised by providing: frame.
(1) a virtually airtight seal round the 5.5 Accoustic performance. Where the width of the flat inside
perimeter of the subframe or outer Assuming the secondary sash has air surface of the window frame is
frame. penetration restricted as described in insufficient to provide a proper seating
(2) sealing any frame corners which 5.1, the acoustic performance which can for the weatherstripping in the panels
would otherwise cause air be expected from the combination of and for the fitting of hinges or other
infiltration through them. the primary window and a glass fitments, the surface may be extended by
(3) effective performance of the seals secondary sash, based on laboratory the application of wood beading.
around the perimeter of the panels. tests, has been determined as follows, Similarly, wood may be added to provide
It shall be appreciated that the assuming a sound absorbent lining is a flush surface where the existing frame
performance of these seals may be fitted to the reveals: members are not in alignment.
limited by the need for ease of
operation, and that small gaps are Primary 6.2.2 Fixing to the reveals of the window
inevitable at the ends of the window Secondary Approx opening.
glass Cavity sash glass dB
meeting rails or stiles. Where it is not possible to fix the
(mm) (mm) (mm) reduction
secondary sash direct to the primary
5.2 Wind resistance. 4 100 4 38 window, or where a wider cavity is
The secondary sash shall resist the wind 4 200 4 40 required for the purpose of sound
loading, calculated in accordance with BS 4 200 6 42 insulation, a timber sub-frame or timber
CP3 Chapter V Part 2 without 6 200 6 44 battens may be fixed to the aperture.
permanent deformation and with a The joint between the timber and the
maximum deflection of 1/125th of the Note 1. For comparison: primary window surfaces of the aperture should be
span of panel framing members. alone, 4mm annealed glass – 25dB, sealed against air penetration with
6mm annealed glass – 27 dB. mastic, sealant, foam strip or other
5.3 Ease of sliding. suitable materials.
For horizontally sliding panels, the initial Note 2. The approximate dB reductions If a sealant is used, acrylic water-based
force to be applied to the operating quoted for glass are also valid for sealant is particularly suitable for this
handle (wherever located), or one-third plastics sheet glazing materials. purpose as it can be decorated.
of the way up the stile in cases where
the handle grip is incorporated in the 6. Installation 6.3 Fixed the outer frames (where
section forming the stile, shall not exceed applicable).
whichever is the greater of 120N or 6.1 Care of property. The perimeter joint to the window
120N per quare metre of panel. Before proceeding with any work the frame, sub-frame or battens should be
Thereafter, a force not exceeding the customer should remove any furniture sealed against air penetration either by
greater of 80N or 80N per square fixtures and fittings from areas where mastic, sealant, foam strip or by
metre of panel shall be capable of they might otherwise be damaged during mechanical means (e.g. by an aluminium
maintaining the panel in motion. the installation. nib forced into a groove in the timber),
For vertically sliding panels hung on Sufficient dust sheets or protective as appropriate to the design
balances, the initial force shall not exceed coverings should be used and the utmost For secondary sashes which contain
the greater of 180N or 180N per square care should be taken to avoid dirtying of, horizontally sliding panels, it may be
metre of panel. Thereafter a force not or damage to, floor coverings and to the necessary to fit a support under the sill
exceeding the greater of 120N or 120N decorated surfaces adjacent to the member of the outer frame to prevent
per square metre of panel shall be windows. Some damage adjacent to the deflection of this member when the
capable of maintaining the panel in installation may be unavoidable, but weight of both panels occurs centrally
motion. The force shall be applied at the reasonable care must be taken to keep on the sill member.
mid point of the bottom rail. this to a minimum. The outer frame should be fixed square,
For vertically sliding panels not hung on On completion, the site should be left in plumb and without any bow, within limits
balances the weight of each panel should a clean and tidy condition. The Code of which allow the panels to operate or be
not exceed 6Kg. Good Practice of the Glass and Glazing removed freely and without loss of

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

Design, Installation and Performance of Secondary Sashes made of Aluminium, uPVC or Wood. May 1990

airtightness performance due to the 6.4.2 Fitting to outer frames. Appendix A: Guide to Suitable Glass
weatherstripping not being in full contact Sliding or removable panels should be Thicknesses
over its width. fitted into the outer frame(s) in such a Secondary sashes may be subjected to the
way that: same wind loads as the primary windows
6.4 Fixing of fitting the panels. (a) they provide a continuous because the latter may be left open, or
weatherstripping contact to achieve because the cavity between them may be
6.4.1 Fixing to primary windows, sub-frames the necessary airtightness vented to the outside.
or battens. performance. When calculating the wind loading as
Hinged or removable panels should be (b) they will not accidentally become described in 4.1.8, it will be found that most
fixed using a sufficient number of fittings dislodged, (but not all) low rise buildings are subjected to
such as hinges, thumbturns and other (c) they can be readily removed, if loads of up to 1000N/m2. A manufacturer may
retaining devices to: required, avoid the procedure of calculating the wind
(a) provide a continuous (d) they operate as intended. loading for each contract by selecting and
weatherstripping contact to achieve using a loading which will be adequate for any
the necessary airightness 6.5 Venting the cavity. contract carried out within an area selected by
performance, and Where it is considered necessary to him, i.e. by always using the maximum loading
(b) adequately support the panels in the make provision in the primary window which can occur within that area.
closed position and, in the case of to vent the cavity, the customer should The following chart gives typical examples of
hinged panels, also when they are be informed and his agreement obtained thicknesses of glass according to area of pane,
open for cleaning or [Link] before proceeding with any modification suitable to resist the wind loading. However,
panels should be fixed plumb and to the primary window. smaller sizes than those shown in the chart will
square and with adjacent panels often be necessary in the interests of safety
aligning with one [Link] may 6.6 Decoration. when closed or when the panels are being
be, however, limitations imposed by Unless otherwise agreed with the handled, or if the deflection when using this
deviations in the shape of the customer, decoration will be confined to glass exceeds the limits laid down in 5.2.
primary windows, e.g. they may be an initial coat of paint, varnish or stain to Attention is drawn to Clauses 4.7 and 5.7 on
out-of-square. any timber supplied and fitted. Safety in BS 6262,

Examples of Maximum Glass Pane Sizes to Resist Different Wind Pressures

Square panes Rectangular panes (3:1 aspect ratio)
3mm 4mm 3mm 4mm
Wind
Pressure Area L Area L Area I L Area I L
N/m2 m2 mm m2 mm m2 mm mm m2 mm mm
600 1.8 1350 3.4 1840 2.4 890 2670 4.4 1210 3630
700 1.5 1220 2.9 1700 2.1 830 2490 3.8 1120 3360
800 1.3 1140 2.5 1580 1.8 770 2310 3.3 1050 3150
900 1.2 1090 2.3 1510 1.6 730 2190 3.0 1000 3000
1000 1.1 1050 2.0 1410 1.4 680 2040 2.7 950 2850

Key: L = Longer side if rectangular panes, or length and height of square panes.
I = Shorter side of rectangular panes.

Areas and lengths have been derived from BS 6262 with the figures rounded.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

• Special Applications
SECTION 5
Recommendations for the use of Glass in Furniture
5.12 S E P T EM B ER 1 992
As detailed in BS 7376 and BS 7449

Contents 0 Foreword applied in accordance with the

0 Foreword The objective of this Data Sheet is to manufacturer’s recommendations.
1 Definitions stimulate careful thought and to assist in With regard to film backed glass, the
the design, specification and supply of glass surface shall be the working surface.
1.1 Annealed Glass
glass when used in the construction of Not all safety films are suitable for
1.2 Annealed Patterned (Cast) Glass tables, trolleys, cabinets, shelves, shelving application to clear glass as the clarity
1.3 Film backed Annealed Glass systems, wall hung and free standing mirrors. varies, although when films are applied to
1.4 Flat Laminated Safety Glass The Glass and Glazing Federation issues the back of mirrors, clarity is immaterial.
1.5 Toughened Glass & Heat Soaked this Data Sheet as a guidance to glass
Toughened Glass suppliers, furniture designers and all other 1.4 Flat Laminated Safety Glass
specifiers dealing with glass in furniture. (in accordance with BS 6206)
2 Performance Testing
For more detailed information, this data Flat laminated glass consists of two or
3 BS 6206: 1981 Impact Performance
sheet should be read in conjunction with more panes of glass, (a type classified in
Requirements BS 952 Part 1), with an organic interlayer
BS 7376 and BS 7449.
4 Edgework, Bevelling and Drilling of reinforcing material between each
5 Contact between Glass and Other Recommendations for the use of Glass pane. Under carefully controlled
Materials in Furniture as detailed in BS 7376 processing, the interlayers are
6 BS 7376: 1990 Inclusion of Glass and BS 7449 permanently bonded to the glass over
in the Construction of Tables or the entire glass [Link] interlayers
Trolleys 1 Definitions are resistant to penetration, absorb
The types of glass referred to by the impact shock, hold the glass in place,
6.1 Trolleys that contain a Heating
Data Sheet are detailed below. and prevent excessive spalling of
Device.
glass fragments.
6.2 Support of Glass in Tables and 1.1 Annealed Glass
Trolleys Annealed glass can be float glass, sheet 1.5 Toughened Glass and Heat Soaked
6.3 Glass in Tables and Trolleys glass or tinted float glass. If it is broken Toughened Glass (in accordance with
supported over entire area and penetrated, the resulting edges of the BS 6206)
7 BS 7449 Inclusion of Glass in the dislodged pieces will be hazardous. Toughened glass is produced by
Construction of Furniture other than subjecting annealed glass to a process of
Tables or Trolleys, including Cabinets, 1.2 Annealed Patterned (Cast) Glass heating and rapid cooling which produces
Shelving Systems and Wall Hung or This is rolled glass, one surface of which high compression in the surface and
has a patterned or decorated texture. compensating tension in the centre.
Free Standing Mirrors
A range of patterns are available in For this reason, toughened glass cannot
7.1 Glass used in External Surfaces
varying thicknesses according to the be cut, drilled, surface worked or edge
7.2 Sliding Doors and Fixed Glasses design, providing varying degrees of worked. All machine work should be carried
retained in a Rebate or Groove obscuration and defusion. Patterned glass out prior to the toughening process.
7.3 Hinged Doors, Lids or Flaps is weaker than annealed glass. Toughened glass can be up to four to
incorporating Framed or Unframed five times stronger than annealed glass,
Glass 1.3 Film Backed Annealed Glass toughened and heat soaked toughened
7.4 Glass Shelves and Mirrors glass will resist many minor impacts
This is annealed glass coated with a film without breaking.
7.5 Calculation for Shelf Specification
or covered with specially formulated When toughened glass is broken it
8 Marking
organic materials intended to hold the shatters into relatively harmless pieces.
9 Standards referred to by glass together after breakage. If broken Thicker toughened glass when broken
BS 7376 and BS 7449 the glass will be difficult to penetrate has a greater tendency to stay together,
10 Technical Services providing the coating or covering is and fall in a cluster.

Glass
Glass
and
and
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:
020
020
7939
7939
9100
9100Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042
042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Recommendations for the use of Glass in Furniture GGF Data Sheet 5.12.

2 Performance Testing
Area of Glass Nominal Thickness
It is a requirement that furniture
manufacturers undertake performance Toughened Laminated Annealed
testing such as horizontal static load, Glass to Glass to Glass
vertical impact and horizontal fatigue BS 6206 BS 6206
tests when using annealed glass that is
not supported over its entire area. m2 mm mm mm
Where glass is used in tables, different ≤0.25 ≥4.0 ≥6.4 ≥10.0
tests are required to be carried out >0.25 to ≤0.50 ≥5.0 ≥6.4 ≥10.0
according to the varying nature of >0.50 to ≤0.75 ≥6.0 ≥6.4 ≥12.0
support, whether the glass is annealed >0.75 to ≤1.50 ≥8.0 ≥8.4 ≥15.0
and whether or not it is safety glass that >1.50 ≥10.0 ≥10.4 ≥19.0
complies with BS 6206.
Furniture that contains glass must meet Table 1. Minimum thickness of glass that is not supported over its entire area
the stability requirements of BS 4875 or
must be supplied with wall fixings and 6 BS 7376: 1990 Inclusion of Glass in 2
1.5m and fully supported over its entire
be appropriately labelled. the Construction of Tables or Trolleys area must comply with the relevant
nominal thickness given in Table 2.
3 BS 6206: 1981 Impact To ensure the reasonable safety of flat 2
Glass with an area greater than 1.5m and
2
Performance Requirements glass with an area greater that 0.02m , BS fully supported over its entire area shall
The impact test specified in BS 6206: 7376 identifies the utilisation of glass that be at least 4.0mm toughened or 4.4mm
1981, “Impact Performance Requirements is or is not supported over its entire area laminated.
for Flat Safety Glass and Safety Plastics and lays down the minimum BS 6206
for use in Buildings” determines the classification on glass thicknesses, 7 BS 7449 Inclusion of Glass in the
performance of safety materials and type and support. Construction of Furniture other than
comprises of a leather bag weighing Tables or Trolleys, including Cabinets,
approximately 45kg being swung against 6.1 Trolleys that contain a Heating Device Shelving Systems and Wall Hung or Free
the material being tested which, in turn, All flat glass components of trolleys that Standing Mirrors
must withstand the impact or break safely contain a heating device shall comply with BS 7449 details performance, thickness
as defined in BS [Link] material is the requirements of BS 3193. and other relevant requirements to
then marked A, B, or C according to the “Specification for Glass Components for ensure the reasonable safety of flat glass
drop height endured. Safety classification Domestic Appliances”. with an area greater than 0.06m .
2

Class A is the highest.

6.2 Support of Glass in Tables 7.1 Unbacked Glass Used in External
4 Edgework, Bevelling and Drilling and Trolleys Surfaces
Exposed edges of glass shall be If glass is horizontally moved to extreme This includes glass doors, mirrored doors,
edgeworked or bevelled (see Table 1 of positions in any direction, its edges must mirrors and glass panels.
BS 952: Part 2: 1980). For screw fixings of simultaneously overlap all supports by a Unbacked glass is either glass that has no
drilled mirrors see GGF Data Sheet 4.8 minimum of [Link] glass is supported backing immediately behind its entire area
“Recommendations for Fixing Mirrors”. on cushioning pads, the minimum horizontal or is fixed to a backing or backboard that
When machining or drilling of toughened area of each support should be 36mm. does not pass the impact test as shown
glass is required, reference should be Annealed glass must be supported for not in Appendix A or BS 7449.
made to the GGF Data Sheet 4.4 “GGF less than 50% of its [Link] support Mirrors and vertical glass that are parallel
Standard for the Quality of Thermally must be placed in at least two non-adjacent to and less than 25mm from a wall when
Toughened Glass for Buildings”. If possible regions and not more than 100mm from in the intended position, are classed as
laminated glass should not normally be the edge of the glass. backed glass.
drilled because moisture attack can Toughened, laminated or annealed glasses
cause delamination. shall comply with the relevant nominal 7.2 Sliding Doors and Fixed Glasses
thickness as shown in Table 1. Retained in a Rebate or Groove
5 Contact Between Glass and The reference to minimum BS 6206 The edge cover provided by the rebate
other Materials classification and complying thickness or or groove must be at least 4mm or equal
In the construction of furniture there annealed glass may only be used in the to the glass thickness if this is more than
shall be no metal to glass, stone to glass, context of these British Standards. 4mm.
or glass to glass [Link] materials
shall be separated by at least 0.5mm. 6.3 Glass in Tables and Trolleys 7.3 Hinged Doors, Lids or Flaps
Separation should be ensured by the use supported over its entire area incorporating Framed or
of a suitable interlayer. Glass which has an area no greater that Unframed Glass

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

Recommendations for the use of Glass in Furniture GGF Data Sheet 5.12.

Figure 1
Minimal Normal Thickness
Area of Glass
Annealed Toughened Laminated Film
Glass Glass Glass backed
Glass

m2 mm mm mm
≤0.5 ≥4.0 ≥4.0 ≥4.4 ≥4.0
>0.5 to ≤1.0 ≥5.0 ≥4.0 ≥4.4 ≥4.0
>0.1 to ≤1.5 ≥6.0 ≥4.0 ≥4.4 ≥4.0
>1.5 to ≤1.50 See Below ≥4.0 ≥4.0 See Below

Table 2. Nominal thickness for glass that is supported over its entire area

Hinged components incorporating glass Glass shelves that are not enclosed in a
shall be tested in accordance with cabinet shall comply with at least Class C
Appendix C of BS 7449 which involves of BS 6206.
loading and slamming tests, performed by
the furniture manufacturer and must not 7.5 Calculation for Shelf Specification
result in damage to the glass nor whole The maximum safe load shall be NOTE: Shaded areas represent shelf supports

or partial detachment from the unit determined by reference to the choice of Figure 1 Unsupported Length L of Shelf
either by structural failure of a hinge or material, nominal thickness and length for Calculation of Maximum Evenly
slippage in a hinge mounting. in Table 3. Distributed Safe Load
In specifying the glass material and
7.4 Glass Shelves nominal thickness consideration shall be
The maximum evenly distributed safe given to the shelves suitability for end use. Example
load that a shelf can support depends on The strength of non-rectangular and Material - Toughened Glass to BS6206
the glass type, thickness and distance rectangular shelves not supported as Shelf dimension span 1000mm x 200mm
between supports, shown in Figure 1 must be established by depth
(see Figure 1 and Table 3). the test method detailed in Appendix D3 Thickness - 6mm
When calculating using the methods of BS 7449.
shown, the recommended load should be From Table 3 maximum uniformly
The maximum safe uniformly distributed 2
equal to or greater than the maximum distributed load = 95KG/M .
load.
load stated by the furniture manufacturer
in his instruction leaflet; (see “marking Example In order to obtain the working load for a
section”).The maximum concentrated The calculation for loading of shelving. particular shelf, the shelf depth is required
2
load may be taken as half the maximum Material - Annealed Glass and from this the shelf area in M .
evenly distributed load. Shelf dimension span - 1000mm x 200mm ... for depth of 200mm. Shelf Area
2
When a glass shelf is moved to extreme depth = 1000mm x 200mm = 0.2M .
positions horizontally, it should still Thickness - 6mm Maximum load carrying conformity
overlap all supports by at least 4mm. From Table 3 maximum uniformly ... Maximum uniformly distributed load x
Furniture with doors must comply with this distributed load = 32 KG/M. Shelf Area
requirement when the doors are open. In order to obtain the working load for a = 95 x 0.2 = 19KG.
When the furniture or shelving system is particular shelf, the shelf depth and the Shelf is capable of supporting a load
o o
tilted to an angle of 30 plus or minus 2 , distance between supports is required (see of 19KG evenly distributed over its
2
the shelf must still be retained. Where Figure 1) and from this shelf area in M . surface, or a concentrated load not
doors are fitted, this requirement must ... for depth of 200mm. Shelf Area = exceeding 9.5KG.
2
be adhered to when the doors are in 1000mm x 200mm = 0.2M .
the open position.
... Maximum load carrying capacity = 8 Marking
A shelf must not tip nor the supports fail Maximum uniformly distributed load x Detailed marking and labelling
when a load, equivalent to 50% of the ... Shelf Area in M2. = 32 x 0.2 = 6.4KG. requirements are contained within both
maximum evenly distributed load and Shelf is capable of supporting a load these standards which must be referred to.
covering an area of 75mm x 75mm, is of 6.4KG evenly distributed over its These include:
placed at any position on it for a least surface, or a concentrated load not 1 The compulsory marking of glass
10 seconds. exceeding 3.2KG. complying to BS 6206. BS 6206

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

Recommendations for the use of Glass in Furniture GGF Data Sheet 5.12.

Table 3. Maximum evenly distributed safe load per unit area supported by a glass shelf for determining safe loading capacity (in kg/m2)
for a given unsupported length, thickness and type of glass

Type of glass Nominal X, the maximum evenly distributed safe load per unit area (in kg.m2) supported by the following lengths % of glass (in mm)
thickness % of
glass (in mm) 300 400 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
Annealed 4 153 86 55 38 33 28 24 21 19 17 14 11 10 8 7 6
5 244 137 88 61 52 45 39 34 30 27 22 18 15 13 11 10
6 356 200 128 89 76 65 57 50 44 40 32 26 22 19 16 14
8 627 353 226 157 134 115 100 88 78 70 56 47 39 33 29 25
10 995 559 358 249 212 183 159 140 124 111 90 74 62 53 46 40
12 1447 814 521 362 308 266 232 203 180 161 130 108 90 77 66 58
Laminated 4 69 39 25 17 15 13 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 4 3 3
6 166 93 60 41 35 30 27 23 21 18 15 12 10 9 8 7
8 305 172 110 76 65 56 49 43 38 34 27 23 19 16 14 12
10 487 274 175 122 104 89 78 69 61 54 44 36 30 26 22 19
12 711 400 256 178 152 131 114 100 89 79 64 53 44 38 33 28
Toughened 4 988 417 213 123 97 78 63 52 43 37 27 20 15 12 10 8
5 1991 840 430 249 196 157 127 105 88 74 54 40 31 24 20 16
6 2997 1482 759 439 345 276 225 185 154 130 95 71 55 43 35 28
8 5283 2972 1775 1027 808 647 526 433 361 304 222 167 128 101 81 66
10 8383 4716 3018 2054 1615 1293 1051 866 722 608 444 333 257 202 162 131
12 12197 6861 4391 3049 2598 2240 1845 1520 1268 1068 778 585 450 354 284 231
Cast 4 129 73 47 32 28 24 21 18 16 14 12 10 8 7 6 5
6 320 180 115 80 68 59 51 45 40 36 29 24 20 17 15 13
10 895 503 322 224 191 164 143 126 111 99 81 67 56 48 41 36

requires such markings to be 9 Standards Referred to by BS 7376 Part 3: 1983 Storage Furniture.
permanent and applied before and BS 7449
installation, in a position to remain Extracts from British Standards are BS 6206 1981
visible after installation, although the reproduced with the permission of BSI. Specification for impact performance
actual position can be specified. Complete copies of the standard can be requirements for flat safety glass and
2 Marking or permanent labelling of the obtained by post from BSI Publications, safety plastics for use in buildings.
furniture with: Linford Wood, Milton Keynes, MK14 6LE.
a) the number and date of the British BS 6250
Standard BS 952 Glass for glazing: Domestic and contract furniture.
b) the manufacturer or suppliers name Part 1: 1978 Classification Part 3: 1983 Specification for
and address Part 2: 1980 Terminology for work on glass. performance requirements for cabinet
c) a means of identification, i.e. model, furniture.
batch or serial number BS 3193 1989
d) full details of the glass incorporated Specification for thermally toughened glass 10 Technical Services
into the furniture including its type and panels for use in domestic appliances. The information above is a guide only to
whether or not it complies with Class the use of glass in tables and furniture as
A, B or C of BS 6206. specified by BS 7376 and BS 7449.
BS 3447 1962
e) a statement regarding the
Glossary of terms used in the
replacement of chipped or
glass industry.
broken glass.
3 The provision of further information in
the form of an instruction leaflet BS 4875
which will contain specific warnings Strength and stability of furniture.
and to include statements as to the Part 5: 1985 Methods for determination
safe loading of shelves; the need for of strength of tables and trolleys
the user to protect the edges Part 8: 1985 Methods for determination
of film backed and laminated glass; of stability of storage furniture.
from moisture and the need to use
wall fixings where appropriate. BS 5459
The list of marking requirements above is Specification for performance
not complete and reference must be requirements and tests for office
made to the full standards. furniture.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

 Special Applications
SECTION 5
Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed
5.18.1 February 2009
Polymeric Filmed Glass

Contents 2. Definitions and Description to the glass from the room side, at a
distance of not less than 2 [Link]
Foreword See GGF Datasheet 5.18.3 “GGF shall be carried out in natural daylight, not
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed in direct sunlight, and shall assess the
1. Scope Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: normal vision area with the exception of
Definitions, Descriptions and a 50 mm wide band around the
2. Definitions and description
Components”. perimeter of the unit.
3. Cure time
3. Cure time 5.2 Externally applied film
4. Inspection for visual quality
Installed film has a discrete time for full The glass with applied film shall be viewed
5. Inspection conditions adhesion to be effected since installation by looking through the film at right angles
utilises a detergent solution in water to to the glass from either side as
6. Acceptance criteria float the film onto the glass; the excess appropriate at a distance of not less than
water is squeegeed out but inevitably 2 [Link] shall be carried out in
7. Inspection of perimeter zone
residual water will remain between the natural daylight, not in direct sunlight, and
8. Edge gaps film and [Link] time to achieve full shall assess the normal vision area with
adhesion is often referred to as "the the exception of a 50 mm wide band
9. Splicing of film adhesive cure time". Adhesion will be around the perimeter of the unit.
increasing from a lower value during this
[Link] light reflections [Link] and adhesive cure time is 6. Acceptance criteria

11. Marking of safety film related to thickness and type of film used.
6.1 Internally applied film
Typical visual cure times may be extended
12. References or shortened according to local The installation shall be deemed
environmental conditions. acceptable if any of the following are not
Foreword
visually disturbing (effects during visual
4. Inspection for visual quality
This standard has been developed by the cure should be disregarded):
GGF Applied Film Group, in association Inspection for optical quality can be made
Dirt Particles Water Haze
with all major film manufacturers, to before full visual cure is [Link] 1
define the visual quality standard for provides a guide for typical visual cure Hair and Fibres Scores and Scratches
adhesive backed polymeric filmed glass. times for adhesive backed polymeric film
not containing layers of metal, alloys, Adhesive Gels Film Distortion
1. Scope oxides and similar coatings. It should be Fingerprints Creases
noted that effects during cure, such as
This standard details the acceptable visual
water bubbles, water distortion, and water Insects Air Bubbles
quality for adhesive backed polymeric film
haze are not to be regarded as defects.
(“film”) applied to architectural glass. Edge Lift Nicks and Tears
Adhesive backed polymeric filmed glass is 5. Inspection conditions
not expected to have identical visual Initial inspection may be undertaken
quality as the glass on which it is installed. 5.1 Internally applied film within 1 day of [Link] quality
The following criteria apply to the shall be judged by looking through the
installed film only and not to any defect The glass with applied film shall be viewed film installation under the conditions
inherent in the glass. by looking through the film at right angles described in section 5.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Filmed Glass

6.2 Externally applied film installation fault. For thicker films of > 200 µ This mark shall be permanent, and applied
the edge gaps will normally be < 4 mm, during installation in a position so that it will
The installation shall be deemed acceptable depending upon frame / glazing conditions. remain completely visible and readable after
if any of the following are not visually installation. Examples of permanent marking
disturbing (effects during visual cure should An edge gap of < 2 mm is recommended include non-reusable labels (e.g. perforated
be disregarded): for darker (tinted, metallised, or brittle labels that peel from the substrate
tinted/metallised, and sputtered) films to in small pieces) and UV stabilised ink
Water Haze Hair and Fibres minimise the light line around the edge of printing.
the installed film.
Scores & Scratches Adhesive Gels
Table 1
Film Distortion Fingerprints 9. Splicing of film Typical cure times for film (section 3)

Creases Air Bubbles Splicing of film is necessary when larger Film thickness/µ Typical cure
panels of glass are treated, where both times/days
Edge Lift Nicks and Tears length and width of the glazing panel
Up to 100 30
exceed the maximum width of [Link]
Dirt Particles Insects 100 to 200 60
splice line itself should not be viewed as a
Initial inspection may be undertaken within 1 [Link] line should be straight and 200 to 300 100
day of [Link] quality shall be should be parallel to one edge of the frame
[Link] two pieces of film may be butt 300 to 425 140
judged by looking through the film installation
under the conditions described in section 5. jointed, and should be close but not
touching; the maximum gap at any point in Note:Typical cure times are for the installed
Due to the conditions existing in external the splice line should be 1 mm. Film of less product to reach acceptable visual quality
installations the visual quality of applied film than 50µ may be overlapped, spliced or and are not to be confused with time to
may not be as good as for internally applied butt jointed. performance. Cure times will be extended
film. However, the installation quality should for certain environmental conditions, e.g. low
not reduce the performance and / or the Note: In some cases a butt joint (e.g. safety / temperature and / or high humidity and / or
expected life of the applied film. security film) is necessary on glazing panels external blinds drawn down to shade the
that are subject to bow. In these cases the film from direct sunlight.
7. Inspection of perimeter zone gap along the splice may have to be greater
than 1 mm. 12. References
7.1 Internally applied film
[Link] light reflections Current GGF Datasheets for adhesive backed
The 50 mm wide band around the polymeric film are:
perimeter shall be assessed by a similar It should be noted that visible light
procedure to that in 4 and 5, but a small reflections can be changed by installation of 5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed
number of particles are considered window [Link] is especially the case for Polymeric Filmed Glass”
acceptable where poor frame condition films with deposited layers containing metal,
mitigates against the high quality standards metal alloys, or [Link] is not a defect, 5.18.2 “Installation Quality Standard for Applying
normally achieved. but is a natural consequence of the high Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film to Glass”
performance coatings used within
7.2 Externally applied film the film. 5.18.3 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
The 50 mm wide band around the Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass:
11. Marking of safety film
perimeter shall be assessed by a similar Definitions, Descriptions and Components”
procedure to that in 4 and 5, but allowing Safety films used to comply with BS 6262-4,
for a small increase in defects since "Safety related to human impact", shall be 5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
external environmental conditions usually correctly marked to show compliance with Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the
mitigate against the high quality standards the relevant British Standard (BS EN Overhead Position for Containment of Glass in the
normally achieved. 12600).The marking shall be as follows: Event of Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions
in Use”
8. Edge gaps (a) an identifiable name, or trademark, or
other mark capable of identification through 5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
Edge gaps will normally be 1- 4 mm without a suitable source* Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the
allowing the film to contact the frame / Overhead Position for Containment of Glass in the
glazing margin, gaskets, or similar, but may (b) the type of material, i.e.“F” for film Event of Failure:Test Method”
need to be greater where frame / glazing applied glass
conditions do not allow close fitting of the 5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations for Blast
applied [Link] edge gap allows for the (c) the number of the British Standard, BS
Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
water used in the installation to be EN 12600
Applied to Glass”
squeegeed out and ensures that film edges (d) the classification according to BS EN 12600
are not raised up by contact with the frame 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion
margin. Contact with the frame margin *e.g. through the Glass and Glazing Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
could lead to peeling of the film, and is an Federation. Applied to Vertical Flat Glass”
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
Installation Quality Standard for Applying
5.18.2 April 2008
Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film to Glass

Contents 1. Scope - Cleaning / application solution

Foreword This standard details the typical - Cutting machine

equipment, test methods, application and
1. Scope acceptance criteria applicable to the - Access equipment
process of applying adhesive backed
2. Definitions and description - Trimming knife
polymeric film (“film”) to glass.
Information is given on preparation of a - Glass scraper
3. Appropriate equipment / materials
method statement covering site risk
4. Pre-checks [Link] certified applicator shall - Window cleaning squeegee
install the window film in accordance with
5. Location preparation this GGF standard, and the manufacturer’s - Application squeegees
recommendations, in order to meet the
6. Film preparation criteria of this Data Sheet and GGF Data - Straight edge margin cutting tool
Sheet 5.18.1, “Visual Quality for Adhesive
7. Installation - Calibrated tape measure
Backed Polymeric Filmed Glass”.
8. Splicing of applied film - Adhesive tape
It is recommended that applicators read
through this Data Sheet prior to - Soft paper towels or water absorbing
[Link] quality inspection
commencing film installation. material (non lint)
10. Marking of safety film
Applicators should ensure suitable training - Rubbish bags
is obtained prior to film installation
11. Housekeeping
including appropriate health and safety - Protective sheets
12. External films and working from heights training.
- External edge sealant
13. References 2. Definitions and Description
- Sharp disposal container
Foreword See GGF Datasheet 5.18.3 “GGF
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Note: In general, it is recommended to use
This standard has been developed by the Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, high quality distilled or Reverse Osmosis
GGF Applied Film Group, in association Descriptions and Components”. (RO) water for application of adhesive
with all major film manufacturers, to backed polymeric film to glass, but in many
provide a methodology for the [Link] equipment / materials cases local tap water has been found to be
assessment and application of adhesive acceptable quality. However, applicators
Appropriate installation materials include should be aware that water containing
backed polymeric film to glass. It is an
the following: minerals such as calcium carbonate (found
evolving specification reflecting current
design, material requirements and in hard water) can react with many soaps,
- Pressure spray bottle
legislation and will be subject to review including those found in shampoos and
as necessary. - Clean water washing up liquids.

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Installation Quality Standard for Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film to Glass

This reaction can form a solid residue that 5.3 Spray the window thoroughly with 6.2.4 When the film for a group of
contaminates the cleaning / installation cleaning / application solution. premeasured panes has been cut and rolled,
solution and reduces the ability to transfer the film from the cutting area to the
position the film (“slip”); the 5.4 Thoroughly clean the surface of the installation location, storing it according to
contamination may also reduce the glass using appropriate equipment, the manufacturer’s recommendations.
adhesive bond strength between the film removing all foreign bodies, taking care to
and the glass surface, including for safety / avoid damage to the glass, frame and 7. Installation
security films. Other residues in tap glazing system.
7.1 Spray the pre-cleaned pane with the
water, such as chemicals containing cleaning / application solution.
5.5 Rinse glass and frame from top to
chlorine and / or sulphur, may react with
bottom with the cleaning / application
metal layers within the film to cause 7.2 Remove the liner from the pre-cut film,
solution. Some types of cleaning solution
demetallisation. Local tap water may also spraying the adhesive face of the film
require rinsing with clean water, in which
be too acidic due to pollution (e.g. from thoroughly with the cleaning / application
case the manufacturer’s recommendations
“acid rain”). If RO water is used, the RO solution. If the film has an over-coat barrier,
should be followed.
filters must be changed according to rinse off thoroughly with the cleaning /
quality of the source water. 5.6 Using a window cleaning squeegee application solution.
remove all residual cleaning / application
4. Pre-checks Note: Depending upon adhesive type, e.g.
solution from the glass, working from the
dry water activated adhesives, spraying of the
top to the bottom.
4.1 Ensure all relevant equipment is adhesive surface during removal of the liner
present clean and in good working order. 5.7 Using a lint free absorbent material, may not be necessary.
wipe around the frame of the window to
4.2 Check that frame type and condition, 7.3 Offer the adhesive side of the film to
remove excess cleaning / application
glass size and site access all agree with the the prepared surface of the glass and place it
solution.
written work instructions. in position.
5.8 Inspect glass, frame and glazing to
4.3 Prepare a written statement covering 7.4 Spray the surface of the film using the
ensure readiness for film application and
the work site Risk Assessment. Details of application solution to enable the squeegee
re-clean if necessary.
the Risk Assessment can be found in the to move freely across the surface without
GGF Installation Training Manual. 5.9 Spray the prepared glass surface with disturbing its position and to minimise
a fine mist of application solution. surface abrasion.
5. Location preparation
6. Film preparation 7.5 Use the appropriate squeegee to
5.1 The applicator shall ensure that there remove the excess application solution from
is sufficient room to operate all 6.1 Inspection between the film and the glass (see Figure 1),
equipment safely, with minimum taking care to overlap the squeegee strokes.
disruption to the client. When a cutting 6.1.1 Check film specification and note
machine is required, it shall be erected in the manufacturer’s film type and 7.6 Where appropriate, place the straight
an area where few people pass. Protect all batch/reference number, and record it. edge margin cutting tool against the window
appropriate areas with an absorbent frame. Using a trimming knife with a sharp
6.1.2 Remove film from packing and
material if required. blade, trim the excess film ensuring all
inspect for visual defects and damage.
margins (edge gaps) are in accordance with
Note 1: Depending on the Risk GGF Data Sheet 5.18.1 “Visual Quality for
6.1.3 Any non-conforming film should be
Assessment, working areas may need to Adhesive Backed Polymeric Filmed Glass”.
labelled “Reject”, segregated from other
be cordoned off and suitable warning
film, and notified to internal quality 7.7 Repeat the previous squeegee
signs displayed.
assurance. procedure with increasing pressure as
Note 2: As the procedures require the necessary. Ensure good contact between the
6.2 Material Cutting
use of water, care should be taken to edge of the film and the glass.
minimise slipping, electrical and other risks. 6.2.1 Where required, mount the film on
a cutting machine and secure in position. 7.8 Dry thoroughly the perimeter of the
5.2 The glazing area should be clean and glass and film, using a lint free absorbent
dust free. 6.2.2 Cut the film to the appropriate size. material.

Note: If the glazing area is unacceptably 6.2.3 Where necessary, roll each piece of 7.9 It may be necessary to re-squeegee a
dirty or dusty, then pre-cleaning before film with the release liner outermost, and perimeter band of about 100 mm to ensure
commencement of film installation secure with masking tape with the film the edge of the film is in close contact with
is necessary. reference and size marked on it. the glass surface.
Installation Quality Standard for Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film to Glass

8. Splicing of applied film 8.4 Overlapped splice installation recommendations in relation

to the use of external sealants.
The majority of manufacturers supply film This method shall not be used when
in varying widths, generally up to 1524 applying safety / security films. Initially 13. References
mm (60”) with some films available in overlap the film by approximately 25 mm,
1829 mm (6”) width. Inevitably some positioning the film so that there is a final Current GGF Datasheets for adhesive
window panes will exceed maximum film overlap ≤ 6 mm. backed polymeric film are:
width; under these circumstances, it
[Link] quality inspection 5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed
becomes necessary to perform a splice
Polymeric Filmed Glass”
using two or more sections of the film.
A visual inspection of the installation shall
be carried out by the applicator in 5.18.2 “Installation Quality Standard for
Under normal circumstances, a splice is
accordance with the GGF Data Sheet Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
vertical and positioned for low visual
5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed to Glass”
disturbance. Under some circumstances,
horizontal splices or vertical splices in the Polymeric Filmed Glass”. Any non-
5.18.3 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
middle of the pane can be used. conformities identified, either during
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass:
installation or on final quality inspection,
Definitions, Descriptions and Components”
8.1 Methods of splicing shall be corrected.
5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
Depending upon the film type, the 10. Marking of safety film
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
methods given in 8.2, 8.3 and 8.4 may be
Safety films used to comply with BS 6262- the Overhead Position for Containment of
used. Overlap joints (section 8.4) are not
4, "Safety related to human impact", shall Glass in the Event of Failure: Types of
to be used for safety / security films.
be correctly marked to show compliance Systems and Precautions in Use”
8.2 Butt splice with the relevant British Standard (BS EN
5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
12600).The marking shall be as follows:
Apply one piece of film (in accordance Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
with section 6) to one side of the glass (a) an identifiable name, or trademark, or the Overhead Position for Containment of
up to the trimming stage. Apply the other mark capable of identification Glass in the Event of Failure: Test Method”
second piece of film to the glass through a suitable source*
5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations for Blast
positioning the film so that the two
(b) the type of material, i.e. “F” for film Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
edges butt together. Both pieces of film
applied glass Applied to Glass”
shall be applied so that the shading is
matched; usually this means that the 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel
(c) the number of the British Standard, i.e.
same machine edge of the film is used. Adhesion Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed
BS EN 12600
Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass”
Note: If the window bows, the machine
(d) the classification according to BS EN
edge of the film is not straight, or the
12600
glazing uses curved glass, a cut splice will
be required. This mark shall be permanent, and applied
during installation in a position so that it
Note: In some specialised cases an
will remain completely visible and
additional piece of safety film may be
readable after installation.
required to overlap both pieces of film at
the butt joint to reinforce the join. 11. Housekeeping
8.3 Cut splice The applicator shall clear all the waste film
and excess water from the installation and
Overlap the film by approximately 25
cutting areas, and reinstate the area as
mm. Use a sharp stainless steel blade to
close as possible to the condition in which
cut through both pieces of film. Squeegee
it was found originally.
the film parallel to the splice, and finish
the window in the normal way. 12. External films

Note:Take care to avoid damage to the Where external films have been specified
glass surface during this process. Do not and where circumstances dictate, e.g.
use carbon steel blades since these have a climatic conditions and glazing angle, the
significant risk of scratching the glass. installer shall check the manufacturer’s
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
5.18.3 April 2008
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass:
Definitions, Descriptions and Components

Contents layer(s), metal alloy layer(s), metal oxide 2.5 Cure time
layer(s), scratch or abrasion resistant
Foreword surface, release liner. The time required for the adhesive
backed polymeric film to achieve its
1. Scope 2.2 Safety film expected adhesion level and for visual
effects due to water haze / water bubbles
2. Definitions and Descriptions Adhesive backed polymeric film designed / etc. to disappear.
so that when applied to a glass pane the
3. Components – Substrates final product can be classified in accordance Note: Cure time should not be confused
with BS EN 12600 “Glass in building – with performance time. Safety film will,
4. Components – Adhesive Backed Pendulum test – Impact method test and with correct installation procedures,
Polymeric Film classification for flat glass”. Safety film is also achieve good performance before
known as ‘Anti-Shatter film’ or ASF since it complete cure.
5. Standards and References is intended to retain broken glass
fragments and hence reduce shattering of 2.6 Containment system
Foreword
glass over a wide area.
A system designed to attach safety film to
This standard has been developed by the the glazing system in order to reduce the
GGF Applied Film Group, in association with 2.3 Security film
risk of the glass + safety film exiting the
all major film manufacturers, to define frame, thereby enhancing the protective
Adhesive backed polymeric film designed
common terms used in GGF Datasheets for effect of the safety [Link] safety film +
so that when applied to a glass pane the
adhesive backed polymeric film. containment system may be used for blast
final product can be classified in
accordance with an appropriate standard mitigation and for containment of glass in
1. Scope the overhead position in the event of
for security glazing, such as BS EN 356
“Glass in building. Security [Link] glass failure. Containment systems should
This standard provides definitions and
and classification of resistance against not be confused with the containment
descriptions of common terms used in
manual attack” and BS EN 13541 “Glass in characteristics for personal safety given in
GGF Datasheets relating to adhesive
building. Security [Link] and BS EN 12600.
backed polymeric film (“film”).
These definitions and descriptions apply classification of resistance against
2.7 Risk assessment
to all GGF adhesive backed polymeric film explosion pressure”. Security film is also
Datasheets. Specific terms will be found known as ‘Anti-Shatter film’ or ASF since it An assessment made by a trained and
with the appropriate Datasheet. is intended to retain broken glass experienced professional in order to
fragments and hence reduce shattering of identify the potential risks, e.g. to glass due
2. Definitions and Description glass over a wide area. to thermal stress, to people from unsafe
glazing, to people from lack of containment
2.1 Adhesive backed polymeric film 2.4 Thickness
with overhead glazing, to people from
One or more layers of polymeric film The total thickness of the safety film is the glazing broken in an explosion.
laminated together, with an adhesive on sum of the thicknesses of its polyester film Note: The GGF has a list of approved
one external face. It may also incorporate layers, excluding the thicknesses of adhesive manufacturers and installers who offer
one or more of the following: Colouring, and other coatings. professional Risk Assessments
UV absorbers, UV inhibitors, metal

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, Descriptions and Components

2.8 Non-vertical overhead glazing 3.5 Thermally toughened soda lime 4.2 Polyester base film
silicate safety glass in accordance with
Glazing which is above head height where Biaxially oriented polyethylene
BS EN 12150-1
there is general access to the areas terephthalate film is used in the
beneath, and which is truly vertical or has 3.6 Heat soaked thermally toughened manufacture of adhesive backed
a slope of > 15° from the vertical. soda lime silicate safety glass in accordance polymeric films due to its excellent tensile
2.9 Vertical glazing with BS EN 14179-1 properties, glass-like visible light
transmission, low haze, and good
Glazing which is truly vertical or has a 3.7 Thermally toughened borosilicate dimensional [Link] exact type of
slope of ≤ 15° from the vertical. safety glass in accordance with BS EN polyester base film used depends upon
13024-1 the end use requirements of the adhesive
2.10 Vertical glazing
3.8 Thermally toughened alkaline earth backed polymeric [Link] properties of
Machine edges are the two edges running the polyester base film, especially for
silicate safety glass in accordance with BS
along the length of a roll of film as safety and security films, must be carefully
EN 14321-1
supplied by the manufacturer. balanced in order to obtain the required
3.9 Heat strengthened soda lime silicate end-use performance for the final
3 Components – Substrates
glass in accordance with BS EN 1863-1 product. Further information on the
Adhesive backed polymeric film can be applied manufacture and properties of polyester
to any glass substrate as described below: 3.10 Chemically strengthened soda lime
film can be obtained from polyester film
silicate glass in accordance with BS EN
manufacturers such as Hoechst, Mitsubishi
3.1 Basic soda lime silicate glass products 12337-1
and DuPont Teijin Films.
in accordance with BS EN 572-1
3.11 Laminated glass and laminated safety
3.1.1 Float glass in accordance with 4.3 Laminating adhesive
glass in accordance with BS EN ISO 12543-1
BS EN 572-2
Appropriate laminating adhesives are
3.12 Coated glass in accordance with BS
3.1.2 Polished wired glass in accordance selected for their durability, performance and
EN 1096-1
with BS EN 572-3 optical qualities, and are used to adhere
4. Components – Adhesive layers of polyester film together. Not all
3.1.3 Drawn sheet glass in accordance
Backed Polymeric Film adhesive backed polymeric films have
with BS EN 572-4
laminated structures, but most do. Different
3.1.4 Patterned glass in accordance with 4.1 Components typically used in layers of polyester films are used to either
BS EN 572-5 the manufacture of adhesive enhance the main property of the final
polymeric film are: product or, more usually, so that the final
3.1.5 Wired patterned glass in
product has a combination of properties.
accordance with BS EN 572-6 • Biaxially oriented polyethylene
A variety of different adhesive types are
terephthalate (polyester) film as the
3.1.6 Wired or unwired channel shaped used including acrylic pressure sensitive and
base film
glass in accordance with BS EN 572-7 polyester adhesives. For all types of adhesive
• Laminating adhesive backed polymeric films, the laminating
3.1.7 Supplied and final cut sizes in adhesive must have high optical transmission,
accordance with BS EN 572-8 • Mounting adhesive low optical haze, good adhesion to the two
polyester film surfaces (included coated
3.2 Special basic products • Hard surface coating, e.g. Scratch
surfaces), and long durability. For adhesive
Resistant (SR) or Abrasion
3.2.1 Borosilicate glasses in accordance backed polymeric films other than safety and
Resistant (AR)
with BS EN 1748-1-1 security films, the laminating adhesive merely
• UV absorbers / inhibitors needs to hold the polyester film layers
3.2.2 Glass ceramics in accordance together over the life of the product, so is
with BS EN 1748-2-1 • Pigments and dyes usually a fairly thin coating of a few microns
thickness. For safety and security films the
3.3 Basic alkaline earth silicate glass – • Metal coatings
laminating adhesive is usually much thicker
Float glass in accordance with
• Release liner and of higher adhesive strength; the
BS EN 14178-1
increased adhesive thickness and strength
3.4 Mirrors – manufactured from silvered improves the safety / security performance
float glass in accordance with BS EN 1036-1 of the final product.
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, Descriptions and Components

4.4 Mounting adhesive enhance its durability and UV filtering prEN 15752-1 Glass in building. Adhesive
[Link] UV absorbers / inhibitors backed polymeric film. Definitions and
An adhesive is added to one surface of are added to the mounting adhesive and / descriptions
the single or multi-ply structure to allow or the laminated structure. When used
the film to be installed to a glass surface. within the laminated structure, the UV prEN 15755-1 Glass in building. Adhesive
As with laminating adhesives, the absorbers / inhibitors are either added as backed polymeric filmed glass. Definitions
mounting adhesive must have high optical a coating or are deep dyed into one or and descriptions
transmission, low optical haze, good more layers of polyester film.
adhesion to the polyester film surface, Note: Other standards for adhesive
good adhesion to glass, and long durability. backed polymeric film will also be
4.7 Pigments / dyes
UV absorbers and / or UV inhibitors are developed e.g. Evaluation of Conformity.
often added to add extra durability. Pigments and dyes are used to impart
colour and tint to the adhesive backed 5.2 Other standards
Adhesive backed polymeric films use
either acrylic pressure sensitive mounting polymeric film. Some films use colour / Standards relevant to adhesive backed
adhesives or so-called ‘dry water tint in the mounting adhesive, the polymeric film (apart from those in
activated’ mounting [Link] ‘dry’ laminating adhesive, the hard surface section 3) include:
adhesives may have improved clarity, coating, or as a coating; more often the
effectively zero distortion, and enhanced colour / tint is deep dyed into one or BS EN 356 Glass in building. Security
durability. Acrylic pressure sensitive more layers of polyester film. [Link] and classification of
adhesives are sticky to the touch and resistance against manual attack.
4.8 Metal coatings
generally adhere to any surface on
BS EN 410 Glass in building.
contact. ‘Dry water activated’ adhesives One or more layers of polyester film are
Determination of luminous and solar
are not sticky to the touch but are metallised or sputtered with metals or
characteristics of glazing.
chemically activated upon contact with metal alloys; occasionally metal oxides and
moisture. Normally, a soapy water solution / or other metal containing materials may
BS EN ISO 527-3 Plastics. Determination
is used to install the adhesive backed be [Link] coatings are designed to
of tensile [Link] conditions for
polymeric film onto the required glass add solar control, low ‘E’ or other
films and sheets.
surface; the soapy water allows the film to properties to the adhesive backed
be positioned on the glass, prevents polymeric film. BS EN 673 Glass in building.
unwanted adhesion of pressure sensitive Determination of thermal transmittance
Note: For discussions of metallising and
adhesives, and activates ‘dry’ adhesives. (U value). Calculation method.
sputtering processes, refer to the various
Some manufacturers add a ‘detackifying’
on-line encyclopaedias available. BS EN 1063 Glass in building. Security
coating onto pressure sensitive mounting
adhesive; this coating acts as a lubricant [Link] and classification of
4.9 Release liner
during installation, allowing low soap or resistance against bullet attack.
soap free installation if [Link] A polymeric film, often with a silicone
system should not be confused with ‘dry treated surface, used to cover the BS EN 12600 Glass in building. Pendulum
water activated’ adhesives. mounting adhesive and prevent test. Impact test method and classification
contamination before installation of the for flat glass.
4.5 Hard surface coating adhesive backed polymeric film to a glass
BS EN 12898 Glass in building.
surface. Some adhesive backed polymeric
A coating is added to the surface of the Determination of the emissivity.
films use a detackifying coating over
laminated film opposite to the mounting
acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive and / or BS EN 50147-1 Anechoic chambers.
adhesive coated [Link] coating provides
a release liner. Shield attenuation measurement.
scratch or abrasion resistance to the
adhesive backed polymeric film, giving 5. Standards and References
many years of useful life with minimal BS EN 50147-2 Anechoic chambers.
surface damage when used and 5.1 Standards for adhesive backed Alternative site suitability with respect to
maintained correctly. polymeric film site attenuation.

4.6 UV absorbers / inhibitors Standards for adhesive backed polymeric BS EN ISO 4892-1 Plastics. Methods of
film are being prepared by CEN TC129 / exposure to laboratory light sources.
UV absorbers / inhibitors are used within WG [Link] current working titles are: General guidance.
an adhesive backed polymeric film to
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, Descriptions and Components

BS EN ISO 4892-2 Plastics. Methods of 5.18.2 “Installation Quality Standard for 5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations for Blast
exposure to laboratory light sources. Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
Xenon-arc sources. to Glass” Applied to Glass”

ISO 16933 Glass in building. Explosion- 5.18.3 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel
resistant security [Link] and Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Adhesion Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed
classification for arena air-blast loading. Definitions, Descriptions and Components” Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass”

5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive

ISO 16934 Glass in building. Explosion-
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
resistant security [Link] and
the Overhead Position for Containment of
classification by shock-tube loading.
Glass in the Event of Failure: Types of
5.3 GGF Datasheets Systems and Precautions in Use”

Current GGF Datasheets for 5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive

adhesive backed polymeric film are: Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
the Overhead Position for Containment of
5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed Glass in the Event of Failure: Test Method”
Polymeric Filmed Glass”
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed
5.18.4 April 2008
Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead
Position for Containment of Glass in the Event of
Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions in Use

Contents Recommendations for Adhesive Backed maximum thermal stress associated with
Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, solar radiation.
Foreword Descriptions and Components”.
Note:Thermally toughened glass will not
1. Scope 2.2 Containment System break due to thermal stress in all
architectural situations except when a fire
2. Definitions and Descriptions A system designed to attach an installed occurs in the building. When broken,
adhesive backed polymeric film to the thermally toughened glass shatters into
3. Breakage Characteristics of Glass
glazing bar, glazing system or frame, and small relatively harmless pieces, which are
4. Design Considerations thereby provide containment of glass in likely to fall.
the overhead position in the event of
5. Containment Systems glass [Link] should not be confused Thicker toughened glass, when broken, will
with the containment characteristics for exhibit a greater tendency for the small
6. References personal safety given in BS EN 12600. pieces to stay together and fall in clusters.
Foreword 3. Breakage Characteristics of Glass
Thermally toughened glass may contain
This document clarifies the The breakage characteristics and Nickel Sulphide (NiS) inclusions which
recommendations concerning the use of associated properties of commonly used could cause spontaneous breakage
adhesive backed polymeric film applied to glass types are described below. although the risk of this happening is
glass in the overhead position for the very low.
containment of glass in the event of 3.1 Laminated glass to BS EN ISO 12543-
failure. It is the first of two documents, the 2 or BS EN ISO 12543-3 3.3 Heat soaked thermally
second of which describes a test method. toughened glass to BS EN 14179-1
When laminated glass is broken the
1. Scope pieces of glass are held together by the Heat soaked thermally toughened glass
interlayer(s) and are likely to remain in has the same properties and breakage
This document describes and recommends position and continue to provide short characteristics as thermally toughened
the general types of containment systems term weather resistance. glass. However, the incidence of breakage
used with adhesive backed polymeric film due to Nickel Sulphide inclusions is
applied to glass in the overhead position Note: laminated glass includes laminated negligible.
for containment of glass in the event of annealed, laminated thermally toughened,
glass failure. It is concerned with self laminated heat soaked thermally 3.4 Heat strengthened glass to
weight, snow loading and snow loading plus toughened and laminated heat BS EN 1863-1
intermittent wind [Link] document strengthened glasses.
does not cover the risk of injury from Heat strengthened glass will withstand the
objects falling through the glass, nor can it 3.2 Thermally toughened glass in
accordance with BS EN 12150-1, BS EN thermal stress associated with solar
cover every possible containment system. radiation but it breaks in a manner similar
14179-1, BS EN 13024-1, or BS EN
14321-1. to annealed glass (section 4.6).
Note: Each installation of adhesive backed
polymeric film for containment purposes
Thermally toughened glass is stronger The built-in stresses in heat strengthened
has to be individually assessed.
than ordinary annealed glass of equal glass, which are lower than those in
2. Definitions and Description thickness and is therefore comparatively thermally toughened glass, make it much
difficult to break. In addition, thermally less susceptible to spontaneous fracture
2.1 See GGF Datasheet 5.18.3 “GGF toughened glass will withstand the due to Nickel Sulphide inclusions.

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass
in the Event of Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions in Use

3.5 Wired glass to BS EN 572-3 or BS glass falls as one piece. -There shall be at least 10 mm width of
EN 572-5 contact between the structural silicone
5. Containment Systems and the safety film
When wired glass is broken, the wire will
hold most pieces of the glass together 5.1 General -There shall be at least 10 mm width of
thereby preventing them from falling. contact between the structural silicone
Suitable containment systems include: and the frame
3.6 Annealed glass excluding wired glass
(e.g. to BS EN 572 parts 1-8 and BS EN -Silicone structural adhesive -It is often necessary to clean the frame
1748-1-1) prior to application of the structural
-Mechanically fixed batten bar silicone. Wipe away any dust or debris
When annealed glass is broken, it tends to using a soft dry cloth and cleaning with
break into dangerous pieces which are -Adhesively fixed batten bar
IPA (isopropyl alcohol) is usually suitable
likely to fall. -Polyester and acrylic foam tapes for this purpose, but cleaning with soapy
water may also be necessary
4. Design Considerations -Structural washers
-Installation of the structural silicone shall
4.1 Glass breakages may occur for many Note:The minimum recommended bite otherwise be according to the
reasons including the following: depth for new blast resistant glazing with manufacturer’s recommendations,
any one dimension >1 m is 30 mm, including the time and conditions required
-Excessive loads (e.g. self-load, snow, wind for the silicone to attain full performance;
loads) although this value may be adjusted in
future with further testing and the adhesive backed polymeric film
-Inadequate framing or other glazing technological development. Containment manufacturer may have additional
defects systems such as the structural silicone and requirements
batten bar methods can effectively
-Incorrect glazing procedures increase the bite depth of the glazing -It may be necessary to cut away the
within the frame. gasket flush with the frame in order to
-Impact from falling, wind-borne or ensure that a width of structural silicone
thrown objects Figures 1 to 7 give examples of possible of 10 mm contacts the frame and/or
glazing systems with installations of safety film.
-The higher thermal stresses encountered containment systems.
in non-vertical overhead glazing Figures 1 and 2 give an example of a
In all situations, both the safety film and possible silicone structural adhesive
-Malicious attack the containment system must be installed containment system.
according to the manufacturers’
-Damaged or defective glass recommendations. Note: Dow Corning 995 and Tremco
ProGlaze SSG structural silicone sealants
-Breakage due to Nickel Sulphide It is strongly recommended that the may be suitable for this type of
inclusions in thermally toughened glass installer only use containment systems containment system. Other similar
that have been tested in accordance with silicones are also suitable but it is
-Explosive pressures the GGF Datasheet 5.18.5 “GGF expected that the manufacturer or
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed installer of the safety film / containment
4.2 The breakage of glass in non-vertical Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the system will ensure that adequate testing
overhead glazing is a very rare Overhead Position for Containment of has been completed to demonstrate that
[Link] risk of injury from falling Glass in the Event of Failure:Test the particular silicone selected performs
broken glass may be reduced by the use Method”.The testing must be carried out as required.
of adhesive backed polymeric film and a by an independent test laboratory such as
suitable containment system. the GGF test facility. 5.3 Mechanically Fixed Batten Bar
4.3 Thermally toughened glass in the 5.2 Silicone Structural Adhesive 5.3.1 General
overhead position may, when broken,
create risks by falling down in fragments A silicone structural adhesive is used to There are various possible types of a
and / or as clusters of fragments. If bridge between the safety film and the batten bar with mechanical securing of
adhesive backed polymeric film is installed [Link] has the following minimum film which typically have the following
to such glazing an appropriate risk characteristics: minimum characteristics:
assessment must be completed in order
to determine whether a containment -The gap between the edge of the safety -The safety film is installed to the glass
system is necessary. film and the frame margin shall be 1.0 + surface but with additional film so that the
0.0 / - 0.5 mm film is extended past the vision area of
4.4 In no circumstances should adhesive the glazing and between the batten bar
backed polymeric film be installed by itself -The silicone shall be a neutral cure and the frame; some systems further
to overhead thermally toughened or heat structural silicone with good adhesion to extend the film so that it wraps inside the
soaked thermally toughened glass without plastic and glass surfaces (silicone adhesives batten bar
an appropriate risk assessment and, where often contain adhesion promoters for this
necessary, the use of an appropriate purpose), with good weatherability and -A batten bar is installed such that the
containment system. Installation of UV resistance safety film is between the batten bar
adhesive backed polymeric film to such and the frame, and is secured to the
glazing can significantly increase the risk if -The structural silicone shall be added such frame with self-tapping screws set a
the glass fails and the sheet of film and that the final cross section is triangular suitable intervals.
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass
in the Event of Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions in Use

-The distance between the batten bar and batten bar to the safety film and the -The system is designed so that the tape
the safety film / glass surface may be batten bar to the frame minimises shearing of the safety film
critically important and must be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s -The batten bar should not extend past -It may be necessary to cut away the
recommendations the frame and should have a minimum gasket flush with the frame in order to
width of 12 mm contact with both the ensure that the tape can contact the
-The batten bar should not extend past frame and safety film frame and / or safety film sufficiently for
the frame good adhesion
-The system is designed so that the
5.3.2 To improve the performance of a batten bar minimises shearing of the -Both the safety film and the tape are
mechanically fixed batten bar, dependent safety film along an edge of the batten bar otherwise installed according to
upon the design, the following additional -It may be necessary to cut away the manufacturer’s recommendations
criteria may apply: gasket flush with the frame in order to
ensure that the batten bar contacts the -Doors may be similar treated
-A structural silicone or similar high bond frame and / or safety film sufficiently for
high performance adhesive may be good adhesion Figure 6 gives an example of a polyester
included between the batten bar and the or acrylic tape containment system.
surface of the safety film to enhance the -Both the safety film and the batten bar
retention of the film between the batten are otherwise installed according to Note: At the current state of technology,
bar and the frame. Alternatively, double manufacturer’s recommendations both mechanically and adhesively fixed
sided high bond strength foam tape may
batten bar systems have higher
be used between the batten bar and the -Doors may be similar treated performance than polyester and acrylic
safety film rather than structural silicone
tape systems.
Figures 3, 5a and 5b give examples of
-An additional gasket may be present on possible installations of adhesively fixed
the batten bar so that the safety film is 5.6 Structural Washers
batten bar containment systems
firmly pressed firmly towards the glass.
This is aimed at avoiding shearing of the Structural washers are used with bolted
Note: At the current state of technology,
film at the point where it curves away structural glazing systems.
carefully designed mechanically fixed
from the glass and under the batten bar, Guidance on these systems should be
batten bar systems have higher
as well as increasing bite depth obtained from the system manufacturer
performance than adhesively fixed batten
because certain types of systems do not
bar systems. However, some adhesively
-Both the options above may be present have re-usable fittings or components.
fixed batten bars design ensures greater
in a mechanically fixed batten bar
absorption of sudden stresses so that less
stress is transferred to the frame; this It is also important to ensure that the
-It may be necessary to cut away the sequence of unfastening and re-tightening
gasket flush with the frame in order to characteristic may enhance performance
of adhesively fixed batten bars in, for the fittings are done correctly.
ensure that the batten bar contacts the Structural washers vary in form but
frame sufficiently and / or the distance example, an explosion.
typically have the following characteristics:
between the batten bar and the safety
film on the glazing is correct 5.5 Polyester and Acrylic
Foam Tapes -316 Stainless steel is used for the
structural washers
-Doors are similar treated
These systems are similar to adhesively
Figures 3, 4 and 5c give examples of fixed batten bar systems except that a -Double sided high bond strength foam
possible installations of mechanically fixed polyester or acrylic tape is used in place tape is used between the washer and
batten bar containment systems. of a batten bar. Self tapping screws cannot film; this adheres the washer both to the
be used. fittings supplied by the structural
5.4 Adhesively Fixed Batten Bar glazing manufacturer and to the safety /
-The gap between the edge of the safety security film
This system is similar to the mechanically film and the frame margin shall be 1.0 +
fixed batten bar, but self tapping screws 0.0 / - 0.5 mm -A plastic spacer may be used between
are not used; they have the following the washer and the metal retaining plate;
minimum characteristics: -The tape is fitted so that part contacts this avoids binding of the metal washer to
the safety film and part contacts the the metal plate and allows easier
-The gap between the edge of the safety
frame tightening of the complete assembly
film and the frame margin shall be 1.0 +
0.0 / - 0.5 mm
-Double sided high bond strength foam -The fittings are removed and safety /
-A batten bar of suitable cross section adhesive tape is used to adhere the security film is installed close to the holes
profile is fitted so that one flat surface tape to the safety film and the tape to already cut through the glazing; it is usually
contacts the safety film and one flat the frame best to treat one fitting at a time rather
surface contacts the frame; often the than remove all the fittings at the
batten bar has a simple L shaped profile -The tape should not extend past the same time
frame and should have a minimum width
-Double sided high bond strength foam of 12 mm contact with both the frame Figure 7 gives an example of a structural
adhesive tape is used to adhere the and safety film washer containment system
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass
in the Event of Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions in Use

6. References Glass in the Event of Failure: Types of

Systems and Precautions in Use”
6.1 UK Home Office publication “Bombs
– Protecting People and Property”, 4th 5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
edition, Appendix 2. Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
the Overhead Position for Containment of
Current GGF Datasheets for Glass in the Event of Failure: Test Method”
adhesive backed polymeric film are:
5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations for Blast
5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
Polymeric Filmed Glass” Applied to Glass”
5.18.2 “Installation Quality Standard for 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel
Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film to Adhesion Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed
Glass” Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass”
5.18.3 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass:
Definitions, Descriptions and Components”

5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive

Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
the Overhead Position for Containment of
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass
in the Event of Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions in Use
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass
in the Event of Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions in Use
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
5.18.5 February 2009
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
the Overhead Position for Containment of
Glass in the Event of Failure:Test Method

Contents 1. Scope [Link] Equipment

Foreword This standard describes a test method for 4.1 General Equipment:
adhesive backed polymeric film (“film”) and
1. Scope containment systems used on non-vertical -Thermally toughened sodium silicate
2. Definitions and Descriptions overhead [Link] aim is to evaluate the safety glass, in accordance with BS EN
reduction of risk in the event of glass 12150, 10 ± 0.3 mm x 2500 ± 5 mm x
[Link] Conditions failure. It is based upon a load uniformly 1500 ± 5 mm (nominal mass: ~94 kg)
applied to a horizontal test piece.
[Link] Equipment
-Standard mild steel frame with a rubber
Testing must be carried out by an
5. Principles of Test gasket for retaining the toughened glass
independent test laboratory such as the
with 19 ± 2 mm edge cover, representing
[Link] Setup GGF test facility.
a normal dry glazing system (Figure 1), or
7. Classification 2. Definitions and Description
-Steel supporting frame of sufficient
[Link] Method 2.1 See GGF Datasheet 5.18.3 “GGF robustness to securely hold the glazing /
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed frame (section 4.2) in a horizontal
[Link] Evaluation Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, position at 800 ± 100 mm above the
[Link] Report Descriptions and Components”. ground

11. Certificate of Conformity 2.2 Detachment -White witness sheet of < 3000 mm x
2000 mm dimensions (card or thick paper
12. References Separation of the containment system
are suitable)
from the frame or from the test sample.
Foreword
2.3 Minor detachment -Sand for adding load to glazing (400 kg in
This standard has been developed by the A length of separation < 1/3 of the 10 kg sacks is suitable)
GGF Applied Film Group, in association edge length
with all major film manufacturers, to clarify -Centre punch
the recommendations concerning the use 2.4 Major detachment
of adhesive backed polymeric film applied A length of separation < 1/3 of the -1200 mm spirit level
to glass in the overhead position for the edge length
containment of glass in the event of -Tape measure
failure. It is the second of two documents, [Link] Conditions
the first of which describes the different -Mechanical lifting apparatus
3.1 The following minimum conditions
types of adhesive backed polymeric films
must be met: -Calibrated micrometer
and containment systems (see GGF
Datasheet 5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations -The film has been installed according to
for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film -Digital camera
the manufacturer’s recommendations
Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position
for Containment of Glass in the Event of -Water condensation is not present on Note: Due to the weight of the
Failure:Types of Systems and Precautions the film surface during cure or during toughened glass, the frame and support
in Use”) and gives guidance on their the test frame, they must be transported and
selection. -Test room temperature is 20 ± 5 °C positioned by mechanical means.

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass in
the Event of Failure:Test Method

4.2 Glazing well ventilated conditions and for the 6.3.8 Leave the completed test piece for
appropriate times (section 3). Ensure the the time recommended by the
The glass may be held in place in a variety film will not be held within the rebate of manufacturer of the containment system.
of ways; for the purposes of this test the steel frame if this frame is to be used; Condition the test piece at 20 ± 5 °C
method, two systems are defined: the film edge shall be installed to within 1 for at least 24 hours immediately prior
mm +0.0 / -0.5 mm inside the sight line to test.
4.2.1 A mild steel frame with rubber of the frame. If bolts are to be used the
gasket and sufficient dimensions, including safety film shall be installed to within 1 Note: For example, structural silicone
return, for the installation of the mm +0.0 / -0.5 mm of all glass edges systems normally take longer than batten
toughened glass pane and a containment including the bolt holes. bar systems due to their different curing
[Link] frame may provide either two characteristics.
or four edged support for the toughened 6.2 Securing the Glass
glass. 6.4 Place the witness sheet underneath
Install the toughened glass + safety film the support frame on the floor level with
4.2.2 A system of securing the mild steel into the steel frame or attach the bolts the centre of the witness sheet
frame (section 4.2.1) to the steel (section 4) to the corner holes in the approximately where the centre of the
supporting frame (section 4.1) is also toughened glass + safety film, with edge installed test piece will be, and secure to
required, e.g. scissor clamps or bolts. cover of 19 ± 2 mm. the floor.
5. Principles of Test Note: If the film is installed after glazing, 6.5 Positioning the Test Piece
ensure that the appropriate tolerances
5.1 The test allows a safety film and and cure time are met. (Section 5.1) 6.5.1 Ensure that when installed upon the
containment system applied to glass to be
supporting frame, the test piece will be ≤
[Link] are three levels of test (see 6.3 Containment System
5° from horizontal in both longitudinal
Table 1).
and transverse directions and at 800 ±
6.3.1 Install the containment system
100 mm from floor level.
according to the manufacturer’s
Table 1 Ensure that no obstructions are present
recommendations. For some containment
beneath or immediately around the
Film thickness, t Minimum cure time systems, particularly the structural silicone
support system.
for testing and batten bar systems, the gaskets may
need to be positioned so that the
t ≤ 100 µ ≥ 30 days containment system can be installed 6.5.2 Lift the test piece into position by
correctly. mechanical means and attach it securely
100 < t ≤ 200 ≥ 60 days to the steel support frame ensuring the
200 < t ≤ 300 ≥ 90 days 6.3.2 For adhesively fixed batten bar safety film side is facing downwards.
containment systems, ensure the batten
t > 300 100+ days† bar has a suitable cross section profile and Note: Do not allow any part of your body
is installed so that one flat surface to pass underneath the test piece during
† The manufacturer will provide the minimum time or after installation to avoid injury in case
contacts the safety film and one flat
period required. the test piece is accidentally dropped.
surface contacts the frame; the batten bar
is normally a simple L shaped profile but Likewise, ensure that other people
other profiles can be used. present are not exposed to this risk.

5.2 A serviceable imposed uniform load 6.3.3 For adhesively fixed batten 6.5.3 When using the steel frame, place
of 100 kg is used as an equivalent to bar containment systems, the batten bar the spirit level midway along a long
snow loading for the UK. An imposed should have sufficient contact with both dimension on the frame holding the
uniform load of 400 kg is used as an the frame and safety film in order to meet toughened glass, and check that this is
equivalent to snow loading plus current test standards. horizontal to < 5° adjusting if necessary;
intermittent wind loading for the [Link] repeat for the other long dimension then
simulates a ‘worst case’ situation where 6.3.4 For all batten bar containment the two short dimensions.
the glass fails, a snow loading is present, systems, the batten bar should not extend
and an intermittent wind loading occurs. past the frame. Make a final check on all four sides to
ensure that no movement away from
5.3 The self weight, snow loading, and 6.3.5 For structural silicone glazing, the horizontal has occurred during the
snow loading plus intermittent wind width of contact between the silicone and levelling process.
loading tests are carried out consecutively the safety film and between the silicone
on the same test piece. and the support frame shall be < 10 mm;
6.6 Sweep the witness sheet clean of any
the cross section shall be triangular.
debris prior to the test using a long
[Link] Setup handled broom.
6.3.6 For 4 edged supported glazing, the
The test piece is made from the containment system must be applied to at
least two parallel edges; normally the Note:The witness sheet may be re-used
toughened glass pane, the safety film, and
containment system is applied to all four for subsequent tests if it has no or only
the containment system.
edges. minor damage.
6.1 Safety Film
6.3.7 For 2 edged support glazing, the 6.7 Check that the temperature in the
Install the safety film to the toughened containment system must be applied to test room is 20 ± 5 °C.
glass according to the manufacturer’s two parallel edges.
recommendations and leave to cure in
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass in
the Event of Failure:Test Method

7. Classification [Link] Method 8.5 Snow Load – 72 hour test

7.1 Fragmentation 8.1 In order to ensure the test report is 8.5.1 If the self load test is omitted,
comprehensive, i.e. fully describes the test follow the procedure in 8.1 to 8.3.
If the test piece does not exhibit the piece, take sufficient digital photographs
fragmentation pattern in accordance immediately prior to commencement of 8.5.2 Uniformly position 10 x 10 kg sand
with BS EN 12150-1, no classification the test to clearly show the safety film, the bags (= 100 kg) over the broken pane to
is possible. type of containment system used, and the give a total loading of ~194 kg, and leave
method(s) of installation of both the for 10 minutes.
7.2 Self Weight safety film and the containment system
within the test [Link] additional digital Sand bags are to be placed gently without
If, after testing according to sections 8.2 to photographs during each stage of the test any impulse loading within a maximum
8.4.5, the test piece meets the criteria in and at test completion to clearly show period of 5 minutes.
9.2 and 9.3 it is classified as Class A. the reaction of the structure to the
8.5.3 Repeat 8.4.1 to 8.4.5.
loading and any debris that has fallen onto
7.3 Snow Load
the witness sheet. 8.5.4 If the test piece passes the 72 hour
If, after testing according to sections 8.2, snow loading test, testing may be
8.2 Break the toughened glass using a
8.3 and 8.5, the test piece meets the extended for snow load plus intermittent
centre punch on the un-filmed glass
criteria in 9.2 and 9.3 it is classified as wind load (section 8.6).
surface of the panel immediately adjacent
Class B. to the centre of one of the long edges. Note: Do not allow any part of your body
7.4 Snow Load plus Intermittent to pass underneath the test piece during
8.3 Leave the test piece for ten minutes
the test to avoid injury in case the test
after breakage and check the
Wind Load piece fails. Likewise, ensure that other
fragmentation.
people present are not exposed to
If, after testing according to sections 8.2, If the fragmentation does not show the this risk.
8.3, 8.5 and 8.6, the test piece meets the required pattern as in BS EN 12150 Part
criteria in 9.2 and 9.3 it is classified as 8.6 Snow Load plus Intermittent Wind
1, the test shall be terminated and a new
Class C. Load Test – 30 second test
test piece used.
7.5 Weather Tightness 8.6.1 Uniformly position 30 x 10 kg sand
8.4 Self weight – 72 hour test
bags (= 300 kg) over the broken pane
If the test piece is a framed system, and if Note: If the manufacturer wishes to plus the 100 kg of sand bags from the
the test piece meets the criteria in section claim a Class B, then the requirements of snow load test to give a total loading of
9.2 but with no detachments, it is further Class A can be ignored (proceed to ~494 kg, and leave for 30 seconds.
classified as Class WT. section 8.5).
Sand bags are to be placed gently without
Note: WT can be applied to any of the 8.4.1 When using the steel frame, note any impulse loading within a maximum
three classes, e.g. A/WT. any glass fragments that have separated period of 5 minutes.
from the test piece and passed through
-Classification Class A, B or C and, if 8.6.2 Repeat 8.4.1 to 8.4.4.
the safety film and/or containment system
applicable, Class WT (section 10) and have fallen onto the witness sheet. 8.7 Film characterisation: Obtain a small
piece of the safety film and measure its
-Deviations from the test method and an 8.4.2 Note any minor and major
thickness in microns using a calibrated
explanation of why they were done detachments of the safety film from the
micrometer. Ensure that no contaminants
containment system and any minor and
are present to affect correct thickness
major detachments of the containment
measurement.
system from the frame.
Table 2: Loading type and classification
[Link] Evaluation
8.4.3 If glass fragments have passed
Loading Class through the safety film and/or the 9.1 The test piece shall exhibit the
containment system and fallen onto the fracture pattern expected of a thermally
Self weight A witness sheet (section 8.4.1), or more toughened soda lime silica safety glass
than two minor detachments and / or any complying with BS EN 12150-1.
Self weight plus snow load B
major detachments are present (section
Self weight plus now load 8.4.2), stop the test and record a failure 9.2 For any type of containment system,
plus intermittent window load C for the imposed load. no glass fragments passing through the
safety film and/or containment system are
8.4.4 Maintain the test piece in position permitted.
for 72 hours and repeat evaluation every
24 hours, sweeping the witness sheet 9.3 No more than 2 minor detachments
clean (section 6.6) after each evaluation are permitted in the test piece. No major
(sections 8.4.1 to 8.4.3). detachments are permitted.

8.4.5 If the test piece passes the test 9.4 After evaluation, the test piece shall
(section 9), then proceed to 8.5. be classified according to section 7.
GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the Overhead Position for Containment of Glass in
the Event of Failure:Test Method

[Link] Report piece was < 5° from horizontal 5.18.3 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass:
The test report shall include the following: -Installation dates of the film and Definitions, Descriptions and Components”
containment system
-Date and time of commencement of 5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
the test -Observations made during the tests Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
(section 8) the Overhead Position for Containment of
-Details of the test laboratory (name, Glass in the Event of Failure: Types of
address, etc.) -If the test was terminated part way Systems and Precautions in Use”
through, the date and time of test
-Person(s) performing the test termination and the reason(s) for 5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
termination Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
-Temperature of the test area the Overhead Position for Containment of
11. Certificate of Conformity Glass in the Event of Failure: Test Method”
-Description of the test piece (section 5)
including a full description of the A certificate of conformity shall be issued 5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations for Blast
containment system type, safety film type by the GGF on proof of production of a Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
and, if available, product code, suitable test report. Applied to Glass”
manufacturer and installer
12. References 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel
-Film thickness in microns Adhesion Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed
Current GGF Datasheets for adhesive Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass”
-Digital photographs of the test piece backed polymeric film are:
clearly showing the safety film, the type of
containment system, and the reaction of 5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed
the structure to the loading (section 8.1) Polymeric Filmed Glass”

-Confirmation that the test piece has 5.18.2 “Installation Quality Standard for
been conditioned for at least 24 hours at Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
20 ± 5 °C prior to test and that the test to Glass”

Figure 1:
Example of suitable glazing frame for containment testing
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
GGF Recommendations for Blast
5.18.6 April 2008
Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric
Film Applied to Glass

Contents 2. Definitions and Description Low Threat is for buildings where there is a
significant risk of a nearby explosion of
Foreword 2.1 See GGF Datasheet 5.18.3 “GGF approximately a satchel bomb size.
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed
1. Scope Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, High Threat is for buildings where there is
Descriptions and Components”. a significant risk of a nearby explosion of
2. Definitions and Descriptions approximately a van bomb size.
2.2 Blast Mitigation
3. Hazard Rating / Threat levels
Reduction of injuries, property damage and Although these definitions are given in
4. Risk Reduction with Safety Film business disruption resulting from glass terms of improvised explosive devices,
breakage under explosive pressure. corresponding definitions can be
5. Recommended Safety Films for Blast extrapolated for explosion threats from
Mitigation 3. Hazard Rating / Threat Levels other sources, e.g. oil refinery plant.

6. Containment Systems 3.1 Systems of Hazard Rating of the risks 3.5 Recommendations for the use of
from shattered glass in an explosion have safety film at these threat levels are given in
7. Additional Notes been developed by the UK Government section 5
and other organisations based upon
8. References decades of explosion testing, and are being 4. Risk Reduction with Safety Film
incorporated into international standards
9. Acknowledgement such as ISO 16933. 4.1 Safety films on annealed glass are
intended to reduce High Hazard to Low
Foreword 3.2 Figure 1 shows the Hazard Rating
Hazard or Very Low Hazard. Safety film on
system from standard ISO 16933. ISO
This standard has been developed by the annealed glass with specifically designed
16933 uses a range test with 3 m deep test
GGF Applied Film Group, in association cubicles. Areas defined within the cubicle containment systems can further improve
with all major film manufacturers, to clarify classify different hazard levels. the performance to Minimal Hazard or No
recommendations concerning the use of Hazard. (Figure 1 and section 6).
safety film applied to glass for blast 3.3 Explosion Properties
mitigation purposes. 4.2 Risk Assessment
It can be difficult if not impossible to define
1. Scope exactly the specific properties and effects an 4.2.1 A professional Risk Assessment is
explosion may have on particular buildings required to establish the risks from an
This standard gives recommendations for and structures around them. However, explosion for a particular building. This will
the use of adhesive backed polymeric extensive research has developed substantial be dependent upon criteria including the
safety film (“safety film”) applied to glass practical and theoretical understanding of glazing and glass types, size and thickness,
for reducing the risk of injury from glass explosions, allowing protective measures to the assessed threat, the building location,
shattered in an explosion. It does not give be taken in order to reduce the effects of the building environment, and the usage of
guidance concerning peel testing of aged explosions to be made with confidence. the [Link] Risk Assessment will also
safety film (see GGF Datasheet 5.18.7 identify the measures required for reducing
3.4 Threat Levels
“GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion the risks from an explosion. Installation of
Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed Two levels of the potential threat of an safety film is only a part of the overall
Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical explosion have been established: Low Threat strategy for protecting people and
Flat Glass”). and High Threat. property in an explosion.

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Recommendations for Blast Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass

4.2.2 For specification of safety film, 5.5.1 The recommendations for use of 5.7 Recommendations for
building owners and managers very often safety film for a High Threat from an secondary glazing
select the appropriate safety films based explosion and where pane size < 3m2 and
upon a High Threat (see section 3.4), pane thickness < 6 mm are given in The recommendations for use of safety
principally because many at risk buildings Table 2. films where the window consists of two
are in major cities and are close to separate frames and where both frames
potential ‘targets’. In addition, the cost Table 2: High Threat: Safety film can be accessed independently (e.g. as in
penalty for the increased protection of recommendations for panes < 3m2 & < secondary glazing) are given in Table 5.
higher performing is relatively small. 6 mm
Table 5: Secondary and similar glazing:
5. Recommended Safety Films for Floor level Recommendation Safety film recommendations for all pane
Blast Mitigation sizes and thicknesses
Ground –11th Safety film ≥150 microns and
meeting BS EN 12600
5.1 The recommendations given below Class 1B1 Glazing Recommendation
are the minimum levels of protection to
12th and over Safety film ≥ 100 microns and
be employed against both threat levels Primary As in sections 5.4 to 5.5
meeting BS EN 12600 Class
(section 3.4).They are based upon the 2B2 Secondary Safety film 100microns and
current Home Office Scientific meeting BSEN 12600 Class
Development Branch (HOSDB) 2B2
5.5.2 The recommendations for use of
recommendations and publications and
safety film for a High Threat from an
the current understanding of the effects
explosion and where pane size > 3m2 5.8 It is possible to obtain a different
of an explosion on glass.
and/or pane thickness > 6 mm are given classification for a safety film on one
5.2 Safety films for blast mitigation are in Table 3. thickness of float glass than for the same
recommended based upon their film on a different thickness of float glass.
Table 3: High Threat: Safety film
[Link] generally means that as Therefore, classification to BS EN 12600
recommendations: panes > 3m2 and/or > for safety film means that:
film thickness increases, so does film 6 mm
performance, although the expectation is
-The specific safety film has been
that technology improvements may result
Floor level Recommendation independently tested as a safety film and
in higher performing products without
float glass composite and meets the
always an increase in thickness. Ground – 1st Safety film ≥ 275 microns and
meeting BS EN 12600 Class
stated BS EN 12600 classification,
5.3 These recommendations are not 1B1
-Glass thickness is the same as that to
intended to substitute for a professional 2nd – 11th Safety film ≥150 microns and be treated,
Risk Assessment but can be used to meeting BS EN 12600 Class
quickly decide the minimum specification 1B1 -The exception to the above is that
of safety film required for the threat level 12th and over Safety film ≥ 100 microns and occasionally glass > 6 mm may require
(section 3.4). meeting BS EN 12600 Class protection, but independent testing to BS
2B2 EN 12600 may not have been carried out
5.4 Recommendations for buildings for the specified film on the thicker glass. In
at Low Threat these cases, it is normal to accept that
5.6 Recommendations for internal testing on thinner glasses is sufficient
The recommendations for use of safety glass partitions evidence to demonstrate adequate
film for a Low Threat from an explosion performance. A film of at least 150 microns
The recommendations for use of safety
are given in Table 1. thickness is recommended. However, the
film for internal glass partitions are given
client must decide whether further testing
Table 1: Low Threat: Safety film in Table 4. For internal insulating glass
is needed to demonstrate BS EN 12600
recommendations for all pane sizes and units, it may be necessary to treat both
performance for the particular film and
thicknesses sides with safety film.
glass thickness composite.
Table 4: Internal glass partitions: Safety film
Floor level Recommendation
5.9 These recommendations are generally
recommendations for all pane sizes and
for monolithic glass. Laminated glass may
All floors Safety film ≥100 microns and thicknesses
be treated with safety film for blast
meeting BSEN 12600 Class mitigation and to reduce spalling.
2B2 Floor level Recommendation
5.10 It is important to check whether
All floors Safety film ≥100 microns and
meeting BSEN 12600 Class there are any other requirements when
5.5 Recommendations for buildings 2B2 installing safety film, e.g. marking of safety
at High Threat glazing required in BS 6262-4.
GGF Recommendations for Blast Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass

6. Containment Systems performance against impact to BS EN 5.18.3 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
12600 may be achieved within one or two Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass:
A containment system is designed to days of installation for many safety films. Definitions, Descriptions and Components”
attach the safety film to the glazing bar,
glazing system or [Link] use of a 7.3 Peel adhesion testing is recommended 5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
containment system with safety film can for aged safety film. See GGF Datasheet Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the
further reduce the risks from glass 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Overhead Position for Containment of Glass in
shattered in an explosion. See GGF Adhesion Testing of Adhesive Backed the Event of Failure:Types of Systems and
Datasheets 5.18.4 “GGF Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass” Precautions in Use”
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed
Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in the 8. References 5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
Overhead Position for Containment of Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in
Glass in the Event of Failure:Types of 8.1 Standards the Overhead Position for Containment of
Systems and Precautions in Use” and Glass in the Event of Failure:Test Method”
5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for ISO/DIS 16933 “Glass in building -
Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied Explosion-resistant security glazing - Test 5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations for Blast
to Glass in the Overhead Position for and classification by arena air-blast loading” Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
Containment of Glass in the Event of Applied to Glass”
Failure:Test Method” BS EN 12600 “Glass in building –
Pendulum test – Impact method test and 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel
[Link] Notes classification for flat glass” Adhesion Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed
7.1 Independent testing has shown the 8.2 GGF Datasheets Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass”
efficacy of safety films for protection in an
explosion. As with all safety products, Current GGF Datasheets for adhesive [Link]
correct installation is essential. It is therefore backed polymeric film are:
The Home Office Scientific Development
very important to use a professional
5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed Branch (HOSDB) has provided valuable
installation company with an appropriately
trained and experienced workforce. Polymeric Filmed Glass” assistance and advice in preparation of
these recommendations.
7.2 The cure time should not be confused 5.18.2 “Installation Quality Standard for
with time to achieve a level of performance. Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film `
For example, with good installation, to Glass”

Figure 1:
Hazard Ratings in relation to a typical test cubicle; refer to the standard ISO 16933 for
a fuller description.

Window
HH
BLAST Witness
Panel High
A No Break Hazard
B No Hazard Zone
F
C Minimal
Hazard
E High
D Hazard
Threshold
0.5 m

1.0 m 2.0 m

VLH Very Low Low Hazard Zone LH

Hazard Zone Low Hazard
Threshold
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion
5.18.7 April 2008
Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed Polymeric
Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass

Contents The on-site 180° peel test is to be used 2.5 Discolouration

to determine the ongoing behaviour of
Foreword the adhesive system on applied adhesively Significant yellowing of an aged safety film
backed polymeric safety film that has been compared to new film.
1. Scope
subject to natural ageing. Note: Discolouration should not be
2. Definitions and Descriptions confused with differences in film
This test method is not applicable to films
properties caused by slight lightening of a
[Link] Conditions > 230 microns since the peel angle can
combined solar control-safety film during
be substantially less than 180° and peel
ageing, small batch-to-batch variations
[Link] Equipment test results (static and dynamic) can be
during manufacture (e.g. visible light
extremely variable. transmission), and similar phenomena.
5. Preparation of Test Strips
Note: Peel testing of newly applied 2.6 Adhesive Distortion
6. Static Peel Test adhesive backed polymeric film is not
appropriate as there is no direct Obtrusive distortion of objects viewed
7. Dynamic Peel Test relationship between performance through an aged safety film.
according to BS EN 12600 and the results
8. Additional Test Observations for Aged 2.7 Adhesive Failure:
of peel testing.
Safety Film Peeling/Bubbling
2. Definitions and Descriptions
[Link] Evaluation Separation of an aged safety film from the
2.1 See GGF Datasheet 5.18.3 “GGF glass at its corners / edges (peeling) or
[Link] Report elsewhere (bubbles) is evidence of
Recommendations for Adhesive Backed
Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: adhesive degradation.
11. Further peel testing
Definitions, Descriptions and
2.8 Buildings at Low Threat / High
12. References Components”.
Threat
13. Acknowledgement 2.2 Aged adhesive backed polymeric film For these definitions, please refer to GGF
Datasheet 5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations
Foreword Film is classed as aged only when the
for Blast Mitigation: Adhesive Backed
manufacturer’s warranty has expired.
This standard has been developed by the Polymeric Film Applied to Glass”
GGF Applied Film Group, in association with 2.3 Embrittlement [Link] Conditions
all major film manufacturers, to provide a
common basis for on-site peel testing of Embrittlement is easy and repeated 3.1 Peel testing is done under the
adhesive backed polymeric safety film. breakage of an adhesive backed polymeric environmental conditions existing at the
film during preparation of a test strip or time of the test.
1. Scope during peel testing; it is usually shown by
aged safety film. 3.2 The test shall only be performed
This standard specifies a test method when the following conditions are
for on-site 180° peel adhesion of aged 2.4 Adhesive Odour satisfied:
adhesive backed polymeric safety film
(“safety film”) of thicknesses < 230 An aged safety film may have significant -The glass pane is vertical
microns applied to flat, vertical odour due to degradation of its components
architectural glass. by sunlight; it is particularly strong as an aged -The glass pane is < 425 mm high and
film is peeled from the glass. ≥150 mm wide

Glass and Glazing Federation

Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266

GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion Testing of Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass

-The drop from the bottom of the test -Spring balance measuring 0-4000 g with the glazing; allow sufficient distance from the
strip to the floor is equal to or greater an accuracy of ± 100 g, e.g. a fisherman’s vertical edges of the panel for the test
than the sum of the length of the test spring balance weights to hang freely (usually < 70 mm). If
strip plus 250 mm the test weights do not hang freely, a different
4.2 The weights shall be suitably certified test panel must be used.
-The film thickness is < 230 microns and of a shape and size to ensure that the
peel angle is < 160°, and that glazing Note: If the thickness of the film is already
-The peel test angle is < 160°; ledges or panels of < 150 mm width can be tested. known, the thickness of the test strip may be
other obstructions must not reduce the measured at this point rather than at section
peel test angle to < 160° Note:The steel weights usually have hooks 7.11 to verify that all layers in the safety film
to hang them onto the clip; the weight of have been completely cut through.
-Water condensation is not present on these hooks should be included as part of
the film surface (section 5.2, note) the steel weight. Alfred Woods & Co. of 5.5 The strip shall be at least 400 mm long
Mitcham, Surrey has a suitable test kit and preferably 600 mm long. Cut a line at ~
Note: If all panes are < 150 mm wide,
[Link] should not be taken as an 45° to the horizontal across the top of
the method described here may be
endorsement by the GGF of this product. the strip.
adapted by using a spring balance to
estimate peel test data. The exact 5. Preparation of Test Strips 5.6 Mark a horizontal line next to and at the
method should be agreed with the client bottom of the test strip (m3 in Figure 1).
in advance of peel testing. 5.1 Ensure the test conditions in section Place similar marks next to the test strip at
3 are met. Note both glass and room 100 mm, 200 mm and 300 mm up from this
3.2 In addition, it is preferable that temperatures and the environmental initial mark (marks m0, m1 and m2 in Figure
panels selected for testing are sufficiently conditions; especially check that the film is 1) giving a total length for the dynamic peel
wide to allow two peel tests to be fully cured, the peel angle is always < test of 300 mm in 100 mm increments.
performed per panel. 160° during the test, and the distance
from the bottom of the test strip to the 5.7 Carefully commence manual peeling of
3.3 One peel test shall be performed per
floor allows the weights to hang freely. the top part of the test strip from the glass.
elevation of installed safety film or per
A sharp stainless steel blade may be
500 m2 of installed safety film, whichever 5.2 Check that the installed safety film is required to start the peel but care should
is greater. undamaged and is free from defects that be taken to avoid damaging the glass. Peel
will affect adhesion e.g. water about 100 mm of the test strip from the
3.4 If failures are found, the number of
condensation and particulates. glass, ensuring the line of adhesive peeling is
peel tests is increased in order to
determine whether only part or all of the < 25 mm from m0 (Figure 1); if the strip is
Note: Substantial water condensation can
installed film requires replacing. Up to one limited in length, less than 100 mm may be
cause the adhesive to be constantly wet,
peel test per 50 m2 of installed film may used to attach the clip but the line of
resulting in reduction or complete loss of
be required. adhesive peeling must be < 25 mm away
adhesive strength. Peel testing is therefore
from mark m0.
only valid where condensation is generally
[Link] Equipment
not present; condensation over occasional 5.8 Wrap the peeled film around the clip,
4.1 The on-site peel test equipment shall short periods of time of < 1 hour is ensuring that it is firmly attached. Occasionally
include the following items: acceptable provided that the film is fully a staple may be needed for this purpose.
cured, ventilation and temperature allow
-A clip of 20 ± 5 g, used to affix the test the condensation to dry quickly, and peel 6. Static Peel Test
weights to the test strip testing is not done on panels where
condensation is currently present. 6.1 Ensuring the line of adhesive peel is
-Two steel weights of 250 ± 1 0 g above mark m0 (Figure 1), attach the weight
5.3 Do not pre-treat the installed film specified in Table 1 to the clip, positioning the
-A steel weight of 700 ± 10 g prior to testing, e.g. do not squeegee the weight and clip such that no peel force is
film before testing to increase adhesion. applied to the strip.
-A steel weight of 800 ± 10 g
Exceptionally, where the surface of the
film is very dirty, the film may be cleaned Table 1: Recommended weights for static
-Stopwatch measuring to tenths of a
but at least 24 hours is required for the peel testing of safety film
second or better
film to dry prior to the peel test.
-Straight edged ruler State Recommended
5.4 Ensuring all film layers are completely weights
-Sharp thin bladed knife, e.g. a craft knife cut through to the glass surface, cut a 25
with snap-off blades; the blades must not ± 1 mm wide vertical test strip into the Aged safety film 250 g
– low threat
scratch the glass (stainless steel blades are safety film, preferably < 200 mm away
recommended) from the vertical edges of the test panel. Aged safety film 500 g
If a 200 mm distance is not viable, cut the – high threat
-Calibrated micrometer strip close to the vertical centre line of
GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion Testing of Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass

6.2 Make any minor adjustments so that Table 3: Sequence for increasing weights weights on the clip, recommence the
the line of adhesive peeling from the glass for dynamic peel testing after maximum peel and restart the stopwatch. If there is
is horizontal (Figure 1). recommended weight has been reached any uncertainty about the validity of the
test, especially if the time for a 100 mm
6.3 To apply the static peel force to the State Incremental weights increment is close to 20 seconds or
test strip, position the weight so that it (use in the order shown) if the time for 300 mm is close to 60
will have no movement at the moment of Aged safety film 950 g, 1050 g, 1300 g, seconds, repeat the test with a new
release (slight tension on the test strip is – low threat 1500 g, 1750 g, & 2000 g test strip.
usually needed), keep it perfectly still and Aged safety film 1500 g, 1750 g, & 2000 g
in position for 5 seconds, and then gently – high threat Note 3: The peel test is invalid if the
release the weight. weight is already moving when it applies
force to the test strip because peel
Note: It is advised that you are ready to 7.4 Make any minor adjustments so that strength varies with the speed of testing.
catch the weight in case fast peeling of the line of adhesive peeling from the glass It is essential to ensure that no impetus
the test strip occurs – it is best to is horizontal (Figure 1). is imparted to the weight as it is
position your hands immediately beneath released.
the weights. 7.5 Zero the stopwatch.
7.8 Timing
6.4 Closely observe the test strip for any Note: Optionally, the weight may be
movement or ‘creep’, then remove the attached at this point in the procedure to Timing of the 100 mm segments and the
test weight and record the results. test the first 100 mm increment,; however, total 300 mm distance for the dynamic
ensure the line of peeling remains peel test can only be done where at
7. Dynamic Peel Test horizontal and aligned with the least slow ‘creep’ is present; the
appropriate mark, and that no peel force procedure above should be used to
7.1 Ensuring the line of adhesive peel is is applied to the test strip before the determine which weight gives the
above mark m0, attach the lowest weight test begins. required movement.
specified in Table 2 to the clip, positioning
the weight and clip such that no peel 7.6 Keeping the line of adhesive peeling 7.8.1 Note the time taken for the
force is applied to the test strip. horizontal, manually peel the test strip weight to peel the film over the first 100
down the glass pane until the line of mm increment (between marks m0 and
7.2 Check that the weight used gives at adhesive peel is exactly aligned with the m1 in Figure 1).
least slow ‘creep’ of the film. If the top mark (m0 in Figure 1). Once this
specified weight does not cause peeling operation is completed, ensure that no 7.8.2 If the time taken for the test strip
of the film, incrementally increase the peel force is placed on the test strip so to peel 100 mm is < 30 seconds for the
weight using Table 2 to obtain at least a that the line of adhesive peeling remains first 100 mm increment, allow the strip
slow ‘creep’ aligned with the mark. to continue peeling for the other 100
mm increments between marks m1 and
7.3 If the maximum weight from Table 2 7.7 To apply the dynamic peel force to m2 and then between marks m2 and m3
does not cause peeling of the film, the test strip, position the weight so that (Figure 1), noting the time taken for each
incrementally increase the weight using it will have no movement at the moment increment and the total time taken for
Table 3 to obtain at least a slow ‘creep’. If of release, i.e. so that movement of the the complete 300 mm length.
no peeling occurs at the maximum weight weight occurs only by the effect of gravity
given, use the spring balance test method (slight tension on the test strip is usually 7.8.3 If the peel rate is slow (> 30
(section 7.9). needed). Keep the weight perfectly still seconds for the first 100 mm increment):
and in position for 5 seconds, and then
Table 2: Recommended weights for gently release the weight, starting the [Link] Stop the dynamic peel after 30
dynamic peel testing stopwatch at the same time. seconds and gently lift the weight so that
no peel force is applied to the test strip;
Note 1: It is advised that you are ready to note the length of the test strip that has
State Recommended
weights catch the weight in case fast peeling of peeled within the first 100 mm
the test strip occurs – it is best to increment (between marks m0 and m1
Aged safety film 500 g
position your hands immediately beneath Figure 1).
– low threat 700 g
the weights.
Aged safety film 700 g [Link] If the peel rate is > 30 seconds
– high threat 950 g Note 2:The strip may stop peeling if it for the first 100 mm increment, stop the
1300 g has not been cut through, if peeling stops, stop watch and repeat section 7.2 to
immediately remove the weights and stop [Link] between marks m1 and m2 and
the stopwatch. Note the time taken and then between marks m2 and m3
re-cut the strip on both sides. Replace the (Figure 1).
GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion Testing of Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass

7.8.4 If the specified weight does not client prior to the test; this test procedure 9.7 There shall be no adhesive bubbling
cause peeling of the film, incrementally should include consideration of both the or peeling (section 8.1) and no obtrusive
increase the weight using Table 3 to obtain static peel test and dynamic peel test adhesive distortion (section 8.2) present
at least a slow ‘creep’. If no peeling occurs requirements. in any part of the test pane.
at the maximum weight, use the spring
balance test method (section 7.9). 8. Additional Test Observations 9.8 Using the dynamic peel test data of
aged film, the expected remaining lifetime
Note: If the peel rate changes from one 8.1 Note any adhesive peeling or can be taken from Table 5.
100 mm increment to another it may be bubbling, or film embrittlement.
necessary to adopt a mixture of the Table 4: Summary of the peel test
8.2 View the aged safety film in natural requirements (see Figure 1 for marks)
methods above.
daylight (not direct sunlight) from a
7.9 If no peeling occurs with the weights, distance ≥ 2m and at an angle of ≤ 30°
Peel test type Requirement
remove the weights leaving the spring clip from the perpendicular to the test pane.
To better see any distortion, look at Static No movement preferred;
in place. Attach one end of the spring
objects through the film, not at the film very slow ‘creep’ is allowed
balance to the clip ensuring the scale is
visible. Align the direction of pull parallel itself. Note any particularly obtrusive Dynamic, ≥ 60 seconds
to and close to the test strip so that the distortion. m 0 – m3
peel angle is ≥ 160°. Pull the spring Dynamic, ≥ 17.5 seconds
8.3 Note any discolouration or adhesive
balance, slowly increasing the applied m 0 – m1
odour.
force, monitoring the reading on the scale. Dynamic, ≥ 20 seconds
Record the force required to produce Note: Safety film has a small amount of m1 – m2
peeling of the test strip such that the time natural adhesive distortion; this is not a & m2 – m3
for each 100 mm increment is ≥ 20 defect but is a natural consequence of the
seconds; if the reading is > 4000 g Dynamic Must move with ≤
high amounts of adhesive used to make 4000 g
without peeling record “> 4000 g”. these high performance products.
7.10 Remove the weights (or spring [Link] Evaluation
balance) and clip; record the results.
9.1 Static Peel Test (section 6) – No Table 5: Expected lifetime of aged
7.11 Measure and record the safety film significant movement is preferred but very safety film
thickness using a calibrated micrometer. slow ‘creep’ is allowed.
Ensure that no contaminants are present Test Expected remaining
to affect correct thickness measurement. 9.2 Dynamic Peel Test, total time (section Weight lifetime for building at
7):The time taken for the total 300 mm Low Threat High Threat
Note: As an approximation, it is possible length shall be < 60 seconds. If the peel
to measure the total film thickness rate was slow and distances moved have 500 g 4 years —-
including adhesive and other [Link] been recorded, the total time for 300 mm 700 g 6 years 2 years
thickness of these coatings is not normally will be < 90 seconds.
sufficient to make the total film thickness 950 g —- 4 years
appear to be that of thicker safety films 9.3 Dynamic Peel Test, incremental times: ≥ 1300 g —- 6 years
(e.g. a 100 micron safety film with coatings The time taken for each of the 100 mm
will not generally be close to the thickness lengths shall be ≥ 20 seconds; since initial
of a 150 micron film) peel rates can be slightly faster than Note: Expected lifetime is indicative of the
normal, the time allowed for the first 100 useful lifetime remaining in the safety film;
7.12 If the total time is < 75 seconds, cut mm increment is < 17.5 seconds as long it is subject to environmental conditions in
a similar test strip (as in section 5) 50 to as the total time (section 9.2) is ≥ 60 future years and cannot be guaranteed
200 mm from one vertical edge of the seconds. If the peel rate was slow and
panel, allowing sufficient distance for the 9.9 Discolouration and adhesive odour
distances moved have been recorded, the
test weights to hang freely (usually < 70 are allowed but these indicate film
time for every 100 mm increment will be
mm).Test this second strip as described in degradation and therefore a shorter
< 30 seconds.
7.1 to 7.10. If no panels are available of expected remaining lifetime than those
sufficient width then two adjacent panels 9.4 Dynamic Peel Test – the film must given in Table 5.
may be tested instead of two tests on peel when < 4000 g weight is used
one panel. [Link] Report
(sections 7.9 - 7.10).

Note: It is possible to test safety film 10.1 The test report shall include the
9.5 Table 4 gives a summary of the above
applied to sloping glazing and / or small following:
requirements.
pane sizes using a suitable spring balance -Date and time of test
and the principles described in this 9.6 There shall be no embrittlement that
document, as long as the peel angle is ≥ makes the peel impossible to perform e.g. -Details of the testing organisation (name,
160°.The exact test procedure and from repeated breaking of the test strip address, etc.)
pass/fail criteria should be agreed with the (section 8.1).
GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion Testing of Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass

-Person performing the peel tests -The additional test observations for aged requirements with respect to the threat to
safety film (section 8) the building, e.g. for explosion protection.
-Film thickness in microns
-Pass / Fail for static and dynamic peel 11. Further peel testing
-Film type and, if available, product code, testing, and for aged safety film (sections
manufacturer and installer 6 and 9) 11.1 Peel testing is a destructive test, so the
tested panels will require replacement of
-Environmental conditions at the time of -Recommendations for future peel testing the complete piece of film. Ensure that
test e.g. sunny, cloudy, approximate glass
future peel tests do not test the panels
temperature, room temperature -The expected remaining lifetime for aged
previously tested.
safety film from Table 5 (see also section 9.9)
-Deviations from the test method, if any, and
An example of a blank peel test record is 11.2 It is recommended to peel test
an explanation of why they were done
shown in the Annex. between one to two years before the
10.2 The test report shall also include the remaining lifetime of the film indicated from
following minimum details for each peel test Note 1: Adhesive odour and film the dynamic peel testing (section 7).
performed: discolouration are indicative of film
degradation but are not pass/fail criteria by 12. References
-Precise location of the peel test (e.g. pane / themselves. Removal of aged safety film
window / elevation / floor) where significant adhesive odour is present Current GGF Datasheets for adhesive
should be done in well ventilated conditions; backed polymeric film are:
-Static peel test results with the weights breathing apparatus and/or out of hours
used (section 6) working may also be necessary. 5.18.1 “Visual Quality for Adhesive Backed
Polymeric Filmed Glass”
-Dynamic peel test results with the weights Note 2: Film thickness is not a pass / fail
used, times taken / distances moved for each criterion by itself. However, aged safety film 5.18.2 “Installation Quality Standard for
100 mm increment, and, if applicable, total may no longer meet the minimum specified Applying Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
time for the 300 mm length (section 7) performance and / or thickness to Glass”

Figure 1:
On-site peel testing of adhesive backed polymeric safety film on glass
GGF Standard for On-Site Peel Adhesion Testing of Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass

5.18.3 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive 5.18.6 “GGF Recommendations for Blast
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass: Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Film
Definitions, Descriptions and Components” Applied to Glass”

5.18.4 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive 5.18.7 “GGF Standard for On-Site Peel
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in Adhesion Testing of Aged Adhesive Backed
the Overhead Position for Containment of Polymeric Film Applied to Vertical Flat Glass”
Glass in the Event of Failure: Types of
Systems and Precautions in Use” 13. Acknowledgement

5.18.5 “GGF Recommendations for Adhesive The Home Office Scientific Development
Backed Polymeric Film Applied to Glass in Branch (HOSDB) has provided valuable
the Overhead Position for Containment of assistance and advice in preparation of
Glass in the Event of Failure: Test Method” this Datasheet.
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
Adhesive backed polymeric film –
5.18.8 May 2012
Guidelines for installation onto
existing glazing

Contents 2 Definitions
Introduction The definitions contained within Data Sheet 5.18.3 together
with the following apply:
1. Scope
2. Definitions 2.1 external film
3. Check list A type of adhesive backed polymeric film that is designed to
[Link] stress be applied to the external surface of the installed glazing.

5. Recommendations 2.2 internal film

6. Other Considerations A type of adhesive backed polymeric film that is designed to be
Bibliography applied to the internal surface of the installed glazing.

Introduction 2.3 safe temperature difference

The application of adhesive backed polymeric film to already Maximum temperature difference that a glass can resist without
installed glass has been taking place in the U.K. for over 40 years. the likelihood of thermal breakage.
The early adhesive backed polymeric films were being used for
NOTE:This is dependent on glass type and the quality of the
‘solar control’ and as such they were highly metallised/dyed and
glass edge.
a few problems of thermal breakage were experienced.
However, since that time the types of adhesive backed polymeric 2.4 thermal breakage
films available and the number of applications has grown
enormously. In the U.K. the market expanded to include ‘human Breakage of a glass pane caused by excessive thermal stress.
impact safety’, i.e. converting annealed glass into a ‘safety glass’. NOTE:Thermal breakage always originates at a glass edge.
Unfortunately the early experience has not been [Link] has
led to a position whereby if an adhesive backed polymeric film is 2.5 thermal stress
applied to a glass product, then it is not unknown for the supplier of
the glass product to state that the “warranty is now void”.This is an Stress produced in the edge of a glass pane as the result of centre
untenable position as the majority of adhesive backed polymeric films of pane to edge of pane temperature difference.
will have no detrimental affect what so ever on the existing glass product.
3 Check list
1. Scope
3.1 General
This Data Sheet explains the influences of adhesive backed
polymeric film on installed glass products. It details the checks that The factors that influence the acceptable performance of an
need to be undertaken to ensure that the application has no adhesive backed polymeric film when installed on a glazed glass
detrimental affect on the glass product. pane depend upon both the film and the glass together with the
details of the glazing.
Thermal stress is explained and a design methodology outlined.
For the purpose of this checklist the term ‘acceptable performance’
A list of glass product types together with their possible relates to the integrity of the glass pane, i.e. remaining unbroken
vulnerability to adverse performance resulting from the application and on-going durability of the glass product.
of adhesive backed polymeric film is given.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Adhesive backed polymeric film – Guidelines for installation onto existing glazing

3.2 Details of film • Grilles

The influence of the adhesive backed polymeric film on ‘acceptable • Painted signs, labels and decals
performance’ is dependent upon the following factors:
It is imperative to identify both the colour of any internal shading
• Position of installed film, e.g. internally or externally; and its proximity to the glass.
• Spectrophotometric properties of the film, i.e. solar heat Additionally the presence of a structural pocket (such as a void
reflectance, transmittance and absorptance, emissivity; created by a suspended ceiling close to the window) must also be
considered.
3.3 Details of installed glass
3.4.5 External Shading
The influence of the glass on ‘acceptable performance’ is dependent
upon the following factors: Consideration must be given to any external structure, system or
object that may create a shadow line across the glazing creating a
• Glass type, e.g. float, sheet, patterned, wired, etc.; temperature differential across the [Link] most common
• Type of glazing examples of shading are;

• Single Glazed • Building Overhang

• Double Glazed • Adjacent Building Structures

• Triple Glazed • Brie Soleil

• Processing the glass has received, e.g. heat strengthening, thermal • External Shutters
toughening, laminating, insulating glass unit manufacture; • External Blinds
• Type and quality of the glass edge; • Pillars and columns
Equally glass thickness and pane size have an influence on final • Painted signs, labels and decals
combination choices.
• External Grilles
3.4 Details of Glazing System • Landscape
3.4.1 General
3.4.6 Location
The following is a non-exhaustive list of the factors that need to be
taken into account when the risk of thermal breakage is being It is important to identify the building orientation including the
considered. elevation and altitude together with winter and summer design
temperatures.
3.4.2 Framing and Glazing Method
4 Thermal Stress Determination
The frame material, construction and the glazing method must be
taken into account when considering film to glass compatibility. It is expected that any adhesive backed polymeric film installer will
Examples of framing and glazing materials include; be able to offer to undertake an appropriate design calculation.
• Metal THE RESULT OF THE DESIGN CALCULATION SHALL BE
• PVC-u CHECKED AND APPROVED BY THE ADHESIVE BACKED
POLYMERIC FILM MANUFACTURER.
• Timber
The calculation method consists, in principle, of the following:
• Frameless
• Determination of the basic temperature difference for the
• Concrete
glass/film combination based on location, environmental
• Rubber Gasket factors, etc.
• Silicone • Increase temperature difference taking account of blinds,
back-ups, etc.
3.4.3 Heating and Cooling Sources
• Modify by frame factor and external shading.
It is important to identify the presence of both heating and cooling
sources that can create a sudden temperature differential across • Compare the total temperature difference with the safe
the glazing. temperature difference.

3.4.4 Internal Shading • If total temperature difference is less than or equal to the
safe temperature difference then there is no risk of thermal
Consideration must be given to any internal structure or other breakage.
system that may create an increased build-up of [Link] most
common examples of internal shading are; 5 Recommendations
• Window Blinds The following is a list of applications where the addition of an
• Curtains adhesive backed polymeric film will not cause a breakage risk:
• Shutters • Clear safety film on ANY glass type.
Adhesive backed polymeric film – Guidelines for installation onto existing glazing

• ANY film type on a ‘thermally treated glass’, i.e. heat

strengthened glass, thermally toughened safety glass, heat soaked
thermally toughened safety glass (see GGF Data Sheet 4.4.1).
• ANY film type on a laminated glass/laminated safety glass
manufactured from ‘thermally treated glass (see GGF Data
Sheet 4.11).
• ANY glass/film combination glazed ‘frameless’, i.e. bolt fixed
thermally treated glass, or structural sealant glazing.
NOTE: Both frameless glazing methods ensure that the edges of
the glass are not covered up and therefore there is no possibility
of a centre/edge temperature differential.

6 Other Considerations
Whilst this Data Sheet deals with the risk of breakage due to
thermal stress there are a number of other points that need
consideration:
• The application of an adhesive backed polymeric film to an
insulating glass unit, assuming that the film is not within the
glazing system, should not affect the IGU lifetime;
• Care should be taken when applying any adhesive backed
polymeric film to a laminated glass/laminated safety glass as there
is a possibility that the mechanical loading associated with the
application may cause breakages from poorly cut glass edges;
• Care should be taken when applying adhesive backed polymeric
film to laminated glass incorporating an intumescent interlayer as
the increase in temperature of the interlayer may produce
changes, i.e. opaque spots, changes in colour/clarity/haze.

Bibliography

GGF Data sheets

4.4.1 Thermally treated soda lime silicate glass products

4.11 Laminated glass and laminated safety glass

5.18.3 GGF Recommendations for Adhesive Backed Polymeric

Film Applied to Glass: Definitions, Descriptions and Components
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
Surface Modification of Glass
5.19 April 2008
for Ease of Maintenance on
Externally Installed Glass

Contents Treated Glass. 3.4 “Non-stick”

Foreword Treatments for internal glazing are covered in The ability of a surface to minimise the
Data Sheet 5.19.1. accumulation of dirt on the surface, thus
1. Scope
making it easier to clean and keep clean.
2. Descriptions
2. Descriptions
3.5 Low maintenance
2.1 Titanium Dioxide
3. Definitions
Decrease the requirement for regular
A non-reactive chemical that is used in a
4. Considerations washing and improve the ease of cleaning.
micro fine coating applied during the
5. Applications manufacturing process. 3.6 Stain resistant
6. Bibliography 2.2 Photo catalytic process Helps maintain the visual appearance due to
Foreword Through the influence of ultra-violet rays impact from a variety of contaminants
from daylight, the coating is energised and including both organic and inorganic.
This data sheet has been developed by a
reacts with organic dirt, breaking it down. 3.7 Hydrophilic
working party consisting of both the GGF
and major manufacturers within the glazing Note:The coating remains unaffected by the The ability of a glass surface to sheet water.
and sealant [Link] aim being to reaction. It is a catalyst and is not consumed (The water runs off the entire area of the
provide a common basis for the applications in the process. glass in one motion)
and considerations of applied coatings and
2.3 Polymeric Resin 3.8 Hydrophobic
treatments on glass.
A chemically bonded cross-linked polymer
1. Scope The ability of a glass surface to repel water.
that can be added to the surface of the glass
(The water creates beads which run off
This data sheet covers coatings/treatments at any time.
individually)
that can be applied to a glass surface, either
Note:This is a chemical process that is not
during or post manufacture, to assist in the Note: In both cases this process will be
affected by the surrounding environment i.e.
maintenance of the glass [Link] hindered by any contaminants that may be
airborne contaminants.
coatings/treatments covered are those that on the surface of the glass.
are durable, i.e. have a reasonable life 3. Definitions
expectancy, when used on the external 4. Considerations
For the purposes of this data sheet the
surface of glazing in for example: windows, 4.1 Self Cleaning Glass
following definitions apply.
doors and conservatory roofs.
3.1 Organic 4.1.1 The photo-catalytic process is unable to
There are processes of materials being break down or remove inorganic deposits.
considered: Carbon based materials: i.e. bird droppings,
road film and tree sap. 4.1.2 Can be handled and processed like
1.1 Photo-catalytic coatings; also known as ordinary glass.
self-cleaning coatings 3.2 Inorganic
Note: Manufactures guidance should be sort
Note:Throughout the data sheet this process Non carbon based material: i.e. cement dust for both the installation and handling of post
will be referred to as Self Cleaning Glass. and brick dust.
treated glass.
1.2 Polymeric resins; also known as “non- 3.3 Cross-linked
4.1.3 Can help reduce the need to access
stick” / easy clean treatments
A description of the bond between the areas that are difficult to [Link] reduced
Note:Throughout the data sheet this process polymer molecules that results in added need for cleaning saves on water and the use of
will be referred to as Polymeric Resin strength and durability of the polymeric resin. detergents for cleaning.

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Surface Modification of Glass for Ease of Maintenance on externally installed glass

4.1.4 Self cleaning glass is suitable for glazing without environmental impact. 5.2.6 The expected service life for external,
angles of 10 degrees from horizontal and greater vertical glazing is up to 10 years.
4.2 Polymeric Resin Treated Glass
to ensure sufficient flow of water across the
[Link] of 30 degrees and steeper 4.2.1 Helps to maintain ongoing performance Note: Frequency of reapplication depends on
are ideal. against industry standards, such as light conditions of exposure and use.
transmission (t-value), by protecting the original 5.2.7 Has good durability and can be handled
4.1.5 Areas protected from rainfall or subject
visibility, clarity and cleanliness of glass through like ordinary glass.
to prolonged periods of drought may require
resistance against chemical attack and the two
an application of water to remove loosened
general categories of physical abrasion. Note: Manufactures guidance should be sort for
deposits.
[Link] Man-made, e.g. incorrect handling both the installation and handling of post
4.1.6 Areas protected from sunlight by severe treated glass.
during transportation.
shading may not receive sufficient UV light to
activate the catalyst. [Link] Natural, e.g. wind erosion, windblown 5.2.8 Allowances should be made, when lifting
particles of dust, grit and sand.
4.1.7 The catalytic process can take with glass suckers, as excess cured residue may
approximately 5 days to activate after 4.2.2 Resists adhesion of both organic and affect suction.
installation. inorganic contaminants – before, during and
after construction of the building to which it is 5.2.9 Compatible with silicone-based and other
4.1.8 Care should be taken during the re-
being fitted. wet sealants as well as dry gaskets.
patination of lead that is on or within the
vicinity if the external coated surface. 4.2.3 Protects glass surface against corrosion
5.2.10 Part of a complete system of glass
caused mainly by moisture and alkalinity.
4.1.9 Helps maintain clean appearance of the renovation.
glass. 4.2.4 Resists staining and discolouration of the
glass surface as a result of building run-off, lime [Link] The removal of contaminants:
4.1.10 Self cleaning glass is compatible with a
scale, metal oxides and other contaminants. Organic and inorganic.
wide range of glazing products and the
manufacturers publish details of tested gaskets 4.2.5 Performance is continuous and does
and wet sealants. not depend on external factors such as [Link] Protection: Application of the
sunlight or rainfall. polymeric resin.
Note: Generally self cleaning glass is not
compatible with silicone based products which 5. Applications [Link] Maintenance: Less than half that of
can contaminate the surface. Silicone oils can normal untreated glass under the relevant
leach out from seals and mask the self cleaning 5.1 Self Cleaning Glass
conditions of exposure.
effect whilst they are present.
5.1.1 Suitable for most types of exterior
glazing: including windows, doors, curtain walling, 6. Bibliography
4.1.11 Self cleaning glass may be cleaned with
warm soapy water if required. In hard water atria and sloped glazing, e.g. conservatory roofs.
BS EN 12150-1: Glass in Building -Thermally
areas rapid drying of the surface may lead to 5.1.2 Self cleaning glass can be toughened or
residues on the glass. Demineralised water can Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass -
laminated. If handled with care it can be Part 1: Definition and Description.
be used to remove residues or some liquid processed face down to allow other products
proprietary cleaners. This should be done prior
to be applied to the reverse. BS EN 12150-2: Glass in Building -Thermally
to the contaminated water drying. Contact the
manufacturers for details. 5.1.3 Available in some solar control options. Toughened Soda Lime Silicate Safety Glass -
Part 2: Evaluation of Conformity
4.1.12 The sheeting affect (hydrophilic action) 5.1.4 Can be single glazed or combined with
of rain water means that vision through the other panes in an insulating glass unit for BS EN 12600: Glass in Building - Pendulum
glass is quickly restored after rain fall and the thermal or acoustic control. Test - Impact Test Method for Flat Glass
glass dries more rapidly due to the water
forming less droplets and rivulets on the glass. 5.2 Polymeric Resin Treated Glass and Performance Requirements.

4.1.13 The hydrophilic action reduces the 5.2.1 Suitable or all types of exterior glass BS 952 Part 2:Terminology for Work on Glass.
effect of external condensation and therefore including windows, doors, curtain walling and
helps maintain visual quality. sloped glazing. BS EN 572-1: Glass in Building - Basic Soda
4.1.14 Detection of coatings:The Lime Silicate Glass products - Part 1
5.2.2 Can be applied at the factory of any glass
manufacturers can supply coating detectors for Definitions and General Physical and
processor or fabricator.
their product. An alternative method is to Mechanical Properties.
spray a fine mist of water on the surface and 5.2.3 Can be applied on-site at any time –
see that it shows the characteristic sheeting before, during or after [Link] BS 6262 Part 4: Safety Related to Human
effect. should be carried out by an authorized and Impact.
approved applicator.
Note:A pattern of water droplets round the BS 8000 Part 7: Code of Practice for Glazing.
edge of the glass that is different from the 5.2.4 Starts to work after a short cure period,
centre indicates possible silicone contamination. generally less then an hour.

4.1.15 Self cleaning glass can be recycled in 5.2.5 Can be re-applied in-situ whenever
the same manner as ordinary untreated glass required.
 Special Applications
SECTION 5
Surface Modification of Glass for
5.19.1 April 2008
Ease of Maintenance on Internally
Installed Glass

Contents 2. Description Note:This process will be hindered by any

contaminants that may be on the surface of
Foreword Glass surface that has been treated with a the glass.
cross-linked polymeric [Link] treatment
1. Scope provides surface protection that is “non- 4. Considerations
stick”, low-maintenance and stain resistant
2. Descriptions
and has a hydrophobic reaction to water. 4.1 Helps to maintain ongoing performance
3. Definitions against industry standards, such as light
3. Definitions
transmittance (t-value), by protecting the
4. Considerations original visibility, clarity and cleanliness of
For the purposes of this data sheet the
following definitions apply. glass through resistance against chemical
5. Applications
attack and physical abrasion: e.g. incorrect
6. Bibliography 3.1 Cross-linked handling during transportation

Foreword A description of the bond between the 4.2 Resists adhesion of both organic and
polymer molecules that results in added inorganic contaminants before, during and
This data sheet has been developed by a strength and durability of the polymeric after construction of the building into which
working party consisting of both the GGF resin. the glass is being installed.
and major manufacturers within the
glazing and sealant [Link] aim 3.2 “Non stick”
4.3 Protects the glass surface against
being to provide a common basis for the corrosion caused mainly by moisture
The ability of a surface to minimise the
applications and considerations of applied and alkalinity.
accumulation of dirt on the surface, thus
coatings and treatments on glass.
making it easier to clean and keep clean.
4.4 Resists staining and discolouration of the
1. Scope
3.3 Low maintenance glass surface as a result of building run-off,
This data sheet covers treatments that lime scale, metal oxides and other
Decrease the requirement for regular contaminants.
can be applied to a glass surface, post
washing and improve the ease of cleaning
manufacture, to assist in the maintenance
of the glass [Link] treatments 4.5 Compatible with silicone-based and
3.4 Stain resistant
covered are those that are durable, i.e. other wet sealants as well as dry gaskets.
have a reasonable life expectancy, when The ability to maintain the visual appearance
4.6 Part of a complete system of glass
used on the surface of glass in internal due to impact from a variety of contaminants
renovation.
applications in buildings. including both organic and inorganic.

There is one process being considered 3.5 Hydrophobic 4.6.1 The removal of contaminants:
Organic and inorganic.
1.1 Polymeric Resin Treated Glass; The ability of a glass surface to repel water.
also known as “non-stick” / easy (The water creates beads which run off 4.6.2 Protection: Application of the
clean treatments. individually) polymeric resin

Glass
Glassand
andGlazing
GlazingFederation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:020
0207939
79399100
9100 Fax:
Fax:0870
0870042
0424266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Surface Modification of Glass for Ease of Maintenance on Internally Installed Glass

4.6.3 Maintenance: Less than half as BS EN 12600: Glass in Building - Pendulum

normal untreated glass under the relevant Test - Impact Test Method for Flat Glass
conditions of exposure. and Performance Requirements.

5. Applications BS 952 Part 2:Terminology for Work

on Glass.
5.1 Any internally glazed area.
BS EN 572-1: Glass in Building - Basic
6. Bibliography Soda Lime Silicate Glass products - Part 1
Definitions and General Physical and
BS EN 12150-1: Glass in Building - Mechanical Properties.
Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate
Safety Glass - Part 1: Definition and BS 6262 Part 4: Safety Related to
Description. Human Impact.

BS EN 12150-2: Glass in Building - BS 8000 Part 7: Code of Practice

Thermally Toughened Soda Lime Silicate for Glazing.
Safety Glass - Part 2: Evaluation of
Conformity
 Special Application
SECTION 5
Surface Modification of Glass for
5.19.2 November 2013
Ease of Maintenance -
Liquid Applied Glass Surface Treatments

Contents 1. Scope
Introduction This Data Sheet sets standards for Liquid Applied Glass Surface
Treatments (GST), with the objectives of:
1. Scope
• Clarifying definitions, descriptions and terminologies;
2. Definitions
• Detailing the specific conditions for each market sector or
3. Descriptions
application for which it is designed,
4. Applications
• Detailing the testing requirements for each specific
5. Effectiveness application of GST

6. Testing • Ensuring that the performance and durability of a GST is

relevant to its intended use.
7. Considerations
This Data Sheet does not cover photo-catalytic coatings, details of
Bibliography which can be found in the following GGF Data Sheet:
Data Sheet 5.19 Surface Modification of Glass for Ease of
Introduction Maintenance on Externally Installed Glass;
There is a whole range of products that have been designed to 2. Definitions
make glass easier to clean and reduce the need for maintenance.
For the purposes of this Data Sheet, the following definitions apply
This Data Sheet relates to one specific group - ‘Liquid Applied
Glass Surface Treatments’ (for the purposes of this document 2.1. Liquid Applied Glass Surface Treatment (GST)
known as GST).
A liquid applied to a glass surface that, when dried or cured, forms
GST relate to a number of technologies and therefore, GST have a a surface layer that either:
wide range of applications as follows:
a) Cross-links with itself and chemically bonds to the surface
• External; forming a multi-molecular structure;
• Internal, b) Bonds with the surface forming a mono-molecular
structure; or
• Under all types of environments, and
• Under many different types and degrees of exposure. c) Deposits itself as a coating

These technologies have certain features in common, i.e. they are 2.2. Chemical cross-linking
hydrophobic (water-repellent).
A chemical bond between polymer chains and glass forming a
Some GST provide protection by resisting attack by moisture, multi-molecular structure.
alkalinity and dirt. The degree of protection varies from durable or
long-lasting to non-durable. 2.3. Coating

These products are inherently different in many ways. A distinct layer that when deposited can have variations in
The differences become apparent with time and also with thickness.
exposure to climatic conditions, which are complex and variable.
NOTE: These variations may result in internal stresses and
It is therefore, important to make comparisons in order to confirm
microscopic cracks in the coating. Moisture can penetrate between
that a particular product or brand is fit for its intended use.
the surface layer and substrate through capillary action, causing

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Surface Modification of Glass for Ease of Maintenance - Liquid Applied Glass Surface Treatments

discolouration of the coating and potentially its failure. 2.13. Nanotechnology

2.4. Treatment Technology at the Nano scale, i.e. dimensions of the order of
100 nm or less.
The application of an agent to preserve or give particular
properties to the glass surface. NOTE: This is a physical measurement and does not indicate either
performance or durability.
2.5. Hydrophobic
2.14. Low Maintenance
The ability of a surface treatment to repel water by causing the
formation of beads of water which subsequently run off the Decreases the requirement for routine washing and improves the
surface. ease of cleaning.

NOTE 1: This is demonstrated with a contact angle of 90o or more 2.15. Stain Resistant
when measured with water according to ASTM C813-90
Ability to maintain the visual appearance of glass when exposed to
NOTE 2: The hydrophobic effect as demonstrated by the contact a variety of contaminants both organic and inorganic.
angle shall not be used to determine if a GST is fit for a specific
purpose or as an indication of its performance or durability. 2.16. Chemical Effectiveness

2.6. Fit for Purpose A measurement of chemical activity, of a product at its time of
manufacture that has shown to have close correlation with actual
A GST can be described as ‘fit for purpose’ provided that it: field performance and durability of the finished product.
a) Meets the relevant laboratory testing requirements for products 2.17. Shelf Life
new to the market as outlined under section 6, or
Length of time that a product, in its original and unopened
b) Has a documented track record/case history sufficient to be container, maintains its chemical effectiveness.
considered as fit for its intended purpose within a specific market
sector and geographical area. NOTE: To achieve optimum performance and durability for each
type of technology, it is important that chemical effectiveness
2.7. Contact Angle measured at the time of production (see definitions) be adequately
maintained until the time of application.
The angle at which a liquid/vapour interface meets a solid surface.
3. Descriptions
2.8. Durable
For the purposes of this Data Sheet, the following
The ability of a treatment to last a defined period of time relevant descriptions apply:
to specific conditions of exposure and use without deterioration
in performance. 3.1. Glass Surface treatments
2.9. Non-Stick 3.1.1. Polymeric resin
The ability of a surface to minimise the accumulation of dirt - both
organic and inorganic - thus making it easier to clean and keep A polymer that chemically cross-links with itself and bonds to the
clean, by making the surface chemically inert to most substances. substrate during the curing process to produce a multi-molecular
layer that is “non-stick”, i.e. chemically inert to most substances after
2.10. Organic Deposit curing.

Carbon based materials including, but not limited to, bird droppings, 3.1.2. Reactive Silicone Fluid
road film and tree sap.
A short chain silicone polymer that, after curing, is mono-molecular
2.11. Inorganic Deposit in thickness and produces a hydrophobic surface.
Non carbon based materials including, but not limited to, cement
3.2. Glass Surface Coatings
and brick dust, building run off, and lime scale.
3.2.1. Sol-Gel Silane, Type A Coating
2.12. Non-durable Water-repellent Coating
A GST that has not yet been proven to meet the requirements A bi-layered structure that is silane based and shall be applied by a
of 2.8 controlled method to produce a hydrophobic surface that consists
of organic and inorganic segments
NOTE: Until a GST is proven to be durable according to 2.8 or
is chemically identical to a proven product, it is considered as 3.2.2. Bi-functional Silane, Type B Coating
non-durable with the only function of being water-repellent.
A mono layered structure that produces a hydrophobic surface
Surface Modification of Glass for Ease of Maintenance - Liquid Applied Glass Surface Treatments

3.2.3. UV-cured Silane, Type C Coating 5. Effectiveness

Technology similar to bi-functional silanes i.e. Type B coating, that To achieve optimum performance and durability for each type of
requires high energy ultraviolet (UV) light to activate the curing technology, it is important that the product is used within its
process. effective shelf life.

4. Applications NOTE: For silane based products the shelf life is typically between
twelve to eighteen months.
A GST, when correctly applied, offers a range of benefits for all
types of glass used in buildings and transportation. 6. Testing

Applications include, but are not limited to, external and internal Laboratory tests can be used to determine if a GST is fit to place
glass such as: on the market. The way of proving performance and durability is
under actual conditions of exposure and use over an extended
period of time.
• Domestic windows and doors - new construction,
replacement
Test organisations have reported that laboratory tests or
• Commercial glazing - windows, doors, curtain walling, combination of tests alone cannot predict the performance or
spandrel panels, roof lights durability of a GST under actual field conditions.

• Decorative glass - stained, leaded, sandblasted/ Prior to a GST being introduced to the market it should meet the
abrasively etched Type Testing (TT) as listed in Table 1.

• Shower doors and enclosure NOTE: It is advised that as early as possible in the development
process, field trials should be carried out under actual conditions of
• Glass blocks
exposure and use in the specific markets sector(s) and
• Mirrors and glass furniture application(s) involved.

• Solar panels – thermal and photovoltaic (PV)

• Transportation - Glass in marine vessels and public service

vehicles

• Display cabinets

• Splash backs

Table 1. Initial Type Testing of a Product

Property Standard or Test Requirement Outcome

UV Weathering EN 1096 – 3 Requirements as per the Standard

BS 3900-F16

Light transmission EN 410:2011 No differences observed in light transmission.

Condensation Resistance EN 1096-2 Requirements as per the Standard. After test Contact angle
as Type A measured by ASTM C813-90 to be ≥90o measured in 5 places
across the tested surface

Alkali Attack EN 3473-1:1991 Samples to be treated as per supplier’s instructions, and then
classified ‘as a material’. Treated samples ‘as a material’ to show a
minimum of 2% reduction in weight loss when compared to
untreated samples

Failure Mode Engineering Accepted Code of Practice (ACoPs) No high level risks or consequences observed
Analysis (FMEA)

NOTE: The purchaser may request additional tests to be carried out.

Surface Modification of Glass for Ease of Maintenance - Liquid Applied Glass Surface Treatments

Table 2. Additional Test Requirements - Specific to Market Sector(s)

Property Standard or Test Requirement Outcome

Shower Glass

Resistance to humidity EN 1096 – 2 Requirements as per the Standard. After test Contact angle
as Type A measured by ASTM C813-90 to be ≥90o measured in 5 places
across the tested surface

Glass in Marine Vessels and Public Service Vehicles

Neutral salt spray EN 1096 – 2 Requirements as per the Standard. After test Contact angle
as Type A measured by ASTM C813-90 to be ≥90o measured in 5 places
across the tested surface

Resistance to Humidity EN 1096 – 2 Requirements as per the Standard. After test Contact angle
as Type A measured by ASTM C813-90 to be ≥90o measured in 5 places
across the tested surface

Resistance to pressure washing ASTM D7089-06 using samples of The contact angle as measured by ASTM C813-90 must
30cm square and cleaned for five minutes be ≥90o measured in five places across the tested surface.

Protection During Installation or Construction

Resistance to mortar Staining Resist Mortar Mix as specified in After 42 days, no glass staining or damage to be observed
section [Link] of BS 3712-2

Direct Food Contact

Fit for direct food contact European Directive 2002/72/EC To meet European and United States Food & Drug
FDA Regulations (Chapter 21 Section Administration (FDA) testing requirements for direct
175.300) food contact

Antimicrobial – Resistance to Adhesion and Growth

Antimicrobial or resistance to Measure adhesion of staphylococcus Minimum of 80% reduction in the number of bacteria
adherence of Bacteria aureus NCTC 4163 adhered to a treated surface after washing when
compared to an untreated surface

Glass Floors and Stair Treads

Will not adversely affect the Tested to HSE slip risk value, PTV No increase in the level of Slip Risk Rating
slip risk values values and UKSRG.

Use with Vacuum Lifters

Use with Vacuum Lifter Tested to 200% of the Safe Working There should be no sliding of the pads when applied to
Load without slippage the coated surface.
NOTE: When pads are released sliding should be avoided.
Surface Modification of Glass for Ease of Maintenance - Liquid Applied Glass Surface Treatments

7. Considerations procedures must take into account every step of the process from
receipt of stock to the disposal of used containers. Safe working
7.1. Shelf Life procedures must also consider the application process and the
The polymeric resin (section 3.1.1) and reactive silicone fluid possibility of any air borne contamination associated with the
(section 3.1.2) have prolonged shelf lives. Products with a finite application technique.
shelf life (silanes) need to be stored and handled so that best
practice in stock rotation throughout the supply chain is achieved. Step 3. COSHH (Control Of Substances Hazardous to
Health 2002)
The manufacturers or distributors of glass surface treatments
Principles of good practice
should always advise their end users of the effective shelf life of
these products and display any use-by date in a prominent place on
The COSHH Regulations define good control practice in schedule
the labelling; this should conform to local or international
2a as follows:
regulations.
1. Design and operate processes and activities to minimise
7.2. Health and Safety
emission, release and spread of substances hazardous to health.
When considering the use of liquid applied glass surface treatments
it is critical to be conversant with the Health and Safety 2. Take into account all relevant routes of exposure – inhalation,
requirements associated with the use of the chemicals and skin absorption and ingestion – when developing control
processes involved and the legal requirement to protect personnel measures.
who may be affected by your actions.
3. Control exposure by measures that are proportionate to the
health risk.
Step 1. Safety Data Sheet
4. Choose the most effective and reliable control options which
When sourcing the chemical products to be utilised in the process, minimise the escape and spread of substances hazardous to
ensure that Safety Data Sheets have been obtained from the health.
supplier. This will provide specific information on the chemical(s)
supplied and highlight areas for further consideration such as: 5. Where adequate control of exposure cannot be achieved by
other means, provide, in combination with other control
• Hazards identified, measures, suitable personal protective equipment.

• First Aid Measures, 6. Check and review regularly all elements of control measures for
their continuing effectiveness.
• Fire Fighting Measures,
7. Inform and train all employees on the hazards and risks from
the substances they work with and the use of control measures
• Accidental Release Measures,
developed to minimise the risks.
• Handling and Storage, 8. Ensure that the introduction of control measures does not
increase the overall risk to health and safety.
• Application Method

• Exposure Controls, Further Information and resources:

Control Of Substances Hazardous to Health 2002 (COSHH)

• Personal Protective Equipment.
[Link]/coshh
• Physical and Chemical Properties,
Safety Data Sheets
• Stability and Reactivity, [Link]/coshh/basics/[Link]

• Toxicological Information, Flammable Liquids

[Link]/fireandexplosion/[Link]
• Transport and Disposal information.
Disposal of hazardous waste
It is essential to obtain and evaluate this information when [Link]/en/...wasteandrecycling/dg10014614
undertaking the risk assessment process required for the use of
liquid applied glass surface treatments.
Local Exhaust Ventilation
[Link]/lev/processes/[Link]
Step 2. The Process

Having identified the chemicals to be used and utilised the Glass and Glazing Federation
information provided by the Safety Data Sheet, the process and dmoore@ggf,[Link]
how the products will be used should be considered. Safe working
• Windows and Doors
SECTION 6.2
Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation
6.2 M A R CH 2 00 6
of Windows and External Doorsets

1. Scope 2.1 Bow Window 2.10 Lintel

This Code of Practice is designed to A type of bay window, usually carrying A beam supporting loads over an opening.
emphasise the good practices required only light loads, which does not form an
for the successful surveying and extension to the floor area of the room. 2.11 Manufacturing size
installation of windows and external
(Also known as window size or work size)
doorsets in both new build and
The overall window dimensions, which
2.2 Dormer Window
replacement situations. It is not
A vertical or near-vertical, window built result from making the appropriate
intended to replace any British or
into and projecting from a pitched roof deductions from the structural opening
European Standards, but rather to
structure. size. It should be identified whether this
supplement them.
includes or excludes any add-ons or
extension pieces.
This Code of Practice provides guidance
2.3 Damp Proof Membrane (DPM)
on surveying and installation for non-load A device, usually comprising of a layer or
bearing windows and external doors of strip of impermeable material, placed
2.12 Oriel window
any material. It is primarily aimed at within a wall, chimney or similar Multi-sided window projecting from an
installations in dwellings but much of the construction to prevent the passage of upper storey, and generally supported by
guidance given is relevant to other types moisture. brackets.
of installations.
2.4 Finishings
This Code does not cover curtain or
2.13 Structural mullion

ribbon walling. However, the good Final coverings and treatment of surfaces
A load bearing intermediate vertical
practices detailed in this document will and their intersections.
member of the building fabric which
also apply to separate window and door transfers applied loads back to the
elements within those particular types of structure.
2.5 Fixing
window assemblies. Item used to secure separate units of a
coupled assembly to each other or to 2.14 Structural opening
When the window and external doorsets secure a completed assembly into the
to be installed fall outside the scope of structure of the building. An aperture in a wall into which the
this Code then specialist advice should be window or doorset is to be installed.
sought from the manufacturer. 2.6 Fixing Packer
2.15 Structural opening size
A packing piece used in gaps at fixing
points to obtain rigid fixing and prevent The size of the maximum rectangular
distortion. shape that can be fitted within the
2. Definitions

The definitions given in BS 6100 Section 1 structural opening.

generally applies, supplemented for the
2.7 Frame

purpose of this Code of Practice by the Surround to a door leaf, window etc.,
2.16 Structure

following. enabling it to be fixed into position. Organised combination of connected

parts designed to provide some measure
Note 1. The phrase ‘sub-sill’ is used in 2.8 Gallows bracket
of rigidity, or a construction works having
place of the more commonly but such an arrangement.
incorrectly used word ‘sill’. Bracket below a bay or bow window to
support the weight of that window. 2.17 Surveyor
Note 2. In accordance with modern
terminology, the word ‘doorset’ is used to A qualified or otherwise competent
2.9 Installer

describe a door outer frame complete The company and / or individual carrying person who is capable of surveying for
with the door leaf. out the works. window and doorset installation, advising

Glass
Glass
andand
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:Tel:
020020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

on suitable design, carrying out the risk cleaning is given in BS 8213-1. The Note: Reference to the manufacturer
assessment as necessary, and assessing requirements of CONDAM and COSHH should be made in case of doubt.
the quality of the finished installation. regulations should also be considered.
The surveyor, as part of the risk 4.5 Lintels
2.18 System supplier assessment, should ensure a safe
working environment including safe The surveyor shall take responsible steps
The original source of the design and / or to check that there is a lintel or other
access is provided.
supply of components used in the means of supporting the structure above
fabrication of the window or door. the window or doorset. Where no such
When a load-bearing situation is suspected
support exists and the load is carried on
or confirmed then reference should be
the existing window or doorset, then
made to The Building Regulations
alternative means of providing this
3. Specification of materials
'Approved Document A : 2004 Structure.
3.1 Fixings support shall be provided.

Fixings shall be at least as corrosion 4.2 Suitability of Aperture 4.6 Bow, Oriel and Dormer Windows
resistant as BS EN 1670 Grade 3.
The surveyor shall check for any apparent Where bow, bay oriel or dormer
defects and deficiencies around the windows have low applied loads no
structural opening. If any defects are
3.2 Sealants
special structural calculations are
Sealants shall be in accordance with found, then the customer shall be required. Where any doubts exist a
Annex B. notified, and agreement reached as to
who is responsible for rectifying these
structural assessment must be made and

defects prior to the new windows or

appropriate action taken with reference
3.3 Finishing trims
doorsets being installed.
to authoritative technical documentation

Finishing trims, where used externally,

or to competent persons.

should be good exterior quality materials Note: For large replacement contracts, it
may be advisable to remove one window
4.7 Building Regulations
used in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. All trims to check the condition of the reveals and The surveyor shall ensure that
should be compatible with the colour existing DPM, in so far as this is possible. replacement windows and doorsets
and material of the frame. comply with all relevent Building
4.3 Services in the aperture Regulations.

4. Surveying for replacement The presence of any electrical or For new build installations, full compliance
windows and doorsets specialist items such as television aerials with Building Regulations is required.
and telephone wires in the aperture shall
4.1 General be noted. Wherever possible such
services shall be routed around, and not
4.8 Coupled / Combination frames

Good surveying is the basis of ensuring a through, the outer frame of the window Where windows and / or doorsets are to
quality installation. Surveyors shall be or door. When this is not possible, a be coupled, the surveyor shall determine
fully trained in window and doorset solution shall be agreed with the the method to be used taking into
installation techniques, and in the customer, which does not compromise account wind and dead loads, visual
requirements of surveying for the the performance of the product. appearance and position of the coupling.
particular window system being used.
The presence of any curtain tracks in the
For future reference with respect to aperture shall be noted. This is particularly
4.9 Opening type and direction
Building Regulation compliance, it is important for inward opening windows
advisable to record (ideally with the aid The surveyor must confirm with the
and net curtains. These could cause
of a photograph) the style of the window customer whether the window or door is
problems either during installation, or
or door being replaced along with the to be inward or outward opening and
interfere with the function of the window
size of any opening lights and the position the handing. On outward opening doors,
and doorset after the installation. Action
of any mullions and transoms. Ideally, this it is strongly recommended that a
to prevent any problems shall be agreed
would be witnessed by the householder restriction device, e.g. a doorstop positioned
with the customer prior to the installation.
and [Link] surveyor should as close as possible, is fitted to help avoid
make note of any enhancements which damage caused by sudden wind gusts.
The protrusion of outward opening
4.4 Design
could be made with respect to security
issues that may be apparent. windows into the path of pedestrians
The surveyor shall determine the design
The surveyor or other competent person should be considered.
wind load for the application, and then
should carry out a risk assessment for the satisfy himself that the windows are
installation process and the suitability of suitable for that exposure. BS 6375-1
4.10 Doorsets

the window design. Information on the gives guidance on the selection and The following additional aspects should
safety of windows in use and during specification of windows. be taken into consideration for doorsets:

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

Thresholds – consideration should be

given to the type of threshold and any
Width or height of

protection for it that may be required.

Structural opening From From

Letterplates – the size and location of any

Up 1.5m 3.0m Over

letterplate shall be confirmed with the

to 1.5m to 3.0m to 4.5m* 4.5m*

customer.
Material
GRP 5 10 15 15
Note: Reference may be made to PVC-White 10 10 15 20
BS EN 13724 : 2002 Postal services.
Apertures of private letter boxes and
PVC-Non-white 15 15 22 28

letter plates. Timber 5 5 5 5

Steel 8 10 12 15
The requirement for additional hardware
such as trickle vents, cat flaps, spy holes
Aluminium 10 10 15 20

etc. shall be clearly specified. * Consideration should be given to the use of intermediate expansion joints when the width exceeds 3m.

On doorsets with side panels, it may be

NOTE [Link] deductions are from the total width or height, and are not ‘per side’.With nominal installations, all the height
deduction will be at the head of the window.

necessary to consider ‘mullion bounce’

NOTE [Link] gap required for effective polyurethane foam fixing at the head is 10mm to 15mm.

and stiffen the mullion to limit this. Any

NOTE [Link] fitting aluminium or steel frames into existing timber sub-frames deduct 4mm.

such stiffening shall be clearly specified. Table 1 - Recommended deductions from structural opening sizes (mm)

4.11 Brickwork removal

Where bricks are to be removed to

install products, the method of any cavity
closing shall be specified. The method of
making good shall be agreed with customer.
Note: It is advisable to consult local
authority building control to ensure any
local interpretations, for instance with
respect to cavity closing, are taken into
account.

4.12 Drainage

The surveyor shall specify or confirm any

method of drainage of frame and/or
glazing to be used.

4.13 Special glasses

The surveyor shall specify or confirm the

position, style and orientation of any glass
pattern or decoration including leading or
Georgian Bar inserts and the need for
any alignment.

4.14 Measurement Figure 1. Measurements of flat windows

Three measurements of width and height building. The surveyor shall determine It is recommended that a proportion of
shall be taken and the squareness of the how the sub-sill is to be fitted taking into the outer frame be hidden behind the
aperture determined by taking diagonal account features such as horns, and how existing brick [Link] system supplier
measurements, see Figure [Link] smallest any making good is to be carried out. or manufacturer should be able to advise
measurement of width and height is used The difference between internal and on this amount.
to determine manufacturing sizes. external reveal sizes shall be determined
and checks made to ensure that the It is a good idea to remove an internal
The need for any sub-sill shall be operation of any opening light will not be architrave from the window to see
determined. The size of the sub-sill shall impeded by plaster, render or tiles etc. exactly how deep the reverse brick detail
really is, to identify how much of the
be such that there is an adequate overhang 4.15 Surveying a window in check outer frame can be put behind in the width.
of at least 25mm from the face of the reveal (reverse brick detail)

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

A hole should be drilled through the Note:The use of proprietary cavity Any electrical or specialist items, such as
head of the existing box frame to closers can enable accurate construction television aerials or telephone wires, shall
ascertain the maximum height the of the window opening and simple be re-routed around, and not through,
window can be put behind the brick. installation of the windows. the frame of the window. Where this is
Quite often this differs greatly from the not feasible, then alternatives shall be
width. agreed with the customer. Appropriate
6. Removal of existing windows and trades should be employed where
The positioning of the frame within the
doorsets necessary.
aperature, should provide uniform visual
appearance for the entire building.
6.1 General 6.2 Safety
The installation team should ensure that
All site practices shall be carried out in a
4.16 Manufacturing sizes all relevant documentation, e.g. drawings
safe manner. Work procedures shall
survey sheets, special instructions etc. are
With some materials expansion and comply with all current health and safety
available and understood. Care should
contraction is to be expected due to at work legislation. For more information
be taken to ensure that the delivery
temperature fluctuations, and this must see the Health and Safety Executive web
vehicle has been loaded correctly with
be taken into consideration. site [Link]
the relevant products and equipment.
Prior to the commencement of work the
Allowances are also to be made with Window removal and installation can be
sizes, type and condition of all windows
regard to the window and building a dangerous operation. Safety precautions
and doorsets should be checked both
aperture [Link] 1 gives the shall be observed at all times. All new
against the survey sizes and types and
deductions that are recommended for operatives shall be formally trained in
against the actual aperture sizes.
windows and external doorsets. the safe use of all tools, and installation
companies shall ensure that their
At the request of the installer, prior to operatives have the correct equipment
When calculating height deductions, due the commencement of work, the including personal protective equipment.
allowances should be also made for the customer should be given adequate Full training and assessment records of all
width of any silicone or mortar bed at notice to remove any furniture, fixings or operatives must be kept in an acceptable
the sub-sill. fittings that may otherwise be damaged manner.
during the installation. Important safety precautions include:
4.17 Installation Techniques
The installer is responsible for both a. When handling glass, all operatives
The surveyor shall determine the internal and external protection of the shall wear safety goggles, cut resistant
optimum installation techniques, see 7. property during the installation work. gloves and safety helmets.
Care should be taken to avoid soiling of,
The surveyor is responsible for specifying or damage to floor coverings and b. All electrical power tools MUST
the nature, location and quantity of the needless damage to decorations. work on either 110 volts main power
fixings taking into account the Damage will inevitably be caused to the or be battery operated (see BS
manufacturer’s instructions. reveals adjacent to the installation, and 7671 : 2001 Section 604).
reasonable care must be taken to keep
this to a minimum.
4.18 Final Checklist c. A safe working platform to give safe
The installer should plan to install and access to the structural openings is
An example of a final checklist is given in seal the new windows and doorsets on essential. (See HSE Construction
Annex D. the same day that the existing windows information sheet 49).
or doorsets are removed, to maintain
5 Surveying for New Build security and weather tightness of the d. When operating a grinding disc, the
structure. When this is not practical, for following safety precautions shall be
The manufacturing sizes and methods of example large contracts, an alternative observed:
installation in new build are normally arrangement for security and weather
• Heavy gloves, face visors, helmets and
decided by the designer in conjunction tightness should be agreed in advance
chest protection shall be worn, as
with the window and doorset supplier in between installer and customer.
discs can easily shatter into lethal
accordance with current Building
projectiles.
Regulations and ‘Limiting thermal bridging The existing windows and doorsets
and air leakage: Robust construction should be removed with care to avoid • Ensure clear access, and that sparks
details for dwelling and similar buildings’ unnecessary damage to the building cannot ignite combustible material
TSO [Link] surveyor shall ensure that structure and its finishings, and without such as dustsheets.
the details agreed are suitable for the permitting any subsidence of the
products to be used and are clearly superstructure during or after the • All non-essential personnel shall be
defined. installation procedure. moved a safe distance away.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

e. Special care should be taken to avoid

contact with asbestos. When the
150mm
250mm
presence of asbestos is suspected,
then refer to relevant GGF Codes of
Practice for asbestos board or asbestos
cement regarding removal and contact

>150mm
the local Environmental Health Officer.

f. The components of old windows and

doorsets shall be recycled wherever
possible. They shall always be stored
and disposed of safely.

Further guidance on the removal of 600mm

existing windows is given in Annex A.
150mm max 150mm
250mm 250mm

7 Installation Figure 2. Fixing positions PVC-U windows

Screws shall be sized to penetrate at positions should be agreed with the

least 25mm into timber, plugged holes in customer, and on domestic installations,
7.1 General

brick, block or masonry, unless equivalent the closest possible fixing positions shall
For correct window fixing, each frame
demonstrable provision can be made by be used.
member should be fixed to the substrate
other means, for example in accordance
or to an adjacent window to resist all
with the appropriate structural code. The following figures show
likely imposed loads that will cause the
Connections to steelwork up to 2mm recommended fixing positions:
frame to deflect. These loads may be
thick such as folded sheet lintels should
due to:
be made with appropriate thread cutting 7.3.2 Fixing distances for timber
screws, to steelwork over 2mm thick into
• Wind loads
windows
pre-tapped holes with machine screws of
• Operating loads minimum 5mm diameter, alternatively Generally the sides of the frame should
• Gravity with power-driven hardened self-drilling be secured as follows:
• Accidental impact screws. a. Corner jamb shall be between
• Attempted burglary 150mm – 250mm from the external
The resulting deflection of any member Note: Other proprietary mechanical corner.
needs to be limited to 1/150th of its fixing methods should be assessed for b. Intermediate fixings shall be at
overall length. suitability. centres no greater than 600mm.
Fixings methods are affected by: c. There shall be a minimum of two
fixings per jamb.
7.3 Fixing Distances

• The presence or absence of a wall cavity. The surveyor is responsible for specifying d. On windows over 1800mm wide,
• The nature and condition of any cavity the nature, location and quantity of the central head and sub-sill fixings shall
• The position of the plaster line and fixings taking into account the be provided.
then to minimise disturbance and manufacturer’s instructions.
damage to interior decorations
• The design of the reveal 7.3.1 PVC-U Windows and doors
• Any requirements for fire resistance
Generally all four sides of the frame shall
be secured as follows:
a. Corner fixings shall be between
7.2 Fixings
150mm and 250mm from the
There are two principal methods of fixing external corner.
available, which may be used separately b. No fixings shall be less than 150mm
or in combination. These are through from the centre line of a mullion or
frame fixings and lug fixings. Always transom.
follow the manufacturer’s instruction. c. Intermediate fixings shall be at
If lug fixings are used then they shall be centres no greater than 600mm
of a suitable material to resist corrosion d. There shall be a minimum of two
and, if used externally, they shall be fixings on each jamb.
secured to the wall using ‘one-way’ or If it is not possible to follow these rules,
other suitable security screws. then, on large contracts, alternative

© Glass and Glazing Federation 5

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

However, the presence of pre-cast

concrete or steel lintels may make it
Additional fixing for windows 150mm

impracticable or pose severe difficulties in

over 1800mm wide 250mm

achieving the specified fixing distances. In

these instances the use of polyurethane
foam has proved a useful addition to
mechanical fixings.

>150mm
600mm Foam fixings shall never be used as the
sole method of fixing the entire frame
max

into the reveal.

7.4 Materials

Materials used in the installation of

150mm windows and doorset shall comply with
250mm Annex B.
Figure 3. Fixing distances for timber windows
7.5 Finishings
7.3.3 Fixing distances for aluminium 7.3.4 Fixing distance steel windows
windows Finishings, such as trims are generally used
The recommended maximum pitch of to neaten the interface between window
Generally all four sides of the frame shall fixing positions for steel frames of hot and [Link] should not be used
be secured as follows: rolled solid section is 175mm from the to provide or enhance the
e. Corner jamb fixings shall be between corners, and then at 750mm intervals; for weathertightness of the window or door
100mm – 150mm from the external steel frames of cold formed hollow or the perimeter joints.
corner section 200mm from corners, then at Finishings, where required, shall be good
f. No fixings shall be less than 100mm 900mm intervals. Note that all holes exterior quality materials used in
from the centre line of a mullion or pierced around the frame perimeter for accordance with the manufacturer’s
transom. fabrication and assembly purposes will instructions, and colour matched where
g. There shall be a minimum of two necessarily require a fixing screw. specified.
fixings per jamb.
Cellular extruded PVC-Ue trims shall be
fitted in accordance with the manufacturer’s
Additional fixing for windows 100 - 150mm instructions and conform to BS 7619:
over 1800mm wide 1993 Specification for extruded cellular
unplasticised PVC (PVC-Ue) profiles.

7.6 Coupled windows / assemblies

Coupled windows / assemblies are usually

delivered to site as separate window
>100mm
600
mm units, to ease handling and minimise
damage. When building up components
into the required assembly, care should
be taken to keep coupling joints equal,
and frames both aligned and plumb.
Ensure that perimeter fixings are made
close to couple bar ends. Coupling joints
100mm
100-150mm
must have seals.
150mm

Figure 4. Fixing distances for aluminium windows Coupled windows / assemblies shall be
fastened together in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
h. On windows over 1800mm wide,
central head and sub-sill fixings shall
7.3.5 Polyurethane foam
be provided.
7.7 Replacement windows and doors
Experience has shown that fewer
i. Intermediate fixings shall be at problems arise if fixings are used in Windows and doorsets shall be installed
centres no greater than 600mm. accordance with 7.3.1 - 7.3.4. plumb and square within the aperture,

© Glass and Glazing Federation 6

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

without twist, racking or distortion of any

member in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommended tolerances
to operate correctly after installation and
in accordance with the surveyor’s
instructions. Fixed Side Hung Tilt/turn
Turn/tilt

7.7.1 Frame Position

Annex C shows typical arrangements for

the most commonly found reveal details.
Fixed Side Hung Tilt/turn

Replacement windows and doorsets are

Turn/tilt

generally positioned to minimise the

amount of making good. Important points
to consider include: Fixed Tilt/turn
Side Hung
Turn/tilt

a. The new frame must bridge the

DPM. Any damage to the DPM must
Horizontal pivot Vertical Pivot Tilt

be repaired.
b. The frame shall be set back as far in Fixed Tilt/turn

the reveal as is feasible for better

Side Hung
~150mm Turn/tilt

weather performance. Horizontal pivot Vertical Pivot Tilt

c. The correct movement gap has been

provided.
~150mm

7.7.2 Open Cavities Fully reversible

topPivot
hung
Horizontal pivot Vertical Tilt

Open cavities discovered between inner

Vertical slider

and outer skins of brick or block work Top Hung

need to be bridged or closed with an ~150mm

insulating material, care being taken to

Fully reversible

maintain integrity of damp membrane,

Horizontal pivot topPivot
Vertical hung Tilt

and adequate purchase for fixing screws

Vertical slider

ensured, if need be with extended

Top Hung

fixing lugs.
~150mm
Fully reversible
top hung

7.7.3 Installation packers Vertical slider

Setting block
Hortizontal slider

Appropriately sized installation packers

Top Hung
Off centre Location block

shall be used adjacent to fixing positions

vertical pivot
Fully reversible

to prevent outer frame distortion during

top hung

installation. Installation packers shall be

Vertical slider
Setting block

resistant to compression, rot and corrosion.

Hortizontal slider ~150mm
Top Hung

They shall span the full depth of the

Off centre Location block

outer [Link] fixings shall be tightened

vertical pivot

so that the frame is held securely against

the packers. Over tightening may lead to
Setting block

distortion and shall be avoided.

Hortizontal slider ~150mm

Off centre Location block

vertical pivot

When lugs are used, they shall be packed

off the substrate to prevent distortion. Hortizontal slider
Setting block
~150mm

Where enhanced security is required,

Off centre Location block
vertical pivot

additional packers shall be used adjacent

to hinge and locking points.
~150mm

7.7.4 Finishing off and making good

Debris or contaminates shall be removed,

any drainage paths shall be cleared. Figure 4. Setting and location block position

© Glass and Glazing Federation 7

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

Internal reveals shall be made good as will make the sash window draughty, and 7.9.2 Glazing Methods
agreed, ready for the customer to jambs bowing inwards will mean that the
redecorate if necessary. sashes will be excessively tight to slide, Many windows and doors are delivered
and will probably not tilt inwards for ready glazed. Alternatively they may be
Any materials such as trims and sealants cleaning if the option is present on the supplied with glass units and pre-formed
should not be applied on top of existing window design. glazing gaskets to be applied on site in
wall coverings or protective tapes as any accordance with the manufacturer’s
subsequent removal of that wall covering c. Lug fixings should be used to secure instruction. Some may require butyl based,
or tape could also remove the trim or the window in the aperture, as polyethylene, PVC or acrylic glazing tapes.
sealant. protruding screw heads will foul on the When used externally, these shall be
smooth sliding operation of the window. capped with silicone sealant.
Protective tapes should be removed as These fixings should be as detailed in 7.2
soon as practicable as ageing of tapes can Others will use non-setting compounds,
cause difficulties in removal. Refer to gun-grade solvent release types, one-or-
manufacturer’s guidance. d. Expanding foam can be used as an aid
two part curing sealants or two-part
to the mechanical fixings, but great care
rubberizing compounds.
should be taken not to bow the outer
Sand and cement shall not be used to fill In all cases manufacturer’s instructions
frame jambs. If expanding foam is used
the gap between the outer frame and shall be followed. Insulating glass units,
then packing pieces should be used
the substrate except for backfill for steel setting and location blocks (see Figure 4),
between the frame and the sashes, or a
windows, nowadays usually limited to distance pieces, frame to glass and bead
brace put across the frame in order to
windows in stone surrounds or interior to glass gaskets, bead to frame air seals,
prevent this bowing.
fair-faced brick and concrete. corner sealing blocks, beads and bead
end caps bedding and capping sealants
Where the replacement product has a 7.8 New Build shall be installed in accordance with BS
smaller front to back dimension than that 8000 -7: 1990 Workmanship on building
of the original, then there may be a The position of the window within the site. Code of Practice for Glazing.
mastic and / or paint line visible on the reveal is normally agreed at the time of
substrate, which should be removed as the original design taking into account
‘Limiting thermal bridging and air leakage:
7.10 Sealing
much as practicable.
Robust construction details for dwellings
The presence of old, oil-based mastics
The method of, and responsibility for, and similar buildings’.These details require
and bituminous damp proof membranes
repair to any render must be agreed with the closing of the cavity with a softwood
can adversely affect the behaviour or
the customer. or proprietary closer. The latter may
appearance of otherwise correctly
provide a means of locating and fixing the
specified and applied sealants, through the
window. In such cases the manufacturer’s
migration of hydrocarbons to the surface
7.7.5 Installation of box sash windows instructions shall be followed.
of the new sealants. Consequent
When replacing a box sash window into photo-oxidation of the migrant products
a flush brick detail, follow the guidelines
7.9 Glazing can affect sealant performance and
for a normal casement window, and produce discolouration. This risk shall be
points a. - d. below.
7.9.1 General avoided by removal of unwanted mastic
and by keeping sealant away from DPMs.
When replacing a window into the All glazing shall comply with the
original check reveal, the window requirements of BS 6262: 2005 Code of Perimeter joints must be sealed from the
should be fitted from the internal, Practice for glazing for buildings and BS outside with a sealant appropriate to:
with the outer frame hidden behind 8000 -7: 1990 Workmanship on building [Link] frame surface
the brickwork. site. Code of Practice for Glazing. In [Link] substrate material
addition, any glass or insulating glazing c. Joint size and configuration
unit manufacturer’s instruction shall be d. Anticipated joint movement
a. As with all sash windows sufficient followed. In the case of IGU compliance e. Anticipated exposure to weather
packing should be place at the corner of with BS EN 1279 should be achieved.
the sill to transfer the weight of the See Figure 4. Annex C gives more details on joint
replacement sash window into the
construction.
structure, without bowing the sill All insulating glass units shall be examined
member. A bowed sill will result in the for damage prior to installation. In situations where sealants rely upon
cams not engaging. Defective units shall not be used. atmospheric moisture to initiate curing
deep filling should be avoided. All sealants
b. It is imperative that the window must Insulating glass units with low emissivity shall be applied against a firm backing so
be fitted level, without twist and with coatings shall be oriented in accordance that it is forced against the sides of the
parallel jambs. Jambs bowing outwards with the manufacturer’s instructions. joint during application.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 8

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

To avoid failure in service, the sealant It is good practice to run a sharp knife a. Remove the mitred beading from
shall not adhere to the backing but shall between the inside face of the frame and around the frame.
permit relative movement. the plaster adjoining the frame, to
Note:These requirements can be minimise the damage to the plaster when b. Carefully cut the sash to release and
achieved through the use of a closed cell, the frame is removed. lower the weights
oversized circular foam strip.
c. Remove the bottom sash cords, then
7.10.1 Extra consideration for steel and take off the parting bead and take out
aluminium windows and doors the top sash.
It is recommended best practice for steel d. Cut the outer frame from the aperture,
and aluminium framed windows and leaving the horns in the structure.
doors to have an insulating fill inserted or
injected wherever practicable around e. Remove the counterweight from the
their full perimeter behind the external sash box.
seal between frame and structural Figure A.1 Cutting through transoms and
opening. mullions f. Remove the sub-, if this is not part
of the outer frame.
7.11 Final Inspection A1 Timber Windows

After all installation a final inspection shall

A2 Metal Windows
Opening casements should be removed
be carried out to ensure that the first, complete with their glass, by levering There are two distinct types of metal
installation is fully in accordance with the the screws from the frames, or windows that may have to be removed.
requirements, preferably accompanied by unscrewing the hinges, or by cutting
the customer. An example checklist is through the hinges. This provides a. Metal windows fixed through the frame
given in Annex D. working space, and reduces the weight. into timber sub-frames or direct into
After removal of the casements and the aperture. First remove all glazing
It is essential that the customer is made fixed light glazing, cut through any from fixed lights, and separate and
aware of the method(s) of operation, mullions and transoms and remove them remove all opening lights from the
locking and unlocking and fire egress. from the outer frame of the window, as frames. Then locate the screws holding
This should be accompanied with written shown in the diagram below. the metal frame in place and remove
operating and maintenance instructions them. Remove any timber sub-frame
such as those published by trade as described for the timber windows.
If the original fixing nails or screws cannot
federations. b. Metal windows sitting directly into the
be found and removed, it would be
necessary to cut twice through the outer brickwork or concrete held in place by
In addition, it is good practice to have the lugs attached to the outer frame.
frame to remove a small central piece of
customer or customer’s designated Remove any opening lights with an
the outer frame. Then carefully lever the
representative sign off the installation angle grinder or hacksaw. Then cut
frame from the surrounding aperture – in
after passing the inspection. the plane of the window – so as to cause through any transoms and mullions and
the minimum of damage to the aperture. remove. Then remove the screws
Annex A
There are often problems with windows from the frame by driving them
(Informative) Window removal techniques
under the roof eaves. There may be a through the frame using a suitable
brick course resting on the frame between punch. Then cut through each side of
Before the removal of existing windows the frame with an angle grinder and
the top of the existing frame and soffit
and doorsets is started, a risk assessment lever away from the wall, taking care
board. This course is often purely decorative
should be carried out. not to damage the fabric of the
– not load bearing and should be
wedged into position until the frame has aperture.
Appropriate protective equipment must
been removed. Also the soffit board –
be worn at all times and people and
plywood, timber or asbestos / cement is
animals must be excluded from within
A3 Plastic Windows and Doorsets
frequently nailed to the existing window
the potential range of flying debris. All of the glazing should be removed first
frame. Carefully locating and removing or
cutting the nails should sever this joint. by removing the glazing beads. A sharp
Safe removal of fixed light glazing is knife may be required to free the glass
imperative. This will preferably be carried where glazing tapes have been used.
out by removing the putty, sprigs, beads
A1.1 Removal of ‘Box – Sash’ windows
or fixing nails and removing the glazing Opening lights should be separated from
intact in its entirety. Alternatively, the Most box-sash windows pre-date cavity the frame and removed.
glass should be carefully broken, so that walls, and are built into the internal
the fragments are on the outside of the reveals of solid brickwork. The sashes are It is advisable to remove any trim profiles
structure. removed fully glazed. around the windows to allow easier

© Glass and Glazing Federation 9

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

access and to determine the presence of three key performance criteria.

fixing brackets.
Plastic windows and doorsets are usually a. Movement capability (BS EN ISO 9046
fixed by through-frame fixings, brackets or and 9047) >25% preferred.
proprietary means. b. Modulus (BS EN ISO 8339) which
should be low.
a. Through-frame fixings can usually be c. Elasticity (BS EN ISO 7389) which
unscrewed to allow the frame to be should be high.
removed from the aperture. Care
should be taken to avoid excessive Other important criteria for window
damage to the fabric of the building. perimeter sealants are:
b. Where fixing brackets have been used
to secure the window or door it will Flow (BS EN ISO 7390)
be necessary to remove the mullions Loss of Volume and Mass (BS EN ISO 0563)
and transoms see Figure 2. The frame Adhesive strength of the bond between
should then be cut with an angle sealant and substrate after water
grinder, and each section levered out – immersion (BS EN ISO 10590) or after
see figure 3. Extra care is needed to exposure to light (BS EN ISO 11431).
reduce the inevitable damage to the
window or door surround. Attempts The effect of the sealant on the substrate
should be made to unscrew the fixings should be determined to ensure
in the brackets, otherwise each adhesion and lack of staining and whether
individual fixing bracket should be primers are required.
levered out separately. BS 6093 : 1993 Code of Practice for
c. Proprietary fixings may require special design of joints and jointing in building
instruction from their manufacturer. construction. Table 1 List sealant types
and their generic properties Gun-Applied
A4 Removal of Sub-sill one-part chemically curing sealants based
upon silicones, polysulphides or
Sub-sill and sometimes heads, polyurethanes are in common use for this
windowboards and mullions are often application. Each is capable of providing
‘horned’ into the fabric of the aperture. an adequate sealant for window
This may conceal damp proof applications. Silicone sealants are more
membranes, and lead to difficulties in resistant to UV radiation and are
removal. Great care must be taken when preferred for external applications.
cutting and levering these items to Polyurethane sealants usually require
reduce damage to plaster, renders and primers with different primers needed for
brickwork to a minimum. If the DPM is different [Link] difficulty and lack
damaged, then it must be repaired or of product standard for the material
replaced. mitigates against the use of polyurethane
sealants for window applications.
Annex B
Sealants

The purpose of perimeter sealants is to

repel water and prevent air leakage in the
face of differential movement between
the aperture and the window. Suitable
sealants exhibit and retain flexibility over
this period. Sealants shall be compatible
with the frame material and the
substrate.

The British Adhesives and Sealants

Association [Link] publishes a
guide for BS ISO 11600 : 2002 Building
Construction – Jointing products –
classification and requirements for
[Link] divides sealants in category
F (Facades) and G (Glazing) and identifies

© Glass and Glazing Federation 10

 Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

Annex C

Insulation where
required, see 7.10.1

Figure C1
Typical flush reveal with joint width less
Sealant than 6mm and frame bridging DPM

DPM

Insulation where
required, see 7.10.1

Backing Strip

Figure C2 Typical flush reveal with joint

width from 6mm to 15mm
Sealant

DPM

Insulation where
required, see 7.10.1

Figure C3 Typical rebated reveal for

replacement windows.
Sealant

packing peice DPM

Insulation where
required, see 7.10.1

Figure C4 Rebate reveal with window

Sealant shuffled into position.

DPM
© Glass and Glazing Federation 11
Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

Annex C Continued

Insulation where
required, see 7.10.1

Packing piece

Sealant Figure C5 Box sash replacement

DPM

Finishing trims

Insulation where
required, see 7.10.1

Figure C6 Window forward of DPM

Sealant
DPM

Silicone or
mortar bed

DPM
Figure C7 Typical sub-sill arrangement

Steel Lintel
shown

Drainage path - do Figure C8 Typical head arrangement.

not block
Insulation as
required see 7.10.1
Sealant

© Glass and Glazing Federation 12

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

Annex D
(Informative) Typical Checklists
Surveyor’s checklist

Y N
Is the condition of the aperture satisfactory and without evidence of damp or cracks?
Is the aperture square and even to within 5mm height and width and 10mm diagonals?
Will any loads be carried by the building and not the window or doorset?
Has the size and method of fixing any sub-sill been determined?
Will the proposed style function without being fouled by plaster, etc?
Will trickle vents function without being fouled by plaster etc?
Will hinges function without being fouled by plaster?
Are curtains and nets clear of the proposed design?
Is the size and configuration within the manufacturer’s limits?
Will the products exposure category be suitable for the location?
Will the installation comply with Building Regulations?
Is the method of drainage appropriate for the installation and product?
Has the customer confirmed the position and handing of opening lights?
Has any additional hardware been specified?
Is the access for installation safe?
Has the fixing method been determined?
Has the extent of making good been agreed with the customer?

© Glass and Glazing Federation 13

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

Annex D Continued
(Informative) Typical Checklists
Surveyor’s checklist

Final Inspection Checklist.

Y N
Visual appearance Is the frame installed plumb and square?
Are the beads fitted correctly and evenly?
Are exposed faces – including beads free from damage?
Is the frame clean with all protective tape removed?
Has any damage to the aperture been correctly made good?
Have all the trims been fitted correctly?
Has all site debris been removed?
Glazing Is all glazing as specified on contract?
Are all sealed units free from scratches and signs of failure?
Are obscure and coated glasses oriented properly?
Are sealed unit spacer bars covered by frame and beads?
Is the glazing held properly by beads / gaskets etc?
Is safety glass in use where neessary and are the markings visible?
Operation Do all openers open, close and lock as intended?
Are seals on frames without gaps?
Are cams free from binding against strikers?
Is all operating gear lubricated as necessary?
Is all hardware attached with correct numbers of fixings?
Sight lines Are all sight lines visually correct?
Are adjacent opening lights aligned as appropriate?
Are all decorative features e.g. leading, correctly aligned?
Sealing Are all joints smooth and correctly formed?
Is the sealant continuous around the frame?
Is the frame face free from excess sealant?
Drainage Are all drainage channels free from obstruction?
Misc.
Note: It may be of benefit to make a photographic record of the existing installation in case of dispute over Building Regulation
compliance at a later date.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 14

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

Annex E F: 2000 : Ventilation

Summary of documents referred:- L: 2002 : Conservation of Fuel

and Power
Bibliography
M: 1999 : Access
BS 6100 - Glossary of Building and Civil
Engineering terms N: 1998 : Glazing - Materials and
protection
BS EN 1670 : 1998
Building hardware corrosion resistance.
Requirements and test method.

BS EN 13724 : 2002
Postal services. Apertures of private letter
boxes and letter plates.

BS EN 1279 : 2005 : Glass in building.

Insulating glass units.
BS 7671 : 2001
Requirements for electrical installations.
IEE wiring regulations. Sixteenth edition.

BS 7619 : 1993
Specification for extruded cellular
unplasticised PVC (PVC-Ue) profiles.

BS 6262 : 1982 Code of Practice for

glazing for buildings.

BS 6375 - 1 2004 : Performance of

windows and doors. Classification for
watertightness and guidance on selection
and specification.

BS 8000-7 : 1990 Workmanship on

building site. Code of Practice for Glazing.

BS 8213 - 1 Windows doors and

rooflights. Design for safety in use an
during cleaning of windows, including
door-height. Windows and roof windows
and code of practice.

BS 6093 : 1993 Code of Practice for

design of joints and jointing in building
construction.

BS 150 11600 2002 : Building

construction. Jointing products.
Classification and requirements sealants.

HSE Construction Sheet 49

The Building Regulations

Approved documents

A: 1992 : Structure

B: 2000 : Fire Safety

© Glass and Glazing Federation 15

Code of Practice for the Survey and Installation of Windows and External Doorsets.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 16

• Windows and Doors
SECTION 6
Security of Window and Door Products
6.3 F E B R UA RY 2 0 0 0

1 Foreword cannot be deflected into the glazing forced entry.

cavity and thus permit the locking gear to
1.1 In the ten year period from 1975 to [Link] use of glazing packers 3.3 Wired glass can also offer some
1985, the number of reported cases of adjacent to the locking points can assist in deterrent to the intruder because of the
Breaking and Entering into domestic achieving this aim. difficulty in making a hole large enough
households doubled in number. through which to put an [Link]
2.3 The use of mushroom headed roller impediment to entry is increased if the
1.2 It must be accepted that given bolts and similar security developments at window is securely locked as the intruder
sufficient uninterrupted time and suitable vulnerable positions, improves security. must then be able to enter the hole
tools, a skilled burglar will succeed in rather than merely put his hand through
breaking into any [Link], it is 2.4 Locking devices that rely solely on the to release a catch.
impossible for any window or door to overlap between a tongue or bolt and
provide complete protection against striking plate should be tested to ensure 3.4 Polycarbonate offers the most
forced entry. One aim of current window that the cover is in accordance with the resistance of the plastics glazing sheet
and door products is to deter the burglar. hardware manufacturers materials. It is unbreakable and so will
Police experience has indicated that the recommendations. resist manual attack when correctly
opportunistic burglar will only attempt to glazed in normal single glazing. It can be
break in through a window or door for a 2.5 It is recommended that, where damaged by fire and by sharp objects,
very short period of time before moving possible, all manufacturers should assess therefore care must be taken in fixing
on to another window, or the next their products by simulated attack. and cleaning.
house.
2.6 No screws or similar fixings, affecting 3.5 When using plastics glazing sheet
1.3 The following recommendations are security, should be accessible for removal materials it is essential that the
aimed at manufacturers of Windows and from outside. recommended correct glazing and fixing
Doors made from all materials whether techniques are used to ensure maximum
of PVC-U, aluminium, timber, steel or 2.7 Hardware may require routine benefit from the protection that these
others, and to point out good practices in maintenance and guidance should be materials can provide.
design and manufacturing techniques that provided on this and on its normal
have been found to help deter forced operation. 3.6 Attention must be paid to the
entry. Not all of the following apply to all method of secure glazing, whatever
types of products nor to all materials 3 Glazing method of glazing is used.
from which they can be made.
3.1 For sealed double glazing units the 3.7 If glazing beads are external, then it
2 General use of laminated glass of suitable may be possible to remove these by the
thickness in at least one leaf of the unit use of a knife, screwdriver or similar hand
2.1 All hardware components should be will substantially improve domestic [Link] applies to glazing beads on
tested for physical strength by simulated security. steel, wood, aluminium and uPVC
attacks on the products. Manufacturers of windows or doors. If tests show that
windows and doors should ensure that Laminated glass of suitable thickness can these beads are removable with such
the components they use are fixed equally be used for single glazing in tools, then the manufacturer should use
according to the hardware and/or system accordance with the suppliers. additional methods such as double sided
suppliers recommendations. tape or glazing clips to secure the glass in
3.2 Toughened glass is up to five times position.
2.2 The manufacturers should ensure that stronger than ordinary glass but when
the styles or rails (mullions or transoms) broken it provides no residual barrier to 3.8 If glazing beads are internal, then care

Glass
Glass
4 andand
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:Tel:
020020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Security of Window and Door Products

must be taken to ensure that they cannot 4.4 If mushroom headed roller bolts or closed, should have pins that are secure,
be knocked out of position by kicking or similar, are used for security then the and that cannot be driven out, thus
hammering that infill panels or glazing. combination of bolts and their keeps allowing the window sash or door leaf to
should be selected in accordance with be removed.
4 Window and Door Locks the suppliers recommendations. Anti-lift
blocks may be required to prevent Installation
4.1 Manufacturers should ensure that the vertical or horizontal disengagement.
customers have signed for the exact 6.1 Installation can play an important part
number of keys issued with each door 4.5 Window fittings with ‘night vent’ if the overall security of all door and
lock. positions should be capable of being window products. Installers must be
locked or secured in those positions. made aware of the need to install and
4.2 If key locking handles are fitted to adjust all hardware correctly. A check
windows, then customers should be 4.6 External door handles should not should be made before leaving any site to
encouraged to make a habit of removing compromise the security of the lock if ensure the correct function of all
the keys from the locks when the removed from outside. components and products.
window is fastened. Similarly door keys
should not be left in place, as there is a 4.7 Double doors should have a secure 6.2 It may be necessary to fit wedge
risk that children could turn a key by shootbolt system top and bottom. blocks to door leaves and frames to
putting a hand through a letterplate prevent hinges being overstrained to gain
opening. 4.8 Double doors should have a secure entry, and to minimise the risk of pull-out
shootbolt system top and bottom. or shearing of screws.
4.3 In general, care should be taken with
espagnolette fittings that rely on packing 5 Hinges
the glass opposite the fixing [Link]
packings should be firmly fixed in 5.1 Any hinges that are accessible from
position. the outside when the window or door is
• Windows and Doors
SECTION 6
Additional Security for Windows and
Doors in Domestic Buildings 6.4 DECEMBER 1990

This documents defines means by which 4. All locks, mechanisms, hinges and any should comply with the physical strength
additional kinds of security can be additional security devices, where the requirements of BS3621 and have at least
incorporated when choosing windows screws are not in the “shear” position, 1000 key differs.
and doors for domestic purposes. It has should be screwed into steel or
been produced after consultation with aluminium reinforcements or two 10. Multipoint locking systems using
Crime Prevention Officers, the Home thickness of uPVC with a minimum total either mushroom headed bolts, shoot
Office and the Fire [Link] thickness of 4mm. bolts, hook bolts or long throw systems
recommendations are not intended to are essential for uPVC doors. (Fig 3 &
make such doors and windows 5. Frame fixings should securely locate at 3a). Where mushroom headed door
impenetrable but to ensure through least 50mm (40mm for lugs) into the bolts are used, then anti-lift devices are
design, enhanced resistance to attack. fabric of the building and be positioned also essential. Where hook or dead
Persons contemplating purchasing such according to the requirements of the bolts are used, the bolts should be of
units are strongly recommended to current BPF/GGF Code of Practice – a material or construction resistant to
require the manufacturer and/or installer 150/250mm from comers and at 600mm hacksaw attack.
of their chosen windows and doors to maximum centres. If lug fixings are the
comply with all recommendations for sole method to be used, then these must 11. Ground Floor and other vulnerable
maximum [Link] recommendations be internally fixed. windows should ideally be fitted with a
apply to windows and doors made from security locking device, either as part of
any material. 6. Frame fixings should coincide where the handle (Fig 7) or as an additional unit
possible, with the locating points of any designed to prevent the window opening.
lock system, with suitable packing An acceptable alternative is to fit a
RECOMMENDATIONS installed between the frame and the device, such as a child lock, designed to
fabric of the building. (See also paragraph restrict the opening of a Tilt and Turn
Frames and Fixings 17).This is particularly important where window to tilt only, or to restrict the
multi- point locking systems are in use, opening of a casement window to
1. In accordance with normal practice (Fig 2). (The use of mushroom headed, 4 inches (100mm) maximum.
the vertical members of uPVC door hook or shoot bolt systems makes the
sashes and the outer frames should be need for this less critical. Fig 3 &3a). 12. The bolts from any locking device
stiffened with an appropriate material, e.g should not simply locate into a hole cut
aluminium or corrosion resistant steel. into a frame member, but into a metal
7. Sliding patio doors should be designed
reinforcement or a purpose designed
such that the meeting stiles are, or can
2. The use of security devices such as striker plate.
be [Link] linking mechanism should
mushroom headed, hook or shoot bolts
either be a part of the stile design or as
is strongly recommended; shoot bolts 13. Hinge bolts, dog bolts (Fig 8) or
an additional device. Internally sliding
should penetrate a minimum of 10mm locking wedges (Fig 9) should ideally be
door leafs may be easier to secure.
into the keep (Fig 3a). Where these or fitted as standard, but must be fitted to
similar devices are not used then the outward opening doors. Removable hinge
locking edges should be appropriately 8. Residential doors fitted with a mid-rail pins must be secured into position on the
stiffened when they exceed [Link] or a solid panel are generally considered outward opening doors.
includes mullions, transoms, stiles and to be a better deterrent to attack. (Fig 4,
bottom rails. (See Fig1). 5 & 6). 14. Sliding patio doors, should have an
anti-lift device, fitted either to the door
3. All strengthening should be Locks or in the top channel, to resist lifting
continuous along at least 85% length of while the door is in the closed position.
the frame member, when fitted and fixed 9. For timber and aluminium doors,
at 400mm maximum centres with a modern multipoint locks offer a high Glazing
minimum of 3 fixings. (In cruciform degree of security. If, however, single
construction one strengthening must be point, key operated, mortice style locks 15. When glazing beads are ‘’external’’,
continuous). are fitted to these doors, then they these must be ‘’security glazing beads’’,

Glass
Glass
4 andand
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:Tel:
020020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Additional Security for Windows and Doors in Domestic Buildings. December 1990

which resist removal without the use of systems (Fig 2) which do not have General Advice
special tools (Fig 10). Alternatively the mushroom heads, shoot, hook or long
glass must be retained into position by throw dead bolts locating at least 10mm 19. Customers should sign for, and state
the use of a suitable double-sided glazing into the keep. how many keys are supplied with their doors.
tape or glass retaining clips.
20. Door Chains or similar devices to
18. For improved Security, laminated
restrict opening are recommended for
16. It the glazing beads are ‘’internal’’, glass is recommended for all doors,
added security. (Fig 12).
(Fig 11) then they must be designed adjacent glazed panels and vulnerable
such that they resist being dislodged by windows. When glazing in safety glazing 21. Always ask strangers for some form
external impact. materials, to achieve an increased level of of identification. IF IN DOUBT – KEEP
security, it is strongly recommended that THEM OUT.
17. The glass unit or infill panel should be consideration is given to having at least
packed adjacent to ALL locking and hinge one window in each room that can be 22. Out-buildings, such as sheds and
points, in addition to any conventional opened from inside and which is large garages, should always be kept locked as
[Link] is particularly important in enough to provide an emergency exit in these areas usually contain tools suitable
units fitted with multi-point locking case of fire. for forcing an entry.

Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 3a

800 +

STIFFENED

L – ESPAGNOLETTE LOCKING POINT

800 + POSITION OF ADDITIONAL PACKERS

Fig 4 Fig 5 Fig 6 Fig 3

CLOSED

OPEN

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

Additional Security for Windows and Doors in Domestic Buildings. December 1990

Fig 7 Fig 8

Wedges or Dog Bolts

ensure that door cannot
be dislodged from frame
by removing hinges

Fig 9 Fig 10

EXTERNAL SECURITY
BEAD

OPEN POSITION

Fig 12

Fig 11

FIRMLY LOCATED
INTERNAL BEAD

This document is prepared in conjunction with the Kent County Constabulary Crime Prevention Department.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

Additional Security for Windows and Doors in Domestic Buildings. December 1990

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

• Windows and Doors
SECTION 6
Fire, Safety the Security
6.5 N OV E M B E R 1 9 9 2
Choosing the Right Replacement Windows
Contents Fire Safety England and Wales do not apply to
Security replacement windows in an existing
1. Introduction Safety building unless the replacement window
2. Standards, Codes, constitutes a "material alteration".
Building Regulation – An Introduction 1.4 For some installations, it will no be Regulation 3(2) defines a material
3. The Relationship of Current Building possible to meet all these design features alteration as being anything which would
Regulations to Replacement Windows and keep within the customer’s cost result in a building becoming less
4. Fire Security ceilings; in which case decisions need to compliant with any relevant requirement.
5. Security made with regard to [Link] notes
6. Safety below set out a guide to the principal 3.1.2 In short this means that if the
7. Ventilation standards, codes of practice and Buildings window being replaced complies with
8. Cleaning from the Inside Regulations in these areas and show either the requirements of the current
9. Gas appliances when these may at times be mutually regulations or with the regulations in
10. British Standard BS 5588. exclusive – thus where decisions on existence when it was installed, the
Fire Prevention in the Design and priority need to be [Link] latter part replacement window must not make the
Construction of Buildings goes on to review a range of differing building less [Link] application of
11. British Standard – BS 8220: Part 1 – types of windows and how they relate to Approved Document B1 (Means of
Security of Buildings/Dwellings the desirable characteristics. Escape from Fire) of the 1991 Building
12. The Guide to Security of Doors and Regulations of England and Wales to
Windows 2 Standards, Codes of Practice and replacement windows depends on
13. Mechanical Means of Assistance Building Regulations - An Introduction whether the installation of a replacement
14. Meeting Priority Requirements window constitutes a material alteration
15. Conclusion The situation regarding mandatory as defined above. If it does constitute a
Regulations and Codes of Practice is still material alteration then B1 does apply.
1 Introduction not clarified. For example, the Building
Regulations 1991 England and Wales do 3.1.3 In domestic dwellings B1 applies
1.1 The purpose of this guidance note is not call up a window as a means of when any of the following occur:
to draw attention to the various escape at either ground or 1st floor level. The floor height above ground level
requirements that need to be addressed However, on floors above these levels it exceeds 4.5 metres or where there
by designers, suppliers and installers is necessary to incorporate a window are three storeys or more.
when considering the installation or that will allow exit on a ladder. The room in which the windows are
replacement of windows in a property. installed has no direct access onto a
Because so many people require so many Approved Document B of the Building hallway or stairs leading to an
different things from their property and Regulations does acknowledge that entrance.
their lifestyle, it is often difficult to balance “Measures intended to prevent There has been a material change of
the criteria that a window may need to unauthorised access can also hinder entry use, such as a conversion to a
meet to satisfy all those demands. of the Fire Service to rescue people dwelling or a flat.
trapped by fire”, and that there may be a
1.2 There can be conflicting priorities, as conflict when trying to control entry in 3.1.4 Approved Document B1 (Means of
this data sheet will [Link] points set the interest of security and exit in the Escape from Fire), Section 1 (dwelling
out here and in the 6.5 data sheet series interest of fire safety. houses) Paragraph1states that in the case
will help designers and customers to take of 1 or 2 storey houses, each habitable
account of the various issues when 3 The Relationship of Current Building room must either open directly onto a
making their decisions. Regulations to Replacement Windows hallway or stair leading to the entrance,
or it must have a window or door
1.3 In attempting to do so, three areas 3.1 England and Wales through which escape could be made.
need to be given high priority with regard More complex requirements apply for
to [Link] are: 3.1.1 1991 Building Regulations for higher dwellings.

Glass
Glass
4 andand
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:Tel:
020020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Fire, Safety the Security Choosing the Right Replacement Windows. Date ???

3.1.5 Even where it may not be a 6. Safety make provision for an adequate,
requirement to follow the current Building permanent air supply by means of an air
Regulations, those recommendations 6.1 When safety is a priority it may be a brick or similar source. A gas installer / gas
merit careful consideration and frequently requirement that the window is difficult to board official can advise on the supply
it is good practice to adopt them. Some open, thereby reducing the risk of children which would be considered "adequate".
of these are mentioned further below. opening it and falling from higher windows. By their nature, replacement windows will
be well fitting and should therefore not
3.2 Scottish Building Regulations 6.2 These basic considerations of fire to be regarded as contributing to this air
safety on the one hand and security on supply.
3.2.1 As a general principal, the Scottish the other can conflict. In trying to achieve
Building Regulations seem to apply to all the latter, a window should allow 10 British Standard - BS 5588
building work, including the installation of ventilation to take place whilst proving Fire Prevention in the Design and
replacement windows. difficult to open (thus reducing both the Construction of Buildings
possibility of entry by a burglar and of a
3.2.2 With specific reference to fire, child falling out). In the case of fire safety, The Code of Practice of BS 5588 Part 1,
every storey of a dwelling above 4.5m however, it is important to ensure that a does not call up a window as a means of
(up to 11m in the case of flats and window is easy to open by people of all escape at ground and first floor level, but
maisonettes) must have an emergency ages, and offers an opening large enough specifies that at levels above this
window. Also, every inner room in a to allow escape. windows should allow for an
dwelling (i.e. a room without direct
access to a circulation area) must have an unobstructed opening of 850mm high by
7 Ventilation 500mm [Link] Building Regulations
emergency [Link] windows must
have opening parts at least 850mm high 1991 also state this, although the heights
All habitable rooms in England and Wales
and 500mm wide, with the bottom of recommended for maximum and
must allow for ventilation of an area
the opening light not more than 1.1m minimum installation do not in fact differ
above the floor. (There are several other equivalent to 1/20th of the total floor
to those found in the Code of Practice.
requirements if the window is in a roof) area and must also have a trickle ventilator
opening of 4000 square mm. In Scotland
11 British Standard – BS 8220: Part 1 –
3.2.3 There is a further provision in the requirement for ventilation is an area
Security of Buildings/Dwellings
Regulation E2.21 which states that if any equivalent to 1/30th of the total floor area.
part of an access balcony provides In kitchens and bathrooms, there must
This British Standard gives very effective
escape in one direction only, then any also be a mechanical ventilator capable of
guidance on fitting lockable security
window which opens onto that part of shifting 30 litres of air per hour.
fastening. It states “Opening windows
the balcony must be at least 1.1m above that are considered to be a security risk
the floor level of the balcony. (The 8 Cleaning from the Inside
should be fitted with lockable security
thinking behind this Regulation is that it fastenings”.
British Standard Code of Practice 153
allows people using the balcony as a
Part (1969), called for a requirement to
means of escape to crawl under the 12 The Guide to Security of Doors and
allow windows to be cleaned safely from
window, should there be a fire in that Windows
[Link] has now been re-issued as BS
room which had reached the point
8213 Part 1, and now includes a cause
where smoke and flames were coming A security document produced by the
relating to replacement windows which
from the window). GGF, in conjunction with the Kent Police,
allows the householder to elect to use a
window cleaner, thereby freeing himself the British Insurance Association and
4 Fire Safety others, states that “Ground floor and
from having to meet this safe-cleaning
requirement. At the time of going to other vulnerable windows should
In the case of a fire, if a normal exit from ideally be fitted with a security
press, this clause has not yet been called
the property is either restricted or locking device”.
up under the Scottish Building Regulations,
blocked then it may be necessary to use
which in Scotland are relevant also to the
a window as a means of escape. For With regard to doors, many mortice
home improvement work.
further guidance on the role of domestic locks and some rim locks fall within the
windows in fire safety, see GGF data scope of BS 3621, which sets the criteria
9 Gas Appliances
sheet 6.5.1. for resistance of manipulation, forceful
9.1 In some homes gas appliances have attack and [Link] locks should have at
5 Security been installed without any provision for least 1000 key differs. As BS 8220 Part 1
the supply of air necessary for the burning points out other locks exist which are
Where security is of major concern, it of gas, other than that which leaks in not marketed as complying with BS 3621
may be necessary to ensure that the around ill fitted windows and doors. but which have features that practical
windows cannot open from outside and experience has shown to be especially
also to reduce the possibility of the glass 9.2 When this is the only air supply relevant for securing certain categories of
being broken. available, the householder should then external doors.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

Fire, Safety the Security Choosing the Right Replacement Windows. Date ???

13 Mechanical Means of Assistance However with units of this size it may be to the occupant, unless a burglar alarm is
necessary, in areas where security is of seen as an adequate alternative.
In most family homes it is not feasible to priority concern, for locks to be fitted to
install complex sprinkler systems to handles and possibly to hinges. The use of geometric friction stays on
reduce the risk of fire. However it will these styles of window unit enables the
allow greater time for escape if smoke Where child safety is of concern, it may sash to be cleaned from the inside of the
alarms are fitted to a property. Also, be necessary to fit a restrictor to the property. However this feature also
where burglaries are considered to be of leading edge of the sash. However, by results in the opening created by a
prime concern, installation of a burglar using a specific type of hinge, the sash 600mm wide side opener being reduced
alarm will be an added deterrent. may be pivoted closer to the top of the to approximately 300mm width, as the
frame than normal, thereby allowing sash moves across the opening when
14 Meeting Priority Requirements easier exit in case of fire. being used.

The following sections are intended to When considering exit in case of fire it is
assist the customer in choosing possible to fit friction stays to the
the design of windows that meet as many window that, on releasing a restrictor, will
of these requirements as possible, or at allow the sash to open to 90 degrees and
least those considered to be most give a full size opening to the unit.
important.

14.1 Characteristics of Window Styles

When deciding upon replacement

windows, it is important to consider both
style and size in relation to the
architectural style of the property and
Top Hung Window
how the window will be used.
14.3 Side Hung Window
14.2 Top Hung Windows
Like to top hung sash, this type of unit
This style of opener has been used in small has become more popular during the last
size windows for much of this century twenty five [Link] style of sash is
and has therefore historically been mainly often used in conjunction with a small
supplied in timber and steel. It was top hung sash (fanlight) in flat windows,
designed originally to allow for ventilation whether these form part of individual
over and above any other criteria. windows or part of the bay window.
Side Hung Window
However, with the development of As with the top hung window, it will
alternative and stronger hinges, it has often be necessary to fit locking
been possible to produce larger top hung mechanisms when security is of concern On child safety, although it can be harder
windows that allow exit from a property, for a child to open a side hung window
because of the position of the handle, it
may still be deemed appropriate to fit a
restriction to the sash.

14.4 Pivot Windows

The pivot window is a more recent

design innovation and comes in two main
forms. One is where the pivot, having
completed the opening cycle through a
90 degrees, ends in a position parallel to
the ceiling and the floor with 50% of the
sash remaining inside the [Link]
other is where the release of a catch will
Fixed Hinge Top Hung Window
enable the sash to turn through a further
At the same time, these developments 90 degrees; the sash will then turn into
mean that the windows may also be the room allowing for the exterior of
produced in Aluminium and PVC-U. Fixed Hinge Side Hung Window the glass to be cleaned.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

Fire, Safety the Security Choosing the Right Replacement Windows. Date ???

Because the sash opens fully, the hinge

mechanisms allow the window to turn
through 90 degrees; this style of window
can provide an ideal escape in the case
of fire.

For additional security purposes locks can

be fitted to the handles and at the sash
fits into the window from the inside it is
harder for a burglar to gain a purchase to
force a window open.

The position of the handle is usually half

Pivot Window way up the leading edge of the sash, and
the tilting position which allows ventilation
through the upper part of the sash
Although the features mentioned above means that there is a reduced likelihood
are extremely useful when cleaning, of child accidents occurring. Some
Tilt and Turn Window
particularly in applications above 4.5 householders may nonetheless feel it
metres where restrictions have not been necessary to fit restrictions to the unit.
fitted to the window, this design may be
considered very dangerous to children, 15 Conclusion
who may be able to open the sash
because of the position of the handle. For This guidance note shows that it is
this reason, these units should be fitted possible to design windows that meet all
with a restrictor which can be disengaged the requirements, but such comprehensive
by an adult for cleaning. Also, sashes that performance inevitably has a cost
only open to 90 degrees can be attached. It is for the designer, the
dangerous when being cleaned from specifier and the householder to decide
inside the building. what their priorities are and for the
salesman to be in a position to offer
Such windows allow egress reasonably products that meet the various
easily when trying to evacuate a building requirements – be they FIRE, SAFETY or
in an emergency, but for security SECURITY. Not all windows can meet all
purposes it is often felt necessary to fit these requirements, therefore a decision
window locks. Window in Tilt Position by the customer or his professional
representative will have to be taken with
14.5 Tilt and Turn regard to the priority for his particular
installation.
This style of window, originally of
continental design, became more familiar
to this country in the mind [Link]
design allows for the sash to be fitted
inwards to allow for ventilation.

By the use of mechanisms fitted to the

handle, it is then possible to close the
window, turn the handle and open a side
hung sash directly into the room.

This feature ensures that the unit can be

cleaned from the inside of the property
without having to stand on ladders or
lean out on the window. It is usual for the
opening sash to be designed so that it
opens to the full height of the window
aperture and not in small units such as in
top and side light window configurations. Window in Turn Position

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

• Windows and Doors
SECTION 6
Hardware Specification Document.
Guidelines for the selection, installation, 6.7 SEPTEMBER 2004

maintenance of hardware for the window and door industry.

Foreword Handle products are designed to aid the independent test certificates by a UKAS
closing and sealing of the vent / leaf. approved test house be obtained to
This guidance document has been They must not be stressed by overtight demonstrate conformity with the above.
prepared by the Technical Committee compression.
of the Hardware Manufacturers Group. 4. Rivets
Locking products are designed to seal as
It provides information to assist the well as provide increased security. With some framing materials there is a
specifier and end user in the selection, Manufacturer’s recommendations with trend away from the use of rivets for
installation and maintenance of hardware. regard to the number of locking points attaching hardware during the fabrication
It aims to ensure that hardware chosen should be followed. of frames. Certain rivets after application
is the most appropriate to meet the leave holes through their centres, which
product’s application. With correct Hardware shall allow windows and doors permit the ingress of water. With PVC-U
installation and maintenance the ultimate to meet specific British and European where water would penetrate into an
service and durability of the product standards. undrained chamber or onto reinforcement,
should meet the expectations of the user. these holes should be sealed by proprietary
Consideration should be given to method.
1. Scope application requirements such as child
This document covers the three main safety and fire escape. Products should be 5. Screws
framing materials – PVC-U, Aluminium selected which offer these facilities while
and Timber. complying with relevant standards. All screws should be chosen with their
application in mind. Guidance can be
2. General Care should also be taken to ensure that found in GGF data sheet 6.8.
electrolytic reaction (bi-metallic) from
It is necessary to comply with the relevant incompatible metals is avoided. For further advice on selecting the
British Standards for each of the framing correct product, contact the supplier.
materials that are being considered, BS Fasteners / fixings are an important part
7412 for PVC-U windows, BS 4873 for of the specification because incorrect 6. Hardware attachment
aluminium windows, BS 644 for timber fixings can reduce the overall
windows and PAS 23 for doors (all performance of all [Link] overall To ensure the hardware operates
materials). strength is dependent upon the weakest correctly it is important that the points
link, especially when considering high listed below are followed during its
All products must comply with the security applications. installation.
relevant Building Regulations.
It is important to select fixings with heads Staff should be trained in the correct
3. Selection that do not obstruct the movement of installation procedures. Where jigs are
other components during opening and available, these must be used to ensure
It is important to ensure that the hardware closing of the sash or leaf. the correct location of relevant components.
selected is suitable for the profile / system
into which it is to be fitted. It is therefore, It is recommended that fasteners / fixings Products should be fitted in compliance
necessary to take into account features used in normal applications should with the system / hardware suppliers’
such as Eurogrooves, cavity size, and the withstand 240 hours salt spray test when recommendations.
position of the reinforcement / screw tested to BS 7479. It is then recommended
ports and vent frame step. that fasteners / fixings used in coastal or All hardware must be operated several
heavily polluted regions of the country times to ensure the correct functions and
Hinged products are designed to carry should withstand a 500 hours salt spray engagement of all parts.
specific weights or sizes; therefore it is test when tested to BS 7479, and where
essential not to exceed the carrying prolonged guarantees are being offered Friction stays should ideally be fitted into
capacities specified by the product this minimum should also be considered. the correct locating upstands /
supplier. It is recommended that evidence of Eurogrooves.

Glass
Glass
4 andand
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:Tel:
020020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Windows and Doors

All hardware positions should be defined Parts exposed when the window/door is 9. References.
by the system company to achieve the opened should be wiped down to
weather seal compression required. remove residue of old lubrication, swarf British Standards
and grime. Sealing cams and strikers
All fixing holes provided must be used. should be given a minute smear of BS 7412: 2002 Plastic windows made
petroleum jelly or equivalent. Sliding bars from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
7. Site installation and the faceplate of gears should be (PVC-U) extruded hollow profiles.
lubricated with suitable lubricant to Specification
After final installation of the window or manufactures recommendation.
door on site, it is important to ensure BS 4873: 1986 Specification for
that there is no obstruction between the In the case of friction stays, manufacturer’s aluminium alloy windows
frame and the hardware, that the lubrication and adjustment instructions
operation of all hardware is checked, and must be adhered to strictly. BS 644: 2003 Timber windows. Factory
the hardware is cleaned of any site debris assembled windows of various types.
and protected from further damage. All fixings should be checked periodically Specification
Carrying out these operations will for tightness and security and adjusted
indicate any further adjustments, which where necessary by a suitably qualified BS EN 1670: 1998 Building Hardware.
may be required to ensure the adequate person. Corrosion resistance. Requirement and
weathersealing is achieved. test method.
Handles or other items, which are visible
Hardware should be lubricated in when the sash is closed, should be BS 7479: 1991, ISO 9227: 1990 Method
compliance with the manufactures cleaned with a mild solution of warm for salt spray corrosion tests in artificial
instructions before the installer leaves soapy water, applied with a soft cloth. atmospheres
the site. They should be dried thoroughly.
Product Approval Specifications
Protectively coated screws and fasteners Ammonia and silicon based and abrasive
should not come into contact with wet or based cleaners should not be used on any PAS 23-1: 1999 General performance
damp cement or plaster or acrylic fillers, hardware or fixings. requirements for door assemblies.
as this will attack the coating and render it Single leaf, external door assemblies
inoperative. These recommendations assume the to dwellings.
window/door has been manufactured to a
8. Maintenance standard not less than those set out in the GGF Data Sheets
appropriate standard /code of practice,
To obtain maximum performance and and that operations function correctly. Data sheet 6.8 2004 - Guidelines for the
durability from the hardware installed, it selection, installation and maintenance of
is important that the end user is advised It should be noted that Tannic acid can be screws and fasteners for the window and
of the simple periodic maintenance which found within certain species of wood e.g. door industries.
must be carried out. [Link] acid can be corrosive on
hardware.
Maintenance should be carried out more
frequently in coastal areas or those, which
are subject to high levels of pollution.

© Glass and Glazing Federation

• Windows and Doors
SECTION 6
Hardware Specification Document
6.8 SEPTEMBER 2004
Guidelines for the Selection, Installation and
Maintenance of Screws and Fasteners for the
Window and Door Industries

1. Scope

This guidance document has been

prepared by the Technical Committee of
the Hardware Manufacturers Group.

It provides information to assist in the

correct selection, specification and
maintenance of screws and fasteners. It is recommended that a screwdriver Standard open end
The objective of this is to consolidate speed of 1500 - 2000 rpm be employed, Multi-grip open end
the various trade standards. as this will cover the vast majority of Peel type with either countersunk or
screw applications. It is important that dome head
the torque of the screwdriver is set in Standard sealed type
2. General accordance with the framing material
being used, to ensure that neither screw The diameter, length and head form are
It is necessary to comply with the heads nor threads nor framing material determined by specific application.
relevant British Standards for each of are damaged. Care should always be
the framing materials that are being taken to insert screws at right angles to Note: certain rivets, after application,
considered, BS 7412 for PVC-U windows, the substrate surface. Care should be leave holes through their centres, which
BS 4873 for aluminium windows, BS 644 taken to ensure that the correct could permit the ingress of water. With
for timber windows and PAS 23 for screwdriver bit is utilized to avoid PVC-U windows and doors, where
doors. damage to the screw heads. moisture penetration would be into an
undrained chamber or onto
All products must comply with the If in doubt consult your supplier for reinforcement, these holes should be
relevant Building Regulations. advice. sealed by a proprietary method.

With screws, particular care should be See table 1 for rivet types in both unset
taken with regard to head, thread and 3. Selection and set conditions.
point design as well as corrosion
resistance. Although there is no specified Consideration should be given to the end 3.2 Screws
minimum requirement in BS 7412 for application when selecting screws and All screws should be chosen with their
corrosion resistance, the Glass and fasteners. application in mind. Where screws are
Glazing Federation suggest a minimum to be replaced, such as in retrofit
of 240 hours, thereby complying with Care in selection should also be taken applications, suitably sized repair screws
BS EN 1670 Grade 4. For coastal or heavily where high security fittings are involved, should be used. It must be appreciated
polluted regions of the country, or where to ensure optimum performance of the that screws from different manufacturers
prolonged guarantees are being offered, it hardware is achieved. For guidance on and countries may have their own
is recommended that screws and fixings material selection reference should be individual specifications.
should withstand a 500 hours salt spray made to section 6 - materials.
test when tested in accordance with Where organically coated screws are
BS 7479. It is recommended that evidence 3.1 Rivets selected, care should be taken by the
of independent test certificates by a UKAS Where it is decided that the use of rivets fabricator to obtain these screws with
approved test house be obtained to is appropriate, they will generally be head recesses which have not been filled
demonstrate conformity with the above. found to be one of FOUR types: with the organic coating.

Glass
Glass
4 andand
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:Tel:
020020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Guidelines for the Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Screws and Fasteners for the Window and Door Industries. GGF Data Sheet 6.8. September 2004.

See table 2 for details of heads, threads, Can self-drill into PVC-U. corrosion resistance.
points and applications.
Suitable for the attachment of stainless Suitable for the attachment of stainless
steel fittings. steel fittings.
4. Maintenance Non magnetic. Non magnetic head
.
If carbon steel fasteners with a suitable
No general maintenance should be 6.4 Bi-metallic: - austenitic stainless steel protective coating are selected, it should
required with screws and fasteners, head and partial thread with a carbon be noted that white corrosion deposits
although light oiling will never go amiss. steel drill tip and initial threads to self-drill may form on the fastener during its
Contact with domestic or industrial and self-tap into reinforcement. Only the service [Link] type of corrosion is not
ammonia based solvents should be austenitic portion of the fastener should detrimental to the overall performance of
avoided. be in contact with the hardware and the fastener and can be considered
reinforcement, to reduce the risk of acceptable, as it is the protective coating
failure. which is corroding, and not the base
5. Fixing material of the product.
If the carbon steel portion is exposed, it
requires protective coating for 500 hours
Protectively coated screws and fasteners
should not come into contact with wet
or damp cement or plaster, or acrylic TABLE 1 - RIVET SELECTION
fillers or their fumes, as these will attack
the coating and render it inoperative.
A typical standard open-ended rivet in unset condition.
6. Materials

From analysis on the results of A typical standard open-ended rivet in set condition.
independent tests (Salt Spray and Drill
Application tests) the following information
about material is given to assist the A typical dome headed peel type rivet in unset condition.
selection of screws and fasteners.

6.1. Carbon Steel

Needs protective coating for 240 hours
A typical dome headed type peel rivet in set condition.
corrosion resistance.
Can self-drill into aluminium and steel
reinforcement.
A typical countersunk peel type rivet in unset condition.
Not normally recommended for
attachment of stainless steel fittings
because of the risk of reduced corrosion
A typical countersunk peel type rivet in set condition.
resistance due to electrolytic reaction
between dissimilar metals.
Magnetic.
A typical multi-grip open-ended peel rivet in unset condition.
6.2 Martensitic: - Grade 410 -
100% stainless steel
Cosmetic coating will prevent pitting.
Does not require any protective coating
for 500 hours corrosion resistance. A typical multi-grip open-ended rivet in set condition.
Can self-drill into aluminium and steel
reinforcements.
Suitable for the attachment of stainless A typical standard sealed rivet in unset condition.
steel fittings.
Magnetic.

6.3 Austenitic: - Grade 302 / 304 -

100% stainless steel A typical standard sealed rivet in set condition.
Does not require any protective coating
for 500 hours corrosion resistance.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

Guidelines for the Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Screws and Fasteners for the Window and Door Industries. GGF Data Sheet 6.8. September 2004.

TABLE 2 - SCREW SELECTION

A typical countersunk [Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical pan headed [Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical pan headed, self-tapping screw for use in the steel or aluminium window and door
[Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical countersunk machine screw that has uses in PVC-U, steel, timber and aluminium window
and door [Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical facet headed, metric threaded, self-drilling screw for the retention of galvanised steel
reinforcements to PVC-U [Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A ribbed headed, self-tapping threaded, self-drilling screw for the retention of aluminium or
galvanised steel reinforcements to PVC-U [Link] diameter and length are determined by the
specific application.

A typical single high threaded, countersunk screw with gimlet point, for the retention of hardware to
unreinforced PVC-U [Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical high / low threaded countersunk screw with gimlet point, for the retention of hardware to
unreinforced PVC-U [Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical metric threaded countersunk screw with self-drilling point, for the retention of hardware to
steel windows and doors, galvanised steel reinforced PVC-U [Link] diameter and length are
determined by the specific application.

A typical self-tapping threaded countersunk screw with a self drilling point, for the retention of
hardware to aluminium windows and doors, or aluminium or galvanised steel reinforced PVC-U
profile. May not be suitable for multi-wall [Link] diameter and length are determined by
the specific application.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

Guidelines for the Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Screws and Fasteners for the Window and Door Industries. GGF Data Sheet 6.8. September 2004.

A typical pan headed, self-tapping threaded screw with self-drilling point suitable for the retention of
hardware to aluminium windows and doors, or aluminium or galvanised steel reinforced PVC-U
[Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical shallow pan headed, single high threaded screw with gimlet point, suitable for the retention
of friction stays to unreinforced PVC-U windows or timber [Link] diameter and length are
determined by the specific application.

A typical shallow pan headed, high / low threaded screw with gimlet point, suitable for the retention
of friction stays to unreinforced PVC-U [Link] diameter and length are determined by the
specific application.

A typical shallow pan headed, high / low threaded screw with spoon point, suitable for the retention
of friction stays to unreinforced PVC-U [Link] diameter and length are determined by the
specific application.

A typical shallow pan headed, self-tapping threaded, and self-drill pointed screw for the retention of
friction stays to steel and aluminium windows, aluminium or galvanised steel reinforced PVC-U
[Link] diameter and length are determined by the specific application.

A typical shallow headed, twin high threaded, self drill pointed screw for the retention of friction
stays to steel or aluminium windows, or aluminium or galvanised steel reinforced PVC-U windows,
or unreinforced PVC-U [Link] style of screw usually has a thread diameter in the region of
4.8mm, and is frequently used as repair screw, as well as original [Link] diameter and length
are determined by the specific application.

A typical screw used for the mechanical jointing of all types of windows and [Link] diameter
and length are determined by the specific application.

7. References. BS EN 1670: 1998 Building hardware GGF Data Sheets

corrosion resistance requirements and Data Sheet 6.7: 2004 Guidance for the
British Standards test methods. selection, installation and maintenance of
BS 7412: 2002 Plastics windows made BS 7479: 1991, ISO 9227: 1990 Method hardware for the window and door
from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride for salt spray corrosion tests in artificial industries.
(PVC-U) extruded hollow profiles. atmospheres.
Specification.
BS 4873: 1986 Specification for Product Approval Specifications
aluminium alloy windows. PAS 23-1: 1999 General performance
BS 644: 2003 Timber windows. Factory requirements for door assemblies. Single
assembled windows of various types. leaf, external door assemblies to
Specification. dwellings.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

• Products, Glazing Techniques
and Maintenance SECTION 6
Specification for the Performance of
6.9 N OV E M B E R 1 9 9 7
Door Assemblies

This specification has been developed by the 5.2.6 Slam Shut Test requirements in this specification are not
GGF, in association with other Trade 5.2.7 Closure against obstruction material specific. Any components used in
Association, to provide a method for 5.2.8 Abusive forces on handles door assemblies shall conform to the relevant
assessment of the performance of door 5.3 Performance in Use British Standard.
assemblies. 5.3.1 General
5.3.2 Mechanical Durability The specification excludes double leaf doors,
Foreword 5.3.3 Basic Security double swing doors, sliding doors, sliding
5.3.4 Resistance to climatic variation folding doors, tilt and slide doors, and pivoted
It has been developed because of the current 5.4 Special Aspects doors.
lack of performance for doors available 5.4.1 General
through the normal sources. 5.4.2 Acoustic Performance 3. Definitions.
In order to ensure that all materials 5.4.3 Thermal Performance
currently available for use in the manufacture 5.4.4 Fire Performance For the purpose of this specification the
of doors are covered, the GGF has involved following definitions apply.
other Trade Associations with expertise of the 6. Testing
particular materials concerned. 6.0 General 3.1 Door
It is intended that this should be an evolving 6.0.1 Test sample All components for closing an opening in a
specification reflecting current design and 6.0.2 Sample conditioning wall that allows access or passage and may
material requirements. Accordingly it will be 6.0.3 Sample preparation admit light when closed.
subject to review and amendments as 6.0.4 Weathertightness test
necessary. preparation 3.2 Door Assembly
6.1 Weathertightness A complete unit as installed comprising door
Contents 6.1.1 Tests for air permeability frame and a door leaf together with its
1. Introduction 6.1.2 Test for watertightness essential hardware which may be supplied
2. Scope 6.1.3 Test for wind resistance from separate sources.
3. Definitions 6.2 Operating Forces
4. Assessment Procedure 6.3 Resistance to Vertical Loads 3.3 Door Leaf
4.1 Product Range 6.4 Resistance to Static Torsion An element which when fitted with hinges or
4.2 Sample Selection 6.5 Resistance to Soft and Heavy pivots in a door frame forms part of a door
4.3 Sequence of Tests Body Impact assembly.
5. Performance Requirements 6.6 Resistance to Hard Body Impact
5.1 Weather 6.7 Slam Shut tests 3.4 Door Frame
Performance Requirements 6.8 Closure against obstruction Part of a door assembly in which the door leaf
5.1.1 Guidance to 6.9 Abusive forces on handles moves.
Selection and Specification of Doors 6.10 Mechanical Durability
Assemblies for Weathertightness 6.11 Basic Security Test 3.5 Hardware
5.1.2 Air Permeability 6.12 Resistance To Climatic Variation All the devices attached to structural members
5.1.3 Watertightness to facilitate opening, closing or making secure
5.1.4 Wind Resistance 7. References the door leaf in the frame such as hinges, dog
5.1.5 Classification bolts, door bolts locks and latches receivers,
5.2 Mechanical Performance 2. Scope door furniture, and profile cylinder.
5.2.1 Operating Forces This specification details the test method and
5.2.2 Resistance to Vertical Loads acceptance criteria applicable to domestic type 3.6 Latches
5.2.3 Resistance to Static Torsion single leaf, single swing, external residential Elements of hardware attached to a door leaf
5.2.4 Resistance to Soft and Heavy door assemblies, inward or outward opening, which can secure the door leaf to the door
Body Impact with or without side panels, and fan lights frame by means of a bolt, latch or lock, which
5.2.5 Resistance to Hard Body Impact being integral or [Link] performance can be finger or hand operated.

Glass
Glass
4 andand
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:Tel:
020020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies. November 1997

3.7 Finger Operated (f) Low threshold options 5.1.2 Air Permeability
Equipment or hardware operated by fingers The air permeability shall be as specified for
only without palm contact. It may or may not 4.3 Sequence of Tests the appropriate exposure category in Table 1.
include a key. The following test sequences shall be applied The air permeability requirement has been
to separate samples. determined by the following:
3.8 Hand Operated (a) The exposure category (design wind
Equipment or hardware operated by use of Test Sequence 1 Section pressure).
the full hand including palm contact. It may or (a) Operating forces. 6.2 (b) The heat loss that can be accepted.
may not include a key. (b) Air permeability 6.1.1 (c) The health and comfort of the occupants.
(c) Watertightness. 6.1.2 For fixed lights the average leakage rate shall
3.9 Cycle (d) Wind resistance 6.1.3 not exceed 1m 3 / per h per metre length of
Set of operations involving the opening of a (e) Repeat air permeability 6.1.1 visible perimeter of infill when tested at the
door leaf including the unlocking and the (f) Repeat watertightness 6.1.2 same pressures as the door.
release of all fasteners, moving open to the (g) Repeat operating forces 6.2 Where a door assembly contains a fixed light
required extent, returning to the closed (h) Resistance to vertical load 6.3 (side and /or fan) and the air flow is within the
position and re-engaging of all fasteners and (i) Resistance to static torsion 6.4 permissible limits for the door assembly, there
re-locking. (j) Slam shut test 6.7 is no requirement to test the fixed light
(k) Closure against obstruction 6.8 separately.
3.10 Operating Device (l) Abusive forces on handles 6.9
Item of hardware enabling user to release and (m)Resistance to soft and heavy 6.5 5.1.3 Watertightness
move a door leaf. body impacts The watertightness shall be as specified for the
(n) Resistance to hard body impacts 6.6 appropriate exposure category in Table 1.
3.11Test Velocity There shall be no leakage during the test up to
The test velocity is that which can be Test Sequence 2 Section and at the test pressure class given in Table 1.
measured on the closing edge of the member (a) Operating forces 6.2 The acceptability of unclassified performance
of the sample under test, and is measured in (b) Mechanical durability 6.10 would be appropriate, for example, where the
metres per second (m/s). (c) Resistance to climatic variation 6.12 door assembly is protected from driving rain
(d) Basic security test 6.11 by a porch or recessed into the reveal, or
protecting it by a porch, may also be necessary
4. Assessment Procedure 5. Performance Requirements where low level thresholds are required for
wheel chair access for use by the disabled. It
4.1 Product Range 5.1 Weather Performance Requirements should be noted that in any specification for
The product range must be defined prior to watertightness class, the ability of the glazing
the selection of the test [Link] definition 5.1.1 Guidance to Selection and Specification system to prevent water entering the rebate
will include:- of Door Assemblies for Weathertightness area, or to be drained from it, is not assessed
(a) Product design specification, including by the tests described in this standard.
profiles, beads, hardware, infills and It is assumed that most door assemblies within
reinforcements. the scope of this specification will be at 5.1.4 Wind Resistance
(b) Size range and configurations. ground level, and that design wind pressures
(c) Installation requirements will not exceed 800 [Link] will not be so Where the design wind pressure is 800 Pa or
(d) Construction of any panels which may where locations are in exposed positions or less the exposure category is given in table 1.
incorporate an opening vent. upper floors providing access to a balcony. In
(e) Locking device options these situations the design wind pressure For door assemblies with side screens the
should be calculated by the methods design wind pressure at which maximum
4.2 Sample Selection described in BS 6399 Part 1. deflection is likely to occur shall be stated by
For type testing, a suitable number of samples
shall be selected which represent the most Table 1. Exposure catagories
adverse and vulnerable aspects of a product Exposure category Test Pressure class
range. Within each range a minimum of two Design wind
Air permeability* Watertightness** Wind Resistance***
samples is [Link] following list, which is pressure Pa
not exhaustive, identifies features that require 800U No requirement No requirement 800 Pa
consideration, 800X Up to 200 Pa No requirement 800 Pa
(a) Distance between securing points which fix (graph A)
the leaf to the outer frame.
800 Up to 200 Pa 100 Pa 800 Pa
(b) Directions of openings.
Over 800 Up to 300 Pa 200 Pa Equal to actual
(c) Glazing options e.g. single or double
(graph B) wind pressure
glazed, construction or infill panels.
(d) Glazing installation methods. Note: Products categorised with a U requirement need only meet a Wind resistant
(e) Range of sizes. class. Products classified with a X need not meet any requirement for watertightness.

© Glass and Glazing Federation 2

Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies. November 1997

the manufacturer. For design wind pressures is measured, e.g. in the case of door assemblies face and three times to the opening face of
over 800 Pa, the actual pressure should be with side panels, the test panels, the test the door leaf.
stated, and this should be the maximum to pressure for that limiting deflection shall be
which the door assembly is exposed. stated, by the manufacturer, where it is greater Note: When the impact is applied to the
The deflection of members such as couplings, than 800 Pa. opening face, the test stresses the door leaf
glazing bars or meeting styles shall be limited itself. When applied to the closing face the test
to 1/125 of the span. Such members retaining 5.2 Mechanical Performance is used to assess the hardware, its fixing
an insulated glass unit shall not deflect more arrangements, and the ability of the door leaf
than 1/175 of the span. 5.2.1 Operating Forces to retain the hardware.
After wind resistance testing there shall be no Operating forces acting on door assemblies Operating forces shall continue to meet the
permanent damage. shall be appropriate for their intended use. requirements of clause 5.2.1.
No permanent damage will be deemed to When tested in accordance with clause 6.2, No component of the assembly shall exhibit
have occurred if: the assembly shall meet the following any visible failure. Glazed areas shall comply
(a) the performance level of fixed lights for air requirements. with requirements of BS 6262.
permeability does not increase by more than i) Latching forces < or = 80N.
1m3/h per metre length of open joint for the ii) Force required to initiate movement < or 5.2.5 Resistance to Hard Body Impact
initial values of up to 5m3/h per metre length = 70N The door leaves shall be tested in accordance
or 2m3/h per metre length of opening joint for iii) Locking and unlocking forces: with Clause [Link] specifies the method to
initial values over 5m3/h per metre length of (a) Hand operated hardware force < or = 75 be used to determine the damage caused to
opening joint. N. door a leaf by the impact of a hard object.
(b) the performance value for air permeability (b) Finger operated hardware force < or = 30 The impact energy to be applied shall
is that required in Table 1 for the test pressure N. be 8 J.
class achieved in the initial tests. (c) Key operation torque < or = 2 Nm. The requirements to meet this specification
(c) the performance level for watertightness is are:-
that required in Table 1 for the test pressure 5.2.2 Resistance to Vertical Loads (a) the mean value of the diameters of the
class achieved in the initial test. Door assemblies shall be tested in accordance indentations caused will not exceed 20mm,
with clause [Link] specifies the method to and
5.1.5 Classification be used to determine the permanent (b) the mean value of the depth of
deformation caused when a vertical load is indentations caused shall not exceed [Link]
The watertightness shall be determined when applied to the free edge of an open door leaf maximum value shall not exceed 3mm.
the door assembly has been tested in fixed in its own frame. The load to be
accordance with clause 6.1 and classified applied shall be 500 N. For an assembly to 5.2.6 Slam Shut Test
according to the exposure categories given in meet this requirement any residual The test specified in clause 6.7 shall be used
Table [Link] test pressure for all requirements deformation shall not prevent normal to determine the resistance of the door
shall be attained, or exceeded, by a door for operation. Operating forces shall continue to assembly to abuse caused by slamming. After
the door to be included in that exposure meet the requirements of 5.2.1. testing in accordance with clause 6.7, the
category. operating forces shall continue to meet
5.2.3 Resistance to Static Torsion requirements of clause 5.2.1. No component
* A test pressure class of 600 Pa (see figure 1, Door assemblies shall be tested in accordance shall exhibit visible failure.
Graph C of BS 6375pt 1) is applicable when with clause [Link] specifies the method to
stringent levels of performance are required, be used to determine the permanent 5.2.7 Closure against obstructions
for example when exceptionally airtight doors deformation caused when static stress in The test specified in clause 6.8 shall be used
are necessary as in air conditioned buildings, torsion is applied to a closed door leaf fixed in to determine the resistance of a door
especially when opening directly into a its own frame. assembly to the closure of the door leaf
habitable room. Where there is such a The load applied shall be 350N. For a door against small objects such as toys, which may
requirement, the exposure category should be to meet this requirement, any residual be accidentally trapped between the frame
suffixed with "Special" e.g. 800 special. deformation shall not prevent normal and leaf. When tested in accordance with
operation of the door. Operating forces shall clause 6.8, the assembly shall withstand an
** The watertightness test pressure classes continue to meet the requirements of 5.2.1. applied force of 200 N.
given cover most situations. Assemblies of Operating forces shall meet the requirement
higher performance than stated in the table 5.2.4 Resistance to Soft and Heavy of clause 5.2.1. No component of the assembly
should be considered where the assembly is Body Impact shall exhibit any visible failure.
located in exposed situations, at high level on Door assemblies shall be tested in accordance
the building and/or directly into a habitable with clause [Link] specifies the method used 5.2.8 Abusive forces on handles
room. A classification of "No Requirement" to determine the damage caused by striking A door leaf should resist abusive forces
would be inappropriate for residential doors in the face of a closed door leaf, fixed in its own applied to the handle. When tested in
some situations. frame, with a soft and heavy [Link] impact accordance with clause 6.9 the assembly shall
energy to be applied shall be 150 J. withstand an applied force of 500 N
*** In wind resistance tests, where deflection It shall be applied three times to the opening Operating forces shall meet the requirement

© Glass and Glazing Federation 3

Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies. November 1997

of clause 5.2.1 and there shall be no loosening 5.4.3 Thermal Performance 6.1.2 Test for Watertightness
of the handle fixings, or visible damage to the Determined in accordance with BS 874 Part 3 Door assemblies shall be tested in accordance
handle assembly. or an approved calculation method. with BS 5368 Part 2 using the preferred spray
method No 2.
5.3 Performance in Use 5.4.4 Fire Performance
Ignitability – determined in accordance with BS 6.1.3 Test for wind resistance
5.3.1 General 476 Part 12. Door assemblies shall be tested by the
In order that the door assembly shall perform methods described in BS 5368: Part [Link]
satisfactorily, it shall be constructed and preparation gust (pl) shall be 500 [Link]
[Link]
installed in accordance with designer’s repeated positive and negative pressure gusts
instructions. (p2) shall be 800 Pa or the greater declared
6.0 General
design wind pressure.
5.3.2 Mechanical Durability The deformation test described in 9.1 of BS
6.01 Test Samples
The repeated operation of the full locking 5368 Part 3 is omitted, but the deflection of
Unless stated otherwise, all test samples shall
cycle, including opening and closing of doors, members shall be measured during the
comprise of a complete door assembly,
should neither damage them nor impair their repeated positive and negative pressure [Link]
including any associated glazing, hardware, and
performance, having regard to normal fulfill the requirements of the safety test
other accessories, details of which should be
maintenance. described in 9.3 of BS 5368 Part 3 any
recorded and included in the test report. Any
permanent residual deformation, damage or
glazing shall comply with BS 6262. If glass
Testing shall be carried out in accordance with functional defects shall be noted.
breakage occurs without damage to the frame
clause 6.10. Following the completion of On completion of the wind resistance test the
members, the unit can be reglazed once and
50,000 cycles, the operating forces shall meet door shall be opened and closed 5 times.
retested.
the requirement of clause 5.2.1.
6.2 Operating Forces
6.0.2 Sample conditioning
5.3.3 Basic Security The measurement of the minimum force or
Unless stated otherwise, the test sample
Glazing systems shall be designed so that the torque required to engage or disengage the
should be stored and tested in an environment
infill cannot be removed from the outside hardware (locks, handles etc.) or commence
within the range of 15º to 30ºC and 25 to
within 3 minutes when tested in accordance opening and complete closing of the door leaf
75% RH, for a minimum of 24 hours.
with clause 6.11. shall be determined as follows: -

5.3.4 Resistance to climatic variation 6.0.3 Sample Preparation 6.2.1 Equipment

A door should not bow or twist to the point The sample, shall be fixed into a suitable sub- Means shall be provided for the application of
where its performance requirements cannot frame using fixings to replicate the forces to manipulate the hardware uniformly
be met. When subjected to the test regime manufacturer’s [Link] sub-frame and without stock.
described in clause 6.12, and measured in should then be mounted into a test frame
accordance with prEN 952, a door will be which is sufficiently rigid to withstand the test Required Load (N) Increments
considered acceptable if the operating forces loads without deflection which could influence ≤1.0 1(±[Link])
measured during the test do not exceed those the test result. ≤10N 10(±1N)
given in clause 5.2.1, and its distortion
characteristics after the test do not exceed the 6.0.4 Weathertightness Test Preparation 6.2.2 Procedure
criteria set out in Table2. During weather performance testing,
permanent ventilators and key escutcheon [Link] Preparation
Table 2 shall be sealed before commencing. If present, Tests shall be performed after manual
Distortion Limits trickle ventilators and letter plates shall be operation of all moving parts five times.
Parameter Maximum value closed, but not additionally sealed.
Twists 8 mm [Link] Procedure to determine the closing
Bow 8 mm 6.1 Weathertightness force to latch
Cup 4mm Open the door leaf for a distance of 200mm,
6.1.1 Test for air permeability and measure the force required to engage the
5.4 Special Aspects Doors assemblies shall be tested in latching mechanism. Make five measurements
accordance with BS 5368: Part 1 with the of the peak load at the operating point, and
5.4.1 General pressure applied to the outside face of the take the mean as the latching force.
Where appropriate to a specific requirement, door only.
the agreed performance should be assessed in For all types of door assembly, the air flow [Link] Procedure to determine the force to
accordance with one of the following; passing through the specimen at each test operate the opening device
pressure difference applied in BS 5368: Part 1,
5.4.2 Acoustic Performance shall be expressed as an average leakage rate [Link].1 Procedure
Determined in accordance with BS EN ISO per metre length of opening joint visible on Handles should be placed by a suitable torque
140-3 (1993) the inner face of the specimen. driver acting on the handle spindle. Apply a

© Glass and Glazing Federation 4

Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies. November 1997

torque in the direction to release, unlock and All loads shall be carefully applied and Note: Repetition of this operation will
lock the hardware. removed in 100 N maximum increment, for a necessitate re-shaping of the [Link]
Keys should be operated by a suitable torque minimum of 1 second for each increment, or angle at which the impactor is raised should
driver. the equivalent rate if continuous, in order to not exceed 30 degrees. After the last impact ,
Make five measurements of the peak load avoid dynamic effects. measure the operating forces in accordance
during the operation of the device, and take After removal of the load, measure the with clause 6.2 and examine all components
the mean for each test undertaken. operating forces in accordance with clause 6.2. for visible evidence of mechanical failure.

[Link]. 2 Determination of force for hand 6.5 Resistance to Soft and Heavy Body Impact 6.6 Resistance to Hard Body Impact
and finger operated hardware
The force required to operate the device shall 6.5.1 Equipment 6.6.1 Equipment
be calculated by dividing the mean torque An impactor of total mass 30 kg ± 2%, A 50(±1) mm diameter steel ball of known
measured in clause [Link].1 by one of the consisting of a spheroconical leather bag of weight, with appropriate release apparatus.
following, as appropriate: diameter approximately 350 mm, containing A device capable of measuring depth with an
a) The length of the handle (in metres), dry sand of apparent density approximately accuracy of not less than 0.05 mm.
measured from spindle centre to the end. 1500 kg/m3 which passes through a sieve of A length measuring device accurate to 0.5 mm.
b) The maximum diameter (in metres) of the 2 mm mesh.
knob. A device for measuring the drop height of the 6.6.2 Procedure
impactor to an accuracy 5%. Mount the door leaf horizontally, with rigid
[Link] Procedure to determine the force to supports under the long edges resting on the
commence motion 6.5.2 Procedure solid base.
With all the hardware disengaged, apply a load The leaf of the door assembly to be tested Select one of the four aiming patterns shown
to the operating point to initiate movement of shall be closed and latched only. Identify the in (Figure1) such that the theoretically weakest
the door leaf. Make five measurements of the impact [Link] shall occur at the centre of point is included, and mark the 15 impact
peak load, and take the mean as the force to the door leaf. Where the impact point points on the surface of the door leaf.
commence motion. coincides with any hardware, this shall be Any area of glass infill shall be omitted from
removed. the test, thereby reducing the number of
6.3 Resistance to Vertical Loads The sample shall be impacted three times impact points.
against the direction of opening, followed by a Impacts points in the topmost row of rows of
6.3.1 Equipment further three impacts in the direction of the aiming pattern shall also be omitted where
A suitable loading device accurate to 2%. opening. the height of the door leaf is less than 2000
Suspend the impactor so that at rest it makes [Link] test area is not extended where the
6.3.2 Procedure light contact with the surface of the door leaf, height is more than 2000 mm.
Without any vertical restraint, position the and with its centre of gravity opposite to, and Note: To facilitate the setting out of the aiming
door at an angle of 90(+5-0)º to the plane of at the height of, the impact point. Raise the pattern, templates may be made for standard
the frame. All loads shall be carefully applied impactor to a height of 500 (+10) mm above sized door leaves in accordance with figure 1.
and removed in 100 N ±2% maximum the height of the impact point. Release the Holes of approximately 8 mm diameter are
increments and over a minimum of 1 second impactor so that it strikes the leaf at the drilled in the centres of the numbered
for each increment, or the equivalent rate if impact point. rectangles so that a marker pen can be used
continuous, in order to avoid dynamic effects.
The load attachment point is at the handle Figure 1 Aiming patterns for hard body impact test
position. X X X X X 1 2 3 Y 4
After removal of the load, measure the X X X X X Mid height of 4 1 2 Y 3
operating forces in accordance with clause 6.2. X X X X X Specimens 3 Y 4 1 2
X X X X X Y 3 4 2 1
6.4 Resistance to Static Torsion X X X X X Y 3 2 4 1
X X X X X 2 Y 1 3 4
6.4.1 Loading Equipment X X X X X 2 4 1 3 Y
Main area
A suitable loading device accurate to 2%. X X X X X 10 equal 1 Y 3 4 2
6.4.2 Procedures divisions
X X X X X 4 1 Y 2 3
The door leaf shall be in the closed position X X X X X Y 2 4 1 3
and all locking hardware including latch X X X X X 1 3 Y 4 2
mechanisms disengaged. Restrain one corner Base area
X X X X X 5 equal divisions
3 1 4 2 Y
of the opening side of the leaf at a position X X X X X totalling 150mm 2 4 1 3 Y
50mm from the edge. Apply a force of 350 N X X X X X Y 2 3 1 4
in the direction of opening on the unrestrained X X X X X Y 3 2 4 1
corner of the opening [Link] load should be
maintained for 60(±5) seconds, and then X = Potential aiming point Y = Remaining sub-areas
removed without shock. (a) Principles of pattern construction (b) Four possible aiming patterns

© Glass and Glazing Federation 5

Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies. November 1997

to indicate the selected aiming pattern on the descending weight, the weight strikes a applied at a point mid-way between the centre
face of the door leaf. platform so removing tension from the line of the spindle and the end of the lever, or
Position the release apparatus vertically over just prior to the instant of closing. 50 mm from the end of the lever if greater.
each of the impact points in turn, and drop the The door leaf should be opened to 60º Twist handles shall be tested with the load
steel ball from a height, measured from its (± 5º), then slammed by the action of the acting at the centre of the spindle.
underside to the surface of the door leaf, descending [Link] slamming operation is Pull handles shall be tested at the mid point of
which corresponds to the required impact repeated 20 times. the length.
energy. Where an imprint is left by any impact, After the last cycle, measure the operating After removal of the load, measure the
within 30 minutes measure the maximum forces in accordance with clause 6.2. operating forces in accordance with clause 6.2,
depth of the indention to the nearest 0.1 mm. and examine the handle for evidence of
6.8 Closure against obstruction loosening of fixings.
Where impacts occur at points where the
surface is uneven, e.g. at mouldings, only a more 6.8.1 Equipment 6.10 Mechanical Durability
general assessment of damage may be possible. A hardwood block 50 mm x 50 mm x 10
Repeat the procedure for the other face of the mm, of mass between 15 g and 20 g. 6.10.1 Equipment
door leaf if the construction is not systematical. A suitable loading device accurate to 2%. Suitable apparatus to operate the locking and
opening equipment, on the door leaf.
6.7 Slam Shut tests 6.8.2 Procedure Masses and scales accurate to 2%.
The hardwood block should be placed in the Equipment to measure the velocity of the
6.7.1 Equipment gap between the leaf and the bottom of the door accurate to 5%.
A light, strong line. hinge side jamb of the test frame to hold the Force gauge and torque meter accurate
A steel bar, 25 mm diameter, of suitable door leaf ajar. Insert the block from the closing to ±3%.
length. face, with its plane vertical and parallel to the
A 15 kg (±2%) weight door frame (see Figure 3). 6.10.2 Procedure
Apply a progressively increasing force to the The leaf of the test specimen is opened to the
6.7.2 Procedure lock side edge at handle height until 200 N is required resting position, and is then brought
The door leaf should be closed from being [Link] force shall act perpendicular to to the closed position and its lock and
60º open, by the descent of the 15 kg mass the plane of the frame. fasteners secured before [Link] cycle is
(see Figure 2).The line should be attached to After removal of the load, measure the repeated for the specified number of times, or
the door leaf at the door handle, or if this is operating forces in accordance with clause 6.2. until [Link] test velocity shall be 0.5
more than 150 mm from the lock (±0.05)m/s.
side edge, at some point within 15 mm of that, Figure 3 Closure against obstruction The operating equipment shall act at the
at the level of the handle. position of normal operation, and where
possible shall be supported by the test
Figure 2 Slam Shut Test [Link] loads applied by operating
equipment shall be within the range of the
specified operating forces, and shall be applied
via the operating device, which shall be
balanced so that the dead load applied on the
operating point does not increase in any
position the weight of the leaf by more
than 5%.
6.9 Abusive forces on handles Adjustment and lubrication in accordance with
the door manufacturers’ published instructions
6.9.1 Equipment shall be carried out before and during the test,
but a frequency of not less than 5,000 cycles.
A suitable loading device accurate to ±2%. With the test specimen installed in accordance
with clause 6.3, the door leaf shall be subjected
The line should be arranged to pass 6.9.2 Procedure manually to 5 operating cycles before taking
horizontally from the door leaf, and then over The test should be applied to all handle types initial measurements. Door leaves should be
the steel bar arranged horizontally, with its axis on the most accessible [Link] leaf of the operated from the closed position to an open
parallel to the plane of the [Link] bar test assembly should be closed and latched, position of 90º ± 10º, or to the stopping
should be arranged approximately 400 mm but not locked or bolted. position of the restrictor if this occurs at less
from the leaf face when the leaf is closed, and Progressively and without shock apply a load than 90º. A dynamic force should be applied
to span the width of the door [Link] line of 500 N to the [Link] load should be at both opening and closing elements of the
should descend vertically from the bar, and applied perpendicular to, and away from, the [Link] fasteners should be released by the
carry the 15 kg weight at its lower extremity. face of the door leaf for 60 (± 5 seconds).The operating equipment and the leaf is set into
The length of line should be arranged so that load should then be removed without shock. motion as continuously as possible, so as to
as the door is closed by the action of the Lever handles shall be tested with the load reach the test velocity between 20º to 60º

© Glass and Glazing Federation 6

Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies. November 1997

(or 20% to 60%) of the stroke of the leaf, and method described in prEN 952 7. References
to continue at that velocity to the end of the [Link] The door assembly shall be installed
stroke. in the mounting system, in the orientation DD171 Guide to specifying
The door leaf is set in motion from the open specified by the applicant and the door closed performance requirements
to the closed position in the same manner as but not locked. for hinged or pivoted
described [Link] door leaf shall come to a [Link] The door assembly shall be exposed doorsets
stop on the closing member of the frame at to the climate indicated in BPF/GGF Trade Standard for Doors.
the test velocity. In the closed position the Table 3 until final deformation has been prEN 952 Door leaves - General and
fasteners and the locking devices shall be fully [Link] test climate shall be maintained Local Flatness - Measurement
[Link] is completed either when for at least 7 days, and terminated at 28 days Method
mechanical failure occurs or when the or when the increase in deformation during BS476 Pt12 Methods of test for
specified number of cycles has been carried three successive days is less than 0.1 mm ignitability of products by
out. In the event of interruption of testing, the per day. direct flame impingement
cycle can be restarted after examination for [Link] The operating forces, as defined in BS874 Pt3 Test for thermal
failure. After completion of the required clause 6.2, shall be measured immediately prior transmittance and
number of cycles, measure the operating to termination of test conditions. conductance.
forces in accordance with clause 6.2. [Link] At the end of the period the door BS5368 Pt 1 Air permeability test
shall be opened and the resultant bow, cup BS5368 Pt 2 Watertightness test under
6.11 Basic Security Test and twist measured. static pressure
BS5368 Pt 3 Wind resistance test
6.11.1 Equipment 6.12.3 Thermal Test BS6262 Glazing for buildings
Two paint scrappers [Link] The door assembly shall be BS6375 Pt 2 Specification for operation
One flat blade screwdriver, length 200 mm, conditioned in an equilibrium environment for and strength characteristics
blade width 7 mm. at least 7 days.
One flat carpenter’s chisel, blade width 25 mm. [Link] The bow, cup and twist of the door
leaf is determined prior to the test by the
6.11.2 Procedure method described in prEN 952.
Attempts should be made to gain entry from [Link] The door assembly shall be installed
the exterior face using the tools specified in in the mounting system in the orientation
6.11.1 by the removal of gaskets, beads, any specified by the applicant and the door closed
security devices and the infilling. but not locked.
[Link] Heat the external face of the door
6.12 Resistance to Climatic Variation with filament lamps for 24 [Link]
temperature required in Table 4 shall be
6.12.1 Equipment reached within 2 hours and maintained
Two climatic chambers. constant during the test.
Measuring devices. [Link] The operating forces, as defined in
A mounting system for the door frame. clause 6.2, shall be measured immediately prior
to the termination of test conditions.
6.12.2 Humidity [Link] At the end of the period the door
[Link] This test is only applicable to those shall be opened and allowed to return to
doors which contain hygroscopic materials. ambient [Link] resultant bow, cup and
[Link] The bow, cup and twist of the door twist shall be measured.
leaf is determined prior to the test by the

Table 3
Humidity Test Climates
Internal face External face
Air Temperature RH Air Temperature RH
23 (±2)°C 30(±5)% 3(±2)°C 65(±5)%

Table 4
Thermal Test Climates
Internal face External face
Chamber Air Temperature Sample Surface Temperature
25 ±2°C +55°C ±5-0°C

© Glass and Glazing Federation 7

Specification for the Performance of Door Assemblies. November 1997

© Glass and Glazing Federation 8

 Windows and Doors
SECTION 6
Guidance for Surveyors and Installers for 6.10 October 2007
the Provision of Trickle Ventilation and
Other Forms of Ventilation for Replacement
Windows within England and Wales

The Building Regulations Requirement 3. Although not mandatory, Note:

F1 - Means of ventilation, states: increasing ventilation by the provision It is important to remember that
of new or additional ventilators to when carrying out building work
“[Link] shall be adequate means maintain good air quality should be (including replacing windows) builders
of ventilation provided for people in considered between the supplier and and installers are under an obligation
the building”. the customer (ref: GGF publication to ensure that, once work is
“Advice to consumers regarding completed, the building as a whole
When assessing a property
ventilation when replacing windows”). continues to comply with F1, or is no
for replacement windows
less compliant than it was before the
the following should be 4. Two stage locking handles
work commenced.
considered regarding the use (Night vents) are an acceptable form
If ventilation in a particular building is
of trickle ventilators and other of trickle ventilation, where security is
materially worsened as a result of
forms of ventilation within not compromised and draughts will
installing replacement windows, Part F
replacement windows: not create a [Link] would
will require that compensatory
usually mean not on the ground floor
1. For replacement windows, provision for ventilation is made.
or any other vulnerable location.
trickle ventilators are not mandatory
unless the existing windows have If an existing window has a two stage
them, however it is always good locking handle, the replacement
practice to consider their use when window should either have trickle
replacing windows. Alternatively vents or two stage locking handles
trickle ventilators may be replaced by (or both) or the room should have
an air brick, if the amount of an air brick fitted.
ventilation is not compromised.
5. Controllable ventilators should
2. Any replacement ventilators must have accessible controls available for
be no smaller in geometric open the user.
area than the existing ventilators.
If the geometric area is not known, 6. The provision of permanent
habitable rooms should have trickle ventilators for combustion
ventilator of 5000mm2 equivalent appliances is a different matter
area and wet rooms should have and compliance with Approved
2500mm2 equivalent area. Document J is mandatory

Glass
Glass
and
and
Glazing
Glazing
Federation
Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel:
Tel:
020
020
7939
7939
9100
9100
Fax:
Fax:
0870
0870
042
042
4266
4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
 Architectural Glazing Systems
SECTION 7
Non-Vertical Overhead Glazing:
7.1 May 2012
Guide to the Selection of Glass
from the Point of View of Safety

Contents This Data Sheet does not cover the following:-

Introduction • Glazing with plastics glazing sheet materials (see BS 5516-2).
1. Scope • Glazing of protective barriers / balustrades (see BS 6180, and
GGF Data Sheet 7.2)
2. Definitions
• Glazing for greenhouses (see BS 5502-21)
3. Design considerations
• Glazing of Conservatories (see GGF A Guide to Good Practice
4. Glass and breakage characteristics in the Specification and Installation of Conservatories within the
5. Post breakage behaviour of glass United Kingdom)

6. Selection of glass for use overhead • Maintenance

7. Enhancement of existing overhead glazing 2 Definitions

Bibliography 2.1 Non-vertical overhead glazing

Introduction glazing above head height which is either horizontal or inclined at

an angle to the horizontal up to 75°, and where there is general
Whenever materials are used overhead, especially at high level, access to the areas beneath the glazing.
there will always be a risk, however small, of injuries to persons
caused by falling material. 2.2 Greenhouse
Glass has been used in overhead glazing for more than a hundred glazed structure intended for horticultural use, and not for human
years, and is very safe provided that the right glass is used in the habitation, recreation or retail activities. It may be freestanding or attached
right place. to another structure, but is not used as a means of access to a dwelling.

1 Scope 2.3 Protective barrier / balustrade

This Data Sheet gives recommendations for the selection of glass any element of building or structure intended to prevent persons
for use in non-vertical overhead glazing with respect to the safety from falling and to retain, stop or guide persons
of persons [Link] recommendations are intended to
reduce the risk of injury from falling broken glass. 3 Design considerations

NOTE: Information is also given with respect to the use of adhesive Glass breakage may occur for many reasons, including
backed polymeric film for the enhancement of the performance of the following:-
existing glazing. • Excessive loads (wind, snow, self-weight, maintenance loads).
This Data Sheet does not consider the risk of injury from objects • Inadequate framing or other glazing systems.
falling through the glass. However, consideration at design stage may
• Incorrect glazing procedures.
enable selection of suitable glazing materials/measures to mitigate
this situation. • Impact by falling, wind-borne, or thrown objects.

This Data Sheet does not consider the risk of injury to persons • The higher thermal stresses encountered in non-vertical
who may fall onto the non-vertical (sloping) overhead glazing. overhead glazing.
• Malicious attack.
NOTE: Persons most likely to be at risk would be construction,
maintenance and/or cleaning operatives. For information see • Damaged or defective glass.
BR 471. NOTE:The above list is not exhaustive

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Non-Vertical Overhead Glazing: Guide to the Selection of Glass from the Point of View of Safety

Careful design, together with proper workmanship, reduces the Note 2: Information on nickel sulfide inclusions can be found in
likelihood of problems arising. GGF Data Sheet 4.4.1 – Annex A
The breakage of glass in non-vertical overhead glazing is a rare
4.2.2 Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime
[Link] risk of injury from falling broken glass may be
silicate safety glass (see GGF Data Sheet 4.4.1)
reduced in several ways and, when selecting glass to provide an
appropriate degree of human safety, the designer or specifier Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass has
should consider the level of risk which is acceptable in a particular the same properties and breakage characteristics as thermally
situation, taking into account the intended use of the building. toughened soda lime silicate safety glass. However, the incidence of
Risk analysis should be based on the following: spontaneous breakage due to nickel sulfide inclusions is negligible.

• Likelihood of people being present beneath the glazing; 4.2.3 Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass
(see GGF Data Sheet 4.4.1)
• Potential for glazing breakage;
Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass will withstand the
• Post breakage behaviour of the glazing material;
thermal stresses associated with solar radiation, but it breaks in a
• Consequences of glazing/failing. manner similar to annealed glass.

NOTE: Further information can be obtained from BR 471. BRE The built-in stresses in heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass,
report entitled ‘Sloping Glazing – Understanding the risks’. which are lower than those in thermally toughened soda lime
silicate safety glass, make it much less susceptible to spontaneous
4 Glass and breakage characteristics breakage due to nickel sulfide inclusions.

In order to assist designers and specifiers in the selection of the 4.3 Wired Glass / Safety Wired Glass
most appropriate glazing, the breakage characteristics and
associated properties of the most commonly used types of glass When wired glass is broken, the wire will hold most pieces of the
are described below: glass together, thereby preventing them from falling.

NOTE:The applicable standards for the commonly used glass types 4.4 Annealed Glass
can be found in the bibliography.
When annealed glass is broken, it tends to break into dagger-like pieces.
4.1 Laminated safety glass (see GGF Data Sheet 4.11)
5 Post breakage behaviour of glass
When laminated safety glass is broken, the pieces of glass are held
together by the interlayer(s) and are likely to remain in position, The behaviour of glass after breakage is a major consideration
and continue to provide short-term weather resistance. when selecting an appropriate glass specification.

Note 1: “Laminated safety glass” is a laminated glass that has an 5.1 Laminated safety glass
impact classification in accordance with EN 12600.
Generally laminated safety glass will remain in place after breakage.
Note 2: “Laminated safety glass” includes laminated annealed safety However, laminated safety glass incorporating thermally treated
glass, laminated thermally treated safety glass glass has to be considered in more detail.
Note 3:The post breakage behaviour of laminated thermally
toughened, laminated heat soaked thermally toughened and 5.1.1 Laminated thermally toughened soda lime
laminated heat strengthened glass needs special consideration. silicate safety glass
When thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass breaks it
4.2 Thermally treated glass (see GGF Data Sheet 4.4.1) has negligible stiffness/[Link] there is a possibility that the
laminated pane may become deglazed.
This covers glass products that have been subjected to a thermal
treatment process. It includes the following: NOTE: If both leafs of thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
glass are broken the laminated pane will probably fall.
• Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass;
• Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass; 5.1.2 Laminated heat soaked thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass
• Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
The post breakage behaviour is the same as laminated thermally
4.2.1 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate toughened soda lime silicate safety glass (see 5.1.1.).
safety glass (see GGF Data Sheet 4.4)
5.1.3 Laminated heat strengthened soda lime
Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass is stronger than silicate glass
ordinary annealed glass of equal thickness and is therefore
comparatively difficult to break. In addition, thermally toughened As heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass breaks in a manner
soda lime silicate safety glass will withstand the maximum thermal similar to annealed glass there will be sufficient remaining
stress associated with solar radiation. stiffness/[Link] even if both leafs are broken it should
remain in place
Note 1:Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass may
contain nickel sulfide inclusions which could cause spontaneous NOTE:The ability of a broken pane to remain in situ is dependent
breakage, although the risk of this happening is very low. upon the loads being applied.
Non-Vertical Overhead Glazing: Guide to the Selection of Glass from the Point of View of Safety

5.1.4 Laminated heat strengthened /toughened 6.1.2 Insulating glass units

glass.
The lower pane should ideally be glass that remains in position post
A laminated glass that comprises one leaf of heat strengthened breakage, e.g. laminated safety glass.
glass and one leaf of thermally toughened/heat soaked thermally
toughened glass has a composite behaviour. If the lower pane is thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
glass or heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
If the heat strengthened glass remains unbroken the laminated glass, then the upper pane should also be one of the types of glass
glass pane will remain in situ even if the thermally toughened pane given in 6.1.1.
is broken.
NOTE: If the lower pane of an insulating glass unit is thermally
If the heat strengthened pane breaks the laminated glass will remain toughened soda lime silicate safety glass or heat soaked thermally
in situ as long as the thermally toughened pane remains unbroken. toughened soda lime silicate safety glass, the upper pane must not
be monolithic annealed glass nor heat strengthened glass.
5.2 Thermally treated glass
6.2 Glazing at a height over five metres and up
5.2.1 Thermally toughened soda lime silicate to 13 metres above floor level
safety glass
6.2.1 Single glazing
When broken, thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
fractures into small, relatively harmless pieces, which are likely to fall. This should be laminated safety glass or wired glass.
Thicker toughened glass, when broken, will exhibit a greater Alternatively, heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate
tendency for the small pieces to stay together and fall in a cluster. safety glass or thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass,
provided it is not more than six millimetres thick and not more
5.2.2 Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime than 3 m2 in area, may be considered;
silicate safety glass
6.2.2 Insulating glass units
The post breakage behaviour is the same as thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass (see 5.2.1). The lower pane should be one of the types of glass given in 6.2.1
including the size and area restriction on heat soaked thermally
5.2.3 Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass toughened soda lime silicate safety glass and thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass.
Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass breaks in a manner
similar to annealed glass and will therefore probably fall out. If the lower pane is thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
glass or heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
NOTE: Depending upon the angle of the glazing and the imposed glass, then the upper pane should also be one of the types of glass
loads there is a slight possibility that the glass may lock together given in 6.2.1.
and not fall out.
6.3 Glazing at a height over 13m above floor level
5.3 Wired glass / Safety Wired Glass
6.3.1 Single glazing
The wire will hold most pieces of the glass together, thereby
preventing them from falling This should be laminated safety glass;

5.4 Annealed glass 6.3.2 Insulating glass units

Broken annealed glass will fall out. The lower pane should be laminated safety glass

6 Selection of glass for use overhead 7. Enhancement of existing overhead glazing

The minimum acceptable requirements are as given below:- Information with respect to the use of adhesive backed polymeric
film for the enhancement of the performance of existing glazing can
NOTE:Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass or heat be found in GGF Data Sheets 5.18.3, 5.18.4 and [Link] also
soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass should give information on the use of edge retention systems.
not be used over swimming pools, etc, either in single glazing or as
the lower pane in insulating glass units. Bibliography

6.1 Glazing at a height up to five metres above BS 5502-21: Buildings and structures for agriculture – Part 21:
floor level Code of practice for selection and use of construction materials

6.1.1 Single glazing BS 5516-2: Patent glazing and sloping glazing for buildings –
Part 2: Code of practice for sloping glazing
This should ideally be glass that remains in position post breakage,
i.e. laminated safety glass, wired glass. BS 6180: Barriers in and about buildings – Code of practice
EN 572: Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass products
The following can also be considered: thermally toughened soda
lime silicate safety glass, heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime EN 1863: Glass in building – Heat strengthened soda lime
silicate safety glass. silicate glass
Non-Vertical Overhead Glazing: Guide to the Selection of Glass from the Point of View of Safety

EN 12150: Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda lime

silicate safety glass
EN 14179: Glass in building – Heat soaked thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass
EN 14449: Glass in building – laminated glass and laminated
safety glass – evaluation of conformity
EN ISO 12543: Glass in building – Laminated glass and
laminated safety glass

GGF Data Sheets:

4.4: Quality of thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
for building
4.4.1: Thermally treated soda lime silicate glass products
4.11: Laminated glass and laminated safety glass
5.18.3: GGF recommendations for adhesive backed polymeric
film applied to glass: Definitions, descriptions and components
5.18.4: GGF recommendations for adhesive backed polymeric
film applied to glass in the overhead position for the containment
of glass in the event of failure:Types of systems and precautions
in use
5.18.5: GGF recommendations for adhesive backed polymeric
film applied to glass in the overhead position for the containment
of glass in the event of failure:Test method
7.2: Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

Other Publications:
GGF’s A Guide to Good Practice in the Specification and
Installation of Conservatories within the United Kingdom
BRE Report BR 471: Sloping Glazing – understanding the risks by
David Kelly, Stephen Garvin and Ian Murray
 Architectural Glazing Systems
SECTION 7
Guidelines for the Use of Glass
7.2 May 2012
in Protective Barriers

Contents c. Free standing glass protective barriers

Introduction As well as giving the basis of design there is an Annex that covers
the situation with respect to conformity with Building Regulations in
1. Scope
the United Kingdom.
2. Definitions and descriptions It does not cover curved glass when used in the above applications.

3. Design considerations 2. Definitions and Descriptions

4. Design criteria For the benefit of this Data Sheet the following definitions apply.

5. Barrier types 2.1 Definitions

6. Glass types 2.1.1 Barrier

Bibliography Any element of building or structure intended to prevent persons

from falling and to retain, stop or guide persons
Annex A Conformity with U.K. Building Regulations
2.1.2 Datum

Introduction Finished level on which people may stand, e.g. floor, roof, balcony,
pitch line of stairs, etc. (see Figure 1)
Glazing in protective barriers can be regarded as a ‘safety risk’ if an
individual can accidentally come into contact with it. 2.1.3 Design height
There are two specific risks that need consideration and these are: Level at which the horizontal force on the barrier is assumed to act
for the purpose of design (see Figure 1)
• Cutting and piercing injuries resulting from accidental impact;
• Falling through the glazing if the impact causes breakage
NOTE: Injuries resulting from walking into unseen glazing is
excluded from this Data [Link] risk can be alleviated by the
use of appropriate manifestation. Advice on manifestation can be
found in BS 6262-4:2005, GGF Publication ‘The Right Glazing in the
Right Place’ and the applicable Building Regulations.

1. Scope
This Data Sheet covers the use of glass in protective barriers
(generally referred to as balustrades) that are designed to offer
protection to people where a difference in height constitutes a
falling risk.
It covers:
a. Full height protective barriers
b. Balustrades with glass infill panels
Figure 1
i. Fully framed
Datum, barrier height
ii. Edge supported and design height
iii. Point/clip supported

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

2.1.4 Line load

Load, i.e. horizontal force, which is applied at the design height

2.1.5 Uniformly distributed load

Load, e.g. wind loading, applied over the entire surface area of
the pane

2.1.6 Concentrated load

Load applied over a small area

2.1.7 Impact load

Figure 2 Examples of infill panels
The load applied when a person falls against the barrier.
NOTE:The application of a structural sealant between adjacent
2.1.8 Containment panes of glass does not change the support condition.

Ability of glazing when subjected to impact loading to resist 2.2.3 Free-standing glass protective barrier
penetration and hence prevent people from falling through it.
This type of protective barrier consists of glass panes affixed, e.g.
NOTE 1:Thermally toughened safety glass will provide containment clamped or bonded, to the structure along the bottom edge
when under the applicable impact test it does not break. (see figure 3). A handrail is attached to the top edge of the glass
and there are no balusters.
NOTE 2: Laminated safety glass will provide containment when
under the applicable impact test it either does not break or
breaks safely.
NOTE 3: Applicable impact test method, i.e. EN 12600.

2.1.9 Baluster
Post supporting the handrail in a balustrade.

2.1.10 Handrail
Rail acting as a guard or support to be held by hand in a
balustrade.
NOTE: It enables the line load to be transmitted to the structure
without stressing the glass.
Figure 3 Examples of free-standing protective
2.2 Descriptions barriers
2.2.1 Full height barrier 3. Design Considerations
These can take many forms and are not necessarily composed of 3.1 Assessment
full floor to ceiling glass/glazing. If any part of a glazed structure,
whether it forms the whole or part of a wall element, extends When assessing the need for a barrier and the type of barrier to
below the minimum barrier height given in 4.5 it is classed as a full be provided, consideration should be given to the likely hazards,
height barrier. building use and the risks to building users.
Where, in a building, more than one use of the building is
2.2.2 Barrier with glass infill panel anticipated, either the barrier design should be chosen to suit the
This type of protective barrier comprises the main frame, i.e. worst case, or more than one type of barrier should be provided,
handrail and balusters, which carry the appropriate [Link] glass as appropriate, to the location.
is used to form the infill panel and provides no support to the 3.2 Difference in levels
main frame. Handrail loads are not transferred to the glass infill.
The protective barrier shall provide guarding when the
There are four main types of infill panels (see figure 2): following apply:
• Fully framed; • In dwellings where the difference in adjacent level is > 600mm;
• Two edge framed • In building other than dwellings where the difference is:
• Clip fixed On stairs greater than two risers;
• Bolt fixed Other location > 380mm
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

3.3 Other considerations 4.2 Load values

The barrier selected shall be designed so as to minimise the risk of The value of the design loads shall relate to the building usage.
persons falling, rolling, sliding or slipping through gaps in the barrier Buildings with higher usage levels will generally be designed to
and/or the infill. higher load levels.
Where barriers are used when children under five are present the The design loads and building usage categories can be found in
gap in the barrier shall not exceed [Link] dimension is given applicable national Building Regulations.
with the applicable Building Regulation.
4.3 Impact loading
NOTE 1:The 100mm is to prevent the child being held fast by the
guarding (see applicable Building Regulation in Bibliography [B1]) In addition to the loading requirements given in 4.1, which are
applicable to any design of barrier, where glass is used, the
NOTE 2: Any guarding protecting glazing has to prevent a sphere performance under impact must be considered.
of 75mm diameter touching the glazing (see applicable building
regulation in Bibliography [B1]) Impact performance of glazing is determined under material testing.
In Europe the appropriate standard is EN 12600. The classification
NOTE 3:The break safe criteria for laminated safety glass and wired of flat glass under this test method is presented as follows:
safety glass are that no opening through which a 76mm diameter
sphere can pass. (see EN 12600) α((β))Ф
N.B: Care should be taken to consider the possible deflection
Where:
under loading.
α is the highest drop height class at which the product either
4. Design Criteria did not break or broke in accordance with a) or b) of
EN 12600: 2002, Clause 4;
4.1 Introduction
β is the mode of breakage (see Annex A of EN 12600);
The presence of protective barriers may be one of guidance for
persons moving about a building. However, the majority of Ф is the highest drop height class at which the product either did
protective barriers are positioned to prevent persons from falling not break or broke in accordance with a) of EN 12600: 2002,
from the edges of floors, stairs, elevated walkways and roofs. Clause 4.
The main requirement of a protective barrier is, therefore, to 4.4 Impact classes
provide containment. It performs this function by being able to
resist the likely applied forces without excessive deflection and The energy level of an impact will vary according to the position of
without being penetrated. the barrier relative to the unhindered distance a body can travel in
a direction perpendicular to the surface of the protective barrier
The forces to be resisted are generally described as follows: (free path - see figure 4).
• Line load is related to the possibility of persons leaning The minimum impact classes that shall be used are dependent
against the barrier, applying a force normal to a conventional upon the glass type and the free path.
barrier at the top edge. It is generally given in the form of kN/m
run, applied at a height above finished floor level, i.e. datum,
roughly equivalent to the waist height of an adult
• Uniformly distributed load (UDL) is related to the
pressure exerted on the infill area (that part of the barrier
below the position of application of the line load). It is generally
given in the form of kN/m2, applied over the entire infill area.
• Concentrated load takes into account any non-uniformity
of the load applied to the infill and may also represent a static Figure 4 Free path
equivalent to a localised human impact (from hand, knee, elbow,
For glass to be used within a barrier it MUST give containment.
etc.). It is generally given in the form of kN, applied at the most
Therefore the impact classes that shall be used are as follows:
vulnerable position on the infill area.
• Free path up to 1500mm
NOTE 1: Line and concentrated loads are given in Eurocode
EN 1991-1-1 and are the subject of a National Annex. • Thermally toughened safety glass minimum
3(C)3, i.e. 6mm
NOTE 2: Uniformly distributed loads are given in Eurocode
EN 1991-1-4 and are the subject of a National Annex. • Laminated safety glass minimum 3(B)3, i.e. 6.4mm
• Free path over 1500mm
N.B: Barriers shall be designed to resist the most unfavourable
likely imposed loads, i.e. line and concentrated; and wind loads • Thermally toughened safety glass 1(C)1, i.e. 10mm
without unacceptable deflections or distortions. • Laminated safety glass 1(B)1, i.e. 6.8mm
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

4.5 Barrier heights 5.2.2 Loading

The heights of barriers above datum are shown in Figure 1. Glass partially or totally below the barrier height shall be
These are given below: designed to satisfy the appropriate design criteria. Any part of a
glass pane below the barrier height shall sustain the infill loads.
• Single family dwelling Where the barrier height is coincident with the glass, the glass
• Barriers in front of a window 800mm shall also sustain the line load applied at the appropriate height.

• Stairs, landings, ramps, edges of internal [Link] glass shall also withstand the impact loading, i.e. have an
floors 900mm appropriate EN 12600 classification. Using a thin glass, e.g. 4mm
toughened Class 1(C)1, does not necessarily mean that the glass
• External balconies, edges of roofs 1100mm is capable of carrying all applicable loads.
All other uses NOTE: The choice of glazing type and thickness needs to take
• Barriers in front of a window 800mm account of wind loading, etc.

• Stairs 900mm 5.2.3 Deflection

• Balconies and stands, etc. having fixed seating within The deflection of the glass, when it is subjected to the design
530mm of the barrier (see figure 5) 800mm loads, shall be limited to L/65 or 25mm, taking L as the longest
• Other positions 1100mm dimension of the glass.

5.3 Barrier with glass infill panel

5.3.1 General
In this type of protective barrier, the main frame, comprising of
the handrail and baluster, is designed to withstand the line loads
applied to the hand rail, and the glass is used to form the infill
panels. The glass in no way provides any support to the main
frame, and the handrail loads are not transferred to the glass.

5.3.2 Loading
The glass infill panel shall carry the applicable loads, i.e. UDL
and concentrated.
With external applications the wind loading shall also be
considered.
5.3.3 Support conditions
[Link] Fully framed (see figure 6)
The frame section shall give a minimum of 15mm edge cover to
the glass
Figure 5 Height and width of barriers in front of
fixed seating
5. Barrier Types
5.1 General
The details below relate to the most commonly used types
of barriers.
There are other commercial systems available that can equally
provide a suitable barrier.

5.2 Full height barrier Figure 6 Fully framed infill panel

5.2.1 General
[Link] Two-edge framed (see figure 7)
This is where glazing as part of an internal or external wall
protects a difference in level. The glass may be glazed on 4-edges, The frame section shall give a minimum of 15mm edge cover to
2-edges or be bolt fixed. It may be single glazing or insulating the glass on those edges that are framed.
glass units.
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

5.4 Free-standing glass protective barrier

5.4.1 General
In this type of protective barrier, the glass is designed to withstand all
the design loads. Each glass pane is either clamped or adhesively fixed
to the structure along its bottom edge, the handrail is attached to
the top edge of the glass, and there are no balusters.
The design of the clamping is detailed in clause 7.2.3 of
BS 6262-6: Glazing for building – Part 6: Code of practice for
special applications
Figure 7 Two–edge framed infill panel
5.4.2 Loading
[Link] Clip Fixed (see figure 8) All barriers loads, i.e. UDL, concentrated and line loads, shall be
carried by the glass pane. In external applications wind loading
The clips should be positioned around the periphery of the infill
shall also be considered.
panel, at a maximum spacing of 600 mm. Each clip should be not
less than 50 mm in length and should give a minimum depth of 5.4.3 Deflection
cover to the glass of 25 mm.
The deflection of the glass, when it is subjected to the design
Depending upon the actual number, size and spacing of the clips, loads shall be limited to L/65 or 25mm, taking L as the distance
the glass may be considered fully framed or two-edge framed. between the clamping and the top edge of the plate.
6. Glass Types
6.1 General
The type and thickness of glass shall be chosen to suit the design
of the protective barrier and the applicable loads.
6.2 Glass types
The following glass types are suitable for installation into
protective barriers; subject to the limitations given in 6.3
• Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass in
accordance with EN 12150-2;
Figure 8 Clip fixed infill panel
• Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
[Link] Bolt fixed (see figure 9) in accordance with EN 14179-2;
• Laminated safety glass in accordance with EN 14449;
The design of the bolt fixings is detailed in clause 7.2 of
BS 6262-6: Glazing for building – Part 6: Code of practice for • Laminated thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass in
special applications accordance with EN 14449;
• Laminated heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate
safety glass in accordance with EN 14449.
• Laminated heat strengthened soda lime silicate safety glass in
accordance with EN 14449
• Safety rated wired glass
NOTE: Thermally toughened safety glass and heat soaked
thermally toughened safety glass are available for other glass
compositions, e.g. borosilicate, alkaline earth silicate.
6.3 Limitations
Laminated safety glass can only be used fully framed, i.e. in full
height glazing or in barriers with fully framed infill panels.
Figure 9 Bolt fixed infill panel
NOTE: Laminated thermally treated glasses may be used without
5.3.4 Deflection being fully framed.
The deflection of the glass, when it is subjected to the design Safety rated wired glass can only be considered for fully framed
loads, shall be limited to L/65 or 25mm, taking L as the maximum full height barrier situations.
span between the supporting points, unless the pane is fully
framed, in which case L is the longer dimension of the glass. All other glass types detailed above are suitable for installation in
conventional systems.
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

Bibliography EN 15682-2: Glass in building – Heat soaked thermally

toughened alkaline earth silicate safety glass – Part 2:
B1 United Kingdom Building Regulations: Evaluation of conformity/product standard
England & Wales –
BS EN 1991-1-1: EUROCODE 1: Part 1-1, General
Approved Document K – Protection from falling, actions – Densities, self-weight and imposed loads
collision and impact – Parts K1, and K2
BS EN 1991-1-4: EUROCODE 1: Part 1-4, General
Approved Document M – Access to and use of actions – Wind actions
buildings
Approved Document N – Glazing - Safety in relation to Annex A Conformity with U.K. Building
impact, opening and cleaning – Part N1 Regulations

Scotland – A.1 General

Building (Scotland) Regulations Technical Handbook – The Building Regulations [B1] in the United Kingdom incorporate
Domestic and Non-Domestic – Section 4 - Safety requirements to provide barriers when it is necessary to protect
people in and about buildings from falling.
Section 4.4 – Pedestrian protective barriers
NOTE: All tables contained within this Annex have been prepared
Section 4.8 – Danger from accidents
to summarise the requirements. However, they are not part of
Northern Ireland – the Building Regulations.
The Building Regulations (Northern Ireland) Statutory
A.2 Building occupancy classes
Rules – Technical Booklet H – Stairs, ramps, guarding
and protection from impact The Building Regulations [B1] classify building types and usage
The Building Regulations (Northern Ireland) Statutory with relationship to applicable imposed loads for protective
Rules – Technical Booklet V - Glazing barriers. Table A1 shows occupancy types that have the same
applied loads.
B2 British Standards
BS 6180: Barriers in and about buildings –
Code of practice Class Occupancy

BS 6262-4: Glazing for buildings – Part 4: Safety related

1 Domestic and Residential – single family dwellings
to human impact – Code of practice Office and Work Areas – light pedestrian traffic routes
BS 6262-6: Glazing for buildings – Part 6: Code of 2 Domestic and Residential – multi-occupancy,
practice for special applications balconies and edges of roofs

B3 European Standards Office and Work Areas – areas not susceptible to

over crowding
EN 1863-2: Glass in building – Heat strengthened soda
Areas without obstacles for moving people and not
lime silicate glass – Part 2: Evaluation of susceptible to over crowding – stairs, landing, corridors,
conformity/Product standard and balconies
EN 12150-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened 3 Areas where people might congregate – areas having
soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of fixed seating within 530mm of the barrier
conformity/Product standard
Areas with tables or fixed seating – restaurants and bars
EN 12600: Glass in building – Pendulum test – Impact
test method and classification for flat glass Areas susceptible to over crowding – footways or
footpaths less than 3 metres wide, adjacent to
EN 13024-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened sunken areas
borosilicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of Retail areas – all retail areas including banks, building
conformity/product standard societies or betting shops
EN 14179-2: Glass in building – Heat soaked thermally 4 Areas susceptible to over crowding – theatres, cinemas,
toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 2: shopping malls, assembly areas. Footways or pavements
Evaluation of conformity/Product standard greater than 3 metres wide adjacent to sunken areas

EN 14321-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened

alkaline earth silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of
conformity/product standard
Table A1 Classification of building occupancy types
EN 14449: Glass in building – Laminated glass and by barrier loadings.
laminated safety glass – Evaluation of
conformity/Product standard
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

A.3 Applicable loadings NOTE 1: Glass panes within these sizes will satisfy the design
criteria irrespective of shape and for glazing methods which
Table A2 gives the applicable loadings dependant upon the
support the glass panel on all edges.
building occupancy classification (see table A1).
NOTE 2: Compliance with this table does not necessarily indicate
Design Loads suitability for purpose. The thickness and type of glass pane that
can be used may also be affected by other criteria, e.g. wind
Building Line load in UDL in kN/m2 Concentrated
Occupancy kN/m run applied to the load in kN loads, and these should also be taken into account when selecting
Class applied 1100mm whole of the infill applied to any the glass.
above finished panel below the part of the infill
floor level line load height panel below the
line load height NOTE 3: Thermally toughened safety glass should comply with
EN 12150 and have a classification according to EN 12600
of 1(C)
1 0.36 0.5 0.25

2 0.74 1.0 0.5 NOTE 4: Laminated safety glass should comply with EN 14449
and have a classification according to EN 12600 of 3(B)
3 1.5 1.5 1.5
NOTE 5: Laminated safety glass is assumed to be symmetrical, i.e.
4 3.0 1.5 1.5
nominal 6mm comprises two leaves of 3mm glass.

Table A2 Design loads for protective barriers A4.3 Barriers with glass infill panels
Table A4 gives information on fully framed glass infill panels.
A4 Sizes of glass that comply with the design
It covers toughened safety glass and laminated safety glass.
loads of protective barriers

A4.1 General
Infill loading criteria Nominal glass thickness mm
The size of glass panels that will carry the loads given in Table A2
Concentrated UDL Toughened Laminated
are dependant upon the type of barrier and support conditions. Load kN kN/m2 safety glass safety glass

A4.2 Full height barriers 0.25 0.5 6 6.4

Table A3 gives information on single glazed full height barriers. 0.5 1.0 6 8.4

1.5 1.5 8 12.4

Area in m2 for glass type

Building Nominal Laminated Thermally Safety

Occupancy Glass Safety Toughened Wired
Class thickness (mm) Glass Safety Glass Glass Table A4 Allowable thickness for fully framed
infill panels
1 6 3.6 3.8 3.4
8 3.8 6.0 NOTE 1: Thermally toughened safety glass should comply with
10 8.4 8.6
12 11.6 11.7 EN 12150 and have a classification according to EN 12600 of
>15 No limit No limit 1(C)1.
2 6 2.2 2.4 0.2 NOTE 2: Laminated safety glass should comply with EN 14449
8 4.2 4.3
10 5.8 6.0 and have a classification according to EN 12600 of 2(B)2.
12 7.8 8.0
15 - 11.4 NOTE 3: Glass panes within these sizes will satisfy the design
16 12.9 - criteria irrespective of shape and for glazing methods which
>19 No limit No limit support the glass panel on all edges.
3 6 n/a n/a n/a
8 n/a 1.8 NOTE 4: Compliance with this table does not necessarily indicate
10 0.2 4.2 suitability for purpose. The thickness and type of glass pane that
12 3.4 6.2 can be used may also be affected by other criteria, e.g. wind
15 - 9.0
16 9.9 -
loads, and these should also be taken into account when selecting
19 - 13.5 the glass.
20 14.4 -
>24 No limit No limit NOTE 5: Laminated safety glass is assumed to be symmetrical, i.e.
nominal 6.4mm comprises two leaves of 3mm glass.
4 any n/a n/a n/a

Table A3 Maximum allowable pane sizes for single

glazed full height barriers
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Protective Barriers

Table A5 gives information on two-edge framed

infill panels with thermally toughened soda lime
silicate safety glass

Infill loading Panel Span Limits mm

Width
UDL Concentrated 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm
kN/m2 Load kN mm * *

0.5 0.25 300 950 1550 1950 2350

500 1250 1800 2150 2450
700 1400 1800 2150 2450
900 1400 1800 2150 2450

1.0 0.5 300 600 1050 1550 1850

500 800 1350 1800 2050
700 950 1500 1800 2050
900 1000 1500 1800 2050

1.5 1.5 300 n/a n/a 550 900

500 n/a n/a 950 1450
700 n/a n/a 1250 1650
900 n/a n/a 1350 1750

Table A5 Maximum allowable spans for

two-edge framed thermally toughened safety glass
infill panels.
NOTE 1: n/a = not applicable for this load category
NOTE 2: * = Possibly not suitable for free paths greater than
1500mm, unless the glass complies with Note 3 with respect to
EN 12600 classification.
NOTE 3: Thermally toughened safety glass should comply with
EN 12150 and have a classification according to EN 12600 of
1(C)1.
NOTE 4: Compliance with this table does not necessarily indicate
suitability for purpose. The thickness and type of glass pane that
can be used may also be affected by other criteria, e.g. wind
loads, and these should also be taken into account when selecting
the glass.

A4.4 Free standing glass protective barriers

For information on free standing glass protective barriers contact
the manufacturer.
 Architectural Glazing Systems
SECTION 7
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in
7.3 July 2013
Floors and Stairs

Detail on anti-slip finishes and other safety matters will

be considered.
Contents
Introduction
1. Scope 2. Definitions

2. Definitions and Descriptions NOTE 1: The majority of these definitions have been taken from
England Building Regulation K: 2013
3. Design considerations
NOTE 2: A drawing showing these terms is shown in Appendix 1
4. Design criteria

5. Glass types
2.1 Uniformly distributed load (UDL)
Load, e.g. wind, snow, applied over the entire surface of the pane.
6. Glass strength considerations
2.2 Concentrated load
7. Post breakage behaviour
Load applied over a small area.
8. Selection of glass for slip resistance
2.3 Normal-use stair
9. Framing and installation Stair intended for use by all users in or connected to a building
10. Building regulations and standards 2.4 Private stair
Appendix 1 Drawing from BS 5395-1 Stair within a dwelling, intended for use only by occupants
and visitors.
Bibliography
2.5 Alternating tread stair
A stair with paddle-shaped treads where the wide portion is on
Introduction
Glass floors and stairs are manufactured from a combination of alternate sides on consecutive treads.
glasses designed to create a walkable structure in association with
structural supports. 2.6 Helical stair
Stair in a helix around a central void.
They are designed for pedestrian use only.

The use of glass for these applications allows the interplay of

2.7 Spiral stair
transparency, reflection and refraction of light. Stair in a helix around a central column.

1. Scope 2.8 Nosing

This Data Sheet covers the use of glass in floors and stairs for The leading edge of a stair tread.
pedestrian traffic in internal/external environments and
domestic/non-domestic applications.
2.9 Going
The depth from front to back of a tread less any overlap with the
Comment will be made when the floor has to act as a
compartment element in case of fire. next tread above.

It will give the basis of design together with information on 2.10 Rise
selection of glass types and methods of installation. The height between consecutive treads

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Floors and Stairs

2.11 Pitch 3.2 Specifics

The angle of inclination between the horizontal and the line The following can be regarded as 'hazards' that require specialist
connecting the nosings of a stair. consideration:

2.12 Flight
Continuous series of steps or a continuous slope between landings Hazard Solution

Potential for exposure to water Careful selection of surface finish

2.13 Stair width
The clear width between the walls or balustrades. and slipping and appropriate slip resistance

Potential for breakage from Careful design specification

impact by falling or thrown possibly including 'sacrificial' layer.
2.14 Tapered tread
A step in which the going reduces from one side to the other. objects

2.15 Ponding Potential for glazing failing/ Consideration of the post-

breaking breakage behaviour of the chosen
Deflection of the pane that will allow collection of unwanted water. glass specification

Necessity of refurbishment Consideration of both glass,

2.16 Sacrificial layer
This is a pane of glass that is expressly used to protect the or replacement glazing design and access.
structural component from damage, e.g. scratching, etc.
Possibility of deflection that Consideration of both glass
NOTE: This type of layer is designed to be easily replaceable could cause ponding and/or be thickness and support stiffness
visually disturbing
2.17 Redundant layer
Frequency of use and impact Careful design specification.
This is a pane within the construction that allows the floor/stair on using alternative routes
tread to continue to support the designed loads should one of the in the building;
panes be broken.

3. Design Considerations
4. Design Criteria
3.1 Assessment
4.1 General
Firstly it is necessary to consider the location of the floor/stair case
and whether it spans a dangerous drop. Breakage of the floor/stair This non-exhaustive list details the prime consideration:
tread could result in a fall from a high level or cause injury even • Internal or external application;
when the drop is quite small.
• Building use category (including change of use)
The nature of the building and the likely behaviour of its users must
be taken into account, with drops in excess of 380mm being • Overall size and dimensions;
classified as dangerous. This is especially important when
considering glass floors or stair treads. • Deflection of the glass/system;

Other points for consideration are as follows: • Loading;

• Likelihood of persons walking on the floor/stair tread with • Depth of drop;

wet footwear; • Glass specification;
• Application of point or concentrated loadings with hard objects • Surface finish;
with small contact area, e.g. castors on furniture.
• Fixing substrate;
• Thermal stress if artificial lighting is installed beneath the
floor/stair tread; or if used in an external application subject to • Support structure.
solar radiation.
Generally the design of glass floors/stair treads ensures that
• Modesty when persons can access beneath the floor or stair; breakage of one leaf does not compromise the performance of the
component, i.e. the inclusion of a 'redundant' leaf. Therefore a fall
• When positioned the user has a view of a large exposed area; is unlikely unless there is total/catastrophic failure of the system.
• In specific applications the floor may also need to offer Two British Standards are relevant to the use of glass in floors and
appropriate fire resistance. stair treads:
• Consideration of secondary protection in instances when the • EN 1991-1-1:2002: Eurocode 1: Actions on structures -
floor may be subjected to excess footfall or movements across General actions - Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for
it, e.g. office furniture, etc. buildings together with the UK National Annex,
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Floors and Stairs

NOTE: This standard specifies the design floor loads for the specific NOTE 3: Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety
use of the building glass should be in accordance with EN 14179;
• BS 5395-1:2010: Stairs: Code of practice for the design of NOTE 4: Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass should be in
stairs with straight flights and winders. accordance with EN 1863;
NOTE: This standard refers to the danger of slippage and specifies NOTE 5: Thermally toughened safety glass and heat soaked
minimum coefficients of friction thermally toughened safety glass are available for other glass
compositions, e.g. borosilicate, alkaline earth silicate.
The loads considered are the uniformly distributed load (UDL) and
the concentrated load. It is usually the concentrated load that will
determine the glass thickness, so care must be taken to specify the
6 Glass Strength Considerations
correct figure from the national annex of EN 1991-1-1. 6.1 General
Traditional glass flooring has been fully supported by its edges and The final glass specification should have sufficient strength to
never at a mid-point. The strength of the supports must be withstand the appropriate floor loadings given in the UK national
calculated by a competent structural engineer, with the deflection annex to EN 1991-1-1:2002.
of the frame limited to an appropriate value for the glass type.
In addition it is important to consider the deflection of the final
Glass technology has improved, coupled with the development of design, particularly when the glass is supported on less than four
structural interlayers, e.g. ionomers. This gives greater performance edges. In such cases it is possible to consider glass specifications
and provides increased stiffness; therefore alternative support that have sufficient strength, but results in a floor that unnerves
configurations can now be considered. people due to excessive deflection.
Using a combination of increased glass and interlayer strength,
laminated glass floors can be designed having point support systems
6.2 Selection of glass for use in floors
or minimal traditional supports. Glass should be provided that is suitable for normal pedestrian use
and so can be walked upon safely and with a degree of confidence
5. Glass Types withstanding the relevant design loads from EN 1991-1-1:2002.
5.1 General It is never feasible to ensure that glass will not fracture under
sufficiently extreme abuse. Consequently a redundant ply of glass in
The type and thickness of glass shall be selected to suit the design a laminated construction is imperative to provide the appropriate
taking into consideration all of the critical factors from the initial level of post fracture behaviour.
assessment.
Contact with hard objects such as glass, metal and stones should
5.2 Glass types be avoided at all times.
The following glass types are suitable for installation into floors Over a period of time the top surface is likely to deteriorate
without a drop below: depending upon the amount of pedestrian traffic and type of
footwear used.
• Annealed soda lime silicate float glass in accordance with
EN 572-9. NOTE: The incorporation of a sacrificial top layer means that when
the visual deterioration becomes unacceptable, only the sacrificial
NOTE: The required thickness will depend upon size, aspect ratio layer requires replacing.
and loading.
The top surface finish of the glass can be modified to achieve an
The following glass types are suitable for installation into floors and appropriate level of slip resistance.
stair treads with a drop below:
Tables 1 to 5 provide some suggested glass types that have
• Laminated annealed safety glass in accordance with EN 14449; sufficient strength for a number of load cases.
• Laminated thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass in
accordance with EN 14449;
• Laminated heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate UDL Concentrated Glass Specific
safety glass in accordance with EN 14449.
(kN/m2) load (kN) thickness use

• Laminated heat strengthened/thermally toughened soda lime 1.5 2.0 15 Domestic

silicate safety glass in accordance with EN 14449
2.5 2.7 15 Office
• Laminated heat strengthened/heat soaked thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass in accordance with EN 14449 2.0 3.0 19 Restaurant

NOTE 1: Floors that are subjected to significant levels of solar 4.0 3.6 25 Retail
radiation would usually preclude the use of annealed glass types for
reasons of thermal safety; 4.0 4.5 25 Museum

NOTE 2: Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass should Thickness of annealed glass complying with EN 572-9
be in accordance with EN 12150;
Table 1 – Thickness of annealed glass, without a drop below,
uniformly and continuously supported, with a size of 1500 x 1000mm
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Floors and Stairs

UDL Concentrated Glass Specific UDL Concentrated Glass Specific

(kN/m2) load (kN) make-up use (kN/m2) load (kN) make-up use

1.5 2.0 19 + 19 Domestic 1.5 2.0 10 + 10 + 10 Domestic

2.5 2.7 25 + 15 Office 2.5 2.7 12 + 12 + 12 Office

2.0 3.0 25 + 19 Restaurant 2.0 3.0 12 + 12 + 12 Restaurant

4.0 3.6 25 + 25 Retail 4.0 3.6 15 + 15 + 15 Retail

4.0 4.5 25 + 25 Museum 4.0 4.5 15 + 15 + 15 Museum

Thickness of annealed laminated glass complying with EN 14449 Thickness of laminated toughened glass complying with
BS EN 14449 & BS EN 12150
Table 2 – Thickness of laminated annealed glass, supported along
all four edges, with a size of 1500 x 1000mm Table 5 – Thickness of laminated toughened glass, supported along
two 1500mm edges, with a span between supports of 1000mm

UDL Concentrated Glass Specific 6.3. Selection of glass for use in stairs
To ensure the safe use of stairs there are specific
(kN/m2) load (kN) make-up use
recommendations for the width, rise and going, which can be
1.5 2.0 12 + 12 Domestic found in BS 5395-1.
2.5 2.7 15 + 15 Office
A summary of these dimensions is shown in table 5.
2.0 3.0 15 + 15 Restaurant

4.0 3.6 19 + 19 Retail

Stair Rise (mm) Going Stair clear
4.0 4.5 19 + 19 Museum category (mm) width (mm)

Min. Max. Min. Max. Min.

Thickness of laminated thermally toughened glass complying with
EN 14449 and EN 12150
Private 150 200 250 400 800*
stair
Table 3 – Thickness of laminated toughened glass, supported along all
four edges, with a size of 1500 x 1000mm Normal- 150 180 300 450 1000*
use stair

Table 5 – Recommended sizes for straight stairs and winders

UDL Concentrated Glass Specific
(kN/m2) load (kN) make-up use Note*: For regular two-way traffic, the minimum stair clear width is
1000mm
1.5 2.0 10 + 10 + 10 Domestic
Note**: For hospitals, the minimum stair clear width is 1200mm
2.5 2.7 12 + 10 + 12 Office

2.0 3.0 12 + 10 + 12 Restaurant

Once the appropriate size and geometry of the stairs have been
decided, the advice given in 6.2 relating to conventional glass floors,
4.0 3.6 15 + 10 + 15 Retail can be applied to stair design.

4.0 4.5 15 + 10 + 15 Museum NB: Exposed nosings of glass stair treads can be particularly
vulnerable to damage. For high pedestrian foot traffic areas it is
Thickness of laminated toughened / heat strengthened / toughened recommended that nosings be protected to avoid accidental
glass complying with EN 14449, EN 12150 & EN 1863 damage of any exposed glass edges/corners.

Table 4 – Thickness of laminated toughened / heat strengthened / 7. Post breakage of glass

toughened glass, supported along all four edges, with a size of
1500 x 1000mm 7.1 Annealed glass floors
Providing that the glass floor is designed, manufactured and
installed in accordance with this Data Sheet, and then if breakage
occurs the glass is likely to lock together. This will mean that there
is no penetration that will allow a drop into the space below.
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Floors and Stairs

However, broken glass should be replaced immediately and access Floors near entrance areas may be walked upon by people with
prohibited. wet footwear with external floors presenting the highest risk of
slipping. For these and other hazardous areas the slip resistant
7.2 Annealed laminated floors/stair treads treatment is critical.

Providing the glass floor/stair tread is manufactured from laminated For external floors, deflection inherent in the glass may lead to
annealed glass, and is suitably supported around the perimeter, the ponding when large sizes are considered.
post fracture behaviour is one that retains a significant degree of its
inherent strength and is likely to resist displacement or penetration. BS 5395-1:2010 Stairs. Code of practice for the design of stairs
with straight flights and winders, makes reference to the danger of
These qualities make this particular specification advantageous slippage and specifies minimum coefficients of friction that could
when the glass is located inside a building and is still required to equally be applied to glass floors
perform the function of supporting people.
9 Framing and Installation
7.3 Thermally treated laminated floors/stair treads
When considering laminated thermally treated glass there is often
9.1 General
the potential for a reduction in overall glass thickness. Traditional glass flooring should be fully supported by its edges
and never at a mid-point, see figure 1.
It should be noted that a reduction in thickness will be followed by
an increase in glass deflection, and can be particularly noticeable
following the fracture of one of the plies in the laminate
construction.

Failure of any single ply in the specifications considered in tables 2

& 4 will rarely be critical when solely considering the ability of the
remaining glass to withstand the appropriate load, as all such
constructions have a “redundant ply.”

This is unlikely to be the case following any additional ply failure.

However with the development of structural interlayers giving
stronger performance and providing increased stiffness, an
improved post breakage characteristic can be realised.

Table 3 relates to laminated thermally treated glass construction,

incorporating a heat strengthened ply. This is advantageous when Figure 1 Example of glass floor
considering the post breakage behaviour should fracture of a
toughened ply occurs. 9.2 Glass floors/stair treads
As glass technology has improved coupled with the development
NB: Irrespective of glass make-up in all cases a replacement panel of structural interlayers giving stronger performance and providing
should be prioritised immediately following fracture. increased stiffness, alternative support configurations can now be
considered. Using a combination of increased glass and interlayer
NOTE: The ability of a broken pane to remain in situ is dependent strength, laminated glass floors can have point support systems or
upon the loads being applied, the glass type, the support condition, minimal traditional supports.
the number of fractured plies and the type of interlayer in the
construction. The manufacturer should be consulted for The final glass specification should have sufficient strength to
information on the post fracture behaviour. withstand the appropriate floor loadings given in the UK national
annex to BS EN 1991-1-1:2002. In addition it is important to
8 Selection of glass for slip resistance consider the deflection of the final design, particularly when the
glass is supported on less than four edges. In such cases it is
As the surface of glass has a smooth fire polished finish there is a
possible to consider glass specifications that have sufficient strength,
very low friction grip between glass and most footwear even in
but results in a floor that unnerves people due to excessive
normal dry conditions.
deflection
Should the surface of glass become wet, there is the potential for
an extremely hazardous condition, which requires consideration
9.3 Frame and Installation
alongside strength and post fracture behaviour. The frame should provide continuous support to the perimeter of
each individual element of glazing, and must be capable of
Sandblasting is a common technique used to provide slip resistance withstanding both the design loading and the self-weight of the
either by an all-over treatment or by deep sandblasting to raise glass without excessive deflection.
dots on the glass surface.
The frame may be of metal, masonry or wood and the glass must
A ceramic frit containing a fine hard grit can be applied and fired be cushioned from it by 3mm thick neoprene rubber or other
into the top surface to provide a reduced risk of slipping. material with a Shore A hardness of 60.
Guidelines for the Use of Glass in Floors and Stairs

The clearance between the edge of the glass and the frame, or Wales –
between adjacent glasses, should be 3mm minimum and infill strips
of a material such as wood, cork or neoprene, should be inserted Approved Document K – Protection from falling, collision
to finish just below the upper surface of the glass. and impact – Parts K1
NOTE: Formerly England & Wales AD K
To provide a flush finish a compatible high-grade synthetic rubber, Scotland –
polysulphide or silicone sealant can be used as a top pointing
Building (Scotland) Regulations Technical Handbook –
9.4 Supporting structure Domestic and Non-Domestic – Section 4 - Safety

The strength of the supports must be calculated by a structural Section 4.4 – Pedestrian protective barriers
engineer, with the deflection of the frame limited to an appropriate
Section 4.8 – Danger from accidents
value for the glass type
Northern Ireland –
The Building Regulations (Northern Ireland) Statutory Rules
10 Building Regulations and Standards
The Building Regulations, see Bibliography [1], cover stairs but does – Technical Booklet H – Stairs, ramps, guarding and
not cover floors. None of the regulations say anything about glass protection from impact
in these applications. However, the regulations are not material
specific so they can be applied to glass. B2 British Standards
BS 5395-1: 2010: Stairs. Code of practice for the design of
British Standards BS 5395 – Parts 1 and 2 cover the specification stairs with straight flights and winders
and design of stairs. The use of glass treads is not covered by these
standards. BS 5395-2: 1984: Stairs. Code of practice of helical and
spiral stairs
B3 European Standards
Appendix 1 Drawing from BS 5395-1

EN 14179-2: Glass in building – Heat soaked thermally

toughened soda lime silicate safety glass – Part 2:
Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
EN 1863-2: Glass in building – Heat strengthened soda
lime silicate glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
standard
EN 12150-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda
lime silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of
conformity/Product standard
EN 12600: Glass in building – Pendulum test – Impact test
method and classification for flat glass
EN 13024-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened
borosilicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of
conformity/product standard EN 14179-2: Glass in building
– Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate
safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of conformity/Product
standard
EN 14321-2: Glass in building – Thermally toughened
alkaline earth silicate safety glass – Part 2: Evaluation of
conformity/product standard
EN 14449: Glass in building – Laminated glass and
laminated safety glass – Evaluation of conformity/Product
standard
EN 15682-2: Glass in building – Heat soaked thermally
toughened alkaline earth silicate safety glass – Part 2:
Evaluation of conformity/product standard
• Bibliography

B1 United Kingdom Building Regulations:

EN 1991-1-1: EUROCODE 1: Part 1-1, General actions –
England – Densities, self-weight and imposed loads

Approved Document K: 2013 – Protection from falling,

collision and impact – Parts K1, and K2
 Security
SECTION 8
Security Glazing – Part 1:
8.1.1 February 2011
Definitions and descriptions

Contents 2. DEFINITIONS and DESCRIPTION

Foreword 2.1 Definitions

NOTE: The definitions used in this Data Sheet have, where
Introduction
possible, been taken from European and International standards.

1. Scope 2.1.1 security

means whereby the fear of harm and/or damage is removed
2. Definitions and description or reduced

3. Standards and reference documents 2.1.2 physical security

protection offered by a barrier creating separation between the
4. Security glazing products threat, and persons and/or property

5. Compliance with the Construction Products Directive 2.1.3 security glazing

glazing, framing and fixing system designed to withstand a specified
type and level of attack.
Foreword
2.1.4 security glazing product
Data Sheet 8.1 covers the use of security glazing in
buildings. It comprises the following parts: glazing product that provides a specific resistance to the actions
of force
Part 1: Definitions and description
2.1.5 actions of force
Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing specific actions either deliberate or accidental that may result in
Part 3: Bullet resistant glazing injury to persons and/or damage to property

Part 4: Explosion resistant glazing 2.1.6 security framing

Part 5: Framing and installation framing system, window, door, etc. designed to resist a specified
type and level of attack

2.2 Description
INTRODUCTION
2.2.1 Actions
This Data Sheet 8.1.1 assesses security glazing products/framing
systems that are applicable to use in buildings. [Link] manual attack
a deliberate action on the part of a person made with the intention
1. SCOPE
of creating an opening in the security glazing product by the use of
This Data Sheet, 8.1.1 defines security glazing, describes security manually held implements or by the use of thrown objects
glazing and references all applicable standards and associated
documents. [Link] ballistic attack
Attack using fire is not included and protection against fire is dealt a deliberate action on the par t of a person made with the
with in the GGF publication – A Guide to Best Practice in the intention of threatening or causing personal injury by the
Specification and Use of Fire-Resistant Glazed Systems. use of firearms

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Security Glazing – Part 1: Definitions and descriptions

[Link] explosion pressure EN 12600: Glass in building – Pendulum test – Impact test
an action, either deliberate or accidental, that may cause method and classification for flat glass
personal injury, material damage to buildings, proper ty, etc. as EN 13123-1: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion
the result of an explosive blast resistance – Requirements and classification – Part 1: Shock tube
2.2.2 Security glazing products EN 13123-2: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion
resistance – Requirements and classification – Part 2: Range test
[Link] manual attack resistant glazing
security glazing designed to resist attack and to delay access EN 13124-1: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion
to a protected space for a shor t period of time resistance – Test method – Part 1: Shock tube
(BS 5544, EN 356) EN 13124-2: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion
NOTE 1: Manually held implements such as axe, crowbar, resistance – Requirements and classification – Part 2: Range test
pickaxe, etc. EN 13541: Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and
NOTE 2: Thrown objects such as bricks, street furniture, etc. classification of resistance against explosion pressure
EN 14351-1: Windows and doors – Product standard,
[Link] bullet-resistant glazing
performance characteristics – Part 1: Windows and external
security glazing product that affords a defined resistance pedestrian doorsets without resistance to fire and/or smoke
against the firing of specified weapons and ammunition leakage characteristics
(BS 5051, EN 1063)
EN 14351-2: Windows and doors – Product standard,
[Link] blast-resistant glazing performance characteristics – Part 2: Internal pedestrian doorsets
security glazing designed to reduce the injurious effects or without resistance to fire and/or smoke leakage characteristics
damage to proper ty of accidental or intentional blast forces EN 14449: Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated
(EN 13541, ISO 16933, ISO 16934) safety glass – Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
3. STANDARDS and REFERENCE DOCUMENTS prEN 15752-1: Glass in building – Adhesive backed polymeric
film – Part 1: Definition and description
3.1 Standards
prEN 15755-1: Glass in building – Adhesive backed polymeric
BS 5051: Bullet - resistant glazing – Specification for glazing for filmed glass – Part 1: Definition and description
interior use (only applicable for plastics glazing sheet materials)
EN ISO 12543-2: Glass in building - Laminated glass and
BS 5357: Code of practice for installation and application of laminated safety glass - Part 2: Laminated safety glass
security glazing
EN ISO 12543-3: Glass in building - Laminated glass and
BS 5544: Specification for anti-bandit glazing (glazing resistant laminated safety glass – Part 3: Laminated glass
to manual attack) (only applicable for plastics glazing sheet
materials) ISO 16933: Glass in buildings – Explosion resistant security
glazing – Test and classification for arena air-blast loading
BS 6262-3: Glazing for buildings – Code of practice for fire,
security and wind loading ISO 16934: Glass in buildings – Explosion resistant security
glazing – Test and classification by shock-tube loading
EN 356: Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and
classification of resistance against manual attack ISO 16935: Glass in building – Bullet-resistant security glazing –
Test and classification
EN 1063: Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and
classification of resistance against bullet attack ISO 16936-1: Glass in building – Forced entr y security glazing
– Part 1: Test and classification by repetitive ball drop
EN 1522: Windows, doors, shutters and blinds – Bullet
resistance – Requirements and classification ISO 16936-2: Glass in building – Forced entr y security glazing
– Part 2: Test and classification by repetitive impact of a hammer
EN 1523: Windows, doors, shutters and blinds – Bullet and axe at room temperature
resistance – Test method
ISO 16936-3: Glass in building – Forced entr y security glazing
EN 1627: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills – Part 3: Test and classification by manual attack
and shutters – Burglar resistance – Requirements and
classification ISO 16936-4: Glass in building – Forced entr y security glazing
– Part 4: Test and classification by pendulum impact under
EN 1628: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills thermally and fire stressed conditions
and shutters – Burglar resistance – Test method for the
determination of resistance under static loading 3.2 Reference documents
EN 1629: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills LPS 1175: Loss Prevention Standard – Requirements and
and shutters – Burglar resistance – Test method for the testing procedures for the LPCB approval and listing of intruder
determination of resistance under dynamic loading resistant building components, strongpoints, security enclosures
and free-standing barriers
EN 1630: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills
and shutters – Burglar resistance – Test method for the LPS 1270: Loss Prevention Standard - Requirements and testing
determination of resistance to manual burglar y attempts procedures for the LPCB approval and listing of intruder resistant
security glazing
Security Glazing – Part 1: Definitions and descriptions

GSA: US General Ser vice Administration - Standard Test Method NOTE 1:These are sometimes referred to as laminated glasses, or laminated
for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast Loadings glass composites.
NOTE 2:The security performance is enhanced by the plastics glazing sheet
Paper ID 12892: International Standards for Blast Resistant materials.
Glazing – Nicholas F Johnson – Symposium on Building Security NOTE 3: Some of the glass components are there to supply abrasion and/or
in an Age of Terrorism weathering resistance.

GGF Data Sheet 4.11: Laminated glass and laminated 4.4 Adhesive backed polymeric filmed glass
safety glass A glass that has had an adhesive backed polymeric film applied to
increase the performance. (see prEN 15755-1)
4 SECURITY GLAZING PRODUCTS
The following products can be classified as security NOTE 1:The application of an appropriate adhesive backed polymeric film
glazing products can turn a non-classifiable glass substrate into one that can be classified, or
increase the level and/or type of classified performance with regards to the
security performance.
4.1 Laminated security glass
NOTE 2:The act of applying (laminating) an adhesive backed polymeric film
A laminated glass or laminated safety glass product (for to a glass substrate does not mean that this product can comply with
definition see clauses 4.1.1 and clause 4.1.2) that when tested EN ISO 12543.
can meet the requirements of one and/or more of the
security glazing test standards, see 4.1.3 to 4.1.5.
5 COMPLIANCE with the CONSTRUCTION
4.1.1 Laminated glass PRODUCTS DIRECTIVE (CPD)
A laminated glass is one that conforms to the definition given Any glazing product which is covered by an official mandate
in EN ISO 12543-3 and meets the appropriate durability tests under the CPD, when placed on the European market, should
as given in EN ISO 12543-4. comply with the applicable harmonized European standard (hEN).
Conformity relates not only to the performance of the product,
4.1.2 Laminated safety glass i.e. Initial Type Testing, but also the Factory Production Control
A laminated safety glass is one that conforms to the definition including on-going inspection and surveillance, i.e. the System of
given in EN ISO 12543-2 and meets the appropriate Attestation of Conformity.
durability tests as given in EN ISO 12543-4. It will require a
pendulum impact performance classification in accordance Details of the applicable hENs together with information on the
with EN 12600. system of attestation of conformity are given in Data Sheets
8.1.2 to 8.1.4.
NOTE 1: Not all laminated glass/laminated safety glass can be classified as a
laminated security glass
NOTE 2: Laminated glass and laminated safety glass when CE marked
comply with EN 14449
NOTE 3: Information on laminated glass and laminated safety glass is given in
GGF Data Sheet 4.11

4.1.3 Manual attack resistant laminated glass

The performance requirements are as specified in EN 356

4.1.4 Bullet-resistant laminated glass

The performance requirements are as specified in EN 1063

4.1.5 Blast-resistant laminated glass

The performance requirements are as specified in EN 13541

4.2 Plastics glazing sheet materials (pgsm)

Monolithic or multi-wall sheet manufactured from specific
polymeric materials, e.g. polycarbonate, modified [Link]
performance under the security glazing test standards will be
influenced by polymer type, thickness, size and framing system.

NOTE 1: Plastics glazing sheet material is not covered by the EN testing

standards.
NOTE 2:Testing and classification, of plastics glazing sheet materials, with
respect to bullet resistance and manual attack resistance will have to be in
accordance with the requirements of BS 5051 and BS 5544 respectively.
NOTE 3: Explosion resistance can be determined by testing plastics glazing
sheet materials in a frame (see EN 13124-2)

4.3 Glass/plastic composites

These are composite products manufactured from glass and
plastics glazing sheet materials. Security performance can be
determined in accordance with the EN standards.
 Security
SECTION 8
Security Glazing – Part 2:
8.1.2 February 2011
Manual attack resistant glazing

Contents NOTE: It is not intended that the test methods be associated with the
terms "anti-bandit" or "anti- vandal", particularly since these terms can be
Foreword only loosely defined and there is considerable overlap in their definition.

Introduction 1. SCOPE
This Data Sheet, 8.1.2 details test and classification methods for
1. Scope security glazing that can be described as manual attack
resistant glazing.
2. Definitions and descriptions
2. DEFINITIONS and DESCRIPTIONS
3. Standards and reference documents The definitions and descriptions contained within Data Sheet 8.1.1
[Link] following are specific to this Data Sheet 8.1.2.
4. Principles of testing manual attack resistant glazing
2.1 Definitions
5. Test methods
2.1.1 security glazing
6. General performance of products glazing, framing and fixing system designed to withstand a specified
type and level of attack.
7. Compliance with the construction products directive
2.1.2 security glazing product
Annex A. Manual attack resistance testing using tools glazing product that provides a specific resistance to the actions
of force
Bibliography
2.1.3 actions of force
specific actions either deliberate or accidental that may result in
injury to persons and/or damage to property
Foreword
Data Sheet 8.1 covers the use of security glazing in 2.2 Descriptions
buildings. It comprises the following parts:
2.2.1 Actions
Part 1: Definitions and description
[Link] manual attack
Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing
a deliberate action on the part of a person made with the intention
Part 3: Bullet resistant glazing of creating an opening in the security glazing product by the use of
manually held implements or by the use of thrown objects
Part 4: Explosion resistant glazing
Part 5: Framing and installation 2.2.2 Security glazing products
security glazing designed to resist attack and to delay access to a
protected space for a short period of time (BS 5544, EN 356)
INTRODUCTION
NOTE 1: Manually held implements such as axe, crowbar,
This Data Sheet 8.1.2 assesses security glazing products that are pickaxe, etc.
more familiarly known as "anti- bandit" and "anti-vandal" glazing
products. NOTE 2:Thrown objects such as bricks, street furniture, etc.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Security Glazing – Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing

3. STANDARDS and REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 4.3 Framing/Installation

For a manual attack resistant glazing to perform up to
3.1 Standards expectations it must be installed into an appropriately designed
BS 5544: Specification for anti-bandit glazing (glazing resistant to and fixed framing/glazing system. (See Data Sheet 8.1.5)
manual attack) (only applicable for plastics glazing sheet materials)
BS 6262-3: Glazing for buildings – Code of practice for fire, security 5 TEST METHODS
and wind loading 5.1 BS 5544
5.1.1 General
EN 356: Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and
classification of resistance against manual attack This test method, now only applicable to plastics glazing sheet
EN 14449: Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated materials, uses the ability of the product to resist penetration by
safety glass – Evaluation of conformity/Product standard the steel ball.
prEN 15755-1: Glass in building – Adhesive backed polymeric
filmed glass – Part 1: Definition and description 5.1.2 Details of test
This test is 5 impacts from 3m and 1 impact from 9m.
EN ISO 12543-2: Glass in building - Laminated glass and The impactor is a hardened steel ball with a mass of 2,260 + 20g
laminated safety glass - Part 2: Laminated safety glass and a diameter of approximately [Link] impacts of the ball
EN ISO 12543-3: Glass in building - Laminated glass and drops shall be within a 125mm diameter circle in the
laminated safety glass – Part 3: Laminated glass approximate centre of the test [Link] specimen size is
600mmx600mm.
ISO 16936-1: Glass in building – Forced entry security glazing –
Part 1: Test and classification by repetitive ball drop NOTE 1:This British Standard has been withdrawn in respect to the
ISO 16936-2: Glass in building – Forced entry security glazing – testing of glass products and replaced by EN 356.
Part 2: Test and classification by repetitive impact of a hammer and NOTE 2:This British Standard is obsolete. However, it is still the method
axe at room temperature for testing and classifying plastics glazing sheet materials.

3.2 Reference documents 5.2 EN 356

LPS 1270: Loss Prevention Standard - Requirements and testing 5.2.1 General
procedures for the LPCB approval and listing of intruder resistant
security glazing The European test method (EN 356) consists of the following:
• Ball drop tests with a range of drop heights, and
4. PRINCIPLES of TESTING MANUAL ATTACK number of impacts;
RESISTANT GLAZING
• Hammer/Axe tests with a range of strike number
4.1 General
The ball drop tests have been used for the protection of both
Historically anti-bandit glazing was used in shop windows, e.g. persons and [Link] hammer/axe test is fundamentally for
jewellers, to save merchandise from the traditional ‘smash and the protection of property.
grab’ thief. Its use was then extended to screens, e.g. post office,
building societies, etc., to protect staff from thrown objects, NOTE 1:The hammer/axe test has been designed for the classification of
including acid, ammonia etc., and manually wielded weapons. security glazing that will withstand attack by weapons such as ice-axes.

NOTE 2:There are International standards, i.e.

Therefore the products were tested and classified by means of ISO 16936-1 and ISO 16936-2, that are generally equivalent to EN 356
simple pass/fail testing using a drop ball test (see BS 5544).This
method did not allow for the differentiation, and hence 5.2.2 Detail of test
classification, of varying thicknesses/make-up of security glazing.
The test specimen size is (1100±5)mm x (900±5)mm.
Clients were requiring a more clearly defined level of protection,
i.e. specific penetration resistance, as over the years the criminal a) ball drop test
fraternity has used more and more sophisticated attack methods, Impactor is a 4.11Kg steel sphere of diameter 100mm.
e.g. angle grinders, circular saws, thermic lances, etc.
The applicable drop height for the various classifications is given
in table 1.
It is worth noting that the test methods referred to in this Data
Sheet do not reproduce the conditions of real human attack, but
Table 1 Test Drop Heights for P1A to P5A
are intended to give a classification of comparative resistance.

Present day thinking is that there is no single test that will cover Category of resistance Drop Height mm
the wide range of resistances to attack [Link] European
standard (EN 356) uses two separate test methods to give a P1A 1500± 50
progressive range of categories of resistance. P2A 3000± 50

4.2 Manual attack using tools P3A 6000± 50

The use of ‘human intervention’ testing, i.e. a man with a specific P4A 9000± 50
set of tools, is not generally considered as a reproducible test P5A 9000± 50
methodology. Not withstanding this there are a number of
standards that use this methodology (see Annex A)
Security Glazing – Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing

For categories P1A, P2A, P3A and P4A, the impactor shall be Table 3 Typical products for EN 356 performance
dropped on to each test piece three times from the same height,
in such a way that the impact positions form the pattern of an
equilateral triangle with a side length of (130 ± 20) mm around Category of resistance Thickness mm
the geometric centre of the test piece, with one side of the
P1A 6.8
triangle parallel to a short side of the [Link] impact
position opposite to this side of the triangle shall be hit first. P2A 8.8
For category P5A, the above procedure shall be repeated a total
P3A 9.1
of three times on each test piece, giving nine impacts, three on
each point of the triangle. P4A 9.5
P5A 10.3
b) hammer/axe
P6B 15.3
This test aims to produce a 400mmx400mm opening in the
P7B 22.3
security glazing. Initially the glazing is impacted with the hammer
to break up the glass and then with the axe to cut out the P8B 26.7
opening.

Table 2 gives the number of strikes, total of hammer blows and

axe strokes, to allow for a particular category of resistance. The use of other components, such as EVA or resin interlayers,
may have an effect on the overall product thickness.
Table 2 Number of strikes for P6B to P8B Glass/polycarbonate composites could reduce the overall
thickness from those in table 3.

Category of resistance Total number of strikes The application of an appropriate adhesive backed polymeric
P6B 30 to 50
security film could either make annealed glass capable of being
classified or increase the classification obtained for a particular
P7B 51 to 70 thickness of laminated glass.
P8B over 70
NOTE1: Information on adhesive backed polymeric filmed glass can be
found in GGF Data Sheet 5.18.3

NOTE 2:The manufacturer of the adhesive backed polymeric security film

should be contacted for details on performance and application.
5.2.3 Applicability of test method for plastics glazing
sheet material 7. COMPLIANCE with the CONSTRUCTION
EN 356 is only applicable to glass and/or glass/plastic composites. PRODUCTS DIRECTIVE

However, the test method may be applied to plastics glazing sheet The two product types that could be regarded as manual attack
[Link] ball drop test method can be used as [Link] resistant glazing are plastics glazing sheet material and laminated
hammer/axe test has to be modified as the hammer strokes will glass/laminated safety glass.
have no effect on the classification and should be ignored.
NOTE: Plastics glazing sheet material does not have a harmonized
5.3 ISO 16936 - Part 1 and Part 2 European Standard and therefore can not be deemed to meet the
Construction Products Directive.
These International Standards are generally equivalent to EN 356.
ISO 16936-1 deals with ball drop testing and ISO 16936-2 with For laminated glass/laminated safety glass to be placed on the
the hammer/axe test. market with a claimed performance to the Essential Characteristic
--“Safety in use – Burglar resistance: Shatter properties and
ISO 16936-1 contains an informative annex referring to testing, resistance to attack” the product is under a System of Attestation
for exterior use, at extreme temperatures, i.e. -20 oC or +40 oC. – Level [Link] means the following:

6. GENERAL PERFORMANCE of PRODUCTS • Manufacturer implements factory production control

Manual attack resistant glazing can be an important deterrent to (FPC) as per standard;
ensure the security of property and occupants in a [Link] • Manufacturer selects test specimens;
level of risk and regulatory requirements determine the necessary Initial type testing to show conformity with product
level of protection, and thus the type of manual attack resistant standard, i.e. EN ISO 12543, by a Notified Testing Body;
glazing. Different levels of resistance can be obtained by varying • Initial type testing to EN 356 undertaken by a Notified
the number and/or thickness of each of the components. Testing Body;
Typical glass/pvb product thicknesses to meet the desired level of • Manufacturer responsible for on-going product
resistance are shown in the table 3 below. However, the actual conformity.
thickness for a specific classification will be dependent upon the
laminated glass supplier.
Security Glazing – Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing

Annex A Manual attack resistance testing using tools

(Informative)

A.1 General
There are a number of standards that detail such testing
[Link] reproducibility is unproven and they are not
supported by the glass industry.

A.2 Standards
The following standards use this methodology:

• ISO 16936-3
• SO 16936-4
• LPS 1270

BIBLIOGRAPHY
ISO 16936-3: Glass in building – Forced entry security glazing –
Part 3: Test and classification by manual attack

ISO 16936-4: Glass in building – Forced entry security glazing –

Part 4: Test and classification by pendulum impact under thermally
and fire stressed conditions

LPS 1270: Loss Prevention Standard – Requirements and testing

procedures for the LPCB approval and listing of intruder resistant
security glazing

GGF Data Sheet 5.18.3: GGF Recommendations for Adhesive

Backed Polymeric Films Applied to Glass: Definitions, Descriptions
and Components
 Security
SECTION 8
Security Glazing – Part 3:
8.1.3 February 2011
Bullet-resistant glazing

Contents INTRODUCTION

Foreword This Data Sheet 8.1.3 assesses security glazing products that are
more familiarly known as "bullet resistant" glazing products.
Introduction
NOTE 1:These products are frequently and incorrectly referred to as
‘bullet proof ’ glazing. No glazing product can be referred to as
1. Scope ‘bullet proof ’ only ‘bullet resistant’.
NOTE 2: Glazing products can only be called ‘bullet resistant’ as they
2. Definitions and descriptions are designed to resist a specific weapon/ammunition.
NOTE 3:The determination of performance of a ‘bullet resistant’ glazing
3. Standards and reference documents product is undertaken using defined weapons/ammunition and strike
patterns/number.
4. Principles of testing bullet-resistant glazing
NOTE 4:The performance of a ‘bullet resistant’ glazing product under
real attack may differ from that determined during testing and classification.
5. Test methods

6. General performance of products 1. SCOPE

This Data Sheet, 8.1.3 details test and classification methods for
7. Compliance with the Construction Products Directive security glazing that can be described as bullet-resistant glazing.

2. DEFINITIONS and DESCRIPTIONS

ANNEX A Bullet-resistance testing using other The definitions and descriptions contained within Data Sheet 8.1.1
weapons/ammunition/strike patterns and/or [Link] following are specific to this Data Sheet 8.1.3
test temperatures
2.1 Definitions
Bibliography
2.1.1 security glazing
glazing, framing and fixing system designed to withstand a
Foreword specified type and level of attack.
Data Sheet 8.1 covers the use of security glazing in
2.1.2 security glazing product
buildings. It comprises the following parts:
glazing product that provides a specific resistance to the actions
Part 1: Definitions and description of force

2.1.3 actions of force

Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing
specific actions either deliberate or accidental that may result in
Part 3: Bullet resistant glazing injury to persons and/or damage to property

2.2 Description
Part 4: Principles of testing bullet resistant glazing
2.2.1 Actions
Part 5: Framing and installation
[Link] ballistic attack
a deliberate action on the part of a person made with the
intention of threatening or causing personal injury by the use
of firearms

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Security Glazing – Part 3: Bullet-resistant glazing

2.2.2 Security glazing products:- the attack face being towards the weapon.

[Link] bullet-resistant glazing 4.2 Framing/Installation

security glazing product that affords a defined resistance For a bullet-resistant glazing to perform up to expectations it
against the firing of specified weapons and ammunition must be installed into an appropriately designed and fixed
(BS 5051, EN 1063) framing/glazing system. (See Data Sheet 8.1.5)
3. STANDARDS and REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
[Link] METHODS
3.1 Standards
5.1 BS 5051
BS 5051: Bullet - resistant glazing – Specification for glazing for
5.1.1 General
interior use (only applicable for plastics glazing sheet materials)
This test method, now only applicable to plastics glazing sheet
BS 6262-3: Glazing for buildings – Code of practice for fire, security
materials, uses the ability of the product to resist penetration by
and wind loading
the bullet.
EN 1063: Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and
This test method consists of six specified levels of ballistic attack
classification of resistance against bullet attack
with the following weapons:
EN 1522: Windows, doors, shutters and blinds – Bullet resistance –
Requirements and classification Three with hand guns
EN 1523: Windows, doors, shutters and blinds – Bullet resistance – Two with rifles
Test method One with shotgun
EN 14449: Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated NOTE: For details of weapons/number of strikes/test range see Table 1.
safety glass – Evaluation of conformity/Product standard
prEN 15755-1: Glass in building – Adhesive backed polymeric 5.1.2 Details of test
filmed glass – Part 1: Definition and description The test specimen size is (420±5)mm x (420±5)mm.
EN ISO 12543-2: Glass in building - Laminated glass and Details of performance classes, weapon types and calibres, test
laminated safety glass - Part 2: Laminated safety glass range and number of strikes are given in Tables 1.
EN ISO 12543-3: Glass in building - Laminated glass and Table 1: Bullet-resistant glazing -Specification for
laminated safety glass – Part 3: Laminated glass glazing for interior use
ISO 16935: Glass in building – Bullet-resistant security glazing –
Test and classification
CLASS WEAPON CALIBRE Range Strikes
4. PRINCIPLES of TESTING BULLET-RESISTANT
GLAZING
G0 Handgun 9mm Parabellum 3m 3
4.1 General
G1 Handgun 0.357 Magnum 3m 3
The objective of bullet-resistant testing is to classify, under given G2 Handgun 0.44 Magnum 3m 3
conditions, the performance of security [Link] testing
is undertaken on specified test specimen sizes using weapon and R1 Rifle 5.56 10m 3
ammunition, i.e. bullet, mass, velocity, chosen as representative of R2 Rifle 7.62 10m 3
the threat perceived.
S86 Shotgun 12 bore solid 10m 1
Testing is undertaken at a temperature range that is lead slug
representative of indoor climates, e.g. 18±5oC.
For G0 to G2 the strike pattern is an equilateral triangle
The numbers of shots, the strike pattern and test range have of 100+10/-0mm per side with one shot per vertices.
been selected as a means of obtaining reproducible results that
allow comparison between products. For R1 and R2 the strike pattern is an equilateral triangle
Test specimens can be of either: of 100+20/-0mm per side with one shot per vertices.

• unitary construction, i.e. single pane of glazing that gives For S86 the strike pattern is centre of test piece.
the bullet-resistant performance, or
• duplex construction, i.e. two panes that act together to The tested specimens will pass the test if they comply with
give the bullet-resistant performance. the following:

Duplex constructions generally consist of a pane of bullet- (a) Projectiles shall not pass through the test pieces;
resistant glazing that stops penetration of the bullet but has
spalling/splintering off the protected face and a secondary pane (b) No fragments from projectiles shall perforate the witness cards;
that acts as a spall/splinter shield, i.e. stops the spall/splinters (c) No fragments ejected from the glazing shall perforate the
impacting someone on the protected side. witness cards.
NOTE:The orientation of the bullet-resistant glazing must be known, i.e.
Security Glazing – Part 3: Bullet-resistant glazing

5.2 EN 1063 Table 3; Glass in building - Security glazing testing

and classification of resistance against bullet attack -
5.2.1 General
Shotgun
The European test method (EN 1063) consists of nine specified
levels of ballistic attack with the following weapons:
CLASS WEAPON CALIBRE TYPE Strikes
Three with hand guns
Four with rifles SG1 Shotgun 12/70 SLS 1

Two with shotguns SG2 Shotgun 12/70 SLS 3

SLS – Solid Lead Slug – Brenneke - 31.0±0.1g
NOTE: For details of weapons/ammunitions/strike pattern/number of
strikes see Tables 2 and 3.

The test determines whether: For BR 1 to 7 the strike pattern is an equilateral triangle of
120±10mm per side with one shot per vertices.
a) Perforation of the test specimen by bullet or parts of the
bullet has occurred; For SG1 there is one shot in the centre of the test specimen.

or For SG2 the strike pattern is an equilateral triangle of 125±10mm

per side with one shot per vertices.
b) Perforation of the witness foil by glass splinters from the
protected, non-attack, face has occurred The test distance is 10m with the exception of BR 2 to BR4
where it is 5m.
NOTE: Attack face is the one designed to face the attack.
Full details of the test procedure can be found in EN 1063
5.2.2 Detail of test
5.2.3 Classification
The test specimen size is (500±5)mm x (500±5)mm.
After the test has been undertaken the splinter collection box
Details of performance classes, weapons, calibre and bullets are and witness foil is examined.
given in Tables 2 for handguns and rifles and Table 3 for shotguns.
Table 3 also gives number of strikes. If the test specimens comply as follows:
1. No perforation of the glazing by the bullet or parts of
Table 2: Glass in building - Security glazing testing and the bullet and no perforation of the witness foil by glass
classification of resistance against bullet attack – Rifles splinters from the rear face.
and handguns
This type of bullet-resistant glazing shall be classified in the
appropriate class with the additional mark: “NS” (no splinters).
CLASS WEAPON CALIBRE Bullet 2. No perforation of the glazing by the bullet or parts of
the bullet, but with perforation of the witness foil by
BR1 Rifle 0.22LR L/RN glass splinters from the protected face.

BR2 Handgun 9mm Parabellum FJ1)/RN/SC This type of bullet-resistant glazing shall be classified in the
appropriate class with the additional mark: “S” (“splinters”).
BR3 Handgun 0.357 Magnum FJ2)/CB/SC
BR4 Handgun 0.44 Magnum FJ2)/FN/FC 5.2.4 Applicability of test method for plastics glazing
sheet material
BR5 Rifle 5.56x45* FJ2)/PB/SCP1
EN 1063 is only applicable to glass and/or glass/plastic
BR6 Rifle 7.62x51 FJ1)/PB/SC [Link] test method as described in EN 1063, may be
BR7 Rifle 7.62x51** FJ2)/PB/HC1 applied to plastics glazing sheet materials.

1) Full steel jacket(plated) 2) Full copper alloy jacket However, the behaviour of plastics glazing sheet materials means
any classification will carry the additional mark “NS”.
* Twist length 178mm±10mm ** Twist length 254mm ±10mm
L – Lead; CB – Coned bullet; FJ – Full metal jacket bullet;
FN – Flat nose; HC1 – Steel hard core, mass 3.7±0.1g
5.3 ISO 16935
PB – Pointed bullet; RN – Round nose; SC – Soft core(lead)
SCP1 – Soft core(lead) and steel penetrator 5.3.1 General
The International test method (ISO 16935) consists of eight
specified levels of ballistic attack with the following weapons:

Three with hand guns

Two with rifles
Three with shotguns,
Security Glazing – Part 3: Bullet-resistant glazing

There is also: For HG 1 to 3 the strike pattern is an equilateral triangle of

110±10mm per side with one shot per vertices;
Class O, any weapon but following the test methodology,
e.g. strike range, pattern, etc. For R1, R2 and SG3 the strike pattern is an equilateral triangle of
120±10mm per side with one shot per vertices;
NOTE: For details of weapons/ammunitions/strike pattern/number of
strikes see Tables 4 and 5.
For SG2 the strike pattern is two shots at positions 60±10mm
directly above and directly below the centre of the test specimen;
The test determines whether:
For SG1 the strike is one shot in the centre of the test specimen
a) No Perforation of glazing but with perforation in the
witness foil The test distance is 10m with the exception of HG1 to HG3
where it is 5m.
b) No Perforation of the glazing, with loss of material from
the non-attack surface but no perforations in the Full details of the test procedure can be found in ISO 16935.
witness foil
5.3.3 Classification
c) No Perforation of the glazing, with no loss of material from Classification depends upon the performance of the worst test
the non-attack surface and no perforations in the [Link] means:
witness foil
If any test specimen is penetrated – the product can not be
5.3.2 Detail of test classified;
The test specimen size is (500±5)mm x (500±5)mm. If any test specimen meets 5.3.1 a) – the product is classified
SPALL (S);
Details of performance classes, weapons, calibre and bullets are
given in Tables 4 for handguns and rifles and Table 5 for shotguns. If any test specimen meets 5.3.1 b) – the product is classified
REDUCED SPALL (RS);
Table 4: Glass in building - Security Glazing Testing and If all test specimen meets 5.3.1 c) – the product is classified NO
classification of resistance against bullet attack – Rifles SPALL (NS);
and handguns
6. GENERAL PERFORMANCE of PRODUCTS
CLASS WEAPON CALIBRE Bullet Bullet resistant glazing can be an important deterrent to ensure
the security of property and occupants in a building. An
assessment of the level of risk determines the necessary level of
HG1 Handgun 9mm Luger FJ2)/RN/LC
protection, and thus the type of bullet resistant glazing.
HG2 Handgun 0.357 Magnum JSP Different levels of resistance can be obtained by varying the
HG3 Handgun 0.44 Magnum FJ2)/FN/SC number and/or thickness of each of the components.

R1 Rifle 5.56x45 FJ2)/PB/SCP Typical glass/pvb and glass/polycarbonate product thicknesses to

meet the desired level of resistance are shown in the table 6
R2 Rifle 7.62x51 FSJ/PB/SC below. However, the actual thickness for a specific classification
FSJ – Full steel jacket(plated) FJ2 – Copper alloy jacket LC – Lead Core;
will be dependent upon the laminated glass supplier.
FN – Flat nose; PB – Pointed bullet; RN – Round nose;
SC – Soft Core; JSP – Jacketed Soft Point; Table 6 Typical products for EN 1063 performance
SCP – Soft core lead with steel penetrator

CLASS Thickness Thickness Thickness (mm)

(mm) (mm) glass/polycarb
Glass/pvb Glass/pvb Composite
Table 5; Glass in building - Security Glazing Testing
(S) (NS) (NS)
and classification of resistance against bullet attack -
Shotgun
BR1 14
BR2 22
CLASS WEAPON CALIBRE TYPE Strikes
BR3 24
SG1 Shotgun 12/70 SLS 1 BR4 33 54 21
SG2 Shotgun 12/70 SLS 2 BR5 37 58 32
SG3 Shotgun 12/70 SLS 3 BR6 50 71 38
SLS – Solid Lead Slug – Brenneke - 31.0±0.1g BR7 56 81
SG1 33 54 21
SG2 50 71 38
Security Glazing – Part 3: Bullet-resistant glazing

The use of other components, such as EVA or resin interlayers, Bibliography

may have an effect on the overall product thickness. ISO 16935: Glass in building – Bullet-resistant security glazing –
The application of an appropriate adhesive backed polymeric Test and classification
security film to the rear face of a bullet resistant glazing complying GGF Data Sheet 5.18.3: GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
with EN 1063 could transform a splinters (S) product into a no Backed polymeric Films applied to Glass: Definitions, descriptions
splinters (NS) one. and components
NOTE1: Information on adhesive backed polymeric filmed glass can be
found in GGF Data Sheet 5.18.3
NOTE 2:The manufacturer of the adhesive backed polymeric security film
should be contacted for details on performance and application.

7. COMPLIANCE with the CONSTRUCTION

PRODUCTS DIRECTIVE
The two product types that could be regarded as bullet resistant
glazing are plastics glazing sheet material and laminated
glass/laminated safety glass.
NOTE: Plastics glazing sheet material does not have a harmonized
European Standard and therefore can not be deemed to meet the
Construction Products Directive.

For laminated glass/laminated safety glass to be placed on the

market with a claimed performance to the Essential Characteristic
--“Safety in use – Bullet resistance: Shatter properties and
resistance to attack” the product is under a System of Attestation
– Level [Link] means the following:
• Manufacturer implements factory production control
(FPC) as per standard;
• Notified Certification Body examines FPC manual and
inspects factory;
• Notified Certification Body selects test specimens;
• Initial type testing to show conformity with product
standard, i.e. EN ISO 12543, by a Notified Testing Body;
• Initial type testing to EN 1063 undertaken by a Notified
Testing Body;
• Manufacturer responsible for on-going product conformity;
• Notified Certification Body responsible for regular audits
of FPC system.

ANNEX A Bullet-resistance testing using other

weapons/ammunition, i.e. open classification and/or
test temperatures
(Informative)
A.1 General
There exist standards/regulations that require the testing using
weapons, etc., other than those given in the European Standard,
i.e. EN 1063.
Similarly there may be requirements for bullet-resistant glazing for
applications when the influence of the outside temperature needs
to be considered, i.e. testing under extreme conditions at
temperatures of -20oC or +40oC.
A.2 Standard
The following standard details the methodology.
ISO 16935
 Security
SECTION 8
Security Glazing – Part 4:
8.1.4 February 2011
Explosion-resistant glazing

Contents NOTE 2: Explosion-resistant glazing can also be referred to as security

glazing – resistance against explosion pressure.
Foreword
1. SCOPE
Introduction
This Data Sheet; 8.1.4 details test and classification methods for
security glazing that can be described as explosion-resistant glazing
1. Scope
2. DEFINITIONS and DESCRIPTIONS
2. Definitions and descriptions
The definitions and descriptions contained within Data Sheet 8.1.1
3. Standards and reference documents [Link] following are specific to this Data Sheet 8.1.4
2.1 Definitions
4. Principles of testing explosion-resistant glazing
2.1.1 security glazing
5. Test methods
glazing and framing system designed to withstand a specified level
6. General performance of products of attack
2.1.2 security glazing product
7. Compliance with the Construction Products Directive
glazing product that provides a specific resistance to the actions
ANNEX A Blast wave characteristics of force
2.1.3 actions of force
Bibliography
specific actions either deliberate or accidental that may result in
injury to persons and/or damage to property
Foreword
2.2 Description
Data Sheet 8.1 covers the use of security glazing in
buildings. It comprises the following parts: 2.2.1 Actions

Part 1: Definitions and description [Link] explosion pressure

an action, either deliberate or accidental, that may cause personal
Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing
injury, material damage to buildings, property, etc. as the result of an
Part 3: Bullet resistant glazing explosive blast
Part 4: Explosion resistant glazing 2.2.2 Security glazing products
Part 5: Framing and installation [Link] blast-resistant glazing
security glazing designed to reduce the injurious effects or
damage to property of accidental or intentional blast forces
INTRODUCTION (EN 13541, ISO 16933, ISO 16934)
This Data Sheet 8.1.4 assesses security glazing products that are
more familiarly known as "blast-resistant" glazing products. 3. STANDARDS and REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.1 Standards
NOTE 1:These products are frequently and incorrectly referred to as
‘blast/bomb proof’’ glazing. No glazing product can be referred to as BS 6262-3: Glazing for buildings – Code of practice for fire, security
‘blast/bomb proof’’ only ‘blast-resistant’. and wind loading

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Security Glazing – Part 4: Explosion-resistant glazing

EN 13541: Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and 4.2 Framing/Installation

classification of resistance against explosion pressure For an explosion-resistant glazing to perform up to expectations
EN 14449: Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated safety it must be installed into an appropriately designed and fixed
glass – Evaluation of conformity/Product standard framing/glazing system. (See Data Sheet 8.1.5)
prEN 15755-1: Glass in building – Adhesive backed polymeric
5. TEST METHODS
filmed glass – Part 1: Definition and description
ISO 16933: Glass in buildings – Explosion resistant security glazing – 5.1 EN 13541
Test and classification for arena air-blast loading 5.1.1 General
ISO 16934: Glass in buildings – Explosion resistant security glazing – This is a shock tube test method.
Test and classification by shock-tube loading
The classification of explosion pressure resistance is based on the
3.2 Reference documents
maximum positive pressure of the reflected shock wave and the
GSA: US General Service Administration - Standard Test Method duration of the positive pressure phase.
for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast Loadings
5.1.2 Details of test
Paper ID 12892: International Standards for Blast Resistant Glazing The test specimen size is (1100±5)mm x (900±5)mm.
– Nicholas F Johnson – Symposium on Building Security in an Age
of Terrorism Details of Classification Code, positive overpressure of the
reflected blast wave (Pr) and duration of the positive pressure
4. PRINCIPLES of TESTING EXPLOSION- phase (t+) are given in Table 1.
RESISTANT GLAZING
4.1 General Table 1: Classification Code, (Pr) and (t+)
The objective of explosion-resistant testing is to classify, under given
conditions, the performance of security glazing. CODE Characteristics of plane shock wave
There are two methods of producing a ‘blast wave’ that is
Positive Duration of positive
equivalent to a given [Link] are: Overpressure (Pr) pressure phase (t+)
Shock tube (kPa) (ms)
Open arena – air blast
ER1 50 < Pr < 100 > 20
NOTE 1:The European standard, EN 13541, is a ‘shock tube’ test method.
ER2 100 < Pr < 150 > 20
NOTE 2:There is currently no European standard for ‘open arena’ testing
of glass products; ER3 150 < Pr < 200 > 20
NOTE 3:There are European standards for windows, doors and shutters; ER4 200 < Pr < 250 > 20
EN 13123 for the requirements and classification; and EN 13124 for the
test method. These standards use both ‘shock tube’ and ‘open arena’
test methods;
5.1.3 Classification
NOTE 4:The International standards, ISO 16933 and ISO 16934, cover
‘open arena’ and ‘shock tube’ test methods respectively. Each of the 3 test pieces shall comply with the following:
4.1.1 Shock tube
- the test pieces shall not have any “through” holes,
This is a facility which simulates explosive blast waves to load test from the front to the back;
specimens with consistency, control and repeatability. Shock tube - there shall not be any opening between the clamping
tests provide an economic means to simulate relatively long- frame and the edges of the test piece
duration blast shock waves representing the effects of large
explosive devices at some distance. The security glazing will be classified as per the code in Table 1.
It can have the following addition information:
NOTE: The results can be assessed against broadly comparable arena tests.

4.1.2 Open arena – air blast - (S) Splinters ejected from the rear (protected side) of
the glass;
This is a test method whereby test specimens are subjected to real - (NS) No splinters ejected from the rear (protected
explosive blast in an open air [Link] test specimens experience side) of the glass.
the following:
5.2 ISO 16934
- positive phase, which is characterised by a nearly
instantaneous rise to a maximum pressure followed by an 5.2.1 General
exponential decay to ambient pressure; This is a shock tube test method.
- negative phase, immediately following the positive phase,
during which the pressure decreases below ambient for a The standard provides criteria for rating the level of damage to
period of time before returning to ambient glazing from which can be assessed the hazard consequences to
Information on blast wave characteristics is given in Annex A. the area located behind the glazing.
Security Glazing – Part 4: Explosion-resistant glazing

There are six levels of hazard defined in the standard; i.e. This standard test for two different threat scenarios:
A (no break) - Vehicle bomb
B (no hazard) - Hand-carried satchel bomb
C (minimal hazard) Tables 3 and 4 give the classification codes and criteria to define
D (very low hazard) the explosion pressure.
E (low hazard)
Table 3: Classification criteria – Vehicle bombs
F (high hazard)

5.2.2 Details of test CODE Mean Peak Air Mean positive pressure
pressure phase impulse
The test specimen size is (1100±5)mm x (900±5)mm.
(kPa) (kPa-ms)
Details of Classification Code, peak pressure and duration of EXV45(X) 30 180
positive phase are given in Table2.
EXV33(X) 50 250
Table 2 : Classification Code, (Pc) and (t+) EXV25(X) 80 380
EXV19(X) 140 600
CODE Characteristics of plane shock wave EXV15(X) 250 850
Positive pressure Duration of positive EXV12(X) 450 1200
(Pc) pressure phase (t+)
(kPa) (ms) EXV10(X) 800 1600
(X) = Hazard rating
ER30(X) 30 ≥15
ER50(X) 50 ≥20
ER70(X) 70 ≥20 Table 4: Classification criteria – Hand-carried
ER100(X) 100 ≥20
satchel bombs

ER150(X) 150 ≥20

CODE Mean Peak Air Mean positive pressure
ER200(X) 200 ≥20
pressure phase impulse
(X) = Hazard rating (kPa) (kPa-ms)

SB1 (X) 70 150

SB2 (X) 110 200
Full details of the test procedure, including determination of
SB3 (X) 250 300
hazard rating, can be found in ISO 16934.
SB4 (X) 800 500
5.2.2 Classification SB5 (X) 700 700
Glazing shall be classed as “blast-resistant” to a given classification
SB6 (X) 1600 1000
code, see Table 2, if it receives a hazard rating (X) of C; ‘minimal
hazard’ or safer. SB7 (X) 2800 1500
(X) = Hazard rating
Glazing may be classed as offering “hazard reduction” to a given
classification code, see Table 2, if it receives a hazard rating (X) of
between D, ‘very low hazard’ and E, ‘low hazard’.
As with ISO 16934 this standard also examines the hazard that
5.3 ISO 16933 results from the explosion blast.

5.3.1 General Full details of the test procedure, including:

This is an open arena – air blast loading test
- determination of hazard rating;
This standard provides a method of determining damage and - charge weight and standoff distance;
hazard, as per ISO 16934, using real explosives.
can be found in ISO 16933.
5.3.2 Details of test
5.3.3 Classification
The test specimens’ vision size is 1000mm x 800mm.
There is no classification as [Link] standard only requires the
NOTE:Vision size normally referred to as ‘sight size’. stating of the Classification Code and the associated Hazard Rating.
Security Glazing – Part 4: Explosion-resistant glazing

6. GENERAL PERFORMANCE of PRODUCTS NOTE 3:The manufacturer of the adhesive backed polymeric security film
should be contacted for details on performance and application.
Explosion resistant glazing can be an important feature to
minimise the consequences of an accidental or criminal explosion
to property and the occupants of a building. An assessment of 7. COMPLIANCE with the CONSTRUCTION
the level of risk must be carried out to determine the necessary PRODUCTS DIRECTIVE
level of protection, and thus the type of explosion resistant The product type that could be regarded as explosion resistant
glazing required. glazing is laminated glass/laminated safety glass.
The success of an explosion resistant product should be
considered as its ability to absorb the energy without allowing For laminated glass/laminated safety glass to be placed on the
threatening particles to enter the protected zone or transferring market with a claimed performance to the Essential Characteristic
damaging loads to the building structure. Thinner flexible – “Safety in use – Explosion resistance: Impact behaviour and
constructions may perform better than thick rigid ones in this resistance to attack” the product is under a System of Attestation
respect. Due to the expectation that the glass may break and – Level 1. This means the following:
deform to a high degree, the ability of the frame and glazing
system to retain the loaded glass is critical to the function of • Manufacturer implements factory production control
explosion resistance. See Data Sheet 8.1.5. (FPC) as per standard;
• Notified Certification Body examines FPC manual and
Different levels of resistance can be obtained by varying the
inspects factory;
number and/or thickness of each of the components.
• Notified Certification Body selects test specimens;
Typical glass/pvb product thicknesses to meet the desired level of
• Initial type testing to show conformity with product
resistance are shown in the table 5 below. However, the actual
standard, i.e. EN ISO 12543, by a Notified Testing Body;
thickness for a specific classification will be dependent upon the
laminated glass supplier. • Initial type testing to EN 13541 undertaken by a
Notified Testing Body;
Table 5 Typical products for EN 13541 performance • Manufacturer responsible for on-going product
conformity;
CLASS Thickness (mm) Thickness (mm) • Notified Certification Body responsible for regular
Glass/pvb (S) Glass/pvb (NS) audits of FPC system.

ER1 10 18
ER2 18 26
ER3 31 39
ER4 27 33

The use of other components, such as EVA or resin interlayers,

may have an effect on the overall product thickness.
Glass/polycarbonate composites could reduce the overall
thickness from those in table 5.

The application of an appropriate adhesive backed polymeric

security film could either make annealed glass capable of being
classified or increase the classification obtained for a particular
thickness of laminated glass.

The application of an approved edge retention system may be

used to mechanically affix such adhesive backed polymeric
security films to the frame/[Link] will enhance the level of
protection and minimise the hazard [Link] is especially true
where broken glass may otherwise be propelled out of the
framing [Link] combination of the film and edge retention
system should meet the relevant levels of performance and
classification for use in blast protection.

NOTE1: Information on adhesive backed polymeric filmed glass can be

found in GGF Data Sheet 5.18.3
NOTE 2: Specific information on blast mitigation using adhesive backed
polymeric filmed glass can be found in GGF Data Sheet 5.18.6
Security Glazing – Part 4: Explosion-resistant glazing

Annex A Blast wave characteristics Bibliography

This informative annex on blast wave characteristics has been EN 13123-1: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
reproduced from ISO 16933 Annex B Requirements and classification – Part 1: Shock tube
EN 13123-2: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
B.1 Blast shock-wave characteristics Requirements and classification – Part 2: Range test
EN 13124-1: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
A blast wave can be generated by detonation of a high Test method – Part 1: Shock tube
[Link] results in a sudden release of energy that
causes the air to be highly compressed and driven at EN 13124-2: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
supersonic speeds, during which air molecules cannot Requirements and classification – Part 2: Range test
respond as they would to a normal input of energy. GGF Data Sheet 5.18.3: GGF Recommendations for Adhesive
As a result the air “shocks up” to form a blast wave.
Backed Polymeric Films Applied to Glass: Definitions,
The blast wave is characterized at any given point by an
Descriptions and Components
instantaneous rise in pressure followed by a decay over
a time period called the positive phase duration. GGF Data Sheet 5.18.6: GGF Recommendations for Blast
See Figure B.1. Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Films Applied to Glass
 Security
SECTION 8
Security Glazing – Part 5:
8.1.5 February 2011
Framing and installation

Contents 1. SCOPE
This Data Sheet, 8.1.5 details test and classification methods for
Foreword
security framing together with advice on the installation of security
Introduction glazing products

2. DEFINITIONS and DESCRIPTIONS

1. Scope
2.1 Definitions
2. Definitions and descriptions
2.1.1 security glazing
3. Standards and reference documents glazing, framing and fixing system designed to withstand a specified
type and level of attack.
4. Principles - Glazing, framing and support
NOTE: In BS 5357 this is referred to as ‘complete installation’.
5. Security framing
2.1.2 security glazing product
6. Specification glazing product that provides a specific resistance to the actions
of force
7. Installation of security glazing
2.1.3 actions of force:
8. Compliance with the Construction Products Directive specific actions either deliberate or accidental that may result in
injury to persons and/or damage to property
Bibliography
2.1.4 security framing
framing system, window, door, etc. designed to resist a specified
Foreword
type and level of attack
Data Sheet 8.1 covers the use of security glazing in
buildings. It comprises the following parts: 2.2 Description
Part 1: Definitions and description 2.2.1 Actions
Part 2: Manual attack resistant glazing [Link] manual attack
Part 3: Bullet resistant glazing a deliberate action on the part of a person made with the
intention of creating an opening in the security glazing product by
Part 4: Explosion resistant glazing the use of manually held implements or by the use of
thrown objects
Part 5: Framing and installation
[Link] ballistic attack
a deliberate action on the part of a person made with the
INTRODUCTION
intention of threatening or causing personal injury by the use
This Data Sheet 8.1.5 assesses security framing/glazing systems and of firearms
the installation of security glazing products.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Security Glazing – Part 5: Framing and installation

[Link] explosion pressure EN 13123-1: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
an action, either deliberate or accidental, that may cause personal Requirements and classification – Part 1: Shock tube
injury, material damage to buildings, property, etc. as the result of an
EN 13123-2: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
explosive blast
Requirements and classification – Part 2: Range test
2.2.2 Security glazing products EN 13124-1: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
Test method – Part 1: Shock tube
[Link] manual attack resistant glazing
EN 13124-2: Windows, doors and shutters – Explosion resistance –
security glazing designed to resist attack and to delay access to a Requirements and classification – Part 2: Range test
protected space for a short period of time (BS 5544, EN 356)
EN 14351-1: Windows and doors – Product standard, performance
NOTE 1: Manually held implements such as axe, crowbar, pickaxe, etc. characteristics – Part 1: Windows and external pedestrian doorsets
without resistance to fire and/or smoke leakage characteristics
NOTE 2:Thrown objects such as bricks, street furniture, etc.
EN 14351-2: Windows and doors – Product standard, performance
[Link] bullet-resistant glazing characteristics – Part 2: Internal pedestrian doorsets without resistance
security glazing product that affords a defined resistance against the to fire and/or smoke leakage characteristics
firing of specified weapons and ammunition (BS 5051, EN 1063)
3.2 Reference documents
[Link] blast-resistant glazing LPS 1175: Loss Prevention Standard – Requirements and testing
procedures for the LPCB approval and listing of intruder resistant
security glazing designed to reduce the injurious effects or
building components, strongpoints, security enclosures and free-
damage to property of accidental or intentional blast forces
standing barriers
(EN 13541, ISO 16933, ISO 16934)
GSA: US General Service Administration - Standard Test Method
2.2.3 Security framing for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast Loadings
Paper ID 12892: International Standards for Blast Resistant Glazing
[Link] manual attack resistant
– Nicholas F Johnson – Symposium on Building Security in an Age
framing that is tested and classified to withstand manual attack of Terrorism
(EN 1627 to EN 1630)
4. PRINCIPLES - GLAZING, FRAMING and SUPPORT
[Link] bullet resistant
The following has been reproduced verbatim from BS 5357: 2007
framing that is tested and classified to withstand ballistic attack with the express permission of BSI.
(EN 1522 and EN 1523)
4.1 General
[Link] explosion resistant The complete installation for the security glazing, including the
framing that is tested and classified to withstand explosive pressure framing and support, should provide at least the equivalent
(EN 13123 – 1 & 2 and EN 13124 – 1 & 2) resistance to attack as the security glazing it is designed to hold
in place.
3. STANDARDS and REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Any method used to hold framed or unframed security glazing in
3.1 Standards place should be of sufficient strength to resist dislodgement by any
anticipated means of manual attack.
BS 5357: Code of practice for installation and application of
security glazing NOTE Glazing resistant to attack by firearms might not necessarily be
resistant to manual attack.
BS 6262-3: Glazing for buildings – Code of practice for fire, security
and wind loading Where security glazing is installed within 1 m of a personnel
workstation, the danger of spalling from the glazing material should
EN 1522: Windows, doors, shutters and blinds – Bullet resistance – be considered.
Requirements and classification
4.2 Framed security glazing
EN 1523: Windows, doors, shutters and blinds – Bullet resistance –
Test method The frame should be of sufficient strength and stiffness to hold the
glazing securely in place when either the frame or the glazing is
EN 1627: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills and subjected to the specified level of attack.
shutters – Burglar resistance – Requirements and classification
The depth of the rebate should be sufficient that, after allowance
EN 1628: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills and for edge clearance around the glazing, there is adequate edge cover
shutters – Burglar resistance – Test method for the determination of to prevent the glazing being levered out of the frame when
resistance under static loading subjected to the specified level of attack.
EN 1629: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills and NOTE The depth required depends on the strength and stiffness of the
shutters – Burglar resistance – Test method for the determination of rebate upstand and the glazing bead.
resistance under dynamic loading
The bead should be fixed, preferably on the private side, in a
EN 1630: Pedestrian doorsets, windows, curtain walling, grills and manner which ensures that it cannot be removed or dislodged
shutters – Burglar resistance – Test method for the determination of when subjected to the specified level of attack.
resistance to manual burglary attempts
Glazing gaskets and sealants should be checked for compatibility
Security Glazing – Part 5: Framing and installation

with the security glazing. Where possible, chemically curing sealants Where a counter or other non-glazed component is provided as
with good adhesion to the glazing and the framing material should part of the glazed security screen, it should be securely supported
be used. and fixed to the walls and floors.
4.3 Fixing methods for explosion resistant glazing NOTE:The reference in 4.4 to clause 5.4 is in BS 5357 and refers to
speaking and transaction apertures.
4.3.1 Fixings where the glass is intended to
remain unbroken 5. SECURITY FRAMING
Where the glass is intended to remain unbroken (except for any 5.1 General
sacrificial layer), the support system should be designed so that it
For any framing/glazing system, e.g. window, door, curtain walling,
resists the forces of the explosion transmitted through the glass, i.e.
etc.; to be approved as a security framing/glazing system it must be
the full blast overpressure, without significant distortion, maintaining
tested for the claimed performance in accordance with the
the glass in position.
appropriate standard.
NOTE 1 The fixing method for this design is usually of a much heavier
duty than those used to resist wind [Link] is particularly important 5.2 Manual attack resistant
with conventional glazing frames, where the frames themselves, the
attachment of the frame to the building, and the attachment of beads to The standards EN 1627 to EN 1630 detail a classification system
the frame, might need to be considerably stronger than normal. and associated test methods.
The installation of such glazing also has consequences for the EN 1627 recommends classes of manual attack resistant glazing in
building structure, since the full force of the blast is transmitted to accordance with EN 356, (see Data Sheet 8.1.2) that relate to
the structure, which should be designed to resist it. specific classifications of security framing.
NOTE 2 This might only be practical for new buildings. NOTE:The applicability of these standards, certainly for domestic
applications, in the United Kingdom is questionable.
4.3.2 Fixings where the glass is allowed to fracture
Where the glass is allowed to fracture, glazing with deep rebates 5.3 Bullet resistant
on all edges of the glass is [Link] beads holding the The standard EN 1522 details the requirements and classification
glass in place should be of sufficient strength to remain intact and system for windows and doors. EN 1523 details the applicable
hold the glass in position. test method.
NOTE: If the glass is allowed to fracture, the forces transferred to the
The details of the test for classification of the windows, doors, etc.
frame and the structure is reduced and might result in a practical
economical option. are the equivalent to those used for the classification of bullet
resistant glass (see Data Sheet 8.1.3).The ballistic attack impact is
It is recommended that a tested framing system and proven fixing directed at the framing, i.e. joints, beads, hinges, etc.
method is adopted but, in general, increasing the edge cover to the
glass and bolting the bead at frequent intervals is sufficient. 5.4 Explosion resistant

4.4 Unframed bullet-resistant security glazing The classification and test standards cover both shock tube and
open arena (range test).
Unframed bullet-resistant security glazing should have no gaps,
except as described in 5.4, between the edges. Butt joints should The applicable standards are:
not be used for bullet-resistant glazing.
• Shock tube EN 13123-1 and EN 13124-1 respectively;
NOTE: Guidance edge finishes of laminated glass can be found in BS EN ISO
12543-5 and defects on edges that will not be framed in BS EN ISO 12543-6. • Open arena EN 13123-2 and EN 13124-2 respectively.

4.5 Supports 6. SPECIFICATION

All fixings to ceilings, walls, floors and junctions should be of 6.1 General
sufficient strength to securely hold in place all components of the
installation, when subjected to the specified level of attack. The specification of security glazing should be the result of an
Vertical supports (mullions) should be securely fixed at ceiling and appropriate risk assessment. It is recommended that professional
floor levels. advice, i.e. police, crime prevention, security services, etc.,
be obtained.
Alternatively, if a counter is provided and it is strong enough to
6.2 Specific factors for consideration
provide satisfactory anchorage, fixings may be made at the counter
level rather than at floor [Link] supports should generally be 6.2.1 Manual attack
taken through suspended ceilings and raised floors in order to The following is a non exhaustive list:
achieve satisfactory anchorage.
• External or internal glazing
Horizontal supports (transoms) should be securely fixed at each
junction with the vertical supports and walls where appropriate. o Prevention of ingress to a building
Where a counter or other non-glazed component is provided as o Prevention of access to protected space
part of the glazed security screen, it should be securely supported o Protection of objects
and fixed to the walls and floors.
• Type of building
o Private dwelling
• Location
• Value
Security Glazing – Part 5: Framing and installation

o Commercial premises • Security glazing products – multi-functionality

• Location o Because a product has been classified for a particular
• Accessibility type of security performance it does not necessarily
mean that it will meet other standards
• Desirability of contents
o If multi-functionality is necessary, then the security
• Type of attack glazing product manufacturer should be consulted
o Implements available
7. INSTALLATION of SECURITY GLAZING
o Time available
7.1 General
6.2.2 Bullet resistance
All security framing, security glass products and associated adhesive
The following is a non exhaustive list: sealants, etc. should be installed in accordance with the
• Type of weapon manufacturers’ instructions.
o Single weapon NOTE: Product combinations must be those that were tested
o Single or multiple strikes and classified.

• Proximity to protected space 7.2 Specific advice

o Distance between weapon and glazing The following is a non exhaustive list:
o Angle between weapon and glazing • Orientation of security glazing product.
• Requirement in protected space NOTE: Most security glazing products have an attack face and a non-attack
o Personnel protection acceptability of: face. An installation with the non-attack face towards the attack will result
in a non quantifiable performance.
• splintering/spalling
• no splintering/spalling • The application of an approved edge retention system may be
used to mechanically affix adhesive backed polymeric security
o Objects film to the [Link] will enhance the level of protection and
minimise the hazard [Link] is especially true where broken
6.2.3 Explosion resistance
glass may otherwise be propelled out of the framing structure.
The following is a non exhaustive list: The combination of the film and edge retention system should
• Type of explosion meet the relevant levels of performance and classification for
use in blast protection.
o Industrial
• gas NOTE 1: Specific information on blast mitigation using adhesive backed
polymeric filmed glass can be found in GGF Data Sheet 5.18.6
• petrochemical
NOTE 2:The manufacturer of the adhesive backed polymeric security film
• dust should be contacted for details on performance and application.
o Terrorist bomb
• Size, e.g satchel, car, lorry • Correct attachment of security framing to the building
structure;
• Explosive material
• Correct orientation of security framing;
• Building design
• All glazing compounds/gaskets/etc. should be compatible with
o Structure the security glazing product;
o Surroundings
• Application of glazing compounds should be in accordance
• Proximity to target of explosion with the suppliers instructions;

6.3 Other factors • Substitution of approved components is NOT permitted

The following should also be considered: 8. COMPLIANCE with the CONSTRUCTION

PRODUCTS DIRECTIVE (CPD)
• Requirements of insurance industry
o This will be influenced by previous history of Any window, door or curtain walling product which is covered by
criminal activity an official mandate under the CPD, when placed on the European
market, should comply with the applicable harmonized European
• Change of use of premises standard (hEN). Conformity relates not only to the performance of
the product, i.e. Initial Type Testing, but also the Factory Production
• Environment: Control including on-going inspection and surveillance, i.e. the
o Neighbourhood System of Attestation of Conformity.
o Climatic conditions for external glazing The applicable hENs are EN 14351-1 and EN 14351-2.
Security Glazing – Part 5: Framing and installation

Bibliography
GGF Data Sheet 5.18.6: GGF Recommendations for Blast
Mitigation: Adhesive Backed Polymeric Films Applied to Glass
 General Information
SECTION 14
The Institute of Dispute Resolution
14.2 May 2012
Services (IDRS) Consumer Arbitration
Scheme for the GGF

A scheme administered by the IDRS for Arbitration Scheme will not apply and the arbitrator will determine
the resolution of disputes between Members which party shall pay the costs involved.
of the Glass and Glazing Federation and their
Arbitrations carried out under the Rules of the Glass and Glazing
customers.
Federation Arbitration Scheme are conducted in accordance with
Explanatory notes the 1996 Arbitration Act (which applies to England and Wales and
Northern Ireland).The Rules of the Scheme have been written by
These explanatory notes do not form part of the Rules of the IDRS produced in consultation with the Office of Fair Trading.
the Scheme.
The Scheme provides for the settling of disputes or differences Rules of the Scheme
between Members of the Glass and Glazing Federation (‘GGF’) 1 Introduction
and their customers where the normal dispute procedure has
failed to achieve an amicable settlement within a reasonable time. 1.1 These Rules apply to arbitrations where an application under
the Scheme is received by the IDRS (‘The Institute’) after the date
The Scheme is designed to offer a simple and inexpensive method of publication shown at the head of these Rules.
of resolving disputes by the appointment of an independent
arbitrator to make a binding award soon after the parties complete 1.2 No claim may be made under the Scheme for:-
their submissions to the arbitrator and with the minimum of
a) for an amount greater than £15,000;
formality. In normal circumstances proceedings can be completed
within three months of the date of acceptance by the IDRS b) in respect of physical injury, illness or nervous shock or of
(‘The Institute’) of an [Link] Rules commit the customer the consequences of any of these;
to pay a modest registration fee, which may be reimbursed at the
arbitrator’s [Link] balance of the costs of the Scheme is c) by a person who is not "a consumer" as defined by the
borne by the Member. GGF Code of Good Practice;

An application must be made on the prescribed form and the d) in a dispute in which in the opinion of the arbitrator the
parties by doing so agree to be bound by the arbitrator's decision. issues are unusually complicated and their proper
resolution is likely to require a hearing and oral evidence.
Informality is the essence of the [Link] arbitrator appointed
by the Institute will decide disputes by reference to written 1.3 The Rules are designed primarily for arbitrations between two
submissions and documentary evidence supplied by the parties, parties only, but with the agreement of the arbitrator and of all
with no oral hearing, although generally the arbitrator will view the parties concerned, the Rules may be adapted for arbitrations
installation which is the subject of the dispute. between three or more parties.

The Scheme is not designed to accommodate disputes in which 1.4 A registration fee is payable by each party when an application
compensation is an issue or where issues are unusually complicated for arbitration is [Link] fees are charged on a scale set
or are likely to require a hearing with oral evidence for their out in the application form and are non-returnable except as
proper resolution. provided in Rule 3.3.1 although either party may be required to
reimburse the other’s registration fee under Rule 4.3.
If the issues are such that this simplified scheme is inappropriate the
normal services of the Institute (particulars of which can be 2 Commencement of arbitration proceedings
obtained on application to the Institute) are available to the parties
to cover disputes, which are likely to require a hearing, or are 2.1 A joint application for arbitration must be made to the
otherwise excluded under Rule [Link] Institute Institute on the prescribed application form accompanied by the
appropriate registration fees.
will be prepared to accept arbitrations in such cases under its
normal Rules if the parties agree and request it. 2.2 The arbitration commences for the purposes of these Rules
when the Institute dispatches to the parties written notice of
In such circumstances the special costs provisions of the GGF acceptance of the application.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
The Institute of Dispute Resolution Services (IDRS) Consumer Arbitration Scheme for the GGF

The notice sent to the customer making the claim will be 3.1.7 The arbitrator will make the award
accompanied by a claim form.
by reference to the written submissions of each party’s case and
2.3 An arbitrator will then be appointed by the Institute. documentary evidence submitted, together with findings from any
The parties will be informed of the arbitrator’s name and view which may have taken place and to:
acceptance of the appointment.
a) The relevant law governing the dispute.
2.4 If at any stage, in the opinion of the arbitrator; the dispute is
b) The provisions of the GGF Code of Good Practice.
not capable of proper resolution on documents only, the arbitrator
shall advise the parties through the Institute, with proposals for c) The written submissions of each party.
how else the arbitration could proceed. Failing agreement on such
proposals the arbitrator’s appointment shall be deemed revoked, 3.1.8 The arbitrator’s reasons will be set out or referred to in
the parties’ application for arbitration deemed withdrawn and the the award.
parties’ registration fees will be [Link] customer will then be
able to pursue the matter through the courts. 3.1.9 Unless otherwise directed in the award, any amount
awarded shall be paid within 21 days of dispatch of the award to
2.5 The arbitrator may, in exceptional circumstances, communicate the parties. Such payment shall be made direct to the party
with or issue directions to both parties direct (with a copy to the entitled to receive it.
Institute) where it may be necessary in the interest of speed,
economy or natural justice. 3.1.10 The Institute will send copies of the award to each party
and to the Glass and Glazing Federation by the same post.
3 Procedure 3.1.11 Every GGF Member is obliged to comply with any award
3.1 General that is made against it. If a Member fails to comply, the Federation
is willing to act on the customer’s behalf to enforce the award.
Subject to any directions issued by the arbitrator and to the The Federation cannot however guarantee that the Member will
provisions of Rule 3.2 the arbitration will exclude oral evidence, be able to comply with the award in circumstances, for example,
all communications shall be in writing and the procedure will be where the Member has become insolvent.
as follows:
3.1.12 If either party has sent original documents in support of its
3.1.1 The customer making the claim the (‘Claimant’) is required, case to the Institute or the arbitrator, that party shall, at the time of
within 28 days of receipt of the claim form to send the completed submitting such documents, inform the Institute (or the arbitrator
form together with the supporting documents in duplicate to as the case may be) if return of any such documents is requested.
the Institute. Subject to that, case papers will be retained by the Institute and
may in due course be disposed of.
3.1.2 The Claimant may not, without the consent of the
arbitrator, claim an amount greater than that specified on the
application form. 3.2 Content of submissions

3.1.3 A copy of the claim documents will be sent by the Institute 3.2.1 The claim shall set out the following:
to the other party (the ‘Respondent’), who is required, within 28 a) the basis of the contract (commonly an order signed for
days of receipt of the documents, to send to the Institute a written both parties), enclosing a copy of the whole of such
defence to the claim and any counterclaim of which notice was contract or order;
given in the application for arbitration, together with any supporting
documents, in duplicate. and
3.1.4 A copy of the defence documents, including any b) the defects or other matters alleged;
counterclaim, will be sent by the Institute to the Claimant, who is
entitled to send to the Institute any written comments within 14 and
days of their receipt. Such comments must be in duplicate and be c) the remedy claim (money, or the execution of work or
restricted to points arising from the Respondent’s defence (and other stated claim);
counterclaim, if any) and may not introduce any matters or points
of claim. and
3.1.5 The arbitrator may at any time, through the Institute d) if money is claimed, the amount claimed in total, together
(or subject to Rule 2.5, direct), request from the parties the with relevant supporting documents;
provision of any further relevant documents and/or information
and/or submissions. If the documents and/or information and/or and
submission are not supplied in the manner requested, and within
e) if the execution of work (or replacement) is claimed
the time specified, the arbitrator shall be entitled to proceed with
adequate details of such work or replacement;
the reference without them.
3.1.6 The arbitrator has an absolute discretion whether or not and
to view the subject of the [Link] parties shall afford the f) any other relevant supporting documents.
arbitrator all necessary assistance and facilities for the conduct
of such view, the purpose of which is to help the arbitrator to 3.2.2 If the Claimant is unable to submit a copy of the original
assess that which is being contended by the parties in their contract or order, the Respondent shall submit a copy of that
written submissions. document along with the defence.
The Institute of Dispute Resolution Services (IDRS) Consumer Arbitration Scheme for the GGF

3.2.3 The defence shall set out the following: Member company involved in the [Link] fees are payable
by the Member regardless of the award.
a) notification of what matters in the opposing document(s)
are accepted 4.2 Each party bears its own costs of preparing and submitting the
case and no legal action may be brought to recover these costs.
or agreed; and
4.3 The arbitrator has a discretion to order in the award that one
b) notification of what matters are disputed, with reasons why;
party shall reimburse the other’s registration fee.
and
5 Miscellaneous
c) any other relevant supporting documents.
5.1
3.2.4 Any counterclaim shall set out the following: a) the law to apply (English, Scottish, Northern Irish etc) may
be determined by the arbitrator if the parties fail to agree;
a) the basis of such counterclaim;
b) where Scottish law applies, any reference in these Rules to
and an arbitrator shall be construed as a reference to an arbiter.
b) what is being claimed (and where a monetary claim, the 5.2 The Institute reserves the right to appoint a substitute
amount claimed and upon what is based); and arbitrator if the arbitrator originally appointed dies or is
c) any other relevant supporting documents. incapacitated or is for any reason unable to deal expeditiously with
the [Link] parties shall be notified of any substitution.
3.2.5 The response by the Claimant to any counterclaim shall set 5.3 Awards made under the Scheme are final and binding on the
out the following: parties. Subject to the right of a party to request the Institute to
a) notification of what matters in the opposing document(s) draw the arbitrator’s attention to any accidental slip or omission
are accepted or agreed; and which the arbitrator has power to correct, neither the Institute nor
the arbitrator can enter into correspondence regarding awards
b) notification of what matters are disputed, with reasons why; made under the Scheme.
and 5.4 An application or appeal may be made to the Courts under
c) any other relevant supporting documents. the relevant Arbitration Acts but;
a) the special costs provisions of the Scheme shall not apply to
3.3 Supplementary any such application or appeal;
3.3.1 If any party fails to deliver its claim, defence, reply or b) either party making any such application or appeal (other
counterclaim (or any further documents and/or information and/or than an application for leave to enforce the award) shall
submissions requested by the arbitrator) within the specified time bear its own and the other party’s costs (including the costs
(or such extended time as the arbitrator allows) and does not of any resumed or fresh arbitration resulting from such
apply the same within 14 days of a reminder by the Institute proceedings) irrespective of the outcome of such
(whether at the arbitrator’s instigation or otherwise), that party proceedings.
forfeits the right to make such submission, with the following
consequences: 5.5 Neither the Institute nor the arbitrator shall be liable to any
party for any act or omission in connection with any arbitration
a) where such failure is non-delivery of the Claimant’s claim or conducted under these Rules, save that the arbitrator (but not the
the Respondent’s counterclaim that party will be deemed Institute) shall be liable for any conscious or deliberate wrongdoing
to have abandoned the claim or counterclaim (as the case by the arbitrator. General Information
may be);
b) where the Claimant’s claim is thus abandoned the
arbitration will not proceed and the Respondent’s
registration fee will be refunded;
c) where the Respondent’s counterclaim is thus abandoned
the arbitrator will proceed with the claimant’s claim;
d) where the default is in respect of other documents and/or
information and/or submissions requested by the arbitrator,
the arbitration shall proceed in such manner as the
arbitrator may determine by notice whether direct or via
the Institute;
e) where the default is non-delivery of the defence (or the
Claimant’s response to a counterclaim) the arbitrator shall
make the award on the basis of the documents submitted
other than those missing by default.
4 Costs
4.1 The arbitrator’s fees and expenses shall be paid by the Institute
and form part of the administrative costs of the Institute, which
costs are initially met by the GGF, but then are passed on to the
 General Information
SECTION 14
GGF Deposit Indemnity 14. 3 November 2012
Fund Rules

1. Scope Date of Default: The date on which the circumstances of

Default are deemed to have occurred.
This data sheet provides GGF Member companies with the rules
of the Federation's Deposit Indemnity Fund. Defaulting Member: A Member who is in Default in relation
to a Contract, in the opinion of GGF Fund Limited.
2. Definitions
Deposit:
Assistance: At the option of GGF Fund Limited, either: to
enable the work the subject of the relevant Contract to be carried (a) In respect of a Contract to supply and install: the sum paid by
out or completed (as the case may be) by another Member at a the Customer to the Member concerned, prior to the
Fair Market Price to the Customer, less the amount of the relevant commencement of the Contract, under the terms of the Contract,
Deposit; or: in cases of hardship, as determined by GGF Fund limited to 25% or £3,000, whichever is the lower.
Limited, payment of up to an amount equal to the Deposit.
(b) In respect of a Contract for repair and maintenance: 100%
Application: An application to GGF Fund Limited by any of the Contract Price (less the Fair Market Price of goods and
Customer, who is not in breach of Contract, and who has paid a services supplied by the Defaulting Member) or £500, whichever
deposit under a Contract to which a Defaulting Member is a party, is less.
to receive assistance from the Fund.
Fair Market Price: Such price as shall, in the opinion of GGF
Contract: Any legally binding agreement between a Member Fund Limited, represent the open market value, at the time at
and a Customer to supply, or to supply and install, glazing products, which any Assistance is to be provided.
including conservatories, soffits and facias, or to effect repair and
maintenance work to an existing installation in premises situated in The Fund: The deposit indemnity fund operated by GGF Fund
the United Kingdom or the Isle of Man, the terms of which are Limited in accordance with these Rules.
clearly evidenced in writing, and subject to the laws of England,
Member: A member of the Glass and Glazing Federation who, in
Scotland, Northern Ireland or the Isle of Man.
respect of a Contract, takes a deposit.
Contract Price:The price payable by reference to a Contract
Members: Members of the Glass and Glazing Federation who
for its performance without variations or additions thereto, unless
routinely take deposits and contribute to the Fund or, if the Glass
agreed in writing, and without deductions in respect of damages
and Glazing Federation shall be dissolved or if there shall be a
liquidated or otherwise.
payment of surplus assets of the Fund pursuant to these Rules, the
Customer: Any private individual who has personally entered persons who were Members of the Glass and Glazing Federation
into a Contract with a Member. and whose Membership in respect of the Fund had not ceased or
been terminated pursuant to these Rules at the time of such
Default: The circumstances in which a Contract cannot be dissolution or payment (as the case may be), and Membership shall
completed by a Member, by reason of that Member being be construed accordingly.
adjudged bankrupt, or, where a Member is incorporated, where an
administration order or a winding-up order has been made by the Premises: Any private domestic premises covered by a contract,
Court, or a resolution has been adopted for a creditors’ voluntary including a dwelling house, bungalow, flat or maisonette.
winding-up, or where the Member lacks the financial resources
Rules: The regulations contained herein, and any further
either to complete the work or to refund the deposit or any part
regulations approved by GGF Fund Limited.
thereof within a reasonable time.

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
email: info@[Link] omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
[Link] in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Deposit Indemnity Fund Rules

3. General (e) GGF Fund Limited shall not consider a request for Assistance
where the Customer making the request may be entitled to
The Fund has been established, and will be administered by GGF recover the deposit or otherwise claim compensation in respect
Fund Limited as a mutual fund for the purpose of protecting of non-performance of the relevant Contract from any person
Customers’ Deposits against the Defaults of Members. other than the relevant Member, unless the Customer can show
The accounting period of the Fund shall be co-terminous to the satisfaction of GGF Fund Limited that he has exhausted
(or taken all reasonable steps to exhaust) such other possible
with that of the Glass and Glazing Federation.
remedies.
Headings of paragraphs are for ease of reference only, and shall
6. The Fund
not affect the interpretation of these Rules.
The Fund is financed by Members’ subscriptions (as further
4. Applications
provided in Clauses 8 and 9 of these Rules). Any surpluses accruing
(a) Any Application shall be made in writing, addressed to the to the Fund belong to the Members as provided in Clauses 12 and
Secretary of GGF Fund Limited, provided that no Application 19 of these Rules.
shall be considered by GGF Fund Limited if received more than
GGF Fund Limited is empowered (i) to accumulate and set aside
ten months after the date of Default of the relevant
monies which form part of the Fund and to allocate and expend
Defaulting Member.
any such monies to any purpose connected with the maintenance,
(b) For the purposes of its consideration of an Application, GGF operation and any winding up of the Fund, including contributing to
Fund Limited may require the Customer to supply such advertising or promotional expenditure by the Glass and Glazing
documents and correspondence constituting the relevant Federation for the benefit of Members, promoting public awareness
Contract as GGF Fund Limited may request. Should a of the Fund, purchasing insurance to protect the Fund and meeting
Customer fail, in whole or in par t, to comply within all costs, charges, outgoings and expenses of GGF Fund Limited in
a reasonable time with any such request, his Application shall connection with the maintenance, operation and any winding-up of
not be entertained by the Fund any further. the Fund and (ii) to invest such monies or borrow for the
purposes of the Fund.
5. Assistance
7. Contributions on Winding-up
(a) If GGF Fund Limited is satisfied that a deposit was paid to a
Member and that such Member will be unable to carry out the Every Member undertakes to contribute the full amount of the
work the subject of the relevant Contract by reason of the year’s subscription to the Fund in the event of its being wound up
relevant Member’s Default, then GGF Fund Limited will during the time he is a Member, which he would otherwise have
consider, in its absolute discretion (i) whether assistance will be been liable to pay if the Fund had not so been wound up.
provided to the relevant Customer from the Fund and (ii) if
8. Successions
assistance is to be provided, what form it will take.
Where, in the opinion of GGF Fund Limited, there is a continuity of
(b) If assistance is provided, GGF Fund Limited may, at its
business following the incorporation of a Member, reconstitution of
absolute discretion:
a partnership or transfer of ownership, any rights or obligations of
(i) enable the work the subject of the relevant Contract to be the proprietor as last constituted may be succeeded to by the new
carried out or completed (as the case may be) by another proprietor.
Member at a Fair Market Price to the Customer, less the
9. Funding
amount of the relevant Deposit; or
(a) Where a Member takes deposits of less than £2,500 in
(ii) make a payment to the Customer from the Fund up to an
aggregate in a calendar year, his subscription to the Fund for that
amount equal to the Deposit.
year will be waived.
(c) If GGF Fund Limited exercises its discretion as described in
(b) All other Members will pay quarterly subscriptions to the Fund
paragraphs (a) and (b)(i) above, the Customer will be issued
on or by 30 April, 31 July, 31 October and 31 January in each
with a voucher redeemable with a Member, to be used against
year, being one month after close of the relevant quarter,
the cost of the successor contract, providing it is of similar
calculated by reference to deposits received in that quarter.
monetary [Link] shall be valid for one year from the
date of issue. 10. Rate of Subscription
(d) GGF Fund Limited may require the Customer, as a condition of The rate of subscription will be fixed from time to time by GGF
receiving Assistance, to legally assign (in such form as GGF Fund Fund Limited, and shall be uniformly applied in the calculation of
Limited may require) to GGF Fund Limited, as custodian for the the amount due from each Member. Each Member shall pay his
Members for the time being whose membership in respect of subscription within fourteen days of it falling due. In the case of a
the Fund has not ceased or been terminated pursuant to these Member being admitted to Membership after the first subscription
Rules, all rights he may have against the Defaulting Member in date of the year, the Member shall pay such sum by way of
respect of the relevant Deposit. subscription to the Fund as GGF Fund Limited shall decide.
GGF Deposit Indemnity Fund Rules

11. Certificates of Membership address last notified by the Member to the Glass and Glazing
Federation or on the day on which the notice is delivered
Each of the Members is entitled to a certificate of Membership in personally to such address (as the case may be).
respect of the Fund.
18. Expenditure of GGF Fund Limited
12. Report of Member’s Registered Auditor
GGF Fund Limited may recover from the Fund all its expenditure
Members shall, upon application for Membership, and once every incurred in the administration of the Fund.
twelve months thereafter, submit a report in the form set out in
the Glass and Glazing Federation’s Turnover Return Fund 19. Indemnity

Return & [Link] report requires confirmation that the assets GGF Fund Limited shall be entitled to be indemnified from the
available to the Member were adequate to meet all liabilities, assets of the Fund against all costs, charges, losses, expenses, claims
including liabilities in respect of deposits, at his last balance sheet and liabilities incurred by GGF Fund Limited in relation to its acts,
date, and confirming the accuracy of the returns and subscriptions omissions and decisions as administrator of the Fund except to the
paid under Clause 8 hereof. Each such report shall be certified by a extent that the same arise out of its fraud or wilful misconduct or
person qualified for appointment as auditor under the Companies that of any of its directors or other officers or its agents, and GGF
Act 1985. Fund Limited shall be entitled to treat the costs of any such
indemnification payment as part of the management expenses of
13. Surpluses the Fund.
GGF Fund Limited may return to Members the whole or any part 20. Termination of the Fund
of any surplus not considered by GGF Fund Limited to be required
for the purposes of the Fund, by relief of subscriptions, cash refund GGF Fund Limited may terminate the Fund at any time.
or by whatever other method GGF Fund Limited may deem
appropriate. If the Fund shall be terminated in connection with any
establishment of a new fund providing similar benefits, GGF Fund
Any amount so returned to Members shall be allocated in Limited may direct the vesting of all or any part of the assets of the
proportion to their aggregate subscriptions paid during their Fund in the persons authorised to administer such successor fund.
respective periods of Membership.
Upon termination, otherwise than by investing the assets in a
14. Termination of Membership successor fund, the surplus assets attributable to Members shall be
ascertained after all applications made by Customers for assistance
GGF Fund Limited may terminate Membership at any time upon from the Fund prior to commencement of the winding-up have
breach of or failure by a Member to observe any requirement been determined and fully provided for and after full provision has
upon the Member under these Rules (including but not limited to been made for all outgoings of the Fund (including costs and
failure by a Member to pay subscriptions within fourteen days of expenses incurred by GGF Fund Limited) which may be incurred in
their falling due). Such termination shall be without prejudice to the connection with the winding-up and otherwise under these Rules
Member’s liability to perform all his obligations in respect to events (including the provisions of Clauses 17 and 18 hereof).
occurring before such termination. In such a case, the Member shall
have no right to participate in any return or distribution of assets of The distribution of such surplus shall be made to Members [whose
the Fund. subscriptions are fully paid up to the date of the termination], in
proportion to their aggregate subscriptions paid during their
Upon a Member ceasing to be a member of the Glass and Glazing respective periods of Membership.
Federation, his Membership will automatically cease.
21. Law of England
15. Publication
The law of England shall govern the provisions of these Rules.
If Membership is terminated or ceases as referred to in Clause 13 Rules of the Deposit Indemnity Fund
above, GGF Fund Limited may publish that fact, and the fact that
applications for assistance from persons contracting after such
termination or cessation with the Member concerned shall not be
entertained, in such form and manner as it may determine.

16. Alteration of these Rules

Alterations of these Rules shall require the authority of a resolution

of the board of directors of GGF Fund Limited. Unless stated,
alterations shall not apply in respect of Contracts made prior to
the date of the alteration.

17. Notices

A notice from GGF Fund Limited to a Member for any purpose

connected with these Rules shall be deemed to have been
delivered on the third clear day after being put in the post to the
 General Information
SECTION 14
GGF Deposit Indemnity Fund Guidance 14. 3.1 November 2012
Notes for Members

1. Scope have permitted taking a deposit after a ‘cooling-off ’ period.

Everyone in the industry appreciated the time and cost involved in
This data sheet gives guidance to Members on the operation of
making a return call, and that the best time to take a deposit was
the Federation's deposit indemnity scheme.
when an order was taken. Costs could be kept down and cash
2. Introduction flow protected.
Established in 1980, in consultation withthe OFT, the Deposit These remain the key roles of the Fund [Link] are the reasons
Indemnity Fund has proved to be a most important innovation by why Member companies are prepared to support the Fund.
the GGF in safeguarding deposits paid by householders to GGF
[Link] purpose of the Fund is to provide assistance to private 4. Background
individuals who have placed a deposit with a GGF Member, in the
event of that Member failing to commence a contract because they At the time of its inception, the Fund had no reserves, and no
have, in certain circumstances, ceased to trade. Requests by income apart from Members’ [Link] a company failed,
customers to receive assistance from the Fund are considered other Member companies had to be prepared to complete the
by GGF Fund Limited and granted in its absolute discretion. job, and absorb the cost of the customer’s lost deposit. Over the
years, as the balance sheet strengthened, the percentage of the
The Fund is managed by GGF Fund [Link] Rules of the Fund deposit borne by the Fund on completion of a voucher job has
are set out in GGF Data Sheet [Link] scheme is voucher based. increased. In 1991, 10% of the original contract value was borne by
When a request for assistance is granted, the voucher issued to the the [Link] was subsequently reduced to 5% and from
customer contains abridged guidance on the procedure to follow, 1999 to nil.
and how to avoid action that might deprive the customer of
assistance which otherwise would be provided. It is not a ‘cash-
5. Future developments
back’ scheme, although GGF Fund Limited may in its absolute
discretion make cash payments in cases of hardship. Guarantee GGF Fund Limited has the right to vary the operation of the Fund
work is not within the scope of the Fund. according to circumstances (and in order to comply with
Government legislation on consumer protection.)
Explanatory leaflets, which may be overprinted with a Member’s
name, are available in pad form. 6. Definition of Fair Market Price

3. Key roles The price at which a Member undertakes a successor contract

does not have to be the price quoted by the failed [Link]
It is worth noting that the Deposit Indemnity Fund was set up to
may be cases where the failed company seriously under quoted in
serve two [Link] first objective was to safeguard customers’
the mistaken belief that volume alone would alleviate its trouble. It
deposits.A customer of a GGF Member needs to be able to place
must be the Fair Market Price for the work as defined in the Rules
his deposit with confidence. Providing a scheme for the protection
of the Fund.
of customers’ deposits enhances the credibility and responsibility of
the industry, and presents Membership with an excellent marketing 7. Purchase of order books from a Receiver
tool, when compared with [Link] second role
Where a Member purchases the order book of a failed company
developed as soon as the Fund was established, when the right of
from a Receiver, no benefit shall accrue to that Member from the
the industry to take deposits was being questioned in European
Fund. Customers shall not receive vouchers unless they wish to
and UK government [Link] original draft of the EC Directive
have their contracts completed by another Member.
‘Contracts Negotiated Away from Business Premises’ would only

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
email: info@[Link] omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
[Link] in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
GGF Deposit Indemnity Fund Guidance Notes for Members

8. Procedure

(a) Where GGF Fund Limited exercises its discretion to issue

vouchers to householders who have lost deposits in
consequence of the insolvency of a Member, vouchers will be
issued after GGF Fund Limited has received confirmation from
the liquidator that they are listed as unsecured creditors.

(b) Vouchers are limited to 25% of contract value, limited

to £3,000.

(c) Where a deposit has been paid by credit card, or where a

finance agreement has been signed, it is normally in the house
holder’s interest to approach those organisations for a refund
under the Consumer Credit Act of 1974.

(d) The householder is under no obligation to accept completion of

his contract by the Receiver, or the assignment of this contract,
should he not so wish.

(e) In order to be valid, the successor contracts must not pre-date

the issuance of vouchers by the Fund.

(f) The successor contract should be for the same work or value
as the householder originally contracted for.

(g) In order to redeem the voucher, the Member must submit the
voucher, a satisfaction note signed by the customer, and a copy
of his contract to GGF Fund Limited.

The householder must bear in mind that the Fund is supported by

Members’ contributions and that the provision of assistance from
the Fund is entirely at the discretion of GGF Fund Limited.

Not all Members of the Federation are entitled to accept

vouchers. Acceptance is restricted to Members who routinely take
deposits and contribute to the Fund.

9. Conclusion

The support Members give the Fund through their contributions

and willingness to carry out successor contracts is greatly
[Link] Fund achieves a great deal for the industry as is
evident from the relieved, appreciative letters received from many
customers who have benefited from its provisions.
 Contract Terms
SECTION 15
Basic Guidance Notes on Construction
Contracts (Commercial) 15.1 May 2012

Introduction Contractual Forms and Housing Grants,

This data sheet deals with a Construction Contract as defined Construction and Regeneration Act 1996
below between the specialist contractor, i.e. glazier and the building (as amended by the Local Democracy, Economic
owner/main contractor. A contract comes into existence when one Development and Construction Act 2009)
party makes an offer, which the other party unconditionally accepts. I This Act came into force on 1 May 1998 and was amended by
Contracts may be made verbally or in writing. If it is made subject the subsequent Act in 2011. In order for a contract to fall within
to contract, no contract will come into existence until the the remit of the Act, and therefore afford the specialist contractor
necessary terms are agreed. In the construction industry it is held the protection given by the Act, the contract must be a
that an estimate is usually an offer, capable of acceptance. "Construction Contract", as defined by Section 104 of the Act.
If the offer is made subject to the specialist contractor's terms, then The contract may be in writing or may be wholly or partly oral.
a contract can only come into being if the acceptance is Every building contract or sub-contract other than those
unconditional. If the building owner/main contractor accepts the excluded by Section 105 (2) must comply by statute with
specialist contractor's offer, but includes his own terms and conditions set out in the Act.
conditions, it becomes a counter offer, which is then subject to
acceptance by the specialist contractor: However, the specialist 2 The following is an outline of the exclusions referred to above
contractor is under no obligation to accept that counter offer and which apply to the glazing industry:-
may wish to renegotiate the terms and conditions which apply to a The manufacture or supply only to site of building or
the contract. engineering components, except under a contract which
If a specialist contractor commences work or does not refute the provides for their installation.
counter offer, either within a reasonable time or within any time b A contract made directly with a residential occupier
imposed by a counter offer, or in any case before the (a contract is with a residential occupier if it principally relates
commencement of work, then the specialist contractor may be to work carried out on a dwelling house or flat, which one of
deemed to have accepted the building owner's/contractor's terms. the parties to the contract occupies or intends to occupy as
It is, therefore essential that the specialist contractor understands his residence). However, where the specialist contractor is in
clearly what he has offered to unconditionally accept. contract with a main contractor, who in turn is in contract
It is not unusual for a building owner/main contractor to issue a with a residential occupier, the sub-contract is afforded the
letter of intent instructing the specialist contractor to commence protection given by the [Link] Act will also apply if the
work. A simple letter of intent is not binding upon either party and work is carried out to a building containing a dwelling house
does not usually amount to a contract. If a specialist contractor is or flat(s) but the contract is not with the residents.
instructed to commence works or part thereof on a letter of 3 Every “Construction Contract” must provide a mechanism which
intent, it is essential that there is wording in the letter of intent that gives protection for the specialist contractor in respect of
the specialist contractor will be entitled to be paid on a quantum payment terms, set off and the right to adjudication.
meruit basis, i.e. a reasonable remuneration for the work carried
out to the date the instruction is cancelled or a contract is not Payment
entered [Link] letter of intent should also make clear who is It must be possible to determine what payments become due,
liable for payment to the specialist contractor. when they become due, and the basis of the calculation of
Many of the widely used sub-contract agreement forms for that payment.
buildingowner/main contractors and architects are drafted and It must also be possible to determine a final date for payment for
produced by the following bodies:- any payment due (interim and final).
• Joint Contracts Tribunal Limited (JCT) Every contract or subcontract shall provide for the payer (or such
• Construction Confederation (CC) other person specified in the contract e.g. a certifying officer or
• National Specialist Contractors Council (NSCC) employer's agent), or the payee, to give notice of the amount to be
• Institution of Civil Engineers (NEC) paid (with the basis of calculation) no later than five days from the

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Contract Terms: Basic Guidance Notes on Construction Contracts (Commercial)

date when payment becomes due. A notice must be sent even if the specialist contractor can seek the opposing party's agreement
the amount to be paid is zero (which is important to bear in mind to a particular individual. An appointment will be made within
if you are in the rectification period of the contract). seven days of referral and matters in dispute must be determined
within 28 days unless this is extended by agreement i.e. the referrer
If the contract states that the payer is to give the notice of the
(specialist contractor) grants an extension to the adjudicator (such
amount to be paid and he fails to do so, the Act provides that the
extension is limited to 14 days). Once again, before a specialist
payee can send the notice [Link] payer must pay the amount
contractor refers a dispute to adjudication, it is suggested he seeks
specified in such notice by the final date for payment (unless a pay-
expert advice.
less notice is sent – see below).
If the parties do not have a construction contract which
Payment may not be withheld after the final date for payment for
automatically falls under the protection of the Act, the parties can
any sum due, unless the payer gives notice of his intention to pay
still agree in their contract that adjudication will apply to the
less than the amount in the notice of payment within the period
resolution of disputes.
prescribed by the contract; such notice must specify the amount
the payer considers due and the basis on which that sum is 6 Scheme for construction contracts
calculated. Pay-less notices have replaced withholding notices under
Where a construction contract does not conform to the
the amendments to the Act.
requirements of the Act in relation to adjudication and payment
Except in the event of the insolvency of the ultimate client "pay- provisions, the Government Scheme for Construction Contracts
when-paid" clauses are rendered ineffective by the Act and are not shall [Link] Scheme has also been revised as part of the 2011
permitted. "Pay-when-certified" clauses are also now excluded by changes to the [Link] Scheme sets out standard terms that
the Act so that a main contractor cannot make payments to his comply with the provisions of the Act. 2011 versions of the JCT
sub-contractors conditional upon his own payment being certified sub-contracts are being issued which have been updated to take
by the employer. account of the changes to the Act introduced on 1st October
2011. After that date, only the new forms should be used. Specialist
Where the duration of the work exceeds 45 days (including
contractors should beware amendments to the Standard Forms.
preparation or works off-site) the specialist contractor shall be
entitled to payment by instalments. Specialist contractors should be 7 Conclusion
aware that while instalments are usually on a monthly basis, this
Members are strongly advised to insist upon the exclusive use of
may not necessarily be the case. Specialist contractors should check
standard forms or their own standard terms and conditions and to
proposed contract conditions and resist elongated periods.
resist the use of non-standard forms or amendments to standard
As a matter of law when payment is made by cheque, payment is forms which, without exception, incorporate onerous conditions
deemed to be made when posted if sent by post or when and as a direct consequence, increase the liabilities which members
received if delivered by hand. However, this is conditional on the are forced to accept.
cheque being honoured.
These notes are for guidance only. It is suggested that members
4 Suspension of Work seek advice on specific circumstances and problems. For your
information GGF Members are entitled to one hour's free advice
Where the sum due to a specialist contractor has not been paid in
on the Wedlake Bell Helpline, telephone 020 7395 3000
full by the date for final payment and no valid notice of intention to
pay less or set off has been given, provided the specialist contractor WEDLAKE BELL
has given seven days notice of his intentions he will be entitled to SOLICITORS
suspend the execution of all or part of his work until payment of
the sum due is received in full; such periods of suspension will not
give rise to claims by the main contractor:The specialist contractor
will also be entitled to his reasonable costs and expenses incurred
in respect of exercising the right of suspension. However, before a
specialist contractor suspends his work, it is suggested that he seeks
expert advice, to ensure that his proposed action is correct.
Unlawful suspension will put the specialist contractor in breach of
contract.
5 Adjudication
This is a quick and relatively cheap method of dispute resolution.
Every construction contract must provide for adjudication on any
matter of dispute or difference arising from the [Link]
specialist contractor is entitled to refer any dispute or difference
arising under the contract at any time to the adjudicator named in
the sub-contract or alternatively nominated by an adjudicator
nominating body named in the contract. In the event that the
contract document neither names an adjudicator nor an
adjudicator nominating body, the specialist has the right to select an
adjudicator nominating body to nominate the adjudicator:The GGF
suggest that members select the Association of Independent
Construction Adjudicators as the appropriate nominating body. No
party has the right unilaterally to select their own adjudicator but
 Contract Terms
SECTION 15
The Construction Act -
How to make it work for you 15.2 August 2012

Introduction by a further 14 days, if and only if the referring party consents.

Members should be aware of the provisions of The Housing Further written clauses must be included requiring;
Grants, Construction & Regeneration Act 1996 ('The Act') which
came into force on 1 May 1998 (as amended by the Local the adjudicator to act impartially and allowing him to take
Democracy, Economic Development and Construction Act 2009). the initiative in any way he considers appropriate in order to
Information on the relevant provisions contained within the Act is ascertain the true facts and the law relating to the matters
included in the GGF Data Sheet 15.1 May 2012 entitled 'Basic in dispute.
Guidance Notes on Construction Contracts'.The whole purpose Additionally, the contract shall provide that any decision of the
of the Act was to provide a framework within which the various adjudicator shall be binding upon the parties unless and until the
factions of the construction industry should be enabled to work in dispute is ultimately resolved by court action, arbitration or
closer harmony with one another, and to attempt to promote the alternatively by agreement between the [Link] contract shall
tendency for parties to construction contracts to become less ensure that the adjudicator and those working with him will be
reliant upon arbitration and court action. exempt from liability unless he has acted in bad faith.
The Act however, recognised that not all building contracts and
sub-contracts would include the clauses required of them by the In the event that a contract or sub-contract fails
Act or might seek to alter the content or impact of the Act upon to include the items, the Scheme for Construction
the construction scene. With this in mind therefore, government Contracts will apply.
included in the Act, Supplementary Provisions at Section I 14,
('The Scheme').
In practice this means that if your contract is deficient in any or all
The purpose of 'The Scheme' of the foregoing items you will be able to rely on the clauses
The Scheme deals only with two items namely; adjudication and relating to adjudication included within the Scheme as if they had
payment. been written into your contract.

Adjudication Many members may feel that adjudication is the single most
influential factor within the Act. Indeed, already there is evidence
It is intended that where a construction contract, - within the that notice to a contractor that you intend to refer a dispute to
meaning of the Act, including construction sub-contracts - fails to adjudication is often sufficient to concentrate minds to find an
comply with Section 108(1) to (4) of the Act, (the section relating acceptable solution.
to Adjudication), then the provisions of the Scheme shall apply.
There are some exclusions, most notably the Act does not apply to If you are proceeding with works under a letter of intent, ensure
domestic contracts, or supply only contracts. that it contains or refers to conditions which you have seen, read,
understood and accept. If in doubt seek legal advice.
All such construction contracts must contain a procedure in writing
(even if the rest of the contract was made verbally) which complies Upon what can you adjudicate?
with the following list of requirements; You should be aware that the Act permits parties to a construction
the right for any party to refer any dispute or difference arising contract to refer a dispute or difference of whatever nature arising
under that contract to adjudication, under the contract to resolution by adjudication at any [Link]
Scheme is provided for the protection of contracting parties whose
provision for an adjudicator to be appointed and the dispute contract conditions fail to comply with the Act.
referred within 7 days of the notice of intention to refer
being given, Remember, adjudication will not always be about money. In practice
you can adjudicate about matters relating to interpretation of
provision for the adjudicator to reach a decision within 28
contractual terms, bills of quantities, specification (including quality
days of the dispute being referred to him,
matters), delays and extension of time, re-imbursement in respect
provision allowing the adjudicator to extend the 28 day period of delay or acceleration, under-valuation, non-payment of sums due,

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this Data Sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9100 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
email: info@[Link] omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
[Link] in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
Contract Terms: The Construction Act — How to make it work for you

deduction of sums relating to alleged right of set-off (L and AD's or Step Three
other delay charges) and matters where contractual documents fail
The Notice of Referral
to include the statutory requirements of the [Link] list is not
exhaustive. The referrer has only seven days from the notice of intent to refer
to adjudication in which to refer the dispute and provide full details
The right of a party to have access to adjudication is one provided
of it to the selected adjudicator. The referrer will see
by Statute and it cannot be waived or excluded by any clause
therefore the importance of having his case
either inserted or implied within a contract.
properly prepared before embarking on the process
It is important to ensure that you abide strictly by the requirements by issuing his Notice of Intent to adjudicate.
of the Act when instituting adjudication proceedings.
The Notice of Referral is a document of immense importance.
Such referral should be accompanied by all the necessary
How to embark on adjudication
documentation to support the referrer's submission. It should set
Take specialist advice; adjudication is not a 'cure all' for your own out details of his case but should be prepared with it in mind that
shortcomings. Contact GGF regarding specialist advice — High the adjudicator has initially only 28 days to reach his decision. It
Street solicitors are not usually experienced in adjudication matters. would therefore be futile to make the documentation over
complex or to run to several ring binders of information, which the
Step One adjudicator will be obliged to study. Concise facts and evidence are
what is required, together with a clear statement of exactly what
The first requirement under both the Act and the Scheme is to redress you seek (as opposed to that which you anticipate the
give notice to the other party that it is your intention to refer a other party may seek) — including a detailed build up of the sum
dispute or difference to [Link] notice from the referring claimed as payment, where applicable.
party (which must be sent to all other parties to the referrer's
contract) should set out briefly: It is essential to ensure that a complete copy of the Notice of
Referral and supporting documentation is sent to all other parties
the nature and a brief description of the matters in dispute, to the contract at the same time as the Notice of Referral is
details of where and when the dispute arose, an despatched to the adjudicator. A specimen letter of referral is given
outline of the redress which is sought, the names and at Appendix B. Upon receipt of the Notice of Referral the Scheme
addresses of the parties and in particular the address of the provides that the adjudicator must inform every party to the
referring party to which notices should be given. dispute of the date that he received it.

A specimen letter of notice of intention to refer is given at Objection by the opposing party to the appointment of a
Appendix A. particular adjudicator will not invalidate either the adjudicator's
appointment or any decision he may make under paragraph 20
Step Two of the Scheme. He may therefore proceed despite the objection,
although if his jurisdiction is challenged because, for example, it is
Where there is a person named in the contract as the adjudicator, argued that the works do not come within the Act, he may await
the referring party must use that adjudicator and in such instances a court ruling if he is unable or unwilling to determine the
may move directly to Step Three of the process. issue himself.
However, having checked that no individual adjudicator is named in It is incumbent upon any party to the adjudication to comply with
the contract, the referrer should now select one of the any request or direction of the adjudicator. Failure to do so will not
Adjudication Nominating Bodies from any list in the contract. (A prevent the adjudication from continuing but the adjudicator may
specimen letter of such referral is given at Appendix C). Where no draw such inference from the failure as he considers justified and
such list exists he should select an Adjudicator Nominating Body may make his decision on the basis of the information that is
(lists available from the GGF) and should write to that Body, before him.
formally requesting them to select an adjudicator (A specimen
Adjudicator's decision
letter of such referral is given at Appendix D). It would be wise to
include within such request, in addition to the general information The adjudicator is provided with a very wide discretion as to how
included in the Notice of Intent to Refer, such additional to make his decision. He may, with the agreement of the parties,
information as might assist the appointing body in selecting a take into account any other matters which he considers are
suitable and appropriate adjudicator, having regard to the nature of connected with the dispute. He can open up and review, unless
the matters in dispute. Also where he should be based i.e. the otherwise stated in the contract conditions, any decision taken by
geographical location of the contract and the parties to it. Give an any other person referred to in the contract as well as reviewing
indication of what discipline you think the adjudicator should be certificates.
chosen from e.g. quantity surveyor, lawyer, etc.
His decision will be binding upon the parties and they must comply
The Adjudicator Nominating Body is required to nominate an with his decision immediately even though either party may
adjudicator within seven days of referral. Where an Adjudicator subsequently decide to refer the dispute to arbitration or to the
Nominating Body fails to nominate an adjudicator within seven [Link] Courts have made it clear that an adjudication award
days (five days if the Scheme applies) from a request to nominate, must be complied with immediately. If it is not, the Courts will
the referring party has the right to request a different Adjudicating enforce the award speedily. Compliance with an award cannot be
Nominating Body to make a nomination. delayed pending a later decision by either an arbitrator or a judge.
Contract Terms: The Construction Act — How to make it work for you

If you are confronted by an argument that the adjudication award play and will be used to determine both of the foregoing factors.
can be challenged (e.g. because the adjudicator has exceeded his
Dates for Payment
jurisdiction) you should seek specialist advice.
If there has been a clerical or typographical error in the decision, In the event of a payment period in a relevant contract not being
the adjudicator can correct this within five days of the delivery of agreed, the relevant period will be considered as 28 days and the
the decision. due date for payment will be 7 days after the expiry of that period.

Adjudicator's Fees The final date for payment in relation to any sum which becomes
due under a construction contract will be 17 days after the
The parties will be jointly and severally liable for the adjudicator's due date.
reasonable fees and expenses although the adjudicator has the
power to determine how such amounts may be apportioned. It is Amount of payment
important to ascertain the adjudicator's terms and conditions of
The Scheme provides that no later than 5 days after the date upon
payment at the time of appointment as terms and charges vary.
Unless the adjudication provisions provide to the contrary or the which a payment becomes due or would have become due if the
parties so agree, the adjudicator may not award a party its own other party had carried out his obligations under the contract, one
legal costs. If he does not the successful party will remain party shall give to the other a notice specifying the amount (if any)
responsible for the costs he has incurred. Clauses that provide that of the payment he has made or proposes to make, stating the
the party bringing the adjudication claim will be liable to pay all amount that is to be paid, the basis of the calculation of such
costs of the adjudication (a "Tolent clause") are intended under the amount and the date for final [Link] notice must still be sent
2009 Act to be outlawed unless agreed by both parties at the time even if the amount to be paid is zero.
of the adjudication. The relevant legislation wording is ambiguous
Notice to pay less
however and the Courts may need to interpret the wording in the
Act before it can be said with certainty that these clauses are illegal. The Act provides that a party to the contract may withhold
Generally payment after the final date of interim payments only if he has
given effective notice of his intention to pay [Link] be effective a
Remember the following and beware of: notice must:
• contract conditions, which state that a dispute shall not exist Give notice that the payer intends to pay less than the notified
until all other forms of dispute resolution have been sum, the sum that the payer considers to be due and the basis on
exhausted, - avoid such a clause, wherever possible. which that sum is calculated,
• do not be fooled by what has become known as a 'period and must be given not later than seven days before the date for
of notice of dissatisfaction'.This is a ruse to put off adjudication
final payment if the scheme applies.
by anything up to a month, - avoid such a clause,
wherever possible, Final Payment under 'The Scheme'
• a clause which extends the period between notice and Where the referrer is seeking to rely upon the Scheme because
referral. Periods of 60 days have appeared in some specific contractual terms do not comply with the Act there are
sub-contracts, - avoid such a clause, wherever possible. particular payment periods laid down for final payments as
Payment opposed to instalment payment periods.

Part II of the Scheme deals exclusively with payment terms, and In respect of 'relevant construction contracts', (i.e. contracts with a
individual sections of Part II can be invoked in situations where the duration of more than 45 days), final payment will be due at the
terms of a contract or sub-contract fail to comply with the end of 30 days after completion of the works or alternatively 30
requirements of the Act. days after the making of a claim for payment, whichever is later. In
the case of contracts where there is no contractual entitlement to
Interim or stage payments
payments by instalment (i.e. less than 45 days duration), payment
In the event that in a relevant construction contract (one where for the contract is due at the end of a 30 day period following the
the duration of the works is or is stated to be not less than 45 completion of the works or alternatively 30 days after the
days) there is failure to agree; contractor makes a claim for payment.
the amount of interim stage payments or periodic payment, The last day by which payment must be paid in either of the
or the intervals at which such payment becomes due, the foregoing instances will be 17 days after the due date.
relevant provisions of paragraphs 2 to 4 of Part II of the
Scheme shall apply. Remember
The paragraphs referred to define the method to be adopted in The Act and therefore the Scheme applies generally to
order to establish the time and the amount of the sum due. construction contracts, except where specific exclusions within the
Broadly speaking they conform to the general principle which has Act [Link] most important exclusion is that the foregoing does
normally been applied for ascertaining interim and final valuations not apply to direct domestic contracts. It will apply to contracts for
and payment within the construction industry for many years. work at a domestic dwelling if the contract is with another
Using the Scheme to Overcome Non-compliant contractor as opposed to the owner or occupier.
clauses in a contract Matters relating to both interim and final payments can be referred
Where a contract fails to provide a mechanism to determine what to an adjudicator in the event of dispute, again with the exception
payments become due and when, the provisions of Part II come into of excluded items.
Contract Terms: The Construction Act — How to make it work for you

Specimen letters sheets, valuations, applications for payment etc. which you feel
relevant to your case)
Appendix A We confirm that a copy of this letter together with a complete set
Notice of intention to refer a dispute to of attached documentation has been forwarded to (insert name of
adjudication. other party or parties).

Name and address of the other party or parties to the contract Yours faithfully
Dear Sir (Name and position in company)

Contract identification Appendix C

Notice of intention to refer a dispute to adjudication Letter of referral to an adjudicator, where one or
more nominating bodies are listed in the contract.
In accordance with the contract between our companies for the
above named works, we hereby give formal notice that, there being Where only one nominating body is named, that body must be
a dispute or difference having arisen between us namely: approached for nomination. In the event of a list of nominating
bodies appearing in the contract the choice of body to be
(List all the various matters of dispute and the redress sought), approached for nomination rests with the referring party.
it is our intention to refer these disputes or differences to (NB. We suggest that you telephone the Adjudicator Nominating
adjudication within 7 days of the date of this notice. Body first to ascertain the fee payable and obtain an application
The address at the head of this letter is the appropriate address for form if appropriate.)
receipt of all notices, letters and correspondence in connection Name and address
with this matter. Would you please confirm by return the address
of the appropriate office for receipt of such notices, letters or Dear Sir
correspondence, so far as your company is concerned. Letter to the Adjudicator Nominating Body specified in the
Yours faithfully contract between (insert your name) and (insert the name of the
other party to the dispute).
(Name and position in company)
You being the nominating body listed in the contract (or you being
Appendix B one of the nominating bodies listed in the contract) between the
above named, we would ask that you select an appropriately
Letter of referral to an adjudicator where named in qualified individual to adjudicate in a dispute, which has arisen on
the contract the above named contract. We enclose your application fee of £.
Name and address The matters in dispute are:
Dear Sir (Insert a list of matters in dispute and redress sought)
Referral to adjudication of a dispute between (insert your name) The terms of the contract are:
and (insert the name of the other party to the dispute).
(Insert brief description of the nature or form of contract)
In accordance with the contract between the above named parties
and more particularly with clause (insert number) or alternatively the location of the works is (insert address of the works).
the Scheme for Construction Contracts we hereby give notice that We would confirm that a Notice of our intention to refer this
we wish formally to refer the said dispute(s) to you for resolution dispute to resolution by an adjudicator has been given to the other
by adjudication. party or parties by our letter dated (insert date of letter), a copy
We confirm that we have advised (insert name of other party or of which is attached hereto.
parties) of our intention to refer these disputes to adjudication by Yours faithfully
our letter to them dated (insert date)
(Name and position in company)
Attached hereto are the following documents:
Appendix D
(Enclose all relevant documents including as appropriate.)
Letter to an adjudicator nominating body. For use
notice of intention to refer this dispute to adjudication where no list of nominating bodies appears in
a copy of the order to us contract documents.
NB:Telephone Adjudicator Nominating Body first to ascertain fee
a copy of our quotation dated (insert date)
and ask for application form.
a copy of the contract documents
Name and address
a copy of the pre-tender meeting dated (insert date) Appointment of an adjudicator
copies of relevant site meeting minutes copies of relevant Dear Sir
correspondence comprehensive and detailed statement of our case
Contract Identification
our application/claim for financial reimbursement (where applicable)
There being no named adjudicator or alternatively no list of
(any other documents, photographs, reports, signed daywork Adjudicator Nominating Bodies contained in the contract
Contract Terms: The Construction Act — How to make it work for you

documentation for the above works, we would ask that you select
an appropriately qualified individual to adjudicate on a dispute
which has arisen on the above named contract.
The contract is between this company and (enter name of other
party to the dispute).

The matters in dispute are

(insert a list of matters in dispute)

The terms of the contract are:

(insert brief description of the nature or form of contract)

the location of the works is (insert address of the works).

We would confirm that a notice of our intention to refer this
dispute to resolution by an adjudicator has been given to the other
party or parties by our letter dated (insert date of letter), a copy
of which is attached hereto.
Yours faithfully
(Name and position in company)

WEDLAKE BELL
SOLICITORS
 Contract Terms
SECTION 15
JCT 2011 Standard Building Sub-Contract:
15.4 February 2013
The Main Changes from JCT Standard Form
of Domestic Sub-Contract ("DSC")
A Short Guide for Sub-Contractors

The main changes to the conditions are as follows:

In 2011, JCT published a suite of main
contracts and subcontracts in order to Payment All JCT Contracts now require Payment Notices to specify the total amount
reflect the updated Housing Grants, Notices due for each interim payment and the basis on which that sum has been calculated.
Construction and Regeneration 1996 An optional Payment Application by the Sub-Contractor has been added to
("the Construction Act") made by the
Sub-Contracts under the 2011 edition. The Contractor has to serve a Payment

Local Democracy, Economic

Notice within 5 days of the payment due date irrespective of whether a

Development and Construction Act

Payment Application has been submitted by the Sub-Contractor.
If a Payment Notice is not served by the Contractor until 5 days after the
2009 (which came into force 1 October due date, the amount stated in the Sub-Contractor’s Payment Application
2011).These replaced the 2005 edition will automatically become due, subject to any Pay Less Notice served by the
of JCT main contracts and subcontracts.
Contractor. The Pay Less Notice is required to be served by the Contractor

The key amendments reflect the

if he wants to withhold monies from the Sub-Contractor. It must be served no

changes that have been made to

later than 5 days before the final date for payment and must specify the sum
which the Contractor considers to be due to the payee and the basis on
payment terms and payment-related which the sum was calculated.
[Link] should be used for all
contracts entered into after 1 October
2011 as the JCT contracts and sub- Final Unless adjudication proceedings are commenced within 10 days of the issue of
contracts which preceded them do not
Payment the final payment notice, that notice shall have effect as conclusive evidence

comply with the current legislation.

Notice that effect has been given to the terms of the Sub-Contract and that all
adjustments to the contract sum and time for completion have been made.
In the DSC it was payment itself that was conclusive evidence that all
There is a non-design and a design form. adjustments had been made.
The Agreement (SBCSub/A) forms the
In the 2011 Sub-Contracts, the issue of the Final Payment Notice is not

contract and incorporates the separate

linked to the issuing of the Final Certificate under the Main Contract as it

Conditions (SBCSub/C).
was before. It now has to be issued 2 months after either the Retention
Release Date (a concept added in the 2011 Sub-Contract), or the date of
In the design version the Agreement is issue of the Contractor's statement of the calculation of the Final
SBCSub/D/A and the Conditions are Sub-Contract Sum; whichever is later. Final payment has to be made
SBCSub/D/C.
17 days from the due date.

Design The Sub-Contractor shall not be responsible for the contents of the
Contractor’s Requirements or for verifying the adequacy of the design
contained within them.

Third Party The Sub-Contractor is required to provide collateral warranties in favour

Rights of the Employer/Purchaser/Tenant/Funder as required by the Main Contract
or Sub-Contract documents. Unlike the JCT 2011 Main Contracts the
Sub-Contract does not currently offer the option of a schedule of third
party rights. (Although this might change.)

Glass and Glazing Federation While every attempt is made to present up to date
information, this data sheet, produced by the Glass
and Glazing Federation, is issued for guidance but
Tel: 020 7939 9101 Fax: 0870 042 4266
without responsibility for any advice given therein or
email: info@[Link] omission therefrom or for the consequences of acting
[Link] in reliance thereon and all liability on the part of the
Glass and Glazing Federation however arising in
connection therewith is expressly disclaimed.
JCT 2011 Standard Building Sub-Contract:The Main Changes from JCT Standard Formof Domestic Sub-Contract Edition ("DSC")

Delay The list of relevant events has been rationalised. The sweep up clause dealing
Relevant with Employer’s risk events includes any ‘impediment, prevention, or default’ of
Events the Employer or Contractor. Therefore late instructions from the architect,
works instructed directly by the Employer, changes in access and the
Employer’s failure to secure compliance by the Planning Supervisor and
Contractor with the CDM Regulations which all come within the sweep up
provision have been deleted. Failure to secure labour, goods or materials is
also no longer a relevant event.

CIS and VAT Clauses 5A, 5B and 5C of DSC 2002 are replaced with clauses 4.7 and 4.8
which deal with CIS and VAT in a much more concise way.

Performance Section 8 of DSC dealing with performance specified work has been deleted.
Specified Therefore if using the 2011 Sub-Contract the conditions will have to be
Work amended if any works are to be performance specified.

PI Insurance This is now required if specified in the Agreement. Terrorism cover provisions
have now been incorporated into the body of the insurance provisions.

Contract Whereas under the DCS any document appended to the Agreement is a
Documents Contract Document, the 2011 sub-contract requires that any Contract
Documents are listed in Article 5 and annexed to the Agreement.

Termination Section 7 entitled ‘Determination’ under DSC 2002 is now renamed

‘Termination’. The provisions have been streamlined. In the 2011 edition,
the Insolvency definition has been revised.

Practical Sectional completion is an option that can be selected in the Schedule of

completion Information to be found in the Agreement. The Conditions define the
Completion Date as completion of the Main Contract works or of a section as
stated in the Main Contract.

Fluctuations Fluctuation options have been moved to a schedule at the end of the
conditions and the relevant option can be selected in the contract particulars
(much as in the old Appendix) in the Agreement or all three can be deleted if
none apply.

Adjudication The Scheme for Construction Contracts is now the procedure for adjudication
in all JCT contracts. The Scheme is amended so that in any dispute relating to
the reasonableness of opening up or testing the Adjudicator must be a
specialist in the relevant area or appoint an independent expert with
appropriate experience.
The Sub-Contract also amends the provisions of the Scheme dealing with
nomination of the Adjudicator. The adjudicator nominating body is RIBA, RICS,
CIA [Link] or the AICA (agent of NSCC), (whichever
is selected in the Agreement).Where a nominating body is not selected in
the Agreement the party requiring reference to adjudication can select one
of the bodies listed.

Disputes There is a statutory right to refer disputes to adjudication. The default position
is that arbitration does not apply and therefore ‘shall not apply’ must be deleted
in the Contract Particulars if it is intended that disputes can be referred to
arbitration.
JCT 2011 Standard Building Sub-Contract:The Main Changes from JCT Standard Formof Domestic Sub-Contract Edition ("DSC")

Warranties Provision for the giving of such warranties as are provided for in the
Main Contract.

Retention The default retention percentage will be 3% if no figure is inserted at clause 8

of the contract particulars whereas under the DSC 2002 if the equivalent
section was left blank no retention would be deducted.
To reflect the changes to the Construction Act, in the 2011 JCT
Sub-Contract the release of retention can now no longer be linked to an
act or event occurring under an upstream contract, e.g. the issuing of the
Certificate of Making Good Defects under the Main Contract.
The release of the first half of the retention, as before, is triggered by
practical completion of the Sub-Contract Works. The second half of
retention will now be triggered for release on the "Retention Release Date"
which has to be specified in the Sub-Contract Particulars.
A "Minimum Retention Amount" has also been introduced in the 2011
JCT Sub-Contracts. This is an amount agreed by the parties and specified
in the Sub-Contract Particulars. If the total amount of retention that would
be deducted is less than the Minimum Retention Amount (default is £250
if none is specified) then no retention can be deducted. Once the first half
of retention is released, if the balance being withheld falls below the
Minimum Retention Amount, then the balance must also be released
to the Sub-Contractor.

Right of The amendments to the Construction Act also give Sub-Contractors an

Suspension express statutory right to recover costs and expenses incurred through exercise
of their existing statutory right of suspension for non-payment , providing the
exercise of that right is lawful i.e. a payment is properly due to the subcontractor
and the statutory notice of suspension has been given as prescribed by the
subcontract (7 days' notice in the JCT Sub-Contracts).

Please note that this note is intended

as a brief summary of the new
provisions only. If you require specific
advice, please contact the
Construction Team at Wedlake Bell
on 020 7395 3000.